JP2023123796A - game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of suitably using an auxiliary tank.SOLUTION: A game machine includes an auxiliary tank that is installed in a predetermined installation area side by side with a hopper device within a casing 11 and stores excessive tokens in a storage tank. An engagement part that can be engaged with a flange part of the auxiliary tank is provided on a baseplate of the casing 11. When the auxiliary tank is installed into the casing 11 in an upward attitude with an upper opening upward and the baseplate part downward, the flange part of the auxiliary tank and the engagement part are not engaged and the auxiliary tank is installed in a free state. In the meantime, when the auxiliary tank is installed into the casing 11 in a downward attitude while being turned upside down, the flange part of the auxiliary tank and the engagement are engaged, thus regulating movement of the auxiliary tank.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 1

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, and the like are known as types of game machines. Some of these gaming machines are provided with auxiliary tanks for storing game media such as surplus tokens in the storage section (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP-A-2005-323750

Here, there is still room for improvement in terms of usability of the auxiliary tank in the above-exemplified gaming machines.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine that can suitably use an auxiliary tank.

The present invention
a housing opened forward;
a door that opens and closes the front opening of the housing;
a hopper device installed in the housing and having a reservoir for storing game media;
an auxiliary tank that is installed in a predetermined installation area in the housing side by side with the hopper device and that stores surplus game media in the storage unit;
with
The auxiliary tank has a bottomed shape having an opening at the upper end and a bottom at the lower end,
a first engaging portion provided on the auxiliary tank;
a second engaging portion provided in the housing and engageable with the first engaging portion;
with
The auxiliary tank can be installed in the predetermined installation area in a first orientation with the opening facing upward and the bottom portion facing downward, and in a second orientation different from the first orientation,
When the auxiliary tank is installed in the first direction, the first engaging portion and the second engaging portion are not engaged, and the auxiliary tank is installed in the second direction. The first engaging portion and the second engaging portion are engaged with each other when the second engaging portion is engaged, and the engagement restricts the movement of the auxiliary tank.

According to the present invention, it becomes possible to preferably use the auxiliary tank.

1 is a front view of a slot machine in one embodiment; FIG. 1 is a perspective view of a slot machine showing a state in which a front door is closed; FIG. 1 is a perspective view of a slot machine showing a state in which a front door is opened; FIG. It is a rear view of a front door. It is a front view of a housing|casing. (a) is a perspective view showing the bottom of the housing, and (b) is a partial enlarged view of the AA cross section of (a). It is a figure which shows the pattern arrangement|sequence of each reel. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between a pattern that can be visually recognized through a display window and an effective line; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between a pattern that can be visually recognized through a display window and an effective line; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the winning mode and the privilege to be given; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the winning mode and the privilege to be given; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the winning mode and the privilege to be given; It is a top view of an auxiliary tank. 14 is a perspective cross-sectional view taken along line CC of FIG. 13; FIG. FIG. 4 is a perspective cross-sectional view taken along line CC of the auxiliary tank in a downward posture; FIG. 14 is a cross-sectional view taken along line BB of FIG. 13; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of a case where the auxiliary tank is used in correspondence with manual collection; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of a case where the auxiliary tank is used in correspondence with automatic collection; (a) is a perspective view of a bottom lid, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the bottom lid. It is a side view of a bottom cover. FIG. 15 is a partial enlarged view of the DD line cross section of FIG. 14; It is explanatory drawing which shows a mode that rotation of a bottom cover is restrict|limited. It is explanatory drawing which shows the support structure of a bottom cover. It is explanatory drawing which shows the removal method of a bottom cover. It is an explanatory view showing an installation example of an auxiliary tank. 3 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a main controller; FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a display control device; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing by a main control unit. 4 is a flowchart showing normal processing by a main controller; It is a flow chart which shows lottery processing. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for normal game states. 4 is a flowchart showing reel control processing; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the operation order of the stop buttons and the winning modes that are established; FIG. 5 is an explanatory diagram for explaining reel stop control; 4 is a flowchart showing RT state processing; It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for 1st RT states. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the operation order of the stop buttons and the winning modes that are established; It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for 2nd RT states. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for 3rd RT states. 10 is a flowchart showing bonus state processing; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the operation order of the stop buttons and the winning modes that are established; It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for BB states. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing a transition relationship of each state; FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing an overview of display modes; It is a flow chart which shows lottery result correspondence processing. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing a first special winning combination process; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing a second special combination process; FIG. 13 is a flow chart showing a third special combination process; It is a flowchart which shows the process for mode change alerting|reporting. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing an overview of the pressing order notification; It is a flow chart which shows pushing process. It is a flowchart which shows a prize-winning result corresponding process. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing game number management processing; FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing end determination processing; 4 is a flow chart showing processing for a specialized zone; 10 is a flowchart showing effect setting processing by a sub-side display control device; FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing a betting effect setting process; FIG. It is a flow chart which shows a production|presentation setting process at the time of a start. 10 is a flow chart showing a process for notification of pressing order. It is a flow chart which shows a production setting process at the time of stop. It is a flow chart which shows processing for bonus information. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing a special combination notification process; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows a continuous production|presentation setting process. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of display effect by an auxiliary display unit; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of display effect by an auxiliary display unit; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of display effect by an auxiliary display unit; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of display effect by an auxiliary display unit; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of display effect by an auxiliary display unit; It is an explanatory view for explaining an example of continuous production. It is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the effective line and the stop symbol in the normal game mode and in the specific mode as the free mode. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the winning mode in the specific mode and the award given. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the winning mode in the specific mode and the award given. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the winning mode in the specific mode and the award given. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing stop symbols for each winning combination in a specific mode; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing stop symbols for each winning combination in a specific mode; It is a diagram showing a lottery table for normal game state in the specific mode. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the operation order of the stop buttons and the winning modes that are established; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the operation order of the stop buttons and the winning modes that are established; It is a figure which shows an example of the production|presentation at the time of switching of a game mode. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing specific mode betting effect setting processing; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the production|presentation setting process at the time of starting for specific mode. 14 is a flow chart showing processing for a winning combination for a specific mode. 11 is a flow chart showing a first specific combination process for a specific mode; 10 is a flow chart showing second specific combination processing for a specific mode. 13 is a flow chart showing a third specific combination process for a specific mode; FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing specific mode pushing process. FIG. 4 is a flow chart showing specialized zone processing for a specific mode; It is a flow chart which shows the production|presentation setting process at the time of the stop for specific modes. 10 is a flowchart showing specific mode game number management processing. 10 is a flow chart showing specific mode winning result handling processing. 9 is a flowchart showing specific mode bonus end processing. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a display effect in a specific mode by the auxiliary display section; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a display effect in a specific mode by the auxiliary display section; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a display effect in a specific mode by the auxiliary display section; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a display effect in a specific mode by the auxiliary display section; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a display effect in a specific mode by the auxiliary display section; It is a timing chart for explaining the flow of the game in the normal game mode. It is a timing chart for explaining the flow of the game in the normal game mode. It is a timing chart for explaining the flow of the game in the specific mode. It is a timing chart for explaining the flow of the game in the specific mode. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing a specific mode bonus notification process; FIG. 9 is a flow chart showing specific mode specific role notification processing. It is a flow chart which shows a continuous effect setting process for a specific mode. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship of the continuous production|presentation in each mode. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the display effect during the bonus and each game during the bonus; FIG. 10 is a drawing showing a lottery table during bonus carryover in a specific mode; 10 is a flowchart showing counting processing by a sub-side display control device; It is a figure which shows an example of the display of the acquisition number by an auxiliary|assistant display part. 10 is a flowchart showing specific mode switching processing by a sub-side display control device; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a display effect at the time of mode switching by the auxiliary display section; 10 is a flowchart showing specific mode setting processing by a sub-side display control device; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a display effect when a specific mode is set by the auxiliary display section; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a display effect when a specific mode is set by the auxiliary display section; It is a diagram showing a modification of the normal game state lottery table in the specific mode. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a modification of the relationship between the display effect during the bonus and each game during the bonus; (a) is a flow chart showing a modification of the specific mode continuous effect setting process, and (b) is a flow chart showing a modification of the end determination process. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a modification of the bonus state lottery table in the specific mode; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a display effect when a specific mode is set by the auxiliary display section; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a display effect for a cell-phone-linked service by an auxiliary display unit; 10 is a flowchart showing information input/output processing by a sub-side display control device; 4 is a flowchart showing processing for an advantageous section by a main controller; 9 is a flowchart showing a modification of specific mode switching processing; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a display effect at the time of mode switching by the auxiliary display section; 10 is a flow chart showing MAX bet switching processing by the main controller. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an outline of a modified example of identification display in a specific mode; It is a front view of the slot machine in the second embodiment. It is a diagram showing an example of a lottery table for normal game state in the specific mode. It is an explanatory view for explaining an outline of special addition. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing a second special combination process; FIG. It is a figure which shows a special addition generation|occurrence|production table. 13 is a flow chart showing a third special combination process; 9 is a flowchart showing end determination processing; 4 is a flow chart showing processing for a specialized zone; It is a flow chart which shows lottery result correspondence processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows various addition tables. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining differences between normal addition and special addition; 4 is a flow chart showing bet operation processing by the main controller. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining differences between normal addition and special addition; It is a flow chart which shows payout determination processing. 10 is a flow chart showing payout processing. 10 is a flow chart showing replay processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the modification of various addition tables. It is a diagram showing a modification of the normal game state lottery table in the specific mode. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the winning mode and the privilege to be given; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the operation order of the stop buttons and the winning modes that are established; It is a figure for demonstrating the outline|summary of the modification of special addition. It is explanatory drawing which shows the modification of various addition tables. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing a modified example of bet operation processing; FIG. It is a figure which shows the modification of a credit injection switch and a start lever. FIG. 11 is a perspective view of a state in which an auxiliary tank according to a third embodiment is in a downward posture; FIG. 151 is an explanatory view showing the installation state of the auxiliary tank corresponding to the FF line cross section in FIG. 150; FIG. 4 is a partially enlarged view of the bottom when the auxiliary tank is in an upward posture; It is explanatory drawing which shows a mode that a lower opening part opens and closes. FIG. 11 is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view showing the configuration of an auxiliary tank according to Modification 1 of the third embodiment; FIG. 11 is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view showing the configuration of an auxiliary tank according to modification 2 of the third embodiment; FIG. 11 is a plan view of an auxiliary tank according to a fourth embodiment; 156. (a) is a perspective cross-sectional view taken along the line GG of FIG. 156, and (b) is a perspective cross-sectional view along the GG line of the tank body. FIG. 157 is a cross-sectional view taken along line HH of FIG. 156 and an enlarged view of a main part; (a) is a perspective view of a bottom lid, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the bottom lid. FIG. 157 is an explanatory view showing the installation state of the auxiliary tank corresponding to the HH line cross section of FIG. 156; It is an explanatory view showing a state before engagement. It is explanatory drawing which shows the engaged state. It is an explanatory view showing a state in which engagement is released. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of a case where the auxiliary tank is used in correspondence with automatic collection; FIG. 11 is a perspective view of a bottom lid according to Modification 1 of the fourth embodiment; It is a top view of a tank main body. (a) is an explanatory diagram showing the state of the extension plate when closed, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing the state of the extension plate when opened. FIG. 5 is an explanatory diagram showing how the movement of the auxiliary tank is restricted; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an installation state of an auxiliary tank 54 according to modification 2 of the fourth embodiment; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an installation state of an auxiliary tank according to modification 3 of the fourth embodiment; (a) is a perspective view of a lower sensor section and its surroundings, and (b) is a partially enlarged view of the lower sensor section. (a) is a perspective cross-sectional view of an auxiliary tank, and (b) is a perspective cross-sectional view of a tank body. It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view of an auxiliary tank. (a) is an explanatory diagram showing a state before engagement, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing an engaged state. It is an explanatory view showing a state in which engagement is released.

<First embodiment>
An embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a reel-type game machine, which is a type of game machine, specifically a slot machine, will be described in detail below with reference to the drawings. 1 is a front view of the slot machine 10, FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the slot machine 10 with the front door 12 closed, FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the slot machine 10 with the front door 12 open, and FIG. FIG. 5 is a front view of the housing 11; FIG. 6(a) is a perspective view showing the bottom of the housing 11; be.

As shown in FIGS. 1 to 6, the slot machine 10 has a housing 11 forming its outer shell. The housing 11 is formed in the shape of a box with an open front as a whole, and is attached to a so-called island facility by nailing or the like when it is installed in a game hall.

A front door 12 is attached to the front side of the housing 11 so that it can be opened and closed. That is, the housing 11 is provided with a pair of upper and lower support shafts 13a and 13b on the left side as viewed from the front, and the front door 12 is provided with bearings 14a at positions corresponding to the support shafts 13a and 13b. , 14b are provided. With the spindles 13a and 13b inserted into the bearings 14a and 14b, the front door 12 rotates with respect to the housing 11 about the opening/closing axis extending vertically connecting the spindles 13a and 13b. It is movably supported, and the front open side of the housing 11 can be opened or closed by turning the front door 12 . Further, the front door 12 is kept in a locked state by a locking device 20 provided on the back side thereof so that it cannot be opened. A key cylinder 21 integrated with a locking device 20 is provided on the upper right end side of the front door 12, and the locked state is released by a predetermined key operation on the key cylinder 21.例文帳に追加

A game panel 25 is provided near the upper center of the front door 12 to inform the player of the game state. Three vertical display windows 26L, 26M and 26R are formed side by side on the game panel 25, and the inside of the slot machine 10 can be visually recognized through the respective display windows 26L, 26M and 26R. The display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R may be combined into one and used as a common display window.

As shown in FIG. 3, the inside of the housing 11 is divided into upper and lower parts by a partition plate 30. Above the partition plate 30, a reel unit 31 constituting variable display means is attached. The reel unit 31 includes a left reel 32L, a middle reel 32M, and a right reel 32R, each of which is cylindrical (annular). Each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is rotatably supported such that the center axis thereof coincides with the rotation axis of the reel. The rotation axes of the respective reels 32L, 32M, 32R are arranged on the same axis extending substantially horizontally, and the respective reels 32L, 32M, 32R correspond to the respective display windows 26L, 26M, 26R one-to-one. . Therefore, part of the surface of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is visible through the corresponding display windows 26L, 26M, 26R. Further, when the reels 32L, 32M, 32R rotate forward, the surfaces of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are displayed through the respective display windows 26L, 26M, 26R as if they were moving from top to bottom.

Here, the configuration of the reel unit 31 will be briefly described.

Each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is connected to a stepping motor, and the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are individually driven by the stepping motor to rotate independently. . The stepping motor is set to make one rotation by applying a drive signal of 504 pulses (hereinafter also referred to as an excitation pulse), for example. controlled. Also, in the reel unit 31, a reel index sensor for detecting that the reel has made one rotation is installed on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. The reel index sensor outputs a detection signal to the main controller 101, which will be described later, each time it detects that the reel has made one rotation. Therefore, main controller 101 adjusts the angular positions of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R every rotation based on the detection signal from the reel index sensor and the number of excitation pulses output until the detection signal is input. It can be checked and corrected.

A plurality of patterns as identification information are drawn on the outer peripheral surface of each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the long side direction (circling direction). More specifically, 21 patterns are drawn at regular intervals. Therefore, 24 pulses (=504 pulses/21 symbols) of excitation pulses are required to switch a pattern at a predetermined position to the next pattern. Further, the main controller 101 recognizes the symbols that are visible from the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R based on the number of excitation pulses output after the detection signal of the reel index sensor is input, Control can be performed to stop a predetermined pattern at a position visible from 26L, 26M, and 26R.

Next, the symbols drawn on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R will be described.

FIG. 7 shows the pattern arrangement of the left reel 32L, the middle reel 32M, and the right reel 32R. As shown in the figure, 21 symbols are arranged in a line on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. Numbers 0 to 20 are assigned to the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, respectively. , and are not actually attached to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. However, the numbers will be used in the following description.

The symbols include a “red bell” symbol (eg, 20th on the left reel 32L), a “first replay” symbol (eg, 19th on the left reel 32L), and a “red 7” symbol (eg, 18th on the left reel 32L). th), “watermelon” symbol (eg, 17th on the left reel 32L), “white bell” symbol (eg, 12th on the left reel 32L), “second replay” symbol (eg, 11th on the left reel 32L) , “White 7” symbol (eg, 10th on left reel 32L), “Cherry” symbol (eg, 9th on left reel 32L), “BAR” symbol (eg, 5th on left reel 32L), “Youth” There are 10 types of symbols (for example, the 0th on the left reel 32L). Then, as shown in FIG. 7, the numbers and arrangement orders of various symbols are completely different in each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

Each of the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R is formed so that three of the 21 symbols attached to the corresponding reel are visible as a whole. Therefore, when all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped, 3×3=9 symbols are visible through the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R.

In the slot machine 10, the game result of each game is reported using a combination of three symbols, one symbol for each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, among the visible symbols. Since 3×3=9 symbols are visible as described above, as a combination of these three symbols, for example, as shown in FIG. A combination of symbols stopping on the upper line L1, a combination of symbols stopping on the middle line L2 connecting the middle symbols of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, and a combination of symbols stopping on the middle line L2 connecting the lower symbols of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. There is a combination of symbols that stop on the bottom line L3. In addition, combinations of symbols stopped on the right downward line L4 connecting the upper symbol of the left reel 32L, the middle symbol of the middle reel 32M and the lower symbol of the right reel 32R, the lower symbol of the left reel 32L and the middle symbol of the middle reel 32M. There is a combination of each symbol that stops on a right rising line L5 connecting the upper symbols of the right reel 32R. In addition, there is also a combination of symbols that stop on the bending line L6 connecting the upper symbol of the left reel 32L, the middle symbol of the middle reel 32M, and the middle symbol of the right reel 32R. The lines L1 to L5 are lines that form a straight line when the respective patterns are arranged, and the bending line L6 is a line in which the patterns are bent in the middle when the respective patterns are arranged. Note that there are combinations of symbols other than the bending line L6 that stop on the line where the bending occurs, but the explanation is omitted here.

Among these lines L1 to L6, a line that is activated by the number of bets of medals and a line that is not activated are set. When a prize is established, a privilege of paying out a predetermined number of medals, which are game media, is given, or a privilege of shifting the game state is given. On the other hand, if the symbols stop in a predetermined combination on the line that is not activated, winning is not established and the privilege is not awarded.

In this slot machine 10, as shown in FIG. 9(a), only the lower right line L4 is the active line, and as shown in FIG. 9(b), two lower lines L3 and lower right line L4 There is a case where the combined line is the valid line and a case where only the bend line L6 is the valid line as shown in FIG. 9(c). More specifically, when three medals are betted and the game is started, only the lower right line L4 is the valid line, and when two medals are betted and the game is started, the lower line is the active line. The line L3 and the downward-sloping line L4 are set as effective lines. Also, when one medal is bet and the game is started, only the bent line L6 is set as the effective line. The three combined lines of the upper line L1, the middle line L2, and the upward right line L5 are never regarded as valid lines. In the following, a game started with 3 medals bet is a 3-bet game, a game started with 2 medals bet is a 2-bet game, and a game started with 1 medal is bet. Also known as a one-bet game. It should be noted that, in the present embodiment, the gameplay is based on the assumption that a 3-bet game or a 2-bet game is normally played. Therefore, the 3-bet game and the 2-bet game are sometimes called the normal game mode, and the 1-bet game is sometimes called the specific mode.

FIGS. 10 to 12 are diagrams showing the correspondence relationships between winning symbol combinations and benefits given when winning in the normal game mode.

In the normal game mode, there are 1st minor winning combination to 32nd minor winning combination as small winning combinations for which medals are paid out.

When the “red bell” symbol or “white bell” symbol on the left reel 32L, the “red bell” symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the “red bell” symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the active line, Won the 1st minor role. When the first minor win is established, 9 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 15 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

The 2nd minor winning prize to the 17th minor winning prize have different winning symbol combinations. A winning mode in which a "red bell" symbol and a "red bell" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the upper line L1, that is, the "bell" symbols on the respective reels 32L, 32M and 32R stop on the upper line L1. is. For example, the "red bell" symbol or "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L stops at the upper stage, the "cherry" symbol on the middle reel 32M stops at the middle stage, and the "second replay" symbol on the right reel 32R stops at the lower stage. When it stops, it becomes the 5th minor winning prize. As shown in FIG. 7, on the middle reel 32M, the "red bell" symbols are arranged at positions (12th, 15th) adjacent to the "cherry" symbols (11th, 14th) on the upstream side. On the right reel 32R, "red bell" symbols are arranged at positions (2nd and 5th) separated by one symbol upstream from the "second replay" symbols (0th and 3rd). Therefore, when the fifth minor winning combination is established on the right downward line L4, the "red bell" symbol or "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "red bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the right The "red bell" symbol on the reel 32R is stopped on the upper line L1. When the 2nd minor winning combination to the 17th minor winning combination are established, 3 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 14 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

The 18th minor winning combination is a winning mode in which the "Cherry" symbol on the left reel 32L stops at the upper or lower stage. When the 18th minor win is established, 3 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 15 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

"Red 7", "BAR", and "Watermelon" symbols on the left reel 32L, "Red Bell" symbols on the middle reel 32M, and "Red Bell" symbols on the right reel 32R are stopped on the effective line. In that case, it will be the 19th minor role winning prize. When the 19th minor win is established, 9 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 15 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

For the 20th to 24th minor wins, 3 medals are paid out in the case of a 3-bet game, and 14 medals are paid out in a 2-bet game.

The 25th minor winning combination is a winning mode in which the "Cherry" symbol on the left reel 32L stops at the upper or lower stage, like the 18th minor winning combination. In the case of winning the 18th minor winning combination, the "Red 7" symbol or the "White 7" symbol on the right reel 32R can be stopped in the middle row only when the BB and the BB are won in duplicate ("Second replay" symbol, If the combination of the "BAR" symbol and the "BAR" symbol) wins the 25th minor win, the "Red 7" symbol or the "White 7" symbol on the right reel 32R stops at the middle row regardless of whether or not the BB is won. can. When the 25th minor win is established, 3 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 15 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

When the "watermelon" symbol or "BAR" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "watermelon" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "watermelon" symbol on the right reel 32R are stopped on the effective line, the 26th small win. Win a prize. When the 26th minor win is established, 5 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 5 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

The 27th minor winning prize is the left reel 32L and the middle reel 32M or the left reel 32L when the player operates the stop switches 42 to 44 aiming at the "watermelon" symbols on the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. , the "watermelon" symbol on the right reel 32R stops on the activated line, while the "watermelon" symbol on the remaining reels does not stop on the activated line. When the 27th minor win is established, 3 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 15 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

"Red bell" or "White bell" pattern on the left reel 32L, "Red 7" pattern, "BAR" pattern, "White bell" pattern, "Cherry" pattern, and "Youth" pattern on the middle reel 32M. When the "red bell" symbol on the reel 32R and the symbol stop on the activated line, the 28th minor winning combination is won. As shown in FIG. 7, the left reel 32L has a "red bell" pattern (3rd, 7th, 15th and 20th) and downstream adjacent positions (2nd, 6th, 14th and 19th). ), and a "second replay" symbol is arranged at a position (11th) adjacent to the "white bell" symbol (12th) on the downstream side. On the right reel 32R, "red bell" symbols (2nd, 5th, 10th, 15th, 20th) and adjacent positions (3rd, 6th, 16th, 0th) on the upstream side have "No. 1 replay” symbols or “second replay” symbols are arranged. Therefore, when the 28th minor winning combination is established on the lower right line L4, the left reel 32L and the right reel 32R will have "bells" except for the case where the "white bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M stops in the middle stage. While the symbols and the “replay” symbols are in tense, the “bell” symbols and the “replay” symbols on the middle reel 32M do not stop, resulting in a so-called double tense failure. When the 28th minor win is established, 9 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 15 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

When the "watermelon" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "red bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "watermelon" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the activated line, the 29th minor winning combination is won. In the 3-bet game, if the player operates the left stop switch at the timing when the ninth "cherry" symbol on the left reel 32L reaches the upper or middle row, and the 29th minor winning combination is established, the left The "white bell" symbol on the reel 32L, the "red bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "red bell" symbol on the right reel 32R are stopped on the middle line L2. When the 29th minor win is established, 3 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 15 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

When the “red bell” symbol or “white bell” symbol on the left reel 32L, the “red bell” symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the “red 7” symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the active line, Won the 30th minor role. Although the details will be described later, the 30th minor winning combination is a winning mode that is established only in the 3-bet game. When the 30th minor winning combination is established, 9 medals are paid out.

When the "red bell" symbol or "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "red bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "BAR" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the effective line, Won 31 minor roles. Although the details will be described later, the 31st minor winning combination is a winning mode that is established only in the 3-bet game. When the 31st minor winning combination is established, 9 medals are paid out.

When the "watermelon" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "white 7" symbol or "cherry" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "watermelon" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the effective line, the 32nd small Awarded for the role. When the 32nd minor win is established, 3 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 15 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

Winnings to which the privilege of replaying that the next game can be played without inserting medals are provided include first to eighth replaying winnings. Further, when the second re-game win is established, the game state shifts to the first RT state, and when the third re-game win is established, the game state shifts to the second RT state, and the fourth re-game. When the winning or the fifth replay winning is established, the game state shifts to the third RT state. The 1st re-game winning to the 8th re-game winning are winning modes that are established only in the 3-bet game.

State transition winnings in which only game state transition is performed include 1st BB winning, 2nd BB winning and CB winning.

When the "red 7" pattern of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R stops on the active line, the 1BB win is won, and when the "white 7" pattern of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R stops on the active line. When the "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "second replay" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "white 7" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the activated line, the second BB win is achieved. . When these BB prizes are established, the game state shifts to the BB state. Also, when the "red bell" symbol or "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "red bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "watermelon" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the active line. , CB prize. When the CB winning is established, the game state shifts to the CB state.

In addition, although it is different from winning, there is a stop outcome in which the game state shifts to the first RT state. Specifically, the left reel 32L has a "red bell" symbol or a "white bell" symbol, the middle reel 32M has a "red 7" symbol, a "BAR" symbol, a "white bell" symbol, a "cherry" symbol, and a right reel 32M symbol. When the "watermelon" symbol on the reel 32R stops on the activated line, the game state shifts to the first RT state. Also, a "red bell" symbol or a "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, a "white 7" symbol, a "watermelon" symbol, and a "first replay" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and a "red 7" symbol on the right reel 32R. When the symbols, "white 7", "second replay", and "cherry" symbols stop on the activated line, the game state shifts to the first RT state. Hereinafter, the combinations of the above symbols are referred to as transitional numbers.

The relationship between the combination of winning symbols and the benefits given when winning in the specific mode as a 1-bet game will be described later in detail.

A start lever 41 that is operated to start the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is provided on the lower left side of the game panel 25. As shown in FIG. The start lever 41 constitutes start operation means or start operation means operated to start rotating the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, that is, to start variable display of symbols. When the start lever 41 is operated with a predetermined number of medals inserted, the reels 32L, 32M and 32R start rotating.

On the right side of the start lever 41, button-shaped stop switches 42 to 44 are provided to be operated to individually stop the rotating reels 32L, 32M, 32R. The stop switches 42 to 44 are arranged directly below the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R corresponding to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to be stopped, respectively. That is, when the left stop switch 42 is operated, the rotation of the left reel 32L is stopped, and when the middle stop switch 43 is operated, the rotation of the middle reel 32M is stopped, and the right stop switch 44 is operated. In this case, the rotation of the right reel 32R stops. The stop switches 42 to 44 constitute stop operation means operated to stop the variable display of symbols based on the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R.

A medal slot 45 for inserting medals is provided on the lower right side of the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R. The medal slot 45 constitutes input means for inputting game media. Further, if attention is paid to the fact that the medal insertion slot 45 is accompanied by an action of directly inserting medals by the player, it can be said that the medal insertion slot 45 constitutes direct input means for directly inputting game media.

A medal inserted from the medal slot 45 is led to either a storage passage 47 or an ejection passage 48 by a selector 46 as passage switching means provided on the back surface of the front door 12 . More specifically, the selector 46 is provided with a medal passage switching solenoid 46a. When the medal passage switching solenoid 46a is de-energized, the medals are guided to the discharge passage 48 side, and when the medal passage switching solenoid 46a is energized, the medals are guided. is guided to the storage passage 47 side. The medals guided to the storage passage 47 are guided to the hopper device 51 housed inside the housing 11 . On the other hand, the medals guided to the discharge passage 48 are guided to the medal receiving tray 50 from the medal discharge port 49 provided at the lower front surface of the front door 12 and returned to the player.

The hopper device 51 is composed of a storage tank 52 for storing medals and a payout device 53 for paying out the medals to the player. The payout device 53 rotates a medal payout rotary plate (not shown) to discharge the medals to an opening 48a provided in the discharge passage 48 and to pay out the medals to the medal receiving tray 50 through the discharge passage 48. It has become. The hopper device 51 is attached to the bottom plate 11a of the housing 11 by being attached to a metal hopper mounting plate 22 (see FIG. 6A). The hopper attachment plate 22 is screwed and fixed to the bottom plate 11a, and has a plurality of locking claws 22a capable of locking the hopper device 51 (lower end portion of the dispensing device 53). By engaging the hopper device 51 with these locking claws 22a, the hopper device 51 is fixed.

An auxiliary tank 54 is provided on the right side of the hopper device 51 to prevent a predetermined amount or more of tokens from being stored in the storage tank 52 . Inside the storage tank 52 of the hopper device 51, a guide plate 52a for discharging medals from the storage tank 52 to the auxiliary tank 54 is provided. Therefore, when the medals are stored above the height at which the guide plate 52a is provided, the medals are stored in the auxiliary tank . As a result, surplus medals overflowing from the storage tank 52 are stored in the auxiliary tank 54 .

The medals stored in the auxiliary tank 54 can be collected by employees of the game hall. That is, the auxiliary tank 54 is housed in the housing 11 while being placed on the bottom plate 11a of the housing 11 (see FIG. 5). ), it can be taken out from the housing 11 . Hereinafter, the recovery method of taking out the auxiliary tank 54 and recovering medals may be referred to as manual recovery.

The medals overflowing from the storage tank 52 can be collected not only manually but also by an automatic collecting device installed in the game hall. That is, as shown in FIG. 6A, the bottom plate 11a of the housing 11 is provided with a medal ejection hole 15 for ejecting the medals to the outside of the slot machine 10, and the medals are ejected from the medal ejection hole 15. The collected medals are supplied to an automatic collection device located below the slot machine 10.例文帳に追加The medal discharge hole 15 penetrates the bottom plate 11a in the thickness direction, and is arranged corresponding to the drop position of the medal dropped from the guide plate 52a. Hereinafter, the collection method of collecting medals using an automatic collection device may be referred to as automatic collection.

Whether the tokens overflowing from the storage tank 52 are recovered manually or automatically depends on the equipment of the game hall where the slot machine 10 is installed, that is, the game hall supports automatic recovery. It can be used properly depending on whether it is present or not.

A button-like return switch 55 is provided below the medal slot 45 . When the return switch 55 is operated under the condition that the medals inserted into the medal slot 45 are clogged in the selector 46, the selector 46 is mechanically interlocked and operated, and the medals clogged in the selector 46 are returned to the medals. It is designed to be returned from the discharge port 49 .

A first credit insertion switch 56 for inserting three credited virtual medals as game media at a time is provided on the lower left side of the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R. A second credit insertion switch 57 is provided to the right of the first credit insertion switch 56 , and a third credit insertion switch 58 is provided to the left of the first credit insertion switch 56 . The second credit insert switch 57 is for inserting one virtual medal, and the third credit insert switch 58 is for inserting two virtual medals at once. The credit insertion switches 56 to 58 constitute input means for inputting game media together with the medal insertion port 45 . Also, it should be noted that while the medal insertion slot 45 is accompanied by the operation of directly inserting medals by the player, the credit insertion switches 56 to 58 are accompanied by the operation of inserting virtual medals based on stored memory. For example, it can be said that it constitutes an indirect input means for indirectly inputting a game medium.

More specifically, the first credit insertion switch 56 and the second credit insertion switch 57 are formed with a larger operating surface than the third credit insertion switch 58. ing. Therefore, the operability of the first credit insertion switch 56 and the second credit insertion switch 57 is improved. In other words, the second credit insertion switch 57 that can be used for the 1-bet game as the specific mode has the same operability as the first credit insertion switch 56 that can be used for the 3-bet game as the normal game mode. It can be said that there is

Between the first credit insertion switch 56 and the second credit insertion switch 57, there is provided a first effect switch 66 which is operated when the effect is generated. That is, a first credit insertion switch 56 and a third credit insertion switch 58 are provided to the left of the first effect switch 66, and a second credit insertion switch 57 is provided to the right of the first effect switch 66. is provided. As described above, the normal game mode is the 3-bet game and the 2-bet game, and the 1-bet game is the specific mode. It can be said that they are distinguished.

In addition, on the lower right side of the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R and on the right side of each of the stop switches 42 to 44, a second effect switch 67 used for switching between the normal game mode and the specific mode is provided. . The second effect switch 67 will be explained later in detail.

A settlement switch 59 is provided to the left of the start lever 41 . That is, the slot machine 10 has a credit function of storing and storing surplus inserted medals up to a predetermined maximum value (equivalent to 50 medals) and payout medals at the time of winning as virtual medals. When the settlement switch 59 is operated under the stored condition, the virtual medals are dispensed from the medal discharge port 49 as real medals. In this case, focusing on the function of paying out credited virtual medals as real medals, it can be said that the settlement switch 59 constitutes settlement operation means for actually paying out the stored game media.

Below the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R of the game panel 25 are a credit display portion 60 for displaying the number of credited virtual medals, and a remaining payout portion for displaying the number of remaining medals to be paid out until the BB state ends. A number display section 61 and a payout number display section 62 for displaying the number of medals paid out at the time of winning are provided. Although these display units 60 to 62 are composed of 7-segment displays, it is of course possible to replace them with liquid crystal displays or the like.

Below the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R on the game panel 25 and to the right of the payout number display section 62, there is provided a pressing order notification section 68 for notifying the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44. there is The pressing order notification unit 68 is composed of three LED lamps corresponding to the left stop switch 42, the middle stop switch 43, and the right stop switch 44, respectively. It should be noted that the pressing order notification unit 68 can also be replaced by a liquid crystal display or the like. 44 may be provided adjacent to each other.

At the top of the front door 12, an upper lamp 63 that lights up or blinks as the game progresses, and a pair of left and right lamps that emit various sound effects as the game progresses and notify the player of the game state. A speaker 64 and an auxiliary display section 65 for giving various information to the player are provided. The auxiliary display section 65 is for executing various display effects as the game progresses. It is called an auxiliary display section 65 . An upper lamp 63 , a speaker 64 , and a display control device 81 for driving the auxiliary display section 65 are provided behind the auxiliary display section 65 .

A power supply box 70 is provided on the left side of the hopper device 51 inside the housing 11 . The power supply box 70 accommodates the power supply device 91 therein, and is provided with a power switch 71, a reset switch 72, a setting key insertion hole 73, and the like. The power switch 71 is a start switch for supplying power to each unit including the main controller 101 . The reset switch 72 is a switch for resetting the error state of the slot machine 10 . The setting key insertion hole 73 is used by a hall manager or the like to adjust the payout of medals. That is, the winning probability of the slot machine 10 can be set by inserting the setting key into the setting key insertion hole 73 and turning it on by the hall manager or the like. The reset switch 72 is operated not only when resetting the error state but also when changing the winning probability of the slot machine 10 .

Above the reel unit 31, a main control device 101 for overall management of the game is attached to the housing 11. As shown in FIG.

<Regarding the auxiliary tank 54>
Here, the auxiliary tank 54 will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 to 16. FIG. 13 is a plan view of the auxiliary tank, FIG. 14 is a perspective cross-sectional view along the CC line of FIG. 13, FIG. 15 is a perspective cross-sectional view along the CC line of the auxiliary tank 54 in a downward posture, and FIG. It is a BB line sectional view.

As shown in FIGS. 13 to 16, the auxiliary tank 54 includes a tank body 501 having a substantially box-like shape with an open top and a bottom. The tank main body 501 is made of transparent synthetic resin, and the inside can be visually recognized from the outside. The tank body 501 has a bottom plate portion 501a that is substantially rectangular in plan view, and a front wall portion 501b, a rear wall portion 501c, a right side wall portion 501d, and a left side wall portion 501e that rise from the bottom plate portion 501a so as to surround the bottom plate portion 501a. An upper opening 502 having a substantially rectangular shape in a plan view and opening upward is formed in the upper portion thereof.

The right side wall portion 501d and the left side wall portion 501e are inclined so that the distance therebetween increases as they go upward. In this case, the upper opening 502 can be expanded as compared with the case where the walls 501d and 501e stand upright. As a result, for example, even when a large amount of medals go to the auxiliary tank 54 at once, such as when the medals in the storage tank 52 are scraped out by hand and moved to the auxiliary tank 54, the medals do not spill and scatter in the housing 11. is suppressed.

As shown in FIGS. 14 and 16, a handle portion 503 is integrally formed on the upper portion of the front wall portion 501b of the tank body 501. As shown in FIGS. The handle portion 503 includes a flat extension portion 503a extending forward from the upper end portion of the front wall portion 501b, and a hanging portion 503b extending downward from the front end portion of the extension portion 503a. Connecting portions 503c that connect the hanging portion 503b and the front wall portion 501b are provided at both left and right ends of the hanging portion 503b, and the mounting rigidity of the hanging portion 503b to the tank main body 501 is enhanced. The handle portion 503 is open downward, and a finger or hand can be inserted from below the handle portion 503 between the hanging portion 503b and the front wall portion 501b.

Since the handle portion 503 is provided, the auxiliary tank 54 can be pulled forward from the inside of the housing 11 by hooking a finger or hand on the drooping portion 503b. When the auxiliary tank 54 is taken out from the housing 11, the fingertip is inserted between the drooping portion 503b and the front wall portion 501b, so that the auxiliary tank 54 can be stably held. Therefore, a series of operations of pulling out the auxiliary tank 54 forward from the inside of the housing 11 and lifting it up can be performed continuously and smoothly.

An upper sensor insertion hole 505a and a lower sensor insertion hole 505b each having a circular shape are vertically arranged in the rear wall portion 501c of the tank main body 501 . When the auxiliary tank 54 is installed in the housing 11, the upper sensor rod 16a and the lower sensor rod 16b (see FIG. 6A) attached to the housing 11 are inserted into the sensor insertion holes 505a and 505b. ) is inserted. These sensor rods 16a and 16b are for detecting the storage state of medals in the auxiliary tank 54, and are electrically connected to the main controller 101. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 6(a), both sensor rods 16a and 16b are vertically separated from each other to form a pair. It extends parallel to the bottom plate 11a.

Each sensor insertion hole 505a, 505b of the tank body 501 is formed at a position corresponding to each sensor rod 16a, 16b in the rear wall portion 501c. Therefore, when the auxiliary tank 54 is installed in the housing 11, the sensor rods 16a and 16b pass through the sensor insertion holes 505a and 505b from the rear of the auxiliary tank 54, and the tip portions of the sensor rods 16a and 16b is positioned inside the tank body 501 . Each of the sensor rods 16a and 16b is made of a conductive metal material, and when the storage amount of medals (conductive) in the auxiliary tank 54 reaches a predetermined amount, the medals are interposed between the sensor rods 16a and 16b. Then, both sensor rods 16a and 16b conduct through the medal. As a result, the main controller 101 recognizes that the auxiliary tank 54 has received a predetermined amount of medals, that is, the auxiliary tank 54 is full.

When the main controller 101 detects that the hall is full, an external signal indicating that the hall is full is output to the game hall management device (hall computer) through an external centralized terminal board 121, which will be described later. . After that, an employee of the game hall is notified of the full state of the auxiliary tank 54 through a predetermined communication terminal, and the employee collects the medals in the auxiliary tank 54 .

<Regarding configuration for handling both manual collection and automatic collection>
By the way, when recovering tokens overflowing from the storage tank 52 by automatic recovery, the auxiliary tank 54 becomes an obstacle and it is necessary to remove the tokens from the housing 11 . However, if the auxiliary tank 54 is removed from the housing 11, it is necessary to secure a storage space for the auxiliary tank 54 in the game hall, which is inconvenient. In addition, the auxiliary tank 54 may be lost or may be mistaken for another type of slot machine, causing inconvenience when the slot machine 10 is redistributed as a used machine.

Therefore, the auxiliary tank 54 according to the present embodiment is compatible with both manual and automatic collection methods. It is configured to automatically collect medals overflowing from. Hereinafter, the configuration for that purpose will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 17 and 18 as well. FIG. 17 is an explanatory diagram when the auxiliary tank 54 is used for manual recovery, FIG. 18(a) is an explanatory diagram for when the auxiliary tank 54 is used for automatic recovery, and (b) is (a). 1 is a partially enlarged view of the EE line cross section of FIG.

As already explained, when the auxiliary tank 54 is installed, the sensor rods 16a and 16b are inserted into the tank main body 501. However, in the present embodiment, even if the auxiliary tank 54 is turned upside down, the sensor rods 16a and 16b can be inserted. 16a and 16b can be inserted into the respective sensor insertion holes 505a and 505b.

That is, when the auxiliary tank 54 is installed in an upward posture with the bottom plate portion 501a facing downward, the upper sensor rod 16a is inserted into the upper sensor insertion hole 505a and the lower sensor rod 16b is inserted into the lower sensor insertion hole 505b. On the other hand, when the auxiliary tank 54 is installed in a downward posture with the bottom plate portion 501a facing upward, the upper sensor rod 16a is inserted into the lower sensor insertion hole 505b and the lower sensor rod 16b is inserted into the upper sensor insertion hole 505a. The opening diameter and height position of each sensor insertion hole 505a, 505b with respect to each sensor rod 16a, 16b are set so as to be possible.

Specifically, in relation to the lower sensor rod 16b, the distance Lb1 (see FIG. 16) from the lower end position of the bottom plate portion 501a to the lower end position of the lower sensor insertion hole 505b and the upper end position of the rear wall portion 501c to the upper end position of the upper sensor insertion hole 505a is equal to or less than the distance from the bottom plate 11a to the lower end position of the lower sensor rod 16b (lower end position at the portion inserted into each sensor insertion hole 505a, 505b). It has become. On the other hand, regarding the relationship with the upper sensor rod 16a, the distance Lb2 from the lower end position of the bottom plate portion 501a to the upper end position of the upper sensor insertion hole 505a and the lower end position of the lower sensor insertion hole 505b from the upper end position of the rear wall portion 501c. Both of the distance La2 from the bottom plate 11a to the upper end position of the upper sensor rod 16a (the upper end position at the portion where the sensor insertion holes 505a and 505b are inserted) are longer than or equal to the distance. In the present embodiment, the opening diameters of the sensor insertion holes 505a and 505b and the distances La1 and Lb1 are substantially equal, and the sensor insertion holes 505a and 505b are arranged in the height direction (vertical direction) of the tank body 501. They are set so as to be substantially vertically symmetrical with respect to the center line 510 .

With such a configuration, the auxiliary tank 54 can be installed in the housing 11 not only in an upward posture, but also in an upside-down downward posture.

As shown in FIGS. 13 to 16, the auxiliary tank 54 is configured such that its bottom can be opened and closed. Specifically, the tank main body 501 includes a lower opening 512 provided in the bottom plate portion 501 a and a bottom lid 514 that opens and closes the lower opening 512 . The bottom lid 514 is rotatably supported by a support portion 504 (see FIG. 16) provided at the connecting portion between the bottom plate portion 501a and the left side wall portion 501e.

The lower opening 512 penetrates the bottom plate portion 501a in the thickness direction, and has a substantially rectangular shape in plan view. The lower opening 512 is arranged in the central portion of the bottom plate portion 501a, and is sized so that a plurality of medals can pass through it at the same time.

The bottom lid 514 plays a role of opening and closing means for opening and closing the lower opening 512, and has a closed position (see FIG. 14) in which the lower opening 512 is closed by covering it from above, and a tank body opening from the closed position. It can be displaced to an open position (see FIG. 15) in which the lower opening 512 is opened by rotating inwardly of 501 . The bottom cover 514 has a substantially flat plate shape, and has a substantially rectangular shape in plan view corresponding to the shape of the lower opening 512 . The lengthwise and widthwise dimensions of the bottom lid 514 are both larger than the lower opening 512 and smaller than the bottom plate portion 501a. It is possible to close the lower opening 512 while avoiding interference with the portion 501c, the right side wall portion 501d, and the left side wall portion 501e.

The support portion 504 includes a front support portion 515a, a rear support portion 515b, and an intermediate support portion 515c. These support portions 515a to 515c are arranged along the longitudinal direction of the tank body 501 at the connecting portion between the bottom plate portion 501a and the left side wall portion 501e, and are arranged at predetermined intervals from each other. The detailed structure of each support portion 515a to 515c and the connection structure with the bottom lid 514 will be described in detail later.

In the present embodiment, when the auxiliary tank 54 is used for manual recovery, the auxiliary tank 54 is positioned upward and the bottom cover 514 is positioned at the closed position as shown in FIGS. The side opening 512 is closed. In this state, as shown in FIG. 17, the auxiliary tank 54 is placed on the bottom plate 11a of the housing 11, and the guide plate 52a (see FIG. 5) of the hopper device 51 is positioned above the upper opening 502.

By adopting such an installation mode, the medals overflowing from the storage tank 52 fall into the auxiliary tank 54, and the medals can be stored in the auxiliary tank 54. - 特許庁At this time, as shown in FIG. 16, the bottom lid 514 rests on the surface of the bottom plate portion 501a of the tank main body 501, thereby restricting the downward rotation of the bottom lid 514 and moving the bottom lid 514 to the closed position. is suppressed from rotating downward. This prevents the bottom of the auxiliary tank 54 from coming off due to the weight of the medal when the auxiliary tank 54 is removed from the housing 11 or lifted.

On the other hand, when the auxiliary tank 54 is used for automatic recovery, as shown in FIG. The part 512 is opened. In this state, as shown in FIG. 18A, the auxiliary tank 54 is placed on the bottom plate 11a of the housing 11, the guide plate 52a is positioned above the lower opening 512, and the auxiliary tank 54 is is positioned above the medal ejection hole 15 (see FIG. 6(a)).

By adopting such an installation mode, the lower opening 512, the upper opening 502 and the medal discharge hole 15 are communicated with each other, and the medals overflowing from the storage tank 52 pass through the auxiliary tank 54 and reach the medal discharge hole 15. becomes movable. As a result, the medals from the storage tank 52 can be guided to the medal discharge hole 15 even with the auxiliary tank 54 installed, and the medals can be automatically collected.

Here, when switching the auxiliary tank 54 from automatic recovery to manual recovery, the operation of closing the lower opening 512 is forgotten, and the auxiliary tank 54 is placed in an upward posture while the lower opening 512 remains open. may be installed inside the housing 11 due to In this case, since the bottom of the auxiliary tank 54 is open, when the auxiliary tank 54 is taken out from the housing 11 , the medals in the auxiliary tank 54 fall and are scattered within the housing 11 . As a result, an employee of the game hall has to manually remove the medals one by one, which may cause a lot of trouble.

Also, when the auxiliary tank 54 is switched from manual recovery to automatic recovery, the user forgets to open the lower opening 512 and leaves the auxiliary tank 54 with the lower opening 512 closed by the bottom lid 514. is installed in the housing 11 in a downward posture. In this case, since the movement path of the medals to the medal discharge hole 15 is blocked by the bottom cover 514, when the game is played in such a state, the medals from the guide plate 52a accumulate to some extent on the bottom of the tank main body 501. After that, it will lead to the situation of spilling one after another. In this case, not only can the medals overflowing from the storage tank 52 not be properly and automatically collected, but also the medals are scattered within the housing 11 .

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the configuration of the auxiliary tank 54 can be switched between manual collection and automatic collection without the employee of the game hall being conscious of the operation of closing or opening the bottom lid 514. The configuration of the auxiliary tank 54 is devised. Such a configuration will be described below with reference to FIGS. 19 to 22 together with a detailed description of the bottom lid 514. 19(a) is a perspective view of the bottom lid 514, (b) is a rear perspective view of the bottom lid 514, FIG. 20 is a side view of the bottom lid 514, and FIG. 21 is a partially enlarged view taken along line DD of FIG. 22 is an explanatory diagram showing how the rotation of the bottom cover 514 is restricted.

The bottom lid 514 is made of transparent synthetic resin, and as shown in FIG. The lid body 521 has a substantially rectangular shape in a plan view, and its lengthwise and widthwise dimensions are larger than those of the lower opening 512 . Therefore, when the bottom lid 514 is positioned at the closed position, the entire lower opening 512 is closed by the lid main body 521, and around the lower opening 512, the back surface 521b of the lid main body 521 and the tank The surface of the bottom plate portion 501a of the main body 501 is in circumferential contact.

As shown in FIG. 19B, a plurality of ridges 523 are provided on the rear surface 521b of the lid body 521. As shown in FIG. Each protrusion 523 extends along the longitudinal direction of the lid main body 521 and is arranged parallel to each other at predetermined intervals in the lateral direction of the lid main body 521 . By providing these protrusions 523, the strength and bending rigidity of the lid body 521 are reinforced, and the durability of the bottom lid 514 is enhanced.

The shaft portion 522 is formed integrally with the lid body 521 at one long side portion 521c of the lid body 521, and extends along the extending direction of the long side portion 521c. The shaft portion 522 includes a front side support shaft 524 and a rear side support shaft 525 provided at both ends in the longitudinal direction of the long side portion 521c, and an intermediate support shaft 526 provided at an intermediate portion between the support shafts 524 and 525. and The front support shaft 524, the rear support shaft 525 and the intermediate support shaft 526 correspond to the front support portion 515a, the rear support portion 515b and the intermediate support portion 515c (see FIG. 13) provided on the tank body 501. . That is, the front support shaft 524 and the rear support shaft 525 are connected to the front support portion 515a and the rear support portion 515b, respectively, and the intermediate support shaft 526 is connected to the intermediate support portion 515c.

A front cutout portion 530 and a rear cutout portion 531 are formed in a rectangular shape at both ends of the shaft portion 522 in the lid body 521 in the axial direction. A support opening 532 is formed at a location corresponding to the intermediate support shaft 526 . By forming the front notch 530, the rear notch 531, and the support opening 532, a predetermined gap is secured between the lid body 521 and each of the support portions 515a to 515c. Interference with the support portions 515a to 515c during rotation is avoided.

The shaft portion 522 is provided with a plurality of notch grooves 533 formed by cutting out portions of the shaft portion 522 in the radial direction of the shaft portion 522 . These notched grooves 533 are in one-to-one correspondence with a plurality of ribs 506 (see FIGS. 14 and 16) provided at the connecting portion between the bottom plate portion 501a and the left side wall portion 501e of the tank body 501. As shown in FIG. When the bottom lid 514 is attached to the tank main body 501, as shown in FIG. is regulated.

In this embodiment, when the bottom lid 514 is positioned at the closed position, the rotational position of the bottom lid 514 is not fixed or held. That is, when the auxiliary tank 54 is in the upward posture, the lid main body 521 of the bottom lid 514 is placed on the bottom plate portion 501a of the tank main body 501, and the closed position is maintained. can be freely rotated toward the open position.

Therefore, when the auxiliary tank 54 is turned upside down from an upward posture to a downward posture, the bottom lid 514 rotates toward the open position by its own weight, and the lower opening 512 is naturally opened. That is, when the auxiliary tank 54 is in the downward posture, the lower opening 512 is opened accordingly. Therefore, the lower opening 512 can be opened in conjunction with the reversing operation of the auxiliary tank 54, and a separate manual opening operation is not required. As a result, the lower opening 512 is prevented from being kept closed, and it is possible to maintain a proper mode at all times without being conscious of whether or not the lower opening 512 is open.

Further, when the auxiliary tank 54 is in the downward posture, the shaft portion 522 of the bottom lid 514 is covered from above by the bottom plate portion 501a. This prevents the medals from the storage tank 52 from colliding with the shaft portion 522 and hindering the support. At this time, by covering the shaft portion 522 with the bottom plate portion 501a, there is no need to provide a dedicated component as a cover member, and the configuration of the auxiliary tank 54 can be simplified.

As shown in FIG. 19A, a protruding portion 535 is integrally formed on the surface 521a of the lid body 521. As shown in FIG. The projecting portion 535 is arranged in the central portion of the lid body 521 in the longitudinal direction, and is adjacent to the support opening 532 in the lateral direction. The protruding portion 535 protrudes from the surface 521a of the lid body 521 at a predetermined height, and is formed in a substantially triangular shape when viewed in the axial direction of the shaft portion 522 (see FIG. 20).

As shown in FIG. 22( a ), when the bottom lid 514 is rotated in the first direction 537 toward the open position from the closed position, the top 535 a of the projecting portion 535 contacts the left side wall portion 501 e of the tank main body 501 . , the rotation of the bottom lid 514 in the first direction 537 is restricted. As a result, the rotation end position of the bottom cover 514 is defined, and the upper limit of the rotation angle in the first direction 537 is limited to the predetermined rotation angle α.

In this case, the predetermined rotation angle (maximum rotation angle in the first direction 537) α of the bottom lid 514 is the same as that of the bottom lid 514 when the auxiliary tank 54 is in the upward posture, as shown in FIG. The rotation angle is such that the bottom cover 514 is tilted toward the closed position with respect to an imaginary vertical line 540 passing through the rotation shaft 538 of FIG. In other words, the center of gravity of the bottom cover 514 does not straddle the imaginary vertical line 540 and the rotation angle is such that it does not exceed the imaginary vertical line 540 in the first direction 537 . Specifically, the predetermined rotation angle α is less than 90°, and is 85° in this embodiment. With such a configuration, when the auxiliary tank 54 is in an upward posture, the center of gravity of the bottom lid 514 is located on the closed position side with respect to the imaginary vertical line 540, and the bottom lid 514 is closed by its own weight. Attempt to lean towards the closed position.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the rotational position of the bottom lid 514 is not fixed or held when the bottom lid 514 is positioned at the open position. That is, when the auxiliary tank 54 is in the downward posture, the projecting portion 535 of the bottom lid 514 abuts the left side wall portion 501e of the tank main body 501, and the bottom lid 514 simply leans against the left side wall portion 501e. However, the bottom cover 514 is in a state in which it can be freely rotated toward the closed position.

Therefore, when the bottom lid 514 tries to tilt toward the closed position as described above, the bottom lid 514 easily rotates toward the closed position, and the lower opening 512 is naturally closed. That is, when the auxiliary tank 54 is in the upward posture, the lower opening 512 is closed accordingly. Therefore, the lower opening 512 can be closed in conjunction with the reversing operation of the auxiliary tank 54, eliminating the need for a separate manual closing operation. As a result, the lower opening 512 is prevented from being left open, and a proper mode can always be maintained without being conscious of whether or not it is closed.

Incidentally, when the auxiliary tank 54 is in a downward posture, the bottom lid 514 tends to stay in the balanced position where the center of gravity of the bottom lid 514 is located directly below the rotating shaft 538. is in contact with the left side wall portion 501e of the tank body 501, the rotation of the bottom lid 514 is restricted before the balanced position. Therefore, when the auxiliary tank 54 is in the downward posture, the bottom lid 514 is maintained at a position rotated in the first direction 537 by the predetermined rotation angle α from the closed position, and this position is the open position. is equivalent to

As shown in FIG. 20, the projecting portion 535 has a first inclined portion 535b located on the shaft portion 522 side and a second inclined portion 535c located on the opposite side to the shaft portion 522 side, with the top portion 535a interposed therebetween. I have. The first inclined portion 535b is inclined upward from the shaft portion 522 side toward the top portion 535a, and the second inclined portion 535c is inclined downward from the top portion 535a toward the side opposite to the shaft portion 522 side. The inclination angle of the second inclined portion 535c is smaller than that of the first inclined portion 535b.

With such a configuration, it is possible to keep the protrusion amount (the height in the protrusion direction) of the protrusion 535 small and ensure the strength of the protrusion 535 . That is, the degree of restriction of the rotation range of the bottom lid 514 is defined by the amount of projection of the projecting portion 535, and when the inclination angle of the second inclined portion 535c is larger than that of the first inclined portion 535b, the top portion 535a position is far from the rotation shaft 538 of the bottom cover 514, and the amount of protrusion of the protrusion 535 needs to be increased. In this case, the strength of the protruding portion 535 is lowered, and the protruding portion 535 is likely to be damaged due to collision with medals or the like.

Here, in the present embodiment, the bottom lid 514 is tilted at a predetermined rotation angle (specific rotation angle) between the closed position and the open position, and in this state, the bottom lid 514 is moved in a predetermined removal direction. , the connection between the bottom lid 514 and the tank body 501 can be released. Hereinafter, the configuration for that purpose will be described with reference to FIGS. 23 and 24, along with a detailed description of the front side support portion 515a, the rear side support portion 515b, and the intermediate support portion 515c. FIG. 23 is an explanatory diagram showing the support structure of the bottom lid 514, and FIG. 24 is an explanatory diagram showing how to remove the bottom lid 514. As shown in FIG.

As already explained, the bottom lid 514 is configured such that the front support shaft 524, the rear support shaft 525 and the intermediate support shaft 526 of the shaft portion 522 are connected to the front support portion 515a, the rear support portion 515b and the intermediate support portion of the tank main body 501. It is connected with the tank main body 501 by connecting with 515c. Since the support shafts 524 to 526 and the support portions 515a to 515c have the same connection structure, the combination of the front support shaft 524 and the front support portion 515a will be described as an example.

As shown in FIG. 23( a ), the front side support portion 515 a includes a support rising portion 551 that rises upward from the bottom plate portion 501 a of the tank body 501 and a support rising portion 551 that protrudes from the left side wall portion 501 e of the tank body 501 toward the support rising portion 551 . and a support projection 552 that

The height dimension of the support upright portion 551 is larger than the shaft diameter of the front side support shaft 524, and the upper portion of the support upright portion 551 is formed with a protruding portion 551b protruding toward the left side wall portion 501e. . The support projecting portion 552 is arranged at a height position corresponding to the projecting portion 551 b and faces the projecting portion 551 b in the radial direction of the front support shaft 524 . An elongated slit portion 554 that opens vertically and extends in the axial direction of the front support shaft 524 is formed between the projecting portion 551b and the support projecting portion 552 . Below the slit 554, a space 553 into which the front support shaft 524 can be inserted is formed. , are curved in an arc shape so that the distance between them narrows as they go upward.

On the other hand, the front support shaft 524 has a shape obtained by chamfering a portion of a round bar. More specifically, it has a pair of flat surfaces 561 parallel to each other and a sliding surface 562 connecting the flat surfaces 561 and having an arcuate cross section. The interval (radial width) M between the two flat surfaces 561 is equal to or smaller than the opening width Ld of the slit portion 554 (opening width in the same direction as the above direction).

As shown in FIG. 20, the flat surface 561 is formed at an inclination angle obtained by rotating a virtual plane flush with the lid body 521 of the bottom lid 514 by a predetermined angle about the rotation shaft 538. It is As shown in FIG. 24, when the bottom cover 514 is tilted at a predetermined specific rotation angle β between the closed position and the open position, both flat surfaces 561 stand upright. The angle is set so that the sliding surface 562 is opposed to the slit portion 554 by doing so.

Therefore, by inclining the bottom cover 514 at the specific rotation angle β, the lateral width of the front support shaft 524 becomes the interval M between the flat surfaces 561 and can be made equal to or less than the opening width Ld of the slit portion 554 . Therefore, by moving the bottom cover 514 toward the upper opening 502 in the same position, the front support shaft 524 passes through the slit 554 and can be removed from the front support 515a. Incidentally, when the bottom cover 514 is moved upward while being inclined at the specific rotation angle β, the rear support shaft 525 and the intermediate support shaft 526 are removed from the rear support portion 515b and the intermediate support portion 515c, respectively. It is possible to remove the bottom cover 514 from the tank main body 501 .

Since the bottom lid 514 is configured to be removable from the tank main body 501 in this way, when the bottom lid 514 is damaged, it is not necessary to replace the entire auxiliary tank 54, and it can be dealt with by replacing the bottom lid 514. Become. Also, when attaching the bottom lid 514 to the tank main body 501, the bottom lid 514 can be easily attached by pushing downward from above each of the support portions 515a to 515c while tilting the bottom lid 514 at a specific rotation angle β. , the assembling work of the auxiliary tank 54 can be facilitated.

On the other hand, when the bottom lid 514 is positioned at the closed position (see FIG. 23(a)) or the open position (see FIG. 23(b)), the width of the front support shaft 524 is larger than the interval M between the slits 554. As a result, the front support shaft 524 cannot pass through the slit portion 554 . Therefore, even if the bottom lid 514 is moved toward the upper opening 502 at those positions, it cannot be removed from the tank main body 501 . As already explained, in the present embodiment, when the auxiliary tank 54 is installed in a downward posture for automatic recovery, the bottom cover 514 is suspended from the tank main body 501 and the protruding portion 535 stays at the rotational position (open position) where it abuts against the left side wall portion 501e of the tank body 501 . Even in such a case, the difference between the predetermined rotation angle α (open position) defined by the projecting portion 535 and the specific rotation angle β at which the bottom lid 514 can be removed allows the bottom lid 514 to move toward the tank body. Falling out of 501 is suppressed.

<Construction for Fixing the Auxiliary Tank 54>
By the way, from the viewpoint of preventing loss of the auxiliary tank 54 during transportation of the slot machine 10, it is desirable to transport the slot machine 10 with the auxiliary tank 54 housed in the housing 11. FIG. However, when the medals stored in the auxiliary tank 54 are to be manually collected, the auxiliary tank 54 must be taken out from the housing 11, so the auxiliary tank 54 must be installed in a free state without being fixed. Therefore, if the slot machine 10 is tilted or vibrated during transportation, the auxiliary tank 54 moves within the housing 11 and collides with surrounding members such as the hopper device 51, resulting in damage.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the configuration is devised so that the auxiliary tank 54 can be in a fixed state when the slot machine 10 is transported, while the auxiliary tank 54 can be in a free state when the slot machine 10 is used for manual recovery. there is This configuration will be described below with reference to FIGS. 6 and 13 to 18. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 13 to 17, the upper end of the tank body 501 of the auxiliary tank 54 is provided with a plate-like flange 571 projecting outward. The flange portion 571 is integrally formed with the tank main body 501, and includes a front flange portion 571a, a rear flange portion 572b, a right flange portion 571c, and a left flange portion 571d. Each of these flange portions 571 a to 571 d is continuously formed in a frame shape so as to surround the upper opening portion 502 . By providing the flange portion 571 in this manner, the bending rigidity of the tank body 501 is reinforced, and deformation of the auxiliary tank 54 is suppressed when the auxiliary tank 54 is lifted in a state in which medals are stored. The front flange portion 571a is also used as the extending portion 503a of the handle portion 503. As shown in FIG.

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 6(a) and 18(a), the bottom plate 11a of the housing 11 is provided with the right side of the tank body 501 when the auxiliary tank 54 is installed in the housing 11 in a downward attitude. An engagement portion 574 that engages with the flange portion 571c is provided. The engaging portion 574 is integrally formed with the hopper mounting plate 22 and formed by bending a portion of the hopper mounting plate 22 . Specifically, in the hopper mounting plate 22, a mounting plate projecting portion 575 is formed so as to project rightward from the right end portion of the mounting plate body portion 22b, and the mounting plate projecting portion 575 is bent into a crank shape. An engaging portion 574 is formed by being held together. As shown in FIG. 6B, the engaging portion 574 includes an upright portion 577 that rises upward from the mounting plate projecting portion 575 and a bulging portion that extends from the upper end of the upright portion 577 toward the area where the auxiliary tank 54 is installed. and an outlet 578 .

The projecting portion 578 has a lower surface 578a substantially parallel to the surface of the bottom plate 11a, and the length dimension of the projecting portion 578 in the projecting direction is smaller than the projecting direction length dimension of the right flange portion 571c. ing. The height of the upright portion 577 is set so that the gap dimension Le between the projecting portion 578 and the bottom plate 11a is slightly larger than or equal to the plate thickness dimension of the right flange portion 571c. Further, the distance Lh (see FIG. 6A) between the inner wall surface 577a of the standing portion 577 and the right side plate 11c of the housing 11 is slightly larger than or equal to the lateral width dimension Lf of the auxiliary tank 54 (see FIG. 13). is set to be As shown in FIG. 18(a), the engaging portion 574 is arranged at a position lower than the front end portion 11d of the bottom plate 11a by a predetermined distance, and has a predetermined length shorter than the longitudinal dimension of the right flange portion 571c. extending in the front-rear direction.

With such a configuration, the auxiliary tank 54 in the downward posture is placed on the bottom plate 11a on the front side of the engaging portion 574, and from this state, the auxiliary tank 54 is slid toward the back plate 11b. By doing so, as shown in FIG. 18B, the right flange portion 571c can be inserted into the gap between the projecting portion 578 and the bottom plate 11a. As a result, the right flange portion 571c and the engaging portion 574 can be engaged with each other, and the overhanging portion 578 can restrict the lifting (upward movement) of the auxiliary tank 54 .

Therefore, by installing the auxiliary tank 54 as described above during transportation of the slot machine 10, the auxiliary tank 54 is prevented from moving upward within the housing 11 and colliding with the guide plate 52a and the like above. Further, when the auxiliary tank 54 moves upward, the auxiliary tank 54 is caught in a position where it interferes with the locking device 20 in the housing 11, so that even if the unlocking operation is performed through the key cylinder 21, it becomes impossible to unlock. Although it may occur, by restricting the upward movement of the auxiliary tank 54, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of such inconvenience.

When the right flange portion 571c and the engaging portion 574 are engaged with each other, not only is the upward movement of the auxiliary tank 54 restricted, but also the auxiliary tank 54 is arranged between the standing portion 577 and the right side plate 11c. By doing so, it is also possible to restrict the movement of the auxiliary tank 54 in the left-right direction. In this case, when the slot machine 10 is transported, the auxiliary tank 54 is prevented from reciprocating from side to side and repeatedly colliding with the right side plate 11 c and the hopper device 51 .

Here, in the case of manually collecting medals, the auxiliary tank 54 is lifted partially or wholly to remove the auxiliary tank 54 from the housing 11. However, the right flange portion 571c and the engaging portion 574 are separated from each other. In the engaged state, the removal operation becomes difficult. That is, in the present embodiment, when the auxiliary tank 54 is in a downward posture so as to engage the right flange portion 571c and the engaging portion 574, the hanging portion 503b is erected and the handle portion 503 is opened upward. state. In this case, since it is difficult to put fingers or hands in from below, after transportation (or after installation) to the game hall where tokens are collected manually, the employee habitually tries to perform the above-mentioned take-out operation. It is easy to hesitate. As a result, an unreasonable removal operation in the engaged state is suppressed, and damage to the right flange portion 571c and the engaging portion 574 is suppressed.

As shown in FIG. 18(a), the front end portion 11d of the bottom plate 11a is provided with a restricting plate 579 that restricts the amount of forward movement of the auxiliary tank 54. As shown in FIG. The regulating plate 579 is made of a metal flat plate having a predetermined thickness, and forms an upward step at its rear end with the bottom plate 11a.

The length dimension of the restriction plate 579 in the front-rear direction (sliding direction of the auxiliary tank 54) is such that the rear end portion of the restriction plate 579 moves forward of the auxiliary tank 54 when the auxiliary tank 54 is slid to a predetermined installation position. It is set to the length where it is located. That is, the distance between the rear end portion of the regulation plate 579 and the back plate 11b is longer than the longitudinal dimension Lg of the auxiliary tank 54. As shown in FIG. Therefore, after the auxiliary tank 54 is installed at the predetermined installation position, even if the auxiliary tank 54 moves forward, it is caught by the restricting plate 579, and further forward movement is restricted. This prevents the auxiliary tank 54 from colliding with the rear surface of the front door 12 when the slot machine 10 is transported, so that damage to the auxiliary tank 54 and the front door 12 can be suppressed.

The thickness dimension of the regulating plate 579 is such that when the front door 12 is closed, the lower end portion 12a of the front door 12 (see FIG. 4) is located above the bottom plate 11a when the front door 12 is closed. It is recommended that the height of the part where the Thereby, the gap between the front door 12 and the bottom plate 11a can be filled with the regulation plate 579. As shown in FIG. In other words, the regulation plate 579 can also function as an anti-tamper plate that prevents unauthorized access to the inside of the slot machine 10 by inserting a foreign object such as a wire through the gap.

Here, the predetermined installation position is set at a position where the guide plate 52a is arranged above the lower opening 512 provided in the bottom plate portion 501a of the auxiliary tank . For this reason, when transporting to the automatic recovery game hall, if the auxiliary tank 54 is installed facing downward with the bottom lid 514 positioned at the open position, the auxiliary tank 54 It can be used as it is without removing or adjusting the position.

However, it is not always necessary to position the bottom lid 514 in the open position during transportation. For example, as shown in FIG. 25, the auxiliary tank 54 may be installed with the bottom cover 514 placed on the upper sensor rod 16a. In this case, the rotation of the bottom lid 514 to the open position can be restricted by contacting the upper sensor rod 16a at a position halfway to the open position. As a result, the upper limit of rotation of the bottom lid 514 from the closed position is regulated to the predetermined rotation angle γ, and even if a foreign object or a hand enters from the medal discharge hole 15 to rotate the bottom lid 514 to the open position, It is blocked by the upper sensor bar 16a. As a result, the lower opening 512 is prevented from being completely opened, making unauthorized access to the interior of the gaming machine difficult.

Here, in this embodiment, the rotation shaft 538 and the upper sensor rod 16a are arranged so that the predetermined rotation angle γ is smaller than the specific rotation angle β (see FIG. 24) at which the bottom cover 514 can be removed. are set. In this case, even if the bottom lid 514 is rotated by a foreign object or a hand entering from the medal discharge hole 15, it becomes impossible or difficult to rotate up to the specific rotation angle β, and the removal of the bottom lid 514 can be made difficult. This makes it possible to suppress the act of completely opening the lower opening 512 by removing the bottom cover 514 .

On the other hand, when the auxiliary tank 54 is installed in an upward posture, as shown in FIG. 17, the auxiliary tank 54 is not engaged with the engaging portion 574, and the auxiliary tank 54 is installed in a free state. Therefore, when collecting medals manually, the auxiliary tank 54 can be easily taken out from the housing 11 .

The distance between the hopper device 51 and the right side plate 11c of the housing 11 corresponds to the width dimension Lf of the auxiliary tank 54, specifically, it is slightly larger than the width dimension Lf. there is Therefore, when the auxiliary tank 54 is installed in an upward posture, the auxiliary tank 54 is sandwiched between the hopper device 51 and the right side plate 11c, and the flange portion 571 contacts the hopper device 51 and the right side plate 11c. , the movement of the auxiliary tank 54 in the horizontal direction is restricted.

As already described, in the present embodiment, when the auxiliary tank 54 is in the upward posture, the left side wall portion 501e and the right side wall portion 501d of the tank body 501 are arranged in an inclined manner such that the distance between them increases upward. formed. Of these, the left side wall portion 501e is a wall portion that faces the engaging portion 574 when the auxiliary tank 54 is installed in an upward posture. can be easily separated from the engaging portion 574 . As a result, when the auxiliary tank 54 is installed in an upward posture, it is possible to secure a space between the auxiliary tank 54 and the engaging portion 574, and interference with the engaging portion 574 makes it difficult to install the auxiliary tank 54 and prevents the auxiliary tank 54 from being installed. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of inconvenience such as tilting.

Incidentally, when the auxiliary tank 54 is installed in an upward posture, the regulation plate 579 is positioned in front of the auxiliary tank 54, and the auxiliary tank 54 can come into contact with the regulation plate 579 when the auxiliary tank 54 is taken out. . Therefore, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 15 and 16, a bulging portion 581 having a semicircular cross section is provided on the back surface of the bottom plate portion 501a of the tank body 501. As shown in FIG.

The bulging portion 581 is integrally formed with the tank main body 501 and arranged in the front portion of the tank main body 501 on the back surface of the bottom plate portion 501a. As a result, the tank body 501 is less likely to get caught on the restricting plate 579, and the auxiliary tank 54 can be drawn out smoothly. In this case, by making the height dimension of the bulging portion 581 larger than the plate thickness dimension of the regulation plate 579, the bulging portion 581 can easily come into contact with the regulation plate 579 first when the auxiliary tank 54 is pulled out. It is possible to suitably exhibit the effect of reducing catching.

To release the engagement between the right flange portion 571c and the engaging portion 574, the engagement can be released by pulling out the auxiliary tank 54 forward (front side) from the state shown in FIG. 18(a). . When the auxiliary tank 54 is installed in a downward posture, the handle portion 503 is in a state in which the hanging portion 503b stands up and opens upward. By hooking the hand, the drawer can be easily pulled out. At that time, in order to suppress the restriction plate 579 from being caught, an inclined surface may be provided at the rear upper end portion of the restriction plate 579 or at the front upper end portion 571e (see FIG. 17) of the extension portion 503a (front flange portion 571a). good.

As already explained, in the present embodiment, the upper sensor rod 16a and the lower sensor rod 16b extend in a direction parallel to the bottom plate 11a of the housing 11 (extending in the same direction as the tank installation surface in the height direction). ), and by sliding the auxiliary tank 54 in the longitudinal direction, the sensor rods 16a and 16b can be moved in and out of the upper sensor insertion hole 505a and the lower sensor insertion hole 505b.

When the auxiliary tank 54 is installed in the housing 11 in an upward posture and medals are stored in the auxiliary tank 54, the auxiliary tank 54 is relatively heavy. When the auxiliary tank 54 is pulled out, it is considered that the auxiliary tank 54 is pulled out by sliding on the bottom plate 11a from the front opening side of the housing 11 . In this case, the sensor rods 16a and 16b inserted through the insertion holes 505a and 505b are pulled out from the auxiliary tank 54 without receiving excessive force.

On the other hand, when the auxiliary tank 54 is installed in a downward posture, the auxiliary tank 54 is empty and relatively light in weight. Therefore, when the auxiliary tank 54 is taken out, it is conceivable that the front end portion of the auxiliary tank 54 is tilted and pulled out so that it can be lifted. In this case, there is concern that the sensor rods 16a and 16b may receive excessive force from the auxiliary tank 54. In this respect, since the engagement state is released by sliding the auxiliary tank 54 in the front-rear direction, the auxiliary tank 54 is prevented from being pulled out in a tilted posture. 16b can be suppressed from receiving excessive force. That is, it is possible to protect the sensor rods 16a and 16b.

According to the configuration described in detail above, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

The bottom of the auxiliary tank 54 is opened and closed as the orientation of the auxiliary tank 54 is changed between up and down. As a result, switching between manual recovery and automatic recovery can be performed simply by turning the auxiliary tank 54 upside down, and the switching operation can be simplified. Moreover, since switching between the closed state and the open state is associated with the posture of the auxiliary tank 54, it is possible to easily grasp which mode it is. For example, in the case of a device that merely switches between opening and closing in an upward posture, it is difficult to grasp the state of the auxiliary tank 54 without looking into it. As a result, it may be used in an erroneous manner, such as using it in an open state when it should be used in a closed state. In this regard, in this configuration, the appearance of the auxiliary tank 54 can be made different between the closed state and the open state, so that the difference in state can be noticed at a glance. In particular, when the bottom of the auxiliary tank 54 is on the upper side, it is configured to be in an open state, so that it is easy to notice that the bottom is empty, and it is possible to suppress use in an erroneous manner.

When the auxiliary tank 54 is changed from the upward posture to the downward posture, the bottom lid 514 is configured to rotate toward the open position by its own weight. In this case, in addition to suppressing forgetting to open the lower opening 512, a drive unit for rotating the bottom lid 514 toward the open position, a sensor for detecting the attitude of the auxiliary tank 54, and the sensor Therefore, it becomes possible to simplify the configuration and reduce the cost.

A configuration in which the upper limit of the rotation range of the bottom lid 514 toward the open side is limited to a predetermined rotation angle α, and the bottom lid 514 rotates toward the closed position by its own weight when the auxiliary tank 54 is in an upward posture. and In addition to suppressing forgetting to close the lower opening 512, a drive unit or the like for rotating the bottom lid 514 toward the closing side becomes unnecessary, thereby simplifying the configuration and reducing costs. be possible.

The right side flange portion 571c and the engaging portion 574 engage with each other when the auxiliary tank 54 is installed facing downward, and are not engaged when the auxiliary tank 54 is installed facing upward. This makes it possible to restrict the movement of the auxiliary tank 54 during transportation of the slot machine 10 while avoiding adverse effects on the removal operation of the auxiliary tank 54 during manual recovery.

In particular, since the presence or absence of engagement is associated with the posture of the auxiliary tank 54, the external appearance of the auxiliary tank 54 can be made different between the engaged state and the non-engaged state. For example, if the engagement point becomes a blind spot from the point of view of an employee of the game hall, a forceful take-out operation is performed without noticing that it is in the engaged state, and the right flange portion 571c, the engaging portion 574, etc. Doing so may cause damage. In this respect, according to the present embodiment, the difference in appearance of the auxiliary tank 54 makes it possible to notice the difference in state at a glance. In this case, for example, if the employee is notified in advance that the auxiliary tank 54 is in a fixed state when the auxiliary tank 54 is in a downward posture, it can be easily determined which of the above states it is in without requiring confirmation of the engagement point. This makes it possible to control the unreasonable take-out operation.

The upward movement of the auxiliary tank 54 is restricted by the right flange portion 571c and the engaging portion 574 being engaged with each other. If the auxiliary tank 54 moves upward during transportation, the auxiliary tank 54 may be caught in a position where it interferes with the locking device 20, and it may become impossible to unlock even if the unlocking operation is performed later. In this regard, in the above configuration, the upward movement of the auxiliary tank 54 is restricted by the engagement between the right flange portion 571c and the engaging portion 574, so that the occurrence of the above inconvenience can be suppressed.

The engagement portion 574 is provided on the surface of the bottom plate 11 a (the installation surface of the auxiliary tank 54 ) and is engaged with the flange portion 571 of the auxiliary tank 54 . In this case, it becomes unnecessary to provide a dedicated part for engagement in the auxiliary tank 54, and the construction of the auxiliary tank 54 can be simplified.

Moreover, since the flange portion 571 is configured to be engaged, the separation distance from the engaging portion 574 can be increased when the auxiliary tank 54 is in the upward posture. As a result, when the auxiliary tank 54 is installed in an upward posture, it is possible to suppress the problem that the movement of the auxiliary tank 54 is restricted due to an unintended engagement state. In addition, considering that the hopper device 51 and the auxiliary tank 54 are provided side by side in the housing 11, when the auxiliary tank 54 is installed in an upward posture, the hopper device 51 and the housing 11 are separated by the flange portion 571. The position of the auxiliary tank with respect to the right side plate 11c of is regulated. Therefore, even if the auxiliary tank 54 is not engaged in the upward posture, it is possible to restrict the displacement of the auxiliary tank 54 .

Focusing on the characteristic that the auxiliary tank 54 does not need to be taken out during automatic recovery, the downward posture of the auxiliary tank 54, which is unsuitable for manual recovery, is adopted as a common posture during transportation and automatic recovery of the slot machine 10. In addition, the auxiliary tank 54 is fixed to the housing 11 only in the case of the common posture. Furthermore, since the bottom plate 501a of the tank body 501 is provided with a lower opening 512 and can be opened and closed by the bottom lid 514, it is possible to eliminate the inconvenience during transportation while suppressing adverse effects during automatic collection. That is, according to the present embodiment, by simply changing the posture of the auxiliary tank 54, it is possible to adapt to the three usage environments of transportation, automatic collection, and manual collection, which is convenient. can be significantly improved.

Next, the electrical configuration of the slot machine 10 will be described with reference to block diagrams of FIGS. 26 and 27. FIG.

The main control unit 101 is equipped with a microcomputer centered around a CPU 102 as arithmetic processing means. In addition to the power supply device 91, the CPU 102 is connected to a clock circuit 103 that outputs a rectangular wave of a predetermined frequency, an input/output port 104, and the like via an internal bus. The main controller 101 functions as a main board built into the slot machine 10 .

On the input side of the main controller 101, the reel unit 31 (more specifically, a reel index sensor that individually detects that each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R has made one rotation) and a start detection sensor that detects the operation of the start lever 41. 41a, stop detection sensors 42a to 44a for individually detecting the operation of each of the stop switches 42 to 44, an inserted medal detection sensor 45a for detecting medals inserted from the medal slot 45, and a medal dispensed from the hopper device 51. A payout detection sensor 51a, a first credit insertion detection sensor 56a that individually detects the operation of the first credit insertion switch 56, a second credit insertion detection sensor 57a that individually detects the operation of the second credit insertion switch 57, and a third credit. A third credit insertion detection sensor 58a that individually detects the operation of the insertion switch 58, a settlement detection sensor 59a that detects the operation of the settlement switch 59, a reset detection sensor 72a that detects the operation of the reset switch 72, and the setting key insertion hole 73. Various sensors such as a setting key detection sensor 73a for detecting that a setting key is inserted and turned on, an upper sensor bar 16a and a lower sensor bar 16b are connected, and signals from these various sensors are sent to an input/output port. 104 to the CPU 102 .

A power supply device 91 is connected to the input side of the main control device 101 via an input/output port 104 . The power supply device 91 includes a power supply unit 91a that supplies driving power to each electronic device of the slot machine 10 including the main controller 101, a power failure monitoring circuit 91b, and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 91b monitors the power failure state and generates a power failure signal when the power switch 71 shuts off the power as well as when the power fails. Therefore, the power failure monitoring circuit 91b monitors the stabilized driving voltage of 12 volts DC output from the power supply unit 91a in this example, and determines that the power supply has been cut off when the driving voltage drops below 10 volts. is configured to output a power failure signal. The power failure signal is supplied to each of the CPU 102 and the input/output port 104, and the CPU 102 recognizes this power failure signal to execute power failure processing, which will be described later. The power failure signal is also supplied to the display control device 81 .

The power supply unit 91a is configured to output a stabilized voltage of 5 volts that is used as a driving voltage in a control system such as the main control unit 101 even when the output voltage drops below 10 volts. The time during which the stabilized voltage is output is sufficient for main controller 101 to execute power failure processing.

On the output side of the main controller 101, the reel unit 31 (more specifically, a stepping motor for rotating the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R), the medal passage switching solenoid 46a provided in the selector 46, the hopper device 51, the credit The input/output port 104 includes a display unit 60, a remaining payout number display unit 61, a payout number display unit 62, a push order notification unit 68, a display control device 81, an external centralized terminal board 121 capable of transmitting information to a hall management device (not shown), and the like. connected through

The CPU 102 includes a ROM 105 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the CPU 102, and a work area for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 105. In addition to the RAM 106 for securing , various processing circuits necessary for the slot machine 10, such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data transmission/reception circuit, etc., and a credit counter for counting the number of credits, etc., are not shown. Various counters are built in. The ROM 105 and the RAM 106 constitute a main memory as storage means, and programs for executing various processes are stored in the above-described ROM 105 as part of the control program.

The RAM 106 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 91 even after the slot machine 10 is powered off. The RAM 106 includes a memory for temporarily storing various data, a winning flag storage area 106a for storing the lottery result of the combination, and stop information used when controlling the stop of each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. In addition to the stop information storage area 106b for storing the status information storage area 106c for storing the game status such as the BB status, etc., a backup area is provided.

The backup area is an area for storing the value of the stack pointer when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like (including when the power is cut off by operating the power switch 71; the same shall apply hereinafter). Yes, when the power failure is resolved (including power-on by operating the power switch 71; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the slot machine 10 can be restored to the state before the power-off based on the information in the backup area. . Writing to the backup area is executed by power failure processing (see FIG. 28) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written to the backup area is executed in the main processing when the power is turned on.

Further, the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the CPU 102 is configured to receive a power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 91b when power is shut off due to power failure or the like. When the power is cut off, the NMI interrupt processing as the power failure flag generation processing is immediately executed.

As shown in FIG. 27, the display control device 81 is equipped with a microcomputer centered around a CPU 181 as arithmetic processing means. The CPU 181 has a ROM 182 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the CPU 181, and a work area for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 182. A RAM 183 and the like for securing are incorporated.

The display control device 81 is provided with input/output ports (not shown), the main control device 101 is connected to the input side, and the upper lamp 63, the speaker 64, and the auxiliary display section 65 are connected to the output side. there is Based on various commands input from the main controller 101, the upper lamp 63, the speaker 64, and the auxiliary display section 65 are driven and controlled. In other words, the display control device 81 is a sub-board that executes auxiliary control in relation to the main control device 101 that is the main board that supervises and manages the game. In other words, the load on the main board is reduced by providing a sub-board for indirect game-related sounds, lamps, and displays.

On the input side of the display control device 81, the first effect switch 66 (more specifically, the first effect switch detection sensor that detects the operation of the first effect switch 66) and the second effect switch 67 (more specifically, the second A second production switch detection sensor for detecting the operation of the production switch 67 is connected. The various display units 60 to 62 and 68 may also be driven and controlled by the display control device 81 .

Next, each control process executed by the CPU 102 of the main controller 101 will be described. The processing of the CPU 102 can be broadly classified into main processing that is started when the power is turned on, timer interrupt processing that is started periodically (with a cycle of 1.49 msec in this embodiment), and a power failure signal to the NMI terminal. There is an NMI interrupt process that is started with the input of . Of these processes, the processes related to the progress of the game, that is, the timer interrupt process and the normal process performed in the main process will be described below with reference to FIGS. 28 to 55. FIG.

FIG. 28 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing periodically executed by the main controller 101. The CPU 102 of the main controller 101 generates a timer interrupt every 1.49 msec, for example.

First, in the register saving process shown in step S101, the values of all the registers in the CPU 102 used in the normal process, which will be described later, are saved in the backup area of the RAM 106. FIG. In step S102, it is confirmed whether or not the power failure flag is set. When the power failure flag is set, the process proceeds to step S103 to execute power failure processing.

Here, an outline of power failure processing will be described.

When the power supply is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, a power failure signal is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 91b of the power supply device 91, and the power failure signal is input to the main controller 101 via the NMI terminal. When a power failure signal is input, main controller 101 immediately executes NMI interrupt processing and sets a power failure flag in a power failure flag storage area provided in RAM 106 .

In the power failure processing, first, it is determined whether or not the command transmission has been completed. If the transmission has not been completed, this processing is terminated, the timer interrupt processing is resumed, and the command transmission is terminated. When the command transmission is completed, the value of the stack pointer of the CPU 102 is saved in the backup area of the RAM 106 . After that, the output state of the output port in the input/output port 104 is cleared, and all actuators (not shown) are turned off. Then, when the power failure is resolved, a RAM judgment value for judging whether or not the data in the RAM 106 is normal is calculated and stored in the backup area, thereby inhibiting subsequent RAM access. After the above processing is performed, an infinite loop is entered in preparation for the case where the power is completely cut off and the processing cannot be executed. Considering the case where the power failure flag is erroneously set due to, for example, noise, it is confirmed whether or not the power failure signal is being output until entering an infinite loop. If the power failure signal is not output, it means that the power failure state has been restored. Therefore, the power failure flag is reset while permitting writing to the RAM 106, and the timer interrupt processing is resumed. If the power failure signal continues to be output, an infinite loop is entered as it is. Incidentally, whether or not the power failure signal is output is checked even under the infinite loop, and when the power failure signal is no longer output, the process proceeds to the main process.

Returning to the description of the timer interrupt process, when the power failure flag is not set in step S102, various processes after step S104 are performed.

That is, in step S104, clearing processing of the watchdog timer for initializing the value of the watchdog timer for monitoring the occurrence of malfunction is performed. In step S105, the CPU 102 performs an interrupt end declaration process to enable the next timer interrupt to be set. In step S106, in order to rotate the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, stepping motor control processing is performed to drive the stepping motors, which are the driving motors for the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. In step S107, the states of various sensors (see FIG. 26) such as the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a, inserted medal detection sensor 45a, payout detection sensor 51a, etc. connected to the input/output port 104 are read, and whether the read result is normal or not. Sensor monitoring processing is performed to monitor whether or not. In step S108, timer calculation processing is performed to subtract the value of each counter or timer. In step S109, counter processing is performed to output to the external centralized terminal board 121 the results of counting the number of bets of medals and the number of payouts.

In step S110, command output processing for transmitting various commands such as a lottery result command, which will be described later, to the display control device 81 is performed. In step S111, segment data setting processing for setting segment data to be displayed in the credit display section 60, the remaining payout number display section 61, and the payout number display section 62 is performed. In step S112, a segment data display process is performed to supply the segment data set by the segment data setting process to each of the display units 60 to 62 and display corresponding numerals, symbols, and the like. In step S113, port output processing for outputting data corresponding to the I/O device from the input/output port 104 is performed. In step S114, the values of each register saved in the backup area in step S101 are returned to the corresponding registers in the CPU 102, respectively. After that, in step S115, interrupt permission processing for permitting the next timer interrupt is performed, and this series of timer interrupt processing is terminated.

Next, normal processing for performing main controls related to games will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 29 .

First, in step S201, interrupt permission processing for permitting the next timer interrupt is performed. In step S202, pre-start processing for enabling a game is performed. In the pre-start process, the process waits until the display control device 81 or the like finishes initialization. When the initialization of the display control device 81 and the like is completed, game management processing shown in steps S203 to S213 is performed.

As game management processing, in step S203, data such as various game information stored in the RAM 106 (for example, random numbers used in the previous game) are cleared. After that, in step S204, start waiting processing is performed.

In the start waiting process, it is determined whether or not any replay winning has been established in the previous game. If any of the replay wins have been established, automatic injection processing for automatically inserting the same number of virtual medals as the number of previous bets is performed, and the start waiting processing is terminated. Specifically, when a replay win is established in a 3-bet game, a process of automatically inserting three virtual medals is performed, and when a replay win is established in a 1-bet game, one virtual medal is inserted. Perform processing for automatically inserting medals. By the way, in the present embodiment, the replay win is not established in the 2-bet game, but if the transformation is such that the replay win is established even in the 2-bet game, two coins are used in the automatic insertion process. should be set so that the virtual medals can be automatically inserted.

Note that in the automatic insertion process, virtual medals are inserted without reducing the number of virtual medals displayed on the credit display section 60 . In other words, if any of the replay wins are established in the previous game, the player can play the current game without reducing the number of medals owned and without inserting medals. If none of the replay winnings has been established, sensor abnormality confirmation processing is performed to confirm whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the sensor reading result performed in the sensor monitoring processing step S107 of the timer interrupt processing, When an abnormality occurs, the slot machine 10 is placed in an error state and an abnormality occurrence process is performed to notify the occurrence of the error. This error state is maintained until the reset switch 72 is operated. Medal return processing for determining whether or not the settlement switch 59 has been operated when the reading result of the sensor is normal, and paying out the same number of medals as the credited virtual medals when the settlement switch 59 has been operated. I do.

After the medal return process is completed or if the settlement switch 59 is not operated, whether or not the medal insertion or credit insertion switches 56 to 58 have been operated between the previous start waiting process and the current start waiting process. If either one is performed, a medal insertion process for changing the number of bets, etc. is performed, and the start waiting process is terminated. Also, if neither medal insertion nor operation of the credit insertion switches 56 to 58 has been performed between the previous start waiting process and the current start waiting process, the start waiting process is terminated as it is.

After completion of the start waiting process, it is determined in step S205 whether or not the number of bets on medals has reached a specified number. In this slot machine 10, "2" is set as the specified number in the CB state, and game states other than the CB state (specifically, normal game state, first RT state, second RT state, third RT state, BB state), "1" and "3" are set as the prescribed numbers. That is, in the CB state, an affirmative determination is made in step S205 on the condition that the bet number is "2", and in other than the CB state, the bet number is "1" or "3". , an affirmative determination is made in step S205. In other words, in a game state other than the CB state, if no medals have been betted, or if the number of bets is "2" even if medals have been betted, a negative determination is made in step S205. If the number of bets has not reached the specified number, the process returns to the start waiting process of step S204, and the processes after the sensor abnormality confirmation process among the processes are performed.

When the number of bets has reached the prescribed number, a mode transition notification process is executed in step S206. Such shift notification processing will be described later in detail.

After the processing of step S206 is performed, a bet command including information on the processing result of step S206 and information on the number of bets determined to be affirmative in step S205 is sent to the display control device 81 as a sub-side control device. set as the output target of The command set here is output to the display control device 81 at step S110 in the timer interrupt process. The processing of the display control device 81 that receives the bet command will be described later in detail.

After executing the processing of step S207, it is determined whether or not the start lever 41 has been operated in step S208. If the start lever 41 has not been operated, the process returns to the start waiting process of step S204, and the processes after the sensor abnormality confirmation process are performed.

On the other hand, when the start lever 41 is operated, the game is started when the start lever 41 is operated under the condition that the prescribed number of medals are betted. It means that a command has occurred. In such a case, in step S209, a valid line setting process for setting a combination line corresponding to the number of bets as a valid line is performed. That is, in the 3-bet game, only the downward-sloping line L4 is set as the active line, and in the 2-bet game, the downward-sloping line L3 and the downward-sloping line L4 are set as the active lines. Also, in the 1-bet game, the bent line L6 is set as the valid line. In step S210, the medal passage switching solenoid 46a is switched to a non-excited state to prohibit acceptance of bets. Thereafter, lottery processing in step S211, reel control processing in step S212, medal payout processing in step S213, RT state processing in step S214, and bonus state processing in step S215 are sequentially executed, and the process returns to step S203.

Next, lottery processing in step S211 will be described based on the flowchart of FIG.

In step S301, a random number to be used when judging whether a winning combination is right or wrong is acquired. In this slot machine 10, when the start lever 41 is operated, the hardware circuit latches the value of the free-run counter at that time. The free-run counter generates a random number from 0 to 65535, and after confirming the operation of the start lever 41, the CPU 102 stores the value latched by the hardware circuit in the RAM 106. FIG. By adopting such a configuration, it becomes possible to quickly obtain a random number at the timing when the start lever 41 is operated, and it is possible to avoid problems such as synchronization. The hardware circuit of the slot machine 10 is configured to latch the value of the free-run counter each time the start lever 41 is operated.

After obtaining the random number, in step S302, a lottery table for judging whether the winning combination is correct or not is selected. In this slot machine 10, as game states in the normal game mode, there are roughly six types of game states: normal game state, first RT state, second RT state, third RT state, BB state, and CB state. Also, as the game state in the specific mode, there are three types of game states: normal game state in the specific mode, BB state in the specific mode, and CB state in the specific mode.

In this slot machine 10, the above six or three types of game states are shifted based on the lottery results of the lottery process and the stop results of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. And the specific mode in this embodiment is a mode that imitates the gameplay of the normal game mode. Therefore, first, the playability of the normal game mode will be explained, and then the specific mode will be explained in detail.

That is, in step S302, the current game state of the slot machine 10 is determined based on the bet number and the setting flag set in the state information storage area 106c, and a lottery table corresponding to the bet number and the game state is selected. . For example, when the number of bets is "3" and the setting flag is not set in the state information storage area 106c, it is determined that the current game state is the normal game state of the normal game mode, and the normal game state is determined. Select a lottery table for In addition, in the slot machine 10, six levels of winning probabilities from "setting 1" to "setting 6" are prepared in advance, and a setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole and turned on, and a predetermined operation is performed. By doing so, it is possible to set on which winning probability the internal processing is to be executed. In step S302, when the setting state is "setting 1", the lottery table with the lowest expected value of medal payout is selected, and when the setting state is "setting 6", the lottery table with the highest expected value of medal payout is selected.

The lottery table will be briefly explained. FIG. 31 is a normal game state lottery table selected in the normal game state of "Setting 3" in the normal game mode. Index values IV are set in the lottery table, and each index value IV is uniquely associated with a winning combination and a point value PV is set.

After selecting the lottery table, the index value IV is set to 1 in step S303, and the determination value DV used when determining whether the winning combination is right or wrong is set in the subsequent step S304. In this determination value setting process, a new determination value DV is set by adding the current index value IV and the corresponding point value PV to the current determination value DV. In the initial determination value setting process, the random value obtained in step S301 is used as the current determination value DV, and the current index value IV of 1 and the corresponding point value PV are added to this random value to create a new value. Let it be the judgment value DV.

After that, in step S305, it is determined whether the winning combination corresponding to the index value IV is correct. Whether or not the judgment value DV exceeds 65535 is judged in the winning judgment. If it exceeds 65535, the process proceeds to step S306, and the winning flag corresponding to the index value IV at that time is set in the winning flag storage area 106a of the RAM106. For example, when the determination value DV exceeds 65535 when IV=20, in step S306, a winning flag indicating that the 1st to 5th minor wins and the 14th to 17th minor wins have been won is set. It is set in the winning flag storage area 106a.

Incidentally, the set winning flag indicates that the 1BB has been won (hereinafter referred to as "1BB winning flag") or the winning flag indicating that the 2BB has been won (hereinafter referred to as "2BB winning flag"). ), the winning flag set in the winning flag storage area 106a is reset after the game in which the corresponding selection flag is set ends (see S203 of normal processing). On the other hand, if the winning flag is the 1st BB winning flag or the 2nd BB winning flag, these winning flags are reset under one of the conditions that the corresponding winning has been established. That is, the first BB winning flag and the second BB winning flag may be valid over a plurality of games. In step S306 in a state in which the 1BB winning flag or the 2BB winning flag is carried over, if a combination other than the 1BB, 2BB and CB is won, the corresponding winning flag is set and the 1BB, 2BB and CB winning flags are set. If a winning combination other than CB is not won, the corresponding winning flag is not set.

If the determination value DV does not exceed 65535 in step S305, it means that the role corresponding to the index value IV is lost. In such a case, the index value IV is incremented by 1 in step S307, and in the following step S308, it is determined whether or not there is a hand corresponding to the index value IV, that is, whether or not there is a determination target to be determined. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the index value IV to which 1 has been added exceeds the maximum value of the index value IV set in the lottery table. If there is an object to be judged, the process returns to step S304 to continue judging the winning combination. At this time, in step S304, the point value PV corresponding to the current index value IV is added to the judgment value DV used for the judgment of the previous winning combination (that is, the current judgment value DV) to obtain a new judgment value DV, In step S305, it is determined whether the winning combination is correct based on the determination value DV. Incidentally, when judging whether a winning combination is correct or not using the lottery table shown in FIG. The probability of winning the lottery (the probability of winning when IV = 13) is about 1/263, and the probability of winning the low cherry (the probability of winning when IV = 14) is about 1/183. be. The probability of winning a watermelon (probability of winning when IV=15) is about 1/154, and the probability of winning Chance A (probability of winning when IV=16) is about 1/252. , the probability of winning the chance B (the probability of winning when IV=17) is about 1/252. The probability of winning the middle bell (probability of winning when IV = 18) is about 1/32,800, and the probability of winning the no-question bell (probability of winning when IV = 19) is about 65,500. 1. The odds of winning forward-push bell 1, forward-push bell 2, pinch-push bell 1, pinch-push bell 2 (probability of winning when IV=20-23) are about 1/164, middle-push bell 1, The probability of winning middle-pressed bell 2, right-pressed bell 1, and right-pressed bell 2 (probability of winning when IV=24 to 27) is about 1/16.4, respectively. The probability of winning the high cherry stack 1 (probability of winning when IV = 31) is about 1/1770, and the probability of winning the high cherry stack 2 (probability of winning when IV = 32) is Approximately 1 in 4680, the probability of winning the weak cherry overlap 1 (probability of winning when IV = 33) is about 1 in 3280, the probability of winning the weak cherry overlap 2 (when IV = 34) The probability of winning is about 1 in 6550. The probability of winning watermelon overlap 1 (probability of winning when IV = 35) is about 1/3280, the probability of winning watermelon overlap 2 (probability of winning when IV = 36) is about 6550 1/1. The probability of winning chance A overlap 1, chance A overlap 2, chance B overlap 1, and chance B overlap 2 (probability of winning when IV=37 to 40) is about 1/3280. The probability of winning middle bell overlap 1 and middle bell overlap 2 (probability of winning when IV=41, 42) is about 1/2620, respectively. The probability of winning the first BB and the second BB alone (probability of winning when IV=43, 44) is about 1/65500, respectively. The probability of winning CB (probability of winning when IV=45) is about 1/19.9. Also, the probability of not winning any role is about 1/1.94.

In addition, 0 is set for the point value PV of IV=2 to 12, 28 to 30, and 46 to 49 in the lottery table for the normal game state in the normal game mode. Therefore, in the normal game state in the normal game mode, winning is not possible with these index values IV.

After the winning flag is set in step S306, or when it is determined in step S308 that there is no determination target to be determined, it means that the determination of the winning combination has been completed. In such a case, the process proceeds to step S309, and a freeze lottery process is performed to determine whether or not to execute a freeze effect that disables the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 for a predetermined period.

In subsequent step S310, lottery result correspondence processing is performed. In the lottery result handling process, a process for determining whether or not to shift the game state according to the lottery result in steps S301 to S309, a process for notifying the winning combination, and the like are performed. The lottery result handling process will be described later in detail.

After executing the process of step S310, a lottery result command is set in step S311. Here, the lottery result command is a command that is transmitted to the display control device 81 so as to grasp the result of the win/loss determination of the winning combination. However, in normal processing, various commands such as the lottery result command are only set in the ring buffer, and the commands are not transmitted to the display control device 81 . Command transmission to the display control device 81 is performed in the command output process (step S110) of the timer interrupt process described above.

Then, in step S312, stop information setting processing for setting stop information for reel stop control is performed, and the lottery processing ends. In the stop information setting process, when a plurality of roles among the small win, replay, and bonus roles are won, the stop information is set in the following order of priority. The stop information is set so that the minor winning combination is preferentially established when the small winning combination and the bonus are won, and the bonus winning is established when the minor winning combination cannot be established. When winning the replay and the bonus, the stop information is set so that the replay win is preferentially established.

Next, the reel control processing in step S212 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the reel control process, first, in step S401, a rotation effect process is performed. The rotation effect process is a process for performing an effect using reel control during the invalid period based on the result of the freeze lottery process performed in step S309. In step S402, rotation start processing for starting rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is performed.

In the rotation start process, it is checked whether or not a predetermined wait time (for example, 4.1 seconds) has elapsed since the reel started rotating in the previous game. If not, the wait time has elapsed. wait until When the wait time has passed, the wait time for the next game is set again, and motor control initialization processing for setting rotation start information in the motor control storage area provided in the RAM 106 is performed. By performing such processing, the acceleration processing of the stepping motor is started in the stepping motor control processing (step S106) of the timer interrupt processing, and the reels 32L, 32M, 32R start rotating. Therefore, even if the player bets the prescribed number of medals and operates the start lever 41, the reels 32L, 32M and 32R may not immediately start rotating. Thereafter, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R wait until they rotate at a predetermined rotational speed at a constant speed, and the rotation start processing ends. In addition, when the rotation speed of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R becomes constant, the CPU 102 can generate a stop command by turning on lamps (not shown) of each of the stop switches 42 to 44. is notified to players and the like.

Following the rotation start process, in step S403, it is determined whether or not any one of the stop switches 42 to 44 has been operated. If none of the stop switches 42-44 is operated, the process waits until one of the stop switches 42-44 is operated. If it is determined that any one of the stop switches 42 to 44 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S404, and it is determined whether or not the stop switch corresponding to the rotating reel has been operated, that is, whether or not a stop command has been generated. do. If no stop command has been generated, the process returns to step S403 and waits until any one of the stop switches 42 to 44 is operated. When a stop command is generated, a stop command is set in step S405. Here, the stop instruction command is a command sent to the display control device 81 in order to grasp which stop switch has been operated to generate the stop instruction. When the stop instruction command is set, stop control processing shown in steps S406 to S412 is performed to stop the rotating reel.

In step S406, the symbol number of the arrival symbol that has reached the base position (lower stage in this embodiment) at the timing when the stop switch is operated is confirmed. Specifically, the pattern number of the arrival pattern that has reached the base position is confirmed based on the number of excitation pulses output from the time when the detection signal of the reel index sensor is input. In the subsequent step S407, the number of reel slips to be stopped this time is calculated based on the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b. In the slot machine 10, as the stop modes for stopping the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated, the arrival symbol that has reached the base position is stopped as it is. A stop mode in which the reel is stopped after sliding by one symbol, a stop mode in which the reel is stopped after sliding by two symbols, a stop mode in which the reel is stopped after sliding by three symbols, and a reel is stopped after sliding by four symbols. 5 patterns of stop modes are prepared. Therefore, in step S407, any value from 0 to 4 is calculated as the sliding number based on the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b. After that, in step S408, the calculated number of slips is added to the symbol number of the reached symbol to determine the symbol number of the stop symbol to actually stop at the base position. In step S409, it is determined whether or not the symbol number of the arrival symbol of the reel to be stopped this time is equal to the symbol number of the stop symbol. conduct. After that, in step S411, it is determined whether or not all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R have stopped. If all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are not stopped, stop information second setting processing is performed in step S412, and the process returns to step S403.

Here, the second stop information setting process is a process of changing the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b of the RAM 106 after the reels are stopped. In the second stop information setting process, the stop information is changed based on the winning flag that is set and the stop number of the stopped reel. In this slot machine 10, for example, when winning is achieved when IV=20 to 27, that is, forward push bell 1, forward push bell 2, sandwich push bell 1, sandwich push bell 2, middle push bell 1, middle push bell 2, right When winning the push bell 1 and right push bell 2 (hereinafter collectively referred to as "push order bell") (see FIG. 31), the stop switches 42 to 44 that generate the stop command are selected. A stop information second setting process is performed in order to change the winning mode established by the order of operations.

FIG. 33 is an explanatory diagram showing the correspondence between the winning combination, the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, and the winning mode established. For example, when the middle push bell 1 is won, the stop information is set so that the second minor winning prize or the fifth minor winning prize is established when the left stop switch 42 is operated first, and the middle stop switch 43 The stop information is set so that the 1st minor winning combination is established when is operated first, and the 2nd minor winning combination or the 5th minor winning combination is established when the right stop switch 44 is operated first. Set stop information. However, even when the stop information is set in this manner, there are cases where corresponding winnings are not established depending on the operation timing of the stop switches 42-44.

The pattern arrangement of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R will be briefly described. In the slot machine 10, in a game state (3-bet game) other than the CB state in the normal game mode, after the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are slid by a maximum of 4 symbols from the timing when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated, can be stopped, and only the lower right line L4 is set as a valid line. For this reason, when the same kind of symbols are arranged on each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R with an interval of 4 symbols or less, the winning symbol becomes effective regardless of the operation timing of the stop switch 43 when the winning symbol is obtained. You can stop on the line. On the other hand, as for the symbols arranged so as to form a section separated by five symbols or more, the player needs to aim at the symbols and operate the stop switches 42 to 44 when stopping on the effective line.

An example will be described in which the middle push bell 1 is won and the left stop switch 42→middle stop switch 43→right stop switch 44 is operated in this order. In such a case, each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is controlled to stop in order to establish the second minor winning combination or the fifth minor winning combination.

The second minor combination symbols on the left reel 32L are the "red bell" symbol and the "white bell" symbol. Further, the "red bell" symbol and the "white bell" symbol also have a function as a fifth minor winning symbol. On the left reel 32L, the second minor combination symbols (fifth minor combination symbols) are arranged so that the interval is 4 symbols or less. Therefore, when the left stop switch 42 is operated first, the "red bell" pattern or the "white bell" pattern stops on the upper stage regardless of the operation timing. For example, when the left stop switch 42 is operated at the timing when the number 8 "watermelon" symbol of the left reel 32L reaches the lower stage, number 12 "white bell" is displayed as shown in FIG. 34(a). The pattern stops at the upper row. As a result, there remains room for establishing the second minor winning combination or the fifth minor winning combination on the right downward line L4.

The second minor combination symbol of the middle reel 32M is a "red 7" symbol. The "red 7" symbol is arranged only at the 18th position on the middle reel 32M. Also, the fifth minor combination symbol of the middle reel 32M is a "cherry" symbol. "Cherry" symbols are arranged at the 11th and 14th positions on the middle reel 32M. Therefore, depending on the operation timing of the middle stop switch 43, the second minor winning symbol or the fifth minor winning symbol may stop on the active line, or both the second minor winning symbol and the fifth minor winning symbol may stop on the active line. or not stop.

Specifically, when the middle stop switch 43 is operated at the timing when any one of the 6th "white bell" symbol to the 13th "first replay" symbol reaches the lower stage, the 5th small combination symbol A barrel "cherry" symbol stops in the middle row. As a result, there remains room for the establishment of the fifth minor winning combination on the right downward line L4. When the middle stop switch 43 is operated at the timing when any one of the 14th "cherry" symbol to the 17th "first replay" symbol has reached the lower stage, as shown in FIG. The "red 7" symbol, which is the 2nd minor combination symbol, stops in the middle stage. As a result, there remains room for the establishment of the second minor winning combination on the right downward line L4. When the middle stop switch 43 is operated at another timing, even if the middle reel 32M is stopped after being slid by four symbols, the second minor winning symbol and the fifth minor winning symbol can be stopped in the middle row. Can not. When the middle stop switch 43 is operated at such timing, the second "BAR" symbol or the sixth "white bell" symbol stops in the middle stage.

When the second minor combination symbol on the middle reel 32M stops in the middle row, the second stop information setting process changes the stop information so that the second minor combination winning can be established.

The second minor combination symbol on the right reel 32R is a "Red 7" symbol. On the right reel 32R, the "Red 7" symbol is arranged only at the 18th position. Therefore, depending on the operation timing of the right stop switch 44, the second minor combination symbol may or may not stop on the activated line. Specifically, when the right stop switch 44 is operated at the timing when any one of the 14th "watermelon" symbol to the 18th "red 7" symbol has reached the lower stage, as shown in FIG. 34(c). As shown, the second minor combination symbol "Red 7" is stopped at the lower stage. As a result, the second minor winning combination is established on the lower right line L4. When the right stop switch 44 is operated at another timing, the "watermelon" pattern stops at the lower stage. For example, if the right stop switch 44 is operated at the timing when the 13th "cherry" symbol has reached the lower stage, the 14th "watermelon" symbol will move to the lower stage as shown in FIG. 34(d). Stop. The combination of the "white bell" symbol, the "red 7" symbol and the "watermelon" symbol from the left is a transition roll as shown in FIG.

When the fifth minor combination symbol on the middle reel 32M stops in the middle row, the second stop information setting process changes the stop information so that the fifth minor winning combination can be established.

The fifth minor combination symbol on the right reel 32R is the "second replay" symbol. "Second replay" symbols are arranged at positions 0 and 3 on the right reel 32R. Therefore, depending on the operation timing of the right stop switch 44, the fifth minor combination symbol may or may not stop on the activated line. Specifically, when the right stop switch 44 is operated at the timing when any one of the 17th "BAR" symbol to the 3rd "second replay" symbol reaches the lower stage, the fifth minor winning symbol is obtained. The "second replay" symbol stops at the bottom. As a result, the fifth minor winning combination is established on the right downward line L4. When the right stop switch 44 is operated at another timing, the "watermelon" pattern stops at the lower stage. The combination of "white bell" symbol, "cherry" symbol and "watermelon" symbol from the left is a transition roll as shown in FIG.

If the second minor winning symbol and the fifth minor winning symbol of the middle reel 32M do not stop in the middle row, that is, if the "BAR" symbol or the "white bell" symbol of the middle reel 32M stops in the middle row, stop information second In the setting process, the stop information is changed so that the "watermelon" symbol stops at the bottom.

The "watermelon" symbols are arranged on the right reel 32R such that the interval between the "watermelon" symbols is 4 symbols or less. Therefore, when the right stop switch 44 is operated, the "watermelon" pattern stops at the lower stage regardless of the operation timing. The combination of "white bell" design, "BAR" design, and "watermelon" design from the left and the combination of "white bell" design, "white bell" design, and "watermelon" design from the left are as shown in FIG. It is a transition to .

In this way, when the middle push bell 1 is won and the left stop switch 42→middle stop switch 43→right stop switch 44 is operated in this order, the 2nd minor winning combination and the 5th minor winning combination are established. Either the winning is established or the transition roll is stopped.

Next, a case where the middle push bell 1 is won and the middle stop switch 43→left stop switch 42→right stop switch 44 is operated in this order will be described as an example. In such a case, the reels 32L, 32M and 32R are controlled to stop in order to establish the first minor winning combination.

On the middle reel 32M, the "red bell" symbols, which are the first minor combination symbols, are arranged so that the interval between the "red bell" symbols is 4 symbols or less. Therefore, when the middle stop switch 43 is operated first, the "red bell" pattern stops in the middle stage regardless of the operation timing.

On the left reel 32L, "red bell" symbols and "white bell" symbols, which are the first minor combination symbols, are arranged so that the interval between the first minor combination symbols is 4 symbols or less. Therefore, when the left stop switch 42 is operated second, the "red bell" pattern or the "white bell" pattern stops on the upper stage regardless of the operation timing.

On the right reel 32R, "red bell" symbols, which are the first minor combination symbols, are arranged so that the interval between the "red bell" symbols is 4 symbols or less. Therefore, when the right stop switch 44 is operated for the third time, the "red bell" pattern stops at the lower stage regardless of the operation timing.

As described above, when the middle push bell 1 is won and the middle stop switch 43→left stop switch 42→right stop switch 44 is operated in this order, the first minor win is established regardless of the operation timing.

In the case of winning the pressing order bell, if the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in one or two predetermined operating sequences, the first minor winning combination is established regardless of the operation timing. If the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in another order of operation, depending on the timing of the operation, a small winning combination will be established or the transitional number will stop on the effective line. By the way, if the middle bell is won, the 29th minor win is established regardless of the operation order and timing, and if the non-question bell is won, regardless of the operation order and timing. 1 small role winning is established.

Returning to the description of the reel control process, when it is determined in step S411 that all the reels 32L, 32M and 32R are stopped, payout determination process is performed in step S413. The payout determination process is a process of setting the number of medals to be paid out, with one of the conditions being that the combinations of winning symbols are arranged on the activated line. In the payout determination process, a combination of symbols formed on the active line is derived from the symbol numbers of the stopped symbols stopped on the lower stages of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, and whether or not winning is established on the active line is determined. judge. If a winning has been established, it is further determined whether or not the winning combination corresponds to the winning flag set in the winning flag storage area 106a. When the winning combination corresponds to the winning flag, the winning combination and the number of payouts corresponding to the winning combination are set in a payout information storage area provided in the RAM 106.例文帳に追加On the other hand, when the winning combination does not correspond to the winning flag, the slot machine 10 is placed in an error state and an abnormality occurrence process is performed to report the occurrence of an error. This error state is maintained until the reset switch 72 is operated.

After performing the payout determination process, a winning result corresponding process is performed in step S414. In the winning result handling process, processing for shifting the game state based on the winning result, etc. are performed. The winning result handling process will be described later in detail.

After the winning result handling process is performed, in step S415, a winning result command is set so that the display control device 81 can recognize the winning combination in the current game, and the reel control process ends.

Next, the outline of the medal payout process in step S213 will be described.

In the medal payout process, it is determined whether or not the number of payouts set in the payout information storage area is zero. If the number of payouts is 0, it means that it has been determined in the previous payout determination process that a minor win has not been established. In such a case, it is determined whether or not any one of the first re-game winning to the eighth re-game winning has been established based on the winning combination set in the payout determination process. When none of the re-game wins have been established, the medal payout processing is terminated as it is, and when any of the re-game wins have been established, re-game setting processing is performed to change the game state to the re-game state. , to end the medal payout process. In the above-described start waiting process (step S204), the automatic input process is performed when it is determined that the current game state is the replay state.

On the other hand, if the number of payouts set in the payout information storage area is not 0, the same number of medals as the number of payouts is paid out, and the medal payout process is terminated. Specifically, when the count value of the credit counter does not reach the upper limit (the number of accumulated medals is 50), the number of payouts is added to the count value of the credit counter, and the value after the addition is added. It is displayed on the credit display section 60 . Further, when the count value of the credit counter reaches the upper limit, or when the count value reaches the upper limit while adding the number of payouts, the medal payout rotary plate is driven to eject the medals from the hopper device 51. It is paid out to the medal receiving tray 50 through the exit 49. - 特許庁In addition, in the medal payout process, a process of changing the number of payouts displayed on the payout number display section 62 in accordance with the payout of medals is also performed. Further, when the current gaming state is the BB state, the processing of subtracting the number of payouts from the value of the counter for the number of remaining payouts, which will be described later, and the remaining number of payouts displayed on the remaining number of payouts display section 61 is performed. .

Next, the RT state processing of step S214 will be described based on the flowchart of FIG.

In step S501, it is determined whether or not the transition roll has stopped on the activated line. When the transition roll has stopped, the process proceeds to step S502, and it is determined whether or not the current game state is the normal game state. When the current game state is the normal game state, the first RT setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c of the RAM 106 in step S503. After that, this process is terminated. If it is determined in step S501 that the transitional number has not stopped on the activated line, the process proceeds to step S504, and the second replay winning combination is determined based on the winning combination set in the previous payout determination process. Determine whether or not it is established. When the second replay win is established, the RT setting flag set in the state information storage area 106c is cleared in step S505, and the first RT setting flag is set in step S503. After that, this process is terminated. In addition, when the transition roll is stopped on the activated line under a game state other than the normal game state, the RT setting flag set in the state information storage area 106c is cleared in step S505, and the process proceeds to step S503. , the first RT setting flag is set, and this processing ends.

When the first RT setting flag is set in step S503, the game state shifts to the first RT state. Then, in step S302 of the lottery process, it is determined that the current gaming state is the first RT state based on the fact that the first RT setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c, and the lottery table for the first RT state is selected. do.

FIG. 36 is a lottery table for the first RT state selected in the "setting 3" first RT state. When compared with the lottery table for the normal game state (see FIG. 31), the lottery table for the first RT state has different point values PV for IV=1 to 5, and the same point value PV for the other index values IV. is set. Therefore, when judging whether or not a role is appropriate using such a lottery table, the probability of winning at IV=6 to 49 is equal to each winning probability in the normal game state, and winning at IV=1. The probability of winning is about 1/67.0, and the probability of winning when IV=2 to 5 is about 1/32.8. The odds of not winning any hand are about 1 in 1.94.

Here, as shown in FIG. 36, if the winner is IV=1, the normal replay win is won, and if the winner is IV=2, the first promotion replay 1 wins, and the IV If it is won at IV = 3, it will be won in the 1st promotion replay 2, if it is won at IV = 4, it will be won in the 1st promotion replay 3, and it will be won at IV = 5 If so, the first promotion replay 4 will be won. The probability of winning at any of IV=1-5 is about 1 in 7.30. The probability of winning the normal replay under the normal game state is also about 1/7.30. That is, when the game state shifts to the 1st RT state, each type of small win, replay, and bonus is won with the same probability as in the normal game state, and a prize-winning mode in which the benefit of replay is given. changes to something different from the normal game state. More specifically, in the normal game state, only the first re-game winning that does not transition to the game state is established, and in the first RT state, in addition to the first re-game winning, the third re-game winning that shifts to the second RT state is established. To establish.

In the second stop information setting process (step S412), a stop command is generated when winning the first promotion replay 1 to the first promotion replay 4 in addition to winning the pressing order bell described above. Stop information is set so as to change the winning mode established by the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 that are turned on.

FIG. 37(a) is an explanatory diagram showing the correspondence between the winning combination, the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, and the winning mode established. When winning the first promotion replay 1 to 4 The third replay win is always established. In the first promotion replay 1 to the first promotion replay 4, the third replay is associated with one operation order among the six operation orders, and the first replay corresponds to the other operation orders. attached.

In addition, in the first promotion replays 2 to 4, in addition to the first replay and the third replay, the sixth replay, the seventh replay, and the eighth replay are also distributed as winning combinations. However, these 6th to 8th replays are not associated with any of the above 6 types of operation orders. Therefore, in the sixth to eighth replays, even if the first promoted replays 2 to 4 are won, no prizes are won regardless of the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44.例文帳に追加

More specifically, in the first promotion replays 1 to 4, the first promotion replay 1 is divided into the first replay and the third replay, and the first promotion replay 2 is divided into the first replay and the third replay. In addition to the 3rd replay, the 6th replay is distributed, in the first promotion replay 3, the 7th replay is distributed in addition to the 1st replay and the 3rd replay, and in the first promotion replay 4 Although the 8th replay is distributed in addition to the 1st replay and the 3rd replay, in any of the 1st promotion replays 1 to 4, the winning replays are the 1st replay and the 3rd replay. It is one of the games. This is to make it difficult to understand the order of operations in which the third replay win is established. That is, for example, if there is one type of first promotion replay, there is also one type of operation order corresponding to the third replay winning, and when the first promotion replay is won, the third replay winning is intentionally established. This is because it may be possible to This relationship is not limited to the first promotion replays 1 to 4, and the same applies to other overlapping roles.

Returning to the description of the RT state process, if it is determined in step S504 that the second regame winning has not been established, the process proceeds to step S506, based on the winning combination set in the previous payout determination process, It is determined whether or not the third replay win has been established. When the third replay win is established, the RT setting flag set in the state information storage area 106c is cleared in step S507, the second RT setting flag is set in step S508, and the process ends. do.

When the second RT setting flag is set in step S508, the game state shifts to the second RT state. Then, in step S302 of the lottery process, it is determined that the current gaming state is the second RT state based on the fact that the second RT setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c, and the lottery table for the second RT state is selected. do.

FIG. 38 is a lottery table for the second RT state selected in the second RT state of "setting 3". When compared with the lottery table for the first RT state (see FIG. 36), the lottery table for the second RT state has different point values PV for IV=1 to 10, and has the same point value PV for the other index values IV. is set. Therefore, when judging whether or not a role is appropriate using such a lottery table, the probability of winning at IV=11 to 49 is equal to each winning probability in the first RT state, and winning at IV=1. The probability of winning is about 1/13.2, the probability of not winning when IV = 2 to 5, and the probability of winning when IV = 6 to 8 is about 1/10.5, and IV = 9 , 10, the probability of winning is approximately 1 in 7.00. The odds of not winning any hand are about 1 in 150. That is, in the case of shifting to the second RT state, the probability of losing is lower than in the normal game state and the first RT state, which is advantageous to the player. In addition, in the second RT state, in addition to the first re-game winning that does not change the game state, the second re-game winning that shifts to the first RT state, the fourth re-game winning that shifts to the third RT state, and the fifth re-game winning Winning a prize is established.

In the stop information second setting process (step S412), in addition to the case where the above-described first promotion replay 1 to first promotion replay 4 are won, fall replay 1 to fall replay 3, second promotion replay 1, and second promotion replay 1 Even when the 2 promotion replay 2 is won, the stop information is set so as to change the winning mode established by the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 that generate the stop command.

FIG. 37(b) is an explanatory diagram showing the correspondence between winning combinations, the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, and the winning modes established. When fall replay 1 to fall replay 3 are won, regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44, the first replay win or the second replay win is established without fail. When the second promotion replay 1 is won, regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44, any one of the first regame winning, the fourth replay winning, and the fifth replay winning is established without fail. . When the second promotion replay 2 is won, regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42-44, the first re-game winning or the fourth re-game winning is established without fail.

Incidentally, the number attached to the fourth replay in the figure corresponds to the symbol combination when the fourth replay win is established. "1" corresponds to the symbol combination of loose eyes, "2" corresponds to the symbol combination of 7 different colors, middle stop, and "3" is the symbol of red 7, red 7, BAR middle stop. "4" corresponds to a symbol combination of white 7, white 7, and BAR middle stop (see FIG. 12). For example, when the left stop switch 42 is operated first when the second promotion replay 1 is won, the symbol combination that becomes a loose eye is stopped and the fourth replay win is established, or the unique color 7 The symbol combination that results in the middle stage stop of the symbols is stopped, and the fourth re-game winning is established.

Returning to the description of the RT state process, if it is determined in step S506 that the third replay winning has not been established, the process proceeds to step S509, based on the winning combination set in the previous payout determination process, It is determined whether or not the fourth re-game winning prize or the fifth re-game winning prize has been established. If the fourth re-game winning and the fifth re-game winning have not been established, the processing is terminated as it is. When the fourth re-game winning prize or the fifth re-game winning prize is established, the RT setting flag set in the state information storage area 106c is cleared in step S510, and the third RT setting flag is set in step S511. and terminate this process.

When the third RT setting flag is set in step S511, the game state shifts to the third RT state. Then, in step S302 of the lottery process, it is determined that the current game state is the 3RT state based on the fact that the 3RT setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c, and the lottery table for the 3RT state is selected. do.

FIG. 39 is a lottery table for the 3rd RT state selected in the 3rd RT state of "setting 3". When compared with the lottery table for the 2nd RT state (see FIG. 38), the lottery table for the 3rd RT state has different point values PV for IV=9 to 12, and the same point values PV for the other index values IV. is set. Therefore, when judging whether a role is appropriate using such a lottery table, the probability of winning at IV = 1 to 8, 13 to 49 is equal to each winning probability in the second RT state, IV = 9, 10 , and the probability of winning at IV=11 and 12 is about 1/7.00. The odds of not winning any hand are about 1 in 150. In other words, when the game state shifts to the 3rd RT state, each role type of small combination, replay, and bonus is won with the same probability as in the 2nd RT state, and a prize-winning mode in which the privilege of replay is given. changes to something different from the second RT state. More specifically, in the 3rd RT state, in addition to the 1st re-game winning that does not shift the game state, the 2nd re-game winning that shifts to the 1st RT state, the 6th re-game winning that does not shift the game state, the 6th re-game winning that does not shift the game state The 7 re-game winning, the 8th re-game winning, and the 3 re-game winning to shift to the 2nd RT state are established.

In the second stop information setting process (step S412), even when BAR replay 1 and BAR replay 2 are won, the winning mode established by the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 that generated the stop command is changed. Set stop information as much as possible.

FIG. 37(c) is an explanatory diagram showing the correspondence between winning combinations, the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, and the winning modes established. When the BAR replay 1 is won, regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44, any of the first replay winning prize, the sixth replay winning prize, the seventh replay winning prize, or the third replay winning prize. is always established. When the BAR replay 2 is won, regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44, any one of the first replay winning prize, the sixth replay winning prize, the eighth replay winning prize, and the third replay winning prize. is always established.

Next, the bonus state processing in step S215 will be described with reference to the flow chart of FIG.

First, in step S601, it is determined whether or not the current game state is the bonus state, that is, whether or not the current game state is the BB state or the CB state. If it is not in the bonus state, bonus determination processing shown in steps S602 to S614 is performed.

In the bonus determination process, it is determined in step S602 whether or not any of the first BB winning flag, second BB winning flag, CB winning flag, special first BB flag, and special second BB flag is set. The special 1st BB flag and the special 2nd BB flag are flags corresponding to the special 1st BB and the special 2nd BB that can be won in the specific mode. The special 1st BB and the special 2nd BB are bonus combinations corresponding to the 1st BB and the 2nd BB in the normal game mode. If any winning flag is set, the process proceeds to step S603, and it is determined whether or not CB winning has been established based on the winning combination set in the previous payout determination process. When CB winning is established, a CB setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c in step S604. In step S605, 15 is set in a remaining payout number counter for counting the number of remaining medals that can be paid out during the bonus state provided in the state information storage area 106c. By performing the processing of steps S604 and S605, the game state shifts to the CB state.

Here, CB and CB state will be briefly described.

When the "red bell" symbol or "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "red bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "watermelon" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the active line, CB Win a prize. The CB symbols are arranged on each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R such that the interval between the CB symbols is 4 symbols or less. Therefore, when the CB is won, the CB prize is established regardless of the operation order and operation timing of the stop switches 42-44.

The main controller 101 determines that the gaming state is the CB state when the CB setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c. Then, in step S205 of normal processing, it is determined whether or not the number of medals bet has reached "2" instead of "3". is set as a valid line.

At step S302 of the lottery process, a CB state lottery table is selected. Although illustration of the lottery table for the CB state is omitted, in the lottery table for the CB state, "0" is set as the point value PV for IV=1 to 45, and "16384" is set for the point value for IV=46 to 49. is set (see FIG. 31, etc. for the correspondence between IV and winning combination). Therefore, in the CB state, the probability of winning CB small and medium hand 1 (probability of winning when IV = 46) is about 1/4.00, and the probability of winning CB small and medium hand 2 (IV = 47 The probability of winning when IV = 48) is about 1/4.00, and the probability of winning CB small and medium role 3 (probability of winning when IV = 48) is about 1/4.00, CB The probability of winning the small and medium combination 4 (the probability of winning when IV=49) is about 1/4.00. No outlier events occur.

FIG. 41(a) is an explanatory diagram showing the correspondence between winning combinations, the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, and the winning modes established. Although detailed explanation is omitted, even if any of the CB small and medium winning combination 1 to CB small and medium winning combination 4 is won, regardless of the operation order and operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44, some kind of small winning combination will be won. It will definitely come true. Since the CB state is a 2-bet game, when the 1st minor winning combination, the 18th minor winning combination, the 19th minor winning combination, and the 25th minor winning combination are established, 15 medals are paid out. When the 2nd minor winning combination to the 17th minor winning combination and the 20th minor winning combination to the 24th minor winning combination are established, 14 medals are paid out. In other words, 14 or 15 medals are always paid out when the state is shifted to the CB state.

Incidentally, in this embodiment, the CB is elected only in the normal game mode, and is not elected in the specific mode.

Returning to the description of the bonus state processing, if it is determined in step S603 that the CB winning has not been established, it means that the bonus winning flag other than the CB has been set. In such a case, the RT setting flag set in the state information storage area 106c is cleared at step S608, and at step S609, 1st BB winning, 2nd BB winning, special 1BB winning or special 2BB winning is established. Determine whether or not

When any BB prize is established, the BB winning flag set in the winning flag storage area 106a of the RAM 106 is cleared in step S610, and BB is set in the status information storage area 106c in step S611. flag is set. In step S612, it is determined whether or not the current BB win is a special first BB win or a special second BB win in the specific mode. If a negative determination is made in step S612 and the current BB winning is the 1st BB or 2nd BB winning in the normal game mode, 216 is set in the remaining payout number counter and the remaining payout number is set in step S613. Processing for displaying 216 on the display unit 61 is performed. On the other hand, when an affirmative determination is made in step S612, 24 is set in the remaining payout number counter and 24 is displayed on the remaining payout number display section 61 in step S614. The numerical value set in steps S613 and S614 is a numerical value corresponding to the maximum number of payouts in the BB state, and the BB state is terminated on condition that medals equal to or greater than the numerical value are paid out in the BB state. In other words, the 1st BB and 2nd BB in the normal game mode are set with the upper limit payout number of 216, and the special 1BB and special 1BB in the specific mode are set with the upper limit payout number of 24, and the bonus upper limit payout is set in each mode. the numbers are different.

By performing the processing of steps S610 to S614, the game state shifts to the BB state. Then, in step S302 of the lottery process, it is determined that the current game state is the BB state based on the fact that the BB setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c, and the corresponding BB state lottery table is selected. .

FIG. 42 is a lottery table for BB state selected in the BB state that shifts to the 1st BB or the 2nd BB in the normal game mode. In the BB state lottery table, "0" is set as the point value PV for IV=1-27 and 31-49, and "21845" is set as the point value for IV=28-30. Therefore, in the BB state, the probability of winning the BB medium and small hand 1 (the probability of winning when IV = 28) is about 1/3.00, and the probability of winning the BB medium red 7 hand (IV = 29) is about 1/3.00, and the probability of winning the BB in BAR matching role (probability of winning when IV = 30) is about 1/3.00 becomes. The odds of not winning any hand are about 1 in 65500.

FIG. 41(b) is an explanatory diagram showing the correspondence between winning combinations, the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, and the winning modes established. As described above, the first minor winning combination is a winning mode that can be established regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42-44. Therefore, regardless of the operation order and operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44, regardless of the operation order and operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44, the first small Any one of the winning combination, the 30th minor winning combination, and the 31st minor winning combination is established without fail. Since the BB state is a 3-bet game, nine medals are paid out when the 1st minor winning combination, the 30th minor winning combination, and the 31st minor winning combination are established. Since the probability of being out in the BB state is about 1/65500, it can be said that the BB state is a game state in which 9 medals are paid out with a very high probability.

When the gaming state has shifted to the CB state or the BB state, an affirmative determination is made in step S601, and end determination processing is performed in step S615. In the end determination process, it is determined whether or not the value of the counter for the number of remaining payouts has become 0, and when it has become 0, the process of clearing the CB setting flag or the BB setting flag is performed. Also, in the end determination process, when the BB setting flag is cleared, the end flag indicating that the BB state has ended in the current game is set. Note that the end determination processing will be described later in detail.

As shown in steps S602 to S614, when the CB is won and the CB prize is established, the CB setting flag is set without clearing the RT setting flag. Therefore, when the CB setting flag is cleared, that is, when the CB state ends, the game state is returned to the game state when the CB winning was established. For example, when the CB winning is established under the normal game state, the normal gaming state is restored after the CB state is ended, and when the CB winning is established under the 3RT state, the 3RT state is established after the CB state is ended. return to On the other hand, if the 1st BB, 2nd BB, special 1st BB, or special 2nd BB is won, the RT setting flag is cleared in step S608 regardless of whether or not the corresponding BB prize is established. Therefore, when the BB setting flag is cleared, that is, when the BB state ends, even if the first BB prize is established under the second RT state, the normal game state is entered. By the way, when shifting to the CB state, the player can expect an increase of 13 (=15-2) or 25 (=14-2+15-2) medals until the end of the CB state. When transitioning to the BB state, the player can expect an increase of approximately 144 (=9×24−3×24) medals in the normal game mode until the BB state ends.

If none of the first BB winning flag, second BB winning flag, CB winning flag, special first BB winning flag, and special second BB winning flag are set (NO in step S602), first BB winning and second BB winning , CB win, special 1BB win, and special 1BB win are not established (when step S609 is NO), and a predetermined value is set to the remaining payout number counter in step S605, step S613 or step S614. If it is done or if the end determination process is performed in step S615, the process advances to step S606 to set the state command. Here, the state command is a command sent to the display control device 81 to grasp the game state at the end of the game (that is, the game state of the next game). Set the status command corresponding to the set flag set in 106c. After setting the state command, in step S607, an external signal setting process for setting an external signal to be output from the external centralized terminal board 121 to the outside of the slot machine 10 is performed. After that, this process is terminated.

<Outline of game state transition and display mode>
Here, the transition of the game state in the normal game mode will be explained using FIG. Illustration of the CB state is omitted.

When the game state is the BB state, the BB state ends when the number of medals paid out under the BB state reaches 216, and the game state shifts to the normal game state.

When the game state is the normal game state, the game state shifts to the first RT state by stopping the shift roll on the effective line, and the game state shifts to the BB state when the BB prize is established. The transition roll is stopped on the effective line when a game in which the pushing order bell is won is lost. In the lottery process using the lottery table for the normal game state, the first promotion replays 1 to 4 that trigger the transition to the second RT state and the second promotion replays 1 and 2 that trigger the transition to the third RT state are not won. Therefore, the normal game state does not shift to the second RT state and the third RT state (see FIG. 31).

When the game state is the first RT state, the game state shifts to the second RT state when the third regame winning is established. The third replay win is established when one of the first promoted replays 1 to 4 is won and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a predetermined order (see FIG. 37(a)). . In the lottery process using the lottery table for the 1st RT state, the second promotion replays 1 and 2 that trigger the shift to the 3rd RT state are not won, so the state does not shift from the 1st RT state to the 3rd RT state.

Further, when the corresponding BB prize is not established in the game in which each BB winning flag is set, that is, when the BB winning flag is carried over, the game state shifts to the normal game state, and each 1BB winning flag is set. When the corresponding BB prize is established in the set game, the game state shifts to the BB state. The first RT state does not transition to the third RT state.

When the gaming state is the second RT state, the gaming state shifts to the third RT state when the fourth re-game winning prize or the fifth re-game winning prize is established. In addition, when the second re-game win is established and when the transition roll is stopped on the activated line, the game state shifts to the first RT state. The fourth replay winning prize and the fifth replay winning prize are established when the second promotion replay 1 or the second promotion replay 2 is won and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a predetermined operation order (Fig. 37 (b) )reference). The second replay winning prize is established when one of fall replays 1 to 3 is won and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a predetermined order (see FIG. 37(b)). The transition roll is stopped on the effective line when a game in which the pushing order bell is won is lost. In addition, when the corresponding BB prize is not established in the game in which each BB winning flag is set, that is, when the BB winning flag is carried over, the game state shifts to the normal game state, and each BB winning flag is set. When the corresponding BB prize is established in the game in which is set, the game state shifts to the BB state.

When the game state is the 3rd RT state, the game state shifts to the 2nd RT state when the third re-game winning is established. In addition, when the second re-game win is established and when the transition roll is stopped on the activated line, the game state shifts to the first RT state. The third replay win is established when BAR Replay 1 or BAR Replay 2 is won and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a predetermined order (see FIG. 37(c)). The second replay winning prize is established when one of fall replays 1 to 3 is won and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a predetermined order (see FIG. 37(b)). The transition roll is stopped on the effective line when a game in which the pushing order bell is won is lost. In addition, when the corresponding BB prize is not established in the game in which each winning flag is set, that is, when the BB winning flag is carried over, the game state shifts to the normal game state, and each BB winning flag is set. When the corresponding BB prize is established in the set game, the game state shifts to the BB state.

Incidentally, when each BB winning flag is carried over, a carryover lottery table (not shown) is used as the lottery table in the lottery process (FIG. 30). In the carryover lottery table, the PV values of IV1 to 22 are the same as the PV values of IV1 to 22 in the lottery table for normal game state (FIG. 31), and the PV values after IV23 are set to 0. ing. In other words, on the lottery table for carrying over, the bonus and the overlapping minor combination with the bonus are not won.

In the slot machine 10, in the normal game mode, the main controller 101 manages six types of game states, namely, the normal game state, the first RT state, the second RT state, the third RT state, the BB state, and the CB state. The main controller 101 manages five types of display modes: normal mode, challenge mode, attack mode, VB mode (including special zone for addition), and BB mode.

FIG. 44 is a diagram showing transition of each display mode.

The BB mode is a display mode that shifts when the first BB prize or the second BB prize is established, and ends when the BB state ends. That is, the BB mode is a display mode corresponding to the BB state. Therefore, when shifting to the BB mode, the player can expect an increase of about 144 medals.

When the normal mode or the challenge mode is shifted to the BB mode, a lottery for transition to the challenge mode and a lottery for transition to the attack mode are performed in the BB mode. When the lottery for shifting to the attack mode is won, the mode is shifted to the attack mode after the BB mode is ended, and when the lottery for the shift to the challenge mode is won, the mode is shifted to the challenge mode after the BB mode is ended. When neither transition lottery is won, the game shifts to the normal mode after the BB mode ends. When the attack mode is shifted to the BB mode, the attack mode is restored after the BB mode ends. When the VB mode is shifted to the BB mode, the VB mode is restored after the BB mode is terminated.

Normal mode is when the push order bell is won, 1st promotion replay 1 to 1st promotion replay 4, fall replay 1 to fall replay 3, 2nd promotion replay 1, 2nd promotion replay 2, BAR replay 1, BAR replay 2 (hereinafter collectively referred to as "pressing order replay"). This is a display mode in which the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is not notified at the time of winning. In the normal mode, a lottery for transition to the challenge mode and a lottery for transition to the attack mode are performed. When the lottery for shifting to the challenge mode is won, the normal mode is shifted to the challenge mode, and when the lottery for shifting to the attack mode is won, the normal mode is shifted to the attack mode. The normal mode does not shift to the VB mode.

The normal mode corresponds to each game state of normal game state, 1st RT state, 2nd RT state, 3rd RT state and CB state. However, in the normal mode, the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is not notified when the push order bell wins and when the push order replay wins, so it is rare to shift to the second RT state and the third RT state. It almost corresponds to the first RT state. In the normal mode, if the game state at that time is the normal game state or the first RT state, it can be expected that the number of medals will decrease by about 1.59 each time one game is played, and the game state at that time is the second RT state or the second RT state. In the third RT state, it can be expected that the number of medals will decrease by about 0.06 each time one game is played.

The challenge mode is a display mode in which the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 is not notified when the push order bell wins and when the push order replay wins, as in the normal mode. In challenge mode, a lottery for transition to attack mode is held. However, the probability of winning the lottery for transition to the attack mode in the challenge mode is set higher than the probability of winning the lottery for transition to the attack mode in the normal mode. In other words, the challenge mode is set as a mode in which the operation order is not notified as in the normal mode, but the transition to the attack mode is facilitated. Transition to attack mode When the lottery is won, the challenge mode is transitioned to the attack mode. When the game is played a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) without winning the transition lottery, the challenge mode is shifted to the normal mode. Challenge mode does not switch to VB mode.

The challenge mode corresponds to each game state of the normal game state, the first RT state, the second RT state, the third RT state, and the CB state. However, in the challenge mode, since the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is not notified when the push order replay wins, it is rare that the state shifts to the second RT state or the third RT state, and it almost corresponds to the first RT state. . In the challenge mode, if the game state at that time is the normal game state or the first RT state, it can be expected that the medals will decrease by about 1.59 each time one game is played, and the game state at that time is the second RT state or the second RT state. In the third RT state, it can be expected that the number of medals will decrease by about 0.06 each time one game is played.

The attack mode is a display mode in which the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 is notified both when the pressing order bell wins and when the pressing order replay wins. The attack mode consists of 4 attack modes, 1st attack mode to 4th attack mode, which have different transition probabilities to VB mode. are more likely to migrate. When the lottery for shifting to the VB mode is won, the attack mode is shifted to the VB mode. Shift to VB mode When the game is played a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times) without winning the lottery, the attack mode shifts to the normal mode.

The first attack mode to the fourth attack mode are set so that the probabilities of winning the lottery for transition to the VB mode are different. More specifically, the probability of winning the lottery for transition to the VB mode is set to be the highest in the fourth attack mode and the lowest in the first attack mode. , 3rd attack mode, and 4th attack mode are set so that the probability of winning the lottery for transition to the VB mode increases in this order.

The attack mode corresponds to each game state of normal game state, first RT state, second RT state, third RT state, and CB state. However, in the attack mode, since the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 is notified both when the pressing order bell wins and when the pressing order replay wins, the player operates the stop switches 42 in the notified order of operation. When ∼44 is operated, it almost corresponds to the second RT state. In the attack mode, if the game state at that time is the normal game state or the first RT state, it can be expected that the number of medals will increase by about 0.61 each time one game is played, and the game state at that time is the second RT state or the second RT state. In the third RT state, it can be expected that the number of medals increases by about 1.90 each time one game is played. Since the attack mode continues for at least 50 games after the game state shifts to the second RT state, the player can expect an increase of about 100 medals when shifting to the attack mode.

The VB mode, like the attack mode, is a display mode in which the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is notified both when the pressing order bell wins and when the pressing order replay wins. The difference between the VB mode and the attack mode is that when the second promotion replay 1 or the second promotion replay 2 is won, in the attack mode, the operation order for establishing the first replay winning prize is notified. , in the VB mode, the order of operations for establishing the fourth re-game winning or the fifth re-game winning is announced (see FIG. 37(b)).

The VB mode corresponds to each game state of the normal game state, the first RT state, the second RT state, the third RT state, and the CB state. However, in the VB mode, the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 is notified both when the pressing order bell is won and when the pressing order replay is won, and the second promotion replay 1 or the second promotion replay 2 is won. If so, the order of operations for establishing the fourth re-game winning or the fifth re-game winning is notified. Therefore, when the player operates the stop switches 42 to 44 in the notified operation order, the VB mode substantially corresponds to the third RT state. In the VB mode, if the game state at that time is the normal game state or the first RT state, it can be expected that the number of medals will increase by about 0.61 every time one game is played, and the game state at that time is the second RT state or the first RT state. In the third RT state, it can be expected that the number of medals increases by about 1.90 each time one game is played. Since the VB mode continues at least 25 games after the game state shifts to the third RT state, the player can expect an increase of about 50 medals when shifting to the VB mode.

Regarding the transition of the display mode when the number of medals possessed by the player increases, the general flow is to shift from the normal mode to the challenge mode, shift from the challenge mode to the attack mode, and return from the attack mode to the normal mode. . In the attack mode, a lottery for transition to the VB mode is performed. Therefore, when a loop occurs in which the attack mode shifts to the VB mode and returns from the VB mode to the attack mode, the player expects to increase the number of owned medals. can.

As described above, when the normal mode and the challenge mode are compared, the probability of winning the lottery for transition to the attack mode is higher in the challenge mode than in the normal mode. Therefore, the challenge mode is also referred to as a so-called chance zone in which a transition to the attack mode is expected.

In addition, the first attack mode to the fourth attack mode are set in the attack mode, and the winning probability of the transition lottery to the VB mode differs in each attack mode. And when it transfers to attack mode from normal mode or challenge mode, it transfers to 1st attack mode fundamentally. In the first attack mode, a lottery for transition to the VB mode and a lottery for transition to the second attack mode are held. If the lottery for transition to the second attack mode is won, the mode is shifted to the second attack mode, and the winning probability of the lottery for transition to the VB mode is increased. In the second attack mode, a lottery for transition to the VB mode and a lottery for transition to the third attack mode are held. When the lottery for transition to the third attack mode is won, the mode is shifted to the third attack mode, and the winning probability of the lottery for transition to the VB mode is increased. Then, in the third attack mode, a lottery for transition to the VB mode and a lottery for transition to the fourth attack mode are performed. When the lottery for shifting to the fourth attack mode is won, the mode shifts to the fourth attack mode, and the winning probability of the lottery for shifting to the VB mode increases.

Therefore, when transitioning to the attack mode, the attack mode is promoted from the first attack mode to the second attack mode to the third attack mode to the fourth attack mode, thereby increasing the probability of transition to the VB mode. A loop between the mode and the VB mode is likely to occur.

As described above, in the slot machine 10, in the normal game mode, the player attempts to increase the number of owned medals in each display mode of the attack mode, VB mode, and BB mode. In conjunction with each display mode, a plurality of states such as a plurality of RT states, a BB state, and a CB state are alternated by winning a prize in each replay or by stopping a transitional result. As described above, depending on the operating order of the stop switches 42 to 43 when the push order replay is won or when the push order bell is won, the corresponding re-game winning is established or the transition roll is stopped. In addition, in the attack mode and VB mode, when the bell is won in the order of pressing, the operation order that enables the establishment of the first minor winning combination is announced, and an increase in owned medals can be expected.

The configuration related to the display mode will be described below.

The configuration related to the display mode can be roughly divided into (1) processing related to the display mode transition lottery, (2) processing for shifting the game state based on the result of the display mode transition lottery, and (3) processing based on the winning result. and (4) processing related to notification effects on the sub side. The steps will be described in order below.

<Processing related to display mode transition lottery>
<Lottery result handling process>
(1) Display mode shift lottery processing is performed in the lottery result correspondence processing (step S310) of the lottery processing (FIG. 30) by the main controller 101. FIG. Therefore, the lottery result handling process will be described below with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 45 .

In step S701, the results of the lottery this time are strong cherries, weak cherries, watermelons, chances A and B, middle bells, strong cherry overlaps 1 and 2, weak cherry overlaps 1 and 2, watermelon overlaps 1 and 2, chance A overlaps 1. , 2, chance B duplication 1, 2, middle bell duplication 1, 2 (for example, see FIG. 31, IV=13-18, 31-42, hereinafter, these hands are collectively referred to as "specific hand") determine whether or not If the result of the lottery is a specific combination, the processing for switching the display mode based on the specific combination in steps S702 to S708 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined at step S701 that the special combination is not won, then at steps S709 to S712, processing for transitioning to the display mode and the like are performed.

Specifically, when it is determined in step S701 that the special combination is won, in step S702, it is determined whether the current game state is the normal game state or the first RT state. If an affirmative determination is made in step S702, it is determined in step S703 whether or not an attack mode winning flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106. FIG. The attack mode winning flag is a flag that is set when winning the attack mode transition lottery and is cleared when shifting to the attack mode. When a negative determination is made in step S703, the first special combination process is executed in step S704.

<1st Special Win Process>
The first special combination processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

Here, the case where the first special combination process is performed means the normal game state or the first RT state and the attack mode is not won. The display mode in this case corresponds to the normal mode or the challenge mode. In the first special winning process, a transition lottery is performed to determine whether the display mode should be shifted to the challenge mode, and a transition lottery to determine whether the display mode should be shifted to the attack mode. Further, in the first special combination process, if the current display mode is the challenge mode, the process for adding the number of continuous games in the challenge mode is performed.

That is, in step S801, it is determined whether or not the current display mode is the challenge mode. When the challenge mode is not in progress means that the current display mode is the normal mode. If a negative determination is made in step S801, a normal table is obtained as a table for attack mode lottery from various table storage area 105a of ROM 105 in step S802. On the other hand, if the determination in step S801 is affirmative, in step S803, a chance mode table is acquired from various table storage area 105a of ROM 105 as a table for attack mode lottery. In the normal time table and the chance mode table, the probability of transition to the attack mode is set according to the type of special hand. For example, between strong cherries and weak cherries, the probability of transition to the attack mode is set higher for strong cherries than for weak cherries. In addition, the probability of transition to attack mode is different between the normal table and the chance mode table as a whole, and the chance mode table has a higher probability of transition to attack mode than the normal table. is set to

After acquiring the attack mode transition lottery table in step S802 or step S803, attack mode lottery processing is executed in step S804. In this process, the lottery counters are obtained from the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106 and compared with the lottery table obtained in step S802 or step S803 to perform a lottery for transition to the attack mode.

In step S805, based on the processing result of step S804, it is determined whether or not the lottery for switching to the attack mode has been won. If the lottery for switching to the attack mode is won, in step S806, processing for setting an attack mode winning flag is performed.

In the following step S807, it is determined whether or not the bonus winning flag is set. If a negative determination is made in step S807, lottery processing for the number of precursor games is performed in step S808. Here, in the present embodiment, as the display mode transition lottery, when the lottery for transition to the challenge mode, attack mode, or VB mode is won, the fact that the lottery for transition to the transition lottery has been won is notified after passing through the portent mode. done. Therefore, the game in which you win the transfer lottery may differ from the game in which you are notified that you have won the transfer lottery. , is set as precursor mode.

0 game to 32 games are set as the number of precursor games, and in step S808, 1 of these 1 to 32 games is randomly determined by lottery. It should be noted that the number of premonitory games to be selected may be set differently according to the specific combination that triggered the winning of the attack mode or the game state. This is the same for lottery processing for the number of other precursor games.

In step S809, based on the processing result of step S808, a process of inputting the number of precursor games to the precursor counters provided in the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106 is performed. The omen counter is a counter that is decremented by 1 for each game, and when the omen counter reaches 0, the omen mode ends and it is notified that the transfer lottery has been won.

In step S810, a process of setting the portent command as an output target to the display control device 81, which is a sub-side control device, is executed. The portent command includes the lottery result that triggered the portent mode (the display mode to be shifted after the portent mode, the attack mode in the case of step S810) and information on the number of portent games. Processing on the display control device 81 side based on reception of the portent command will be described later in detail. After executing the process of step S810, the first special combination process is terminated.

Further, when the bonus winning flag is set in step S807, the first special combination processing is terminated as it is without setting the number of precursory games or the like. If the bonus winning flag is set, it means that you won a specific role in the carryover state of the 1st BB or 2nd BB and won the attack mode transition lottery, or if you win a double role with a bonus (strong cherry overlap 1, 2, etc.) and wins the attack mode transition lottery. In this case, priority is given to the BB mode instead of the attack mode as the transition destination of the display mode.

If it is determined in step S805 that the attack mode transition lottery has not been won, the process proceeds to step S811. In step S811, a challenge mode lottery process is executed. In the challenge mode lottery process, a table for challenge mode lottery is acquired from various table storage area 105 a of ROM 105 , and counters for lottery are acquired from various counter areas 106 e of RAM 106 . In the table for the challenge mode lottery, the probability of shifting to the challenge mode is set according to the type of the special combination. For example, between strong cherries and weak cherries, the probability of transition to the challenge mode is set higher for strong cherries than for weak cherries.

The case where step S811 is executed includes the case where the display mode is the challenge mode. In this case also, the challenge mode lottery process is executed in step S811, and the table for the lottery is common to the normal mode and the challenge mode. with a table. As in steps S801 to S803, the lottery table may be changed depending on whether the challenge mode is on or not.

In step S812, based on the result of processing in step S811, it is determined whether or not the player has won the challenge mode. If it is determined that the challenge mode has been won, it is determined in step S813 whether or not the current display mode is the challenge mode. If the normal mode is selected instead of the challenge mode, a process of setting a challenge mode winning flag in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106 is executed in step S814.

In the subsequent step S815, it is determined whether or not the bonus winning flag is set, and if it is set, the first special combination processing is terminated. If not set, a lottery process for the number of precursor games is executed in step S816, a process for setting the number of precursor games to the precursor counter is executed in step S817, and a process for setting a precursor command is executed in step S818. After that, the first special combination processing is terminated. The processing of steps S815 to S818 corresponds to steps S807 to S810.

If it is determined in step S813 that the challenge mode has been won again during the challenge mode, then in steps S819 to S823, a process for adding the continuation game of the challenge mode is performed. That is, in step S819, it is determined whether or not the bonus winning flag is set. If the bonus winning flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S820, and lottery processing for the number of additional games in the challenge mode is executed.

Here, the addition means adding the number of continuous games in the challenge mode or the attack mode, and the additional number of games corresponds to the value to be added to the number of continuous games. At step S820, the value to be added to the number of continuous games in the challenge mode is determined by lottery.

Specifically, in the lottery process for the number of added games, a table for the lottery for the number of added games in the challenge mode is obtained from the table storage area 105a of the ROM 105, and a lottery counter is obtained from the counter area 106e of the RAM 106. The table for the lottery for the number of additional games in the challenge mode is set so that the number of additional games increases according to the type of the specific role. For example, in Strong Cherry, 30 games are added to the challenge mode with a probability of 80%, and 50 games are added with a probability of 20%. Also, in weak cherries, 5 games are added with a probability of 80%, and 20 games are added with a probability of 20%.

In step S821, processing for adding the number of games in the challenge mode is performed. In this process, a counter for managing the number of continuous games in the challenge mode (more specifically, a challenge mode continuous counter provided in the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106) is set to a value corresponding to the number of additional games selected in step S820. Perform addition processing. Then, in step S822, after performing the process of setting the additional command as an object to be output to the display control device 81, the first special combination process is terminated. The add-on command includes information that the add-on has occurred, the number of add-on games, and the target (challenge mode or attack mode) for the add-on. The processing on the side of the display control device 81 that receives the add command will be described in detail later, but in the display control device 81, based on the reception of the add command, the add command as notification of the information contained in these add commands is displayed. Notify.

If the bonus winning flag is set in step S819, the process proceeds to step S823. In step S823, the challenge mode addition flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106, and then the first special combination process is terminated. The challenge mode addition flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to grasp that the condition for adding the number of games in the challenge mode is satisfied. Although the details will be described later, if the bonus ends in a situation where the challenge mode addition flag is set, the challenge mode is added when the bonus ends.

Returning to the description of the lottery result handling process (FIG. 45), if a negative determination is made in step S702, or if an affirmative determination is made in step S703, the process proceeds to step S705. In step S705, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is the second RT state. If it is in the second RT state, it is determined in step S706 whether or not the VB mode win flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106. FIG. The VB mode winning flag is a flag that is set when winning the VB mode transition lottery and is cleared when shifting to the VB mode. If a negative determination is made in step S706, then in step S707 a second special combination process is executed. If a negative determination is made in step S705, or if an affirmative determination is made in step S706, the third special combination process is executed in step S708.

<Second Special Win Process>
The second special combination processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

Here, the case where the second special win process is performed means that the player is in the second RT state and the VB mode is not won. The attack mode corresponds to the display mode in this case. In the second special winning process, a transition lottery is performed to determine whether the display mode should be transitioned to the VB mode. In addition, in the second special combination process, a lottery for promotion of the rank of the attack mode is performed, and a process for adding the number of continuous games in the attack mode is performed.

That is, in step S901, processing for grasping the rank of the attack mode is performed. As already explained, in the present embodiment, four attack mode ranks of the first to fourth attack modes are provided, and each rank has a different probability of transition to the VB mode. Therefore, in step S901, it is determined which of the first attack mode to the fourth attack mode the rank of the current attack mode is.

At step S902, the VB mode lottery table corresponding to the attack mode rank grasped at step S901 is obtained from the table storage area 105a of the ROM 105. FIG. In the VB mode lottery table, the probability of transition to the VB mode is set according to the type of special combination. For example, between strong cherries and weak cherries, the probability of transition to the VB mode is set higher for strong cherries than for weak cherries. In the VB mode lottery table of each rank, the probability of transition to VB mode is different as a whole, and the probability of transition to VB mode is higher in the second attack mode than in the first attack mode. , so that the probability of transition to VB mode is higher in the third attack mode than in the second attack mode, so that the fourth attack mode is more likely to enter the VB mode than the third attack mode. is set so that the transition probability of

In step S903, the table acquired in step S902 and the lottery counters acquired from the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106 are used to perform a VB mode transition lottery. Then, in step S904, it is determined whether or not the result of the lottery in step S903 corresponds to VB mode winning.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S904, a process of setting a VB mode winning flag in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106 is performed in step S905. Thereafter, in steps S906 to S909, similarly to steps S807 to S810, processing for setting the number of precursor games is performed. That is, in step S906, it is determined whether or not the bonus winning flag is set, and if it is set, the second special combination processing is terminated. If not set, a lottery process for the number of precursor games is executed in step S907, a process for setting the number of precursor games to the precursor counter is executed in step S908, and a process for setting a precursor command is executed in step S909. After that, the second special combination processing is terminated.

If it is determined in step S904 that the result of the VB mode lottery process is not VB mode winning, the process proceeds to step S910. Steps S910 to S913 are processing for increasing the rank of the attack mode.

In step S910, attack mode promotion lottery processing is performed. In this process, a promotion lottery table is acquired from various table storage area 105 a of ROM 105 , and a lottery counter is acquired from various counter areas 106 e of RAM 106 . A plurality of tables for the promotion lottery are provided according to the rank of the attack mode. Specifically, a table for the first attack mode, a table for the second attack mode, a table for the third attack mode, and Three (the promotion lottery is not performed in the situation staying in the 4th attack mode) is provided. In each table, the probability of winning the promotion lottery is set according to the type of specific combination. For example, between strong cherries and weak cherries, the probability of winning the promotion lottery is set higher for strong cherries than for weak cherries. Further, in the table for each attack mode, the table for the second attack mode has a lower promotion probability than the table for the first attack mode. The table for attack mode is set so that the probability of promotion is lower, and as the rank of attack mode is promoted, it is set so that it becomes more difficult to be promoted to the next rank.

In step S911, it is determined whether or not the result of the lottery in step S910 was promotion winning. If the player wins promotion, the attack mode promotion process is performed in step S912. In this processing, the rank flag provided in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106 is rewritten to a rank flag one level higher than the rank flag corresponding to the current attack mode rank. Thereafter, in step S913, a process of setting the promotion command as an object to be output to the display control device 81 is performed. The elevate command contains information about the attack mode to elevate to. Upon receiving the promotion command, the display control device 81 controls the auxiliary display section 65 and the like so as to perform an effect for the attack mode of the rank of the promotion destination. As the effect for the attack mode in the auxiliary display section 65, for example, a different background color effect is set according to the rank of the attack mode. In addition to notifying that the rank has been promoted, control is performed so that an effect for the attack mode is performed with a background color corresponding to the rank of the destination of the promotion.

If it is determined in step S911 that the promotion lottery has not been won, or if the process of step S913 has been executed, then in steps S915 to S920 a process for adding the number of continuous games in the attack mode is performed.

That is, in step S914, lottery processing for adding the number of games in the attack mode is performed. In the additional lottery process, tables for attack mode additional lottery are acquired from various table storage area 105 a of ROM 105 , and counters for lottery are acquired from various counter areas 106 e of RAM 106 . The attack mode additional lottery table is set so that the probability of winning the additional lottery differs depending on the type of specific combination. For example, strong cherries win the additional lottery with a probability of 80%, and weak cherries win the additional lottery with a probability of 20%. Note that the winning probability may be varied according to the rank of the attack mode. Then, in step S915, it is determined whether or not the additional lottery has been won. When it is determined that the additional lottery is not won, the process of the second special combination is terminated as it is.

If it is determined that the additional lottery has been won, it is determined in step S916 whether or not the bonus winning flag is set. If the bonus winning flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S917, and lottery processing for the number of additional games in the attack mode is performed. In the lottery process for the number of added games, a table for lottery for the number of added games in attack mode is acquired from various table storage area 105a of ROM 105, and a lottery counter is acquired from various counter areas 106e of RAM 106. FIG. The attack mode additional game number lottery table is set so that the additional game number differs according to the type of the specific combination. For example, in the strong cherry, 20 games are added to the attack mode with a probability of 90%, and 80 games are added with a probability of 10%. Also, in weak cherries, 5 games are added with a probability of 95%, and 100 games are added with a probability of 5%.

In step S918, processing for adding the number of games in the attack mode is performed. In this process, a value corresponding to the number of additional games selected in step S917 is added to a counter that manages the number of continuous games in the attack mode (more specifically, attack mode continuous counters provided in the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106). Perform addition processing. Then, in step S919, after performing the process of setting the additional command as an object to be output to the display control device 81, the process of the second special combination ends.

If the bonus winning flag is set in step S916, the process proceeds to step S920. In step S920, the attack mode addition flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106, and then the second special combination process is terminated. The attack mode addition flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to recognize that the condition for adding the number of games in the attack mode is satisfied. Although the details will be described later, when the bonus ends in a situation where the attack mode addition flag is set, the attack mode is added at the end of the bonus.

<Third Special Win Process>
Next, the third special combination processing executed in step S708 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

The case where the third special winning process is performed means the state of the third RT or the state of the second RT and winning the VB mode. The display mode in this case corresponds to attack mode or VB mode. In the third special combination process, a process for adding the number of continuous games in the attack mode is performed.

That is, in step S1001, lottery processing for adding the number of games in the attack mode is performed. Such processing is the same as the processing in step S914. Note that the odds of winning the additional lottery may differ between the lottery process in step S914 and the lottery process in step S1001.

In step S1002, it is determined whether or not the result of the lottery in step S1001 was an additional winning result. If it is determined that the additional lottery has been won, it is determined in step S1003 whether or not the bonus winning flag is set. If the bonus winning flag is not set, the process advances to step S1004 to perform lottery processing for the number of additional games in the attack mode. Then, in step S1005, processing for adding the number of games in the attack mode is performed, and in step S1006, processing for setting an additional command as an object to be output to the display control device 81 is performed, and then the third special combination processing is terminated. The processing of steps S1003 to S1006 is the same as the processing of steps S916 to S919. The number of additional games may differ between the lottery process of step S916 and the lottery process of step S1004.

If a negative determination is made in step S1002, the third special combination processing is terminated. Also, if it is determined in step S1003 that the bonus winning flag is set, the attack mode addition flag is set in step S1007, and then the third special combination processing is terminated. The attack mode addition flag is as described above.

Returning to the description of the lottery result handling process (FIG. 45), when it is determined in step S701 that the result of the lottery process this time is not winning a special combination, the result of the lottery process this time is pushed out in step S709. It is determined whether or not the order replay or push order bell (hereinafter collectively referred to as "push order role") was won. In the case of winning the push-in, the push-in process is performed in step S710, and then the lottery result handling process is terminated. The pushing process will be described later in detail.

After executing any one of steps S704, S707, S708 and S710, or after making a negative determination in step S709, the process proceeds to step S711. In step S711, it is determined whether or not the special zone flag corresponding to the additional special zone is set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106. FIG. The specialized zone flag is a flag that is set based on the establishment of the seventh replay winning prize. Indicates a condition that occurs with probability. If the special zone flag is set in step S711, special zone processing is executed in step S712. Such specialized zone flags, specialized zones, and specialized zone processing will be described later in detail. When a negative determination is made in step S711, or after the process of step S712 is executed, this lottery result handling process is terminated.

As described above, in the lottery result handling process, when it is determined that a special combination has been won, a lottery for transition to challenge mode, attack mode or VB mode, or processing for adding the number of continuous games in challenge mode or attack mode etc. are performed. When the lottery for transition to the challenge mode, attack mode or VB mode is won, the fact that the lottery for transition is won is notified after the premonitory game is played. Therefore, the processing for shifting the game state based on the result of the display mode transition lottery will be described below.

<Processing for Transitioning Game State Based on Display Mode Transition Lottery Results>
(2) In the processing for shifting the game state based on the result of the display mode transition lottery, the processing for notifying that the display mode transition lottery has been won and the notification for shifting the game state are performed. A process for performing is performed. Therefore, first, a description will be given of the processing related to the notification that the transfer lottery has been won.

<Mode transition notification processing>
Notification of winning the transition lottery is performed in the mode transition notification process (step S206) in the normal process (FIG. 29). The mode change notification process is a process that is executed when a predetermined bet operation is performed (when it is determined that the number of bets in step S205 is the specified number). The mode change notification process will be described below with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S1101, it is determined whether or not the number of precursor games is zero. The number of precursory games is counted in the winning result handling process described later, and the number of precursory games is decremented by one each time one game is completed. If the number of precursor games is not 0, the mode transition notification process is terminated.

If the number of precursor games is 0, it is determined in step S1102 whether or not the challenge mode winning flag is set. That is, it is determined whether or not the current portent mode is a portent mode triggered by winning the challenge mode. If the challenge mode winning flag is set, the challenge mode winning flag is cleared in step S1103. Then, in step S1104, a challenge mode flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106. FIG. The challenge mode flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to recognize that the current display mode is the challenge mode. In step S<b>1105 , a challenge mode start command is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81 . The display control device 81 that has received the challenge mode start command uses the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like to notify that the challenge mode is started. Such notification will be described later in detail.

After that, in step S1106, the counting of the number of continuous challenge modes is started. Specifically, the initial value (for example, 10) of the number of continuous games in the challenge mode is set in the challenge mode continuation counter provided in the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106. FIG. After performing the process of step S1106, this mode transition notification process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S1102 that the challenge mode winning flag is not set, it is determined in step S1107 whether or not the attack mode winning flag is set. That is, it is determined whether or not the current portent mode is a portent mode triggered by winning the attack mode. If the attack mode winning flag is set, the attack mode winning flag is cleared in step S1108. Then, in step S1109, an attack notification flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106. FIG. The notification flag for attack is a flag for shifting the game state to the second RT state in accordance with winning the attack mode transition lottery. After that, in step S1110, an attack mode winning notification command is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81. FIG. The display control device 81 that has received the attack mode winning notification command uses the auxiliary display section 65 or the like to notify that the player has won the attack mode transition lottery. Such notification will be described later in detail. After executing the process of step S1110, this mode shift notification process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S1107 that the attack mode winning flag is not set, it is determined in step S1111 whether or not the VB mode winning flag is set. That is, it is determined whether or not the current portent mode is a portent mode triggered by winning the VB mode. If the attack mode winning flag is set, the VB mode winning flag is cleared in step S1112. Then, in step S1113, the VB notification flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106. FIG. The VB notification flag is a flag for shifting the game state to the 3rd RT state when the lottery for transition to the VB mode is won. After that, in step S1114, a VB mode winning notification command is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81. FIG. The display control device 81 that has received the VB mode winning notification command uses the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like to notify that the player has won the VB mode transition lottery. Such notification will be described later in detail. After executing the process of step S1114, this mode shift notification process is terminated. If it is determined in step S1111 that the VB mode winning flag has not been set, the mode transition notification processing is terminated.

That is, among the challenge mode, the attack mode, and the VB mode that transition through the precursor mode, the challenge mode is started based on the bet operation when the number of precursor games in the precursor mode becomes 0. On the other hand, in the attack mode and the VB mode, based on the bet operation when the number of precursor games in the precursor mode becomes 0, only notification of winning the attack mode transition lottery or the VB mode transition lottery is performed. Even if the number of games reaches 0, the attack mode and VB mode are not started. This is because the challenge mode as a display mode does not involve the transition of the game state, while the attack mode and the VB mode involve the transition of the game state. This is due to the difference that VB mode is initiated by transitioning to the third RT state.

As already explained, the 2nd RT state is entered when the first promoted replays 1 to 4 are won and the third replay win is established, and the 3rd RT state is entered into the second promoted replays 1 and 2. , and when the fourth and fifth replay wins are established. Then, when the first promotion replays 1 to 4 are won and the third replay win is established, or when the second promotion replays 1 and 2 are won and the fourth and fifth replay wins are established, This is the case where the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 at the time of winning the promotion replay corresponds to the third replay win or the like. Therefore, when a lottery for shifting to the attack mode or the VB mode is won, the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 is reported in the game in which the player wins the winning combination to shift the game state, It is configured to allow the game state to be shifted. It should be noted that from the notification of winning the attack mode or VB mode transition lottery to the start of the attack mode or VB mode (until the game state transitions), notification as a preparation state (for example, " In preparation") is performed.

<Description on transition of display mode>
The notification process for shifting the game state is performed in the pushing process (step S710) in the lottery result handling process (FIG. 45). Here, prior to the description of the pushing process, the outline of the case where the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 is notified will be described with reference to FIG.

<Outline of push order notification effect>
Notification of the order of operations at the time of the winning of the pushing order (push order notification effect) is mainly performed by the auxiliary display section 65 and the pushing order notification section 68 . Here, a case will be described as an example in which the player wins the pushing order role when the operation order notified this time is middle→right→left.

As shown in FIG. 50(a), in the auxiliary display section 65, of the three buttons displayed in parallel corresponding to the stop switches 42 to 44, the button display corresponding to the stop switch to be operated first (middle stop button in the figure) is displayed. The middle button display corresponding to the switch 43) is given the number 1 and displayed larger than the other button displays. Each button is displayed in a color corresponding to the winning combination (yellow for bell, blue for replay, etc.). As a result, the player can recognize the combination that has been won in the current game and that the stop switch to be operated first is the middle stop switch 43 . In the auxiliary display section 65, the right stop switch 44 is the next stop switch to be operated, and the left stop switch 42 is the last stop switch to be operated. 2 is added and displayed, and the left button display is displayed with the number 3 added.

In the pressing order notification unit 68, among the three LED lamps 68a, 68b, 68c arranged side by side corresponding to the stop switches 42 to 44, the middle LED lamp 68b is lit, and the left and right LED lamps 68a, 68c are lit. turns off. As a result, the player can recognize that the middle stop switch 43 is the first stop switch to be operated in the current game. The pressing order notification section 68 may also be configured to notify the winning combination together with the pressing order by, for example, changing the color of the LED lamps to be lit. Also, in order to make it possible to recognize the stop switch to be operated second and subsequent times, the lighting color of the LED lamp corresponding to the second and subsequent operations may be changed or blinked.

When the player operates the middle stop switch 43, as shown in FIG. 50(b), the middle button display corresponding to the middle stop switch 43 disappears on the auxiliary display section 65, and the right button corresponding to the right stop switch 44 is displayed. Button display is displayed large. Thereby, the player can confirm that the operation of the middle stop switch 43 is completed and that the stop switch to be operated next is the right stop switch 44 .

In the pressing order notification unit 68, the middle LED lamp 68b is turned off and the right LED lamp 68c is turned on (the left LED lamp 68a remains turned off). Thereby, the player can recognize that the operation of the middle stop switch 43 is completed and that the stop switch to be operated next is the right stop switch 44 .

When the player operates the right stop switch 44, as shown in FIG. 50(c), the right button display corresponding to the right stop switch 44 disappears in the auxiliary display section 65, and the left button corresponding to the left stop switch 42 disappears. Button display is displayed large. Thereby, the player can confirm that the operation of the right stop switch 44 is completed and that the next stop switch to be operated is the left stop switch 42 .

In the pressing order notification unit 68, the right LED lamp 68c is turned off and the left LED lamp 68a is turned on (the middle LED lamp 68b remains turned off). Thereby, the player can recognize that the operation of the right stop switch 44 is completed and that the next stop switch to be operated is the left stop switch 42 .

To explain the execution timing of the pressing order notification effect, the pressing order is displayed during the invalid period of the stop switches 42 to 44 from when the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start rotating to constant speed rotation through the acceleration period. It is set so that the notification effect is executed. In this way, by adopting a configuration in which the pressing order notification effect is executed at a timing before the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 becomes effective, the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is recognized and then the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated. 44 can be desired, and the game can be progressed at a good tempo.

<Pushing down process>
Next, referring to the flow chart of FIG. 51, the pushing process executed in step S710 in the lottery result handling process (FIG. 45) will be described.

In step S1201, it is determined whether or not the current lottery result is one of the first promotion replays 1-4. The affirmative determination in step S1201 means that the first replay or the third replay wins according to the operation sequence of the current game. In this case, the process advances to step S1202 to determine whether or not an attack notification flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM . As already explained, the attack notification flag is a flag that is set when the number of precursor games in the precursor mode becomes 0 after winning the lottery for transition to the attack mode in the mode transition notification processing (FIG. 49). be.

If the attack notification flag is set, it is determined in step S1203 whether or not the current display mode is the attack mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not an attack mode flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. The attack mode flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to specify that the display mode is the attack mode. In addition to the attack mode flag, a challenge mode flag, a VB mode flag, a specialized zone flag, and a BB mode flag are provided as flags for specifying the display mode. In the present embodiment, when the display mode is a mode (VB mode, additional specialized zone) corresponding to an RT state higher than the attack mode, the attack mode flag is the flag corresponding to that mode (VB mode flag, specialized zone flag). Therefore, in step S1203, the determination that the attack mode flag is set includes not only the attack mode, but also the VB mode and the specialized zone.

If it is determined in step S1203 that the attack mode is not in progress, then in step S1204, processing for notifying the pressing order of the third replay is executed. Specifically, of the first replay and the third replay, the operation order corresponding to the third replay win is reported (see FIG. 37(a)). After that, in step S1205, a process of setting the push order notification command as an object to be output to the display control device 81, which is a control device on the sub side, is performed, and then the main push order process is terminated. The pressing order notification command includes information on the current display mode and information on the lottery result. The processing on the display control device 81 side based on the reception of the pressing order notification command will be described later in detail.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1203 that the attack mode is in effect, then in step S1206, the operation order corresponding to the first replay winning prize is announced (see FIG. 37(a)). After that, in step S1207, a process of setting a pressing order notification command is performed, and then the actual pressing order process is terminated. It should be noted that the case of negative determination in step S1203 is the case of winning the first promotion replays 1 to 4 in spite of being in the attack mode, for example, the game state is in the first RT state during the attack mode A case such as a fall is assumed. That is, in the lottery table in the 2nd RT state and the 3rd RT state, the first promoted replays 1 to 4 are not won, and the first promoted replays 1 to 4 are won only in the 1st RT state. Therefore, a negative determination in step S1203 indicates that the attack mode is in progress and the state is the first RT state.

In this way, when the first promotion replays 1 to 4 are won in the situation where the lottery for transition to the attack mode is won, the operation order corresponding to the third replay win is notified, thereby changing the game state. can be shifted to the second RT state. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1202, the pushing order process is terminated without performing the pushing order notification process. Therefore, for example, in the first RT state, even if the first promotion replays 1 to 4 are won without winning the attack mode, there are cases where the first replay win is established and cases where the third replay win is established. , there is.

As already explained, the attack notification flag is based on the fact that the lottery for transition to the attack mode has been won and the number of precursor games has become 0 (the fact that the lottery for transition to the attack mode has been won has been notified). is a flag that is set by Also, the attack mode flag is a flag that is set based on the transition to the attack mode (transition to the second RT state). The attack notification flag and the attack mode flag are cleared when the attack mode ends. Therefore, when the attack notification flag is set and the attack mode flag is not set, it indicates a state of preparation for shifting to the attack mode, and the attack notification flag is set. , and the attack mode flag is set indicate that the display mode is the attack mode. By the way, it is also possible to set the attack mode flag while clearing the attack notification flag based on the transition to the attack mode.

If a negative determination is made in step S1201, it is determined in step S1205 whether or not the lottery result of this time is one of fall replays 1-3. The affirmative determination in step S1205 means that the first replay or the second replay wins according to the operation sequence of the current game. In this case, in step S1206, it is determined whether or not the attack notification flag is set. When the attack notification flag is set, in step S1207, the processing for notifying the pressing order of the first re-game is executed. Specifically, of the first replay and the second replay, the operation order corresponding to the first replay win is reported (see FIG. 37(b)). After that, in step S1208, a process of setting a pressing order notification command is performed, and then the actual pressing order process is terminated.

In this way, if the first promotion replays 1 to 4 are won in the state where the move to the attack mode lottery is won, the operation order corresponding to the third replay win is notified, thereby changing the game state to the second. It is possible to shift to the 2RT state. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1202, the pushing order process is terminated without performing the pushing order notification process. Therefore, for example, in the first RT state, even if the first promotion replays 1 to 4 are won without winning the attack mode, there are cases where the first replay win is established and cases where the third replay win is established. , there is.

In addition, when falling replays 1 to 3 are won in a situation where the notification flag for attack is set, the game state is shifted to the 1st RT state by notifying the operation order corresponding to the first replay winning prize. It is possible to prevent it from happening. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1206, the pushing order process is terminated without performing the pushing order notification process. Therefore, for example, when the attack mode ends, the attack notification flag is cleared, and the display mode shifts to the normal mode, the second replay winning may be established by winning the fall replays 1 to 3, and the RT state will transition from the second RT state to the first RT state.

Also, for example, in the first RT state, the first promotion replays 1 to 4 are won without winning the attack mode, and the operation order happens to correspond to the third replay win, and the third replay win is established. Even in the case of (even in the case of transition to the second RT state), the second replay winning prize can be established by winning fall replays 1 to 3. Therefore, as described above, even if the attack mode is not won and the game moves to the second RT state by chance, the game will quickly move to the first RT state after that.

If a negative determination is made in step S1205, it is determined in step S1209 whether or not the current lottery result is one of the second promotion replays 1 and 2. Affirmative determination in step S1209 means that the first replay, the fourth replay, or the fifth replay wins according to the operation order of the current game. In this case, in step S1210, it is determined whether or not the attack notification flag is set. If the attack notification flag is set, it is determined whether or not the VB notification flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106 in step S1211. As already explained, the VB notification flag is a flag that is set when the number of precursor games in the precursor mode becomes 0 after winning the VB mode transition lottery in the mode transition notification processing (FIG. 49). be.

If the VB notification flag is set, a process for notifying the pressing order of the fourth re-game or the fifth re-game is executed in step S1212. Specifically, of the first replay, the fourth replay, and the fifth replay, the operation sequence corresponding to the fourth regame winning or the fifth replay winning is notified (see FIG. 37(b)). After that, in step S1213, a process of setting a pressing order notification command is performed, and then the actual pressing order process is terminated.

If a negative determination is made in step S1210, the pushing order process is terminated as it is without performing the pushing order notification process. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1211, the processing for notifying the pressing order of the first replay is executed in step S1207, and the processing for setting the pressing order notification command is performed in step S1208. Terminates the regular running process. Therefore, in the case of winning the second promotion replay 1, 2 without winning the VB mode, if the attack mode is on, the push order notification effect corresponding to the first replay winning prize is performed, and if the attack mode is not on. The pressing order notification effect is not performed.

If a negative determination is made in step S1209, it is determined in step S1214 whether or not the current lottery result is one of BAR replays 1 and 2. Affirmative determination in step S1214 means that any one of the first replay, third replay, and sixth to eighth replay wins depending on the operation order of the current game. In this case, in step S1215, it is determined whether or not the attack notification flag is set. If the attack notification flag is set, it is determined in step S1216 whether or not the VB notification flag is set. When the attack notification flag is set and the VB notification flag is set, in step S1217, a process for notifying the pressing order of the sixth to eighth re-games is executed. Specifically, among the first regame, third regame, and sixth regame to eighth regame, the operation sequence corresponding to the sixth to eighth regame wins is notified (FIG. 37 ( c) see). After that, in step S1218, a process of setting a pressing order notification command is performed, and then the actual pressing order process is terminated.

If a negative determination is made in step S1215, the pushing order process is terminated as it is without performing the pushing order notification process. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1216, then in step S1207 a process for notifying the pressing order of the first replay is executed, and in step S1208 a process for setting a pressing order notification command is performed. Terminates the regular running process. Therefore, in the case of winning BAR replays 1 and 2 without winning the VB mode, if the attack mode is on, the press order notification effect corresponding to the first replay win is performed, and if the attack mode is not on, the push order notification effect is performed. No forward notification effect is performed.

If a negative determination is made in step S1214, it is determined in step S1219 whether or not the result of the current lottery is winning of the pressing order bell. If the pressing order bell is won, it is determined in step S1220 whether the current display mode is the normal mode or the challenge mode. If it is not the normal mode or the challenge mode, in step S1221, a process for notifying the pressing order for notifying the operation order corresponding to the winning of the first minor combination is executed (see FIG. 33). After that, in step S1222, a process of setting a pressing order notification command is performed, and then the actual pressing order process is terminated. If a negative determination is made in step S1219 or if an affirmative determination is made in step S1220, the main pushing order process is terminated without performing the process for informing the pushing order.

<Processing for switching the display mode based on the winning result>
<Processing for Winning Results>
Next, a description will be given of the processing when a combination corresponding to the transition of the game state is won as a result of the notification for shifting the game state as described above. This process is performed in the winning result handling process (step S414) in the reel control process (FIG. 32). The winning result handling process will be described below with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S1301, game number management processing is executed. Although the details will be described later, in this game number management process, in addition to counting the number of precursor games in the precursor mode, the number of continuous games in the challenge mode, attack mode, VB mode, and special zone is counted.

In the following step S1302, it is determined whether or not the result of this stop is the third replay winning. As described above, when the third replay winning has been established, in the RT state processing (FIG. 35), the processing for shifting the game state to the second RT state is performed. In this case, in step S1303, it is determined whether or not the attack notification flag is set. If the attack notification flag is set, it is determined in step S1304 whether or not the current display mode is the attack mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not an attack mode flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. The attack mode flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to specify that the display mode is the attack mode. In addition to the attack mode flag, a challenge mode flag, a VB mode flag, a specialized zone flag, and a BB mode flag are provided as flags for specifying the display mode. In this embodiment, when the display mode is a mode (VB mode, additional specialized zone) corresponding to the RT state higher than the attack mode, the attack mode flag is the flag corresponding to that mode (VB mode flag, specialized zone flag). Therefore, for example, in step S1304, when it is determined that the attack mode flag is set, in addition to the attack mode, the VB mode and the special zone are included. .

At step S1304, if the attack mode flag is set, the display mode is already the attack mode, so the process for dealing with the winning result is terminated. On the other hand, if the attack mode flag is not set, processing for starting the attack mode is performed in steps S1305 to S1307.

That is, in step S1305, an attack mode flag is set. In the subsequent step S1306, the attack mode start command is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81. FIG. The display control device 81 that has received the attack mode start command uses the auxiliary display section 65 or the like to notify that the attack mode will start from the next game. Such notification will be described later in detail. After that, in step S1307, counting of the attack mode continuation number is started. Specifically, an attack mode continuation counter provided in various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106 is set to an initial value (for example, 50) of the number of continuation games in the attack mode. After performing the process of step S1307, the main winning result handling process is terminated.

When it is determined in step S1302 that the third replay winning has not been established, the process proceeds to step S1308. In step S1308, it is determined whether or not the fourth and fifth replay wins have been established as a result of this stop. As described above, when the fourth and fifth re-game winnings are established, in the RT state processing (FIG. 35), the processing for shifting the game state to the third RT state is performed. In this case, in step S1309, it is determined whether or not the VB notification flag is set. If the VB notification flag is set, it is determined whether or not the VB mode flag is set. If the VB mode flag is set, the display mode is already the VB mode, so the process for dealing with the winning result is terminated. On the other hand, if the VB mode flag is not set, processing for starting the VB mode is performed in steps S1311 to S1313.

That is, in step S1311, processing for setting a VB mode flag is performed. In this case, the attack mode flag and the VB mode flag coexist in the various flag storage area 106d. This is because the VB mode is a mode that transitions through the attack mode, and the transition to the attack mode is always made after the VB mode ends.

After that, in step S1312, the VB mode start command is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81. FIG. The display control device 81 that has received the VB mode start command uses the auxiliary display section 65 or the like to notify that the VB mode will start from the next game. Such notification will be described later in detail. Then, in step S1313, counting of the number of VB mode continuations is started. Specifically, an initial value (for example, 60) of the number of continuous games in the VB mode is set in a VB mode continuous counter provided in the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106. FIG. After performing the process of step S1313, the process for dealing with the winning result is terminated.

When it is determined in step S1308 that the fourth and fifth replay winnings have not been established, the process proceeds to step S1314. In step S1314, it is determined whether or not the seventh regame winning has been established as a result of this stop. In the present embodiment, when the seventh replay winning has been established, that is, the BAR symbol is stopped in the middle stage of the left reel 32L, the BAR symbol is in the middle stage of the middle reel 32M, and the BAR symbol is stopped in the middle stage of the right reel 32R. When the BAR pattern stops on the middle combination line, it is configured to shift to a special zone for adding. In the add-on specialized zone, not only the specific combination but also all the combinations that can be won in the normal game mode (push order combination, specific combination and bonus) are added to the number of continuous games in the attack mode. It should be noted that the case where the seventh re-game winning has been established means that the BAR replay 1 has been won and the stop switches 42 to 44 have been operated in the operation order corresponding to the seventh re-game winning (Fig. 37). (c)), furthermore, when the 7th replay out of the 1st, 6th, and 7th replays wins the lottery, for example, when winning the BAR replay 1, 20 minutes A lottery for winning the seventh replay is won with a probability of 1.例文帳に追加

If the seventh replay win has been established, it is determined in step S1315 whether or not the VB notification flag is set. If the VB notification flag has been set, then in step S1316, a process of setting a specialized zone flag in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106 is performed. The specialized zone flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to recognize that it is the above-mentioned additional specialized zone, and when the specialized zone flag is set, the counting of the number of continued games in the VB mode is stopped. . In this case, the attack mode flag, the VB mode flag, and the specialized zone flag coexist in the various flag storage area 106d. This is because the specialized zone shifts to the VB mode and always shifts to the VB mode after the specialized zone ends.

After that, in step S1317, a specialized zone start command is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81. FIG. The display control device 81 that has received the special zone start command uses the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like to notify that the special zone will start from the next game. Such notification will be described later in detail. Then, in step S1318, counting of the number of continuations of the specialized zone is started. Specifically, the initial value (for example, 5) of the number of continuous games in the special zone is set in the special zone continuation counter provided in the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106. FIG. After performing the process of step S1318, the process for dealing with the winning result is terminated. Also, if a negative determination is made in step S1314 or step S1315, the winning result handling process is terminated.

As described above, processing for shifting the display mode is performed separately from the RT state processing (FIG. 35) based on the winning of the combination (3rd to 5th replays) corresponding to shifting the game state. conduct. This is to avoid the attack mode or the like from being started based on the winning of a winning combination corresponding to changing the game state by chance, even though the display mode transition lottery has not been won. is.

In addition, when switching the display mode, among those accompanied by the transition of the game state, when shifting to a higher mode, that is, when shifting from the normal mode or the challenge mode to the attack mode, or when shifting from the attack mode to the VB mode, Alternatively, when shifting from the VB mode to the specialized zone, the shift is made based on the winning result of the corresponding combination. Therefore, the display mode and the transition of the game state are performed as a set in the same game. On the other hand, in the case of shifting to a lower mode, the display mode is not shifted when the game state shifts due to, for example, a second replay win as a fall replay or a stop of the transition roll. When shifting to a lower mode, the game state is managed by winning results (RT state processing), while the display mode is managed by the number of games played. Therefore, when shifting to a lower mode, there is a possibility that the transition of the game state and the transition of the display mode are performed in separate games.

<Number of games management process>
The number-of-games management process executed in step S1301 of the winning result handling process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In the game number management process, the number of precursor games in the precursor mode is counted, and the number of continued games in the challenge mode, attack mode, VB mode, and special zone is counted. Then, a process for terminating the corresponding display mode is performed.

In the game number management process, first, in step S1401, it is determined whether or not the number of bets is a specific number. As already explained, in this embodiment, as game modes, there are provided a normal game mode in which the 3-bet game and the 2-bet game are played, and a specific mode in which the 1-bet game is played. The process of step S1401 is for determining whether the game to end this time is a game in the normal game mode or a game in a specific mode. Then, in step S1401, when the number of bets is 1 as the specific number, it is determined that the game to end this time is the game in the specific mode. If the game is in the specific mode, the game number management process is terminated. That is, in the game in the specific mode, the number of games in the precursor mode and the number of continuous games in the challenge mode, etc. are not counted.

If the game to end this time is not the specific mode but the normal game mode, the process proceeds to step S1402. In step S1402, it is determined whether or not the bonus winning flag is set or the game is in a bonus state. If the determination in step S1402 is affirmative, in step S1403 the display mode flags of the challenge mode flag, the attack mode flag, the VB mode flag, and the specialized zone flag are cleared, and then this game number management process is terminated. . In other words, when the bonus win flag is set or during the bonus, the number of games in the attack mode, etc., is not counted. Note that if each flag is not set in step S1403, that state is maintained.

Incidentally, in step S1403, while the attack mode flag and the VB mode flag are cleared, the attack notification flag and the VB notification flag are not cleared. Therefore, after the end of the bonus, after going through a preparation state such as an attack mode, these flags are used to notify the order of pressing for shifting the game state, so that the game state before the bonus can be restored.

If the determination in step S1402 is negative, it is determined in step S1404 whether or not the number of precursor games is zero. If not 0, a process of subtracting 1 from the number of precursor games is performed in step S1405. If the number of precursor games is 0 in step S1404 (not in precursor mode), or after the process of step S1405 is executed, the number of continuous games in each mode is counted in steps S1406 to S1427. .

That is, in step S1406, it is determined whether or not the current display mode is the challenge mode. If it is the challenge mode, the process advances to step S1407 to perform processing for subtracting 1 from the challenge mode continuation counter, thereby decrementing the number of continuation games in the challenge mode. Then, in step S1408, it is determined whether or not the challenge mode continuation counter is zero. If not 0, the number-of-games management process is terminated. If it is 0, the challenge mode flag is cleared in step S1409, and a challenge mode end command is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81 in step S1410. Upon receiving the challenge mode end command, the display control device 81 uses the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like to notify that the challenge mode will end in the current game. After performing the process of step S1410, the number-of-games management process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S1406 that the mode is not the challenge mode, the process proceeds to step S1411. In step S1411, it is determined whether or not the current display mode is the attack mode. If it is the attack mode, the process advances to step S1412 to decrement the attack mode continuation counter by 1, thereby decrementing the attack mode continuation game number. Then, in step S1413, it is determined whether or not the attack mode continuation counter is zero. If not 0, the number-of-games management process is terminated. If it is 0, the attack mode flag is cleared in step S1414, and the attack notification flag is cleared in step S1415. After that, in step S1416, an attack mode end command is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81. FIG. Upon receiving the attack mode end command, the display control device 81 uses the auxiliary display section 65 or the like to notify that the attack mode will end in the current game. Such notification will be described later in detail. After performing the process of step S1416, the number-of-games management process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S1411 that the attack mode is not set, the process proceeds to step S1417. In step S1417, it is determined whether or not the current display mode is the VB mode. If it is the VB mode, the process advances to step S1418 to determine whether or not it is an additional specialized zone. If it is not a special zone, the VB mode continuation counter is decremented by 1 in step S1419, thereby decrementing the number of VB mode continuation games. Then, in step S1420, it is determined whether or not the VB mode continuation counter is zero. If not 0, the number-of-games management process is terminated. If it is 0, the VB mode flag is cleared in step S1421, and the VB notification flag is cleared in step S1422. After that, in step S1423, the VB mode end command is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81. FIG. Upon receiving the VB mode end command, the display control device 81 uses the auxiliary display section 65 or the like to notify that the VB mode will end in the current game. Such notification will be described later in detail. After performing the process of step S1423, the number-of-games management process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S1418 that the zone is an additional special zone, the process proceeds to step S1424. In step S1424, the special zone continuation game count is decremented by performing a process of subtracting 1 from the special zone continuation counter. Then, in step S1425, it is determined whether or not the special zone continuation counter is zero. If it is 0, the specialized zone flag is cleared in step S1426, and the specialized zone end command is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81 in step S1427. Upon receiving the special zone end command, the display control device 81 uses the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like to notify that the special zone will end in the current game. As such notification, for example, the number of games successfully added in total in the special zone this time is notified. After performing the process of step S1427, the number-of-games management process is terminated. If a negative determination is made in step S1417 or step S1425, the game number management process is terminated.

<End determination processing>
Next, as the processing at the end of the bonus, the end determination processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. As already explained, the end determination process is a process executed in step S615 in the bonus state process (FIG. 40). In the termination determination process, it is determined whether or not the bonus termination condition is met, and when the bonus is to be terminated, processing for notification of winning such as an attack mode in which bonuses and duplicate winnings are performed, and an attack mode in which bonuses and duplicate winnings are performed. For example, processing for adding the number of games is performed.

That is, in step S1501, it is determined whether or not a minor winning combination has been established. As already explained, during the bonus, the first small win (BB medium and small win 1) is established with a high probability (FIG. 42). In addition, when winning the BB middle red 7 matching combination (IV=29), the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the operation order corresponding to the 30th minor combination winning (Fig. 41(b)), and further, When the lottery for winning the 30th minor combination out of the 1st minor combination and the 30th minor combination is won, the 30th minor combination is established. In the present embodiment, for example, a lottery for winning the 30th minor combination is won with a probability of 1/100 in the case of winning the BB middle red 7 combination combination. When winning the BB middle BAR matching combination (IV=30), the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the operation order corresponding to the 31st minor combination winning (FIG. 41(b)), and furthermore, the 1st minor When the lottery for winning the 31st minor winning combination among the combination and the 31st minor winning combination is won, the 31st minor winning combination is established. In the present embodiment, for example, a lottery for winning the 31st minor combination is won with a probability of 1/200 in the case of winning the combination of BAR in BB.

If it is determined in step S1501 that a minor win has been established, then in step S1502 processing is performed to subtract the current game payout number from the remaining payout number. If a negative determination is made in step S1501, or after the processing of step S1502 has been executed, the addition processing is executed in step S1503. The add-on process is a process for giving benefits other than payout of game media based on the result of the game during the current bonus. For example, if the game result of this time is the 30th small winning combination (lower row of red 7), if the display mode is the normal mode or the challenge mode, the attack mode is won. If there is, the number of continuous games in the attack mode is added (for example, 100 games). In addition, when the 31st small winning prize (all the lower BARs) is established, if the display mode is the normal mode or the challenge mode, the attack mode and the VB mode are won, and if the attack mode is the VB mode and the special zone , and in the VB mode, the special zone is won a plurality of times (for example, twice), and in the special zone, the number of continuous games in the attack mode is added (for example, 300 games). In step S1503, a flag (attack mode win flag, etc.) corresponding to the transition of the display mode is set, and a counter addition process (attack mode continuation counter, etc. addition process) according to the number of additional games is performed.

In subsequent step S1504, it is determined whether or not the number of remaining payouts has become zero. If it is not 0, the end determination process is terminated as it is. If it is 0, after a bonus end command is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81 in step S1505, in steps S1506 to S1519, processing for winning notification such as attack mode, attack mode, etc. Processing for adding the number of continuous games is performed.

That is, in step S1506, it is determined whether or not the attack mode winning flag is set. If the attack mode winning flag is set, the lottery process for the number of precursor games is performed in step S1507, the number of precursor games is set in step S1508, and the precursor command is set in step S1509. The processes of steps S1507 to S1509 are the same as the processes of steps S808 to S810. After executing the process of step S1509, the end determination process is terminated.

That is, when the bonus ends in a situation where the attack mode is won, after the bonus ends, the attack mode winning notification is performed through the premonitory game. Therefore, the game can be played while anticipating that the player will be in an advantageous state again after the bonus ends.

Here, if a bonus is won in any of the portent modes before notification of winning, the number of portent games has already been set when lottery processing for the number of portent games is performed in step S1507. In this embodiment, even in such a case, the number of precursor games is reset. That is, regardless of the number of games remaining when the bonus is won, the number of precursor games is again set to 1 out of 1 to 32 games after the bonus ends. By doing so, it is possible to make the player feel excited for a long time after the end of the bonus.

If the attack mode winning flag is not set in step S1506, it is determined in step S1510 whether or not the challenge mode winning flag is set. If the challenge mode winning flag is set, the process for the precursor mode of steps S1507 to S1509 is performed, and then the end determination process is terminated. If the challenge mode winning flag is not set in step S1510, it is determined whether or not the VB mode winning flag is set in step S1511. If the VB mode winning flag is set, the process for the precursor mode of steps S1507 to S1509 is performed, and then the end determination process is terminated. That is, when the bonus ends in a situation where the challenge mode and the VB mode are also won, after the bonus ends, the premonition game is performed, and then the challenge mode and the VB mode winning notification is performed.

If the VB mode winning flag is not set in step S1511, the process proceeds to step S1512. In step S1512, it is determined whether or not the attack mode addition flag is set. If the attack mode addition flag is set, the attack mode addition game number lottery process is performed in step S1513, the attack mode game number addition process is performed in step S1514, and an addition command is set in step S1515. . The processes of steps S1513 to S1515 are the same as the processes of steps S917 to S919. After executing the process of step S1515, the end determination process is terminated.

If the attack mode addition flag is not set in step S1512, it is determined in step S1516 whether or not the challenge mode addition flag is set. If the challenge mode add-on flag is set, a challenge mode add-on game number lottery process is performed in step S1517, a challenge mode game add-on process is performed in step S1518, and an add-on command is set in step S1519. . The processes of steps S1517 to S1519 are the same as the processes of steps S820 to S822. If a negative determination is made in step S1516, or if the process of step S1519 has been executed, the end determination process ends.

<Processing for specialized zone>
Next, the special zone processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The specialized zone processing is processing executed in step S712 in the lottery result handling processing (FIG. 45). As already explained, the player moves to the specialized zone during the VB mode, and during the specialized zone, the number of consecutive games in the attack mode is increased every game.

That is, in the special zone processing, first, in step S1601, the result of the current lottery processing is grasped. In the subsequent step S1602, a lottery process for the number of additional games in the attack mode is performed. In the following step S1603, processing for adding the number of games in the attack mode is performed. Then, in step S1604, after setting the add-on command, the processing for the specialized zone ends. The processing of steps S1602 to S1604 is the same as the processing of steps S917 to S919. However, the number of games to be selected is larger in the number-of-addition-games lottery process in step S1602 than in the number-of-addition-games lottery process in step S917.

<Processing related to notification effects on the sub side>
Next, as (4) processing related to notification effect on the sub side, processing for various notifications performed by the display control device 81 on the sub side will be described. As processing for various notifications, effect setting processing that is executed at a predetermined cycle (1.49 msec cycle) is provided. Therefore, the effect setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the effect setting process, first, in step S1701, it is determined whether or not a new command has been received from the main controller 101. FIG. If a new command has been received, processing for storing the received command in the RAM 183 is executed in step S1702. A command storage area is provided in the RAM 183, and the command storage area is configured as a ring buffer capable of individually storing a plurality of commands and reading out from previously stored commands.

If a negative determination is made in step S1701, or after the processing of step S1702 has been executed, it is determined in step S1703 whether or not the newly received command was a command at the time of betting. The betting time command is a command output from the main controller 101 based on the betting operation being performed. In addition to the betting command set in step S207 of the normal processing, the mode transition notification processing (see 49), a challenge mode start command, an attack mode winning notification command, a VB mode winning notification command, and the like. In the case of these bet time commands, a bet time effect setting process is executed in step S1704.

If a negative determination is made in step S1703, or if the process of step S1704 has been executed, then in step S1705 it is determined whether or not the newly received command was the start command. The command at the start is a command output from the main controller 101 based on the operation of the start lever 41. In addition to the lottery result command set in step S311 of the lottery process, the first to There are precursor commands and additional commands set in the third special combination process (FIGS. 46 to 48), push order notification commands set in the push order process (FIG. 51), and the like. In the case of these start time commands, a start time effect setting process is executed in step S1706.

If a negative determination is made in step S1705, or if the process of step S1706 has been executed, it is determined in step S1707 whether or not the newly received command is a stop command. The stop command is a command output from the main controller 101 when all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped, and is a winning result command set in step S415 of the reel control process (FIG. 32). In addition, attack mode start command, VB mode start command, special zone start command, challenge mode end command, attack mode end command, VB mode end command, special zone There is an end command, etc. In the case of these stop commands, stop effect setting processing is executed in step S1708.

When a negative determination is made in step S1707, or after the processing of step S1708 is executed, other processing is executed in step S1709, and then the effect setting processing is terminated. In step S1709, effects based on commands from the main controller 101 other than when betting, starting, and stopping (for example, effects when the first reel stops, effects when the second reel stops, and operation of the settlement switch 59 effects, etc.) settings, effects settings based on signals from sensors (first effect switch detection sensor, second effect switch detection sensor, etc.) connected without going through the main controller 101, settings for error notification, etc. I do.

Below, the effect setting process at the time of betting, the effect setting process at the time of start, and the effect setting process at the time of stop will be described. It should be noted that each effect setting process will be described with reference to schematic diagrams of display effects in FIGS. 64 to 69. FIG.

<Production setting processing at the time of betting>
The betting effect setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S1801, it is determined whether or not the bet time command received this time is a bet command and the bet number information included in the bet command is a specific number bet command of a specific number (1). This process is a process for determining whether the game mode to be executed is the normal game mode or the specific mode, and when it is determined to be the specific number bet command, the game mode to be executed this time is the specific mode. means that In this case, in step S1802, the specific mode betting effect setting process is executed, and then the main effect setting process is terminated. This specific mode betting effect setting process will be described later in detail.

If it is determined in step S1801 that it is not a specific number bet command and the game mode to be executed is the normal game mode, the process proceeds to step S1803. In step S1803, it is determined whether or not the challenge mode start command is included in the betting command received this time. When the challenge mode start command is included, in step S1804, processing for setting the challenge mode start effect is performed. In the challenge mode start effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 64(a), the auxiliary display unit 65 displays characters "Challenge mode start", and the display mode to be changed is likely to win the attack mode shift lottery. A display (for example, a predetermined character display) that suggests the chance mode is performed. In addition, in the challenge mode start presentation, the speaker 64 is controlled so that a corresponding sound effect (for example, "Grab the attack mode!" in a thick male voice) is emitted.

If the challenge mode start command is not included in step S1803, it is determined in step S1805 whether or not the attack mode winning notification command is included as the betting command received this time. When the attack mode winning notification command is included, in step S1806, processing for setting the attack mode winning notification effect is performed. In the attack mode win notification effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 65(a), the auxiliary display section 65 displays characters "Attack mode confirmed". In addition, in the attack mode winning notification presentation, the speaker 64 is controlled so that a corresponding sound effect (for example, "Attack number one!" in a high-pitched voice of a woman) is emitted.

If the attack mode winning notification command is not included in step S1805, it is determined in step S1807 whether or not the VB mode winning notification command is included as the betting command received this time. When the VB mode winning notification command is included, in step S1808, processing for setting the VB mode winning notification effect is performed. In the VB mode winning notification effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 65(b), the auxiliary display section 65 displays characters "VICTORY BONUS confirmed". In addition, in the VB mode winning notification effect, the speaker 64 is controlled so that a corresponding sound effect (for example, "Victory!" in male and female voices) is emitted.

After executing any of the processes of step S1804, step S1806 and step S1808, or when a negative determination is made in step S1807, in step S1809, after setting other effects at the time of betting, this effect setting process exit. In the process of step S1809, for example, in response to the reception of the bet command, the lamps around (or inside) the credit input switches 56 to 58 corresponding to the bet number are turned off to notify that the operation has been accepted. Alternatively, for example, processing for returning from the demo mode in which one condition is that no game has been played for a predetermined time, or lighting a lamp around the start lever 41 to inform that the operation is valid. processing, etc.

<Start effect setting processing>
Next, the start effect setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S1901, it is determined whether or not the number of bets at the start is a specific number (1). This process is a process for determining whether the game mode to be started is the normal game mode or the specific mode. It means that there is In this case, in step S1902, after execution of the effect setting process at the start of the specific mode, the effect setting process is terminated. This specific mode starting effect setting process will be described later in detail.

If it is determined in step S1901 that the number is not the specific number, display mode setting processing is performed in step S1903. In this process, it is determined whether the display mode currently set on the main controller 101 side is the normal mode, challenge mode, attack mode, VB mode, or special zone, and in the corresponding display mode , the display effect of the auxiliary display section 65 is set. Specifically, a challenge mode flag, an attack mode flag, a VB mode flag, and a specialized zone flag are also set in the various flag storage area 183a of the RAM 183 on the display control device 81 side as flags for grasping the display mode. Areas are provided in which a corresponding flag is set at the start of each mode and cleared at the end of each mode. For example, in the process of setting the challenge mode start effect in step S1804, a challenge mode flag is set. In step S1903, by grasping these various mode flags, the current display mode is identified, and the auxiliary display unit 65, speaker 64, upper lamp 63, etc. are controlled so that the corresponding effect is performed.

In the following step S1904, based on the received lottery result command, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the game to be started this time is the first prize. In the case of winning the pushing order, in step S1905, processing for notification of pushing order is performed. Here, the pressing order notification process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S2001, it is determined whether or not the pressing order notification command is included in the start time command received this time. If the pressing order notification command is not included, the main pressing order notification processing is terminated. If the pressing order notification command is included, the process advances to step S2002.

In step S2002, it is determined whether or not the current lottery results are the first promotion replays 1-4. In the case of the first promoted replays 1 to 4, in step S2003, the mode correspondence flag is checked to determine whether or not the current display mode is the attack mode. If not in the attack mode, in step S2004, the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like is controlled so as to notify the pressing order that the third regame winning is established, and then the pressing order reporting process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S2003 that it is in the attack mode, in step S2005, the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like is controlled so as to notify the pressing order that the first regame winning is established. End the process.

If it is determined in step S2002 that the first promotion replays 1 to 4 are not won, it is determined in step S2004 whether or not the current lottery result is drop replays 1 to 3. In the case of fall replays 1 to 3, the process advances to step S2005 to control the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like so as to notify the pressing order that the first replay win is established, after which the pressing order notification processing is terminated. do.

If it is determined in step S2004 that the replays are not fall replays 1 to 3, it is determined in step S2006 whether or not the current lottery results are the second promotion replays 1 and 2. In the case of the second promotion replays 1 and 2, it is determined in step S2007 whether or not the VB mode winning notification effect has already been executed. For example, when setting the VB mode winning notification effect in step S1806, a notified flag indicating that VB winning has been notified is set in the various flag storage area 183a of the RAM 183. FIG. The notified flag is cleared when the mode is shifted to the VB mode. Then, in step S2007, the presence or absence of the notified flag may be determined. If it has already been announced that the VB mode has been won, in step S2008, the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like is controlled so as to perform notification of the pressing order in which the fourth and fifth regame winnings are established. end the processing. If the VB mode winning notification has not been completed, the process advances to step S2005 to perform the pressing order notification for the first regame winning prize, and then terminate the pressing order notification processing.

If it is determined in step S2006 that it is not the second promotion replays 1 and 2, it is determined in step S2009 whether or not the current lottery results are BAR replays 1 and 2. If it is BAR replay 1 or 2, it is checked in step S2010 whether or not the current display mode is the VB mode by checking the mode correspondence flag. If it is in the VB mode, in step S2011, the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like is controlled so as to notify the pressing order that the 6th to 8th regame winnings are established, and then the pressing order reporting process is terminated. do. If it is not in the VB mode, the process proceeds to step S2005, and after notification of the pressing order for the first regame winning prize is performed, the pressing order notification processing is terminated.

If it is determined in step S2009 that it is not BAR replays 1 and 2, it is determined in step S2012 whether or not the current lottery result is Bell. If the bell is won, in step S2013, the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like is controlled so as to notify the pressing order that the bell wins as the first minor combination, and then the pressing order notification processing is terminated. . If a negative determination is made in step S2012, the pressing order notification processing is terminated.

Returning to the description of the effect setting process at the start (FIG. 58), if it is determined in step S1904 that the winning combination is not the winning combination, it is determined in step S1906 whether or not the special combination is winning. If the special combination is won, a special combination notification process is performed in step S1907. The special combination notification process will be described later in detail.

If a negative determination is made in step S1906, or after the processing of step S1905 or step S1907 is executed, the process proceeds to step S1908. In step S1908, it is determined whether or not an add-on command has been received as the current start command. When the add-on command is received, in step S1909, the add-on effect is set in advance so that the add-on effect for the number of games corresponding to the add-on command is executed at the time of stop. As an additional effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 68(b), a numerical value corresponding to the number of additional games is displayed as "+10" on the auxiliary display section 65. FIG. In addition, in the additional effect, the speaker 64 is controlled so that a corresponding sound effect (for example, an electronic sound “kyukyukyukyuuuin!”) is emitted. In addition, it is preferable to change the display contents of the auxiliary display section 65 and the sound effect emitted from the speaker 64 according to the number of additional games. Note that the additional effect may be set as the start time effect.

When the addition command is not received at step S1908, or after executing the process of step S1909, the process for bonus notification is executed at step S1910, the continuous effect setting process is executed at step S1911, and then, In step S1912, after setting other effects at start, the process for setting effects at start ends. The bonus notification process and the continuous effect setting process will be described later in detail. In the process of step S1912, for example, a process of setting an effect suggesting a lottery result corresponding to the start of the game, turning off the lamp around the start lever 41 to notify that the operation has been accepted, and the like are performed.

<Production setting processing at stop time>
Next, the stop effect setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S2101, it is determined whether or not the number of bets for the game to end this time is a specific number (1). This process is a process for determining whether the game mode of the current game is the normal game mode or the specific mode. means that it was In this case, in step S2102, after execution of the specific mode stopping effect setting process, the present effect setting process is terminated. This specific mode stop effect setting process will be described later in detail.

If it is determined in step S2101 that the number is not the specific number, the process advances to step S2103. In step S2103, it is determined whether or not the challenge mode end command is included in the currently received stop command. When the challenge mode end command is included, in step S2104, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled so that the challenge mode end effect is performed. In the challenge mode end effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 64(b), the auxiliary display section 65 displays characters "challenge mode end". In addition, in the challenge mode end presentation, the speaker 64 is controlled to emit a sound effect corresponding to the end of the challenge mode (for example, "More diligence!" in a loud male voice).

If the challenge mode end command is not included in step S2103, it is determined in step S2105 whether or not the attack mode start command is included in the currently received stopping command. When the attack mode start command is included, in step S2106, processing for setting the attack mode start effect is performed. In the attack mode start presentation, for example, as shown in FIG. 66(a), the auxiliary display section 65 displays characters "Attack Mode!! Ver.1". In addition, in the attack mode start rendering, the speaker 64 is controlled so that a corresponding sound effect (for example, "Attack mode start!" in a high-pitched voice of a woman) is emitted.

Incidentally, the display of "Ver. 1" in the attack mode start effect corresponds to the rank of the attack mode. That is, the display indicates that the attack mode to be started this time is the first attack mode. Then, when the rank of the attack mode is promoted to the second attack mode (when a promotion command is received), the auxiliary display portion 65 displays characters "Attack Mode!! Ver.2" as promotion effect. Also, when the rank of the attack mode is promoted to the third attack mode, the character display "Attack mode!! Ver.3" is displayed, and when it is promoted to the fourth attack mode, the character display is "Attack mode!! Ver.4". display is performed.

If the attack mode start command is not included in step S2105, it is determined in step S2107 whether or not the attack mode end command is included in the currently received stopping command. When the attack mode end command is included, in step S2108, processing for setting an attack mode end effect is performed. For example, as shown in FIG. 66(b), in the attack mode ending presentation, the characters "Attack mode END" are displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65, and the current attack mode (VB mode, including the special zone) is displayed. ), and the total number of payouts for this attack mode (including VB mode, specialized zone, and bonus). In addition, in the attack mode end presentation, the speaker 64 is controlled so that a corresponding sound effect (for example, "See you later" in a high-pitched voice of a woman) is emitted.

If the attack mode end command is not included in step S2107, it is determined in step S2109 whether or not the VB mode start command is included as the currently received stop command. When the VB mode start command is included, in step S2110, processing for setting the VB mode start effect is performed. In the VB mode start presentation, for example, as shown in FIG. 67(a), the auxiliary display section 65 displays characters "777 VICTORY!!". In addition, in the VB mode start presentation, the speaker 64 is controlled so that a corresponding sound effect (for example, "Victory bonus start" in male and female voices) is emitted.

If the VB mode start command is not included in step S2109, it is determined in step S2111 whether or not the VB mode end command is included as the currently received stop command. If the VB mode end command is included, processing for setting a VB mode end effect is performed in step S2112. In the VB mode ending effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 67(b), the auxiliary display unit 65 displays characters "VICTORY BONUS END", and at the same time, the number of games to be continued in the attack mode at the end of the current VB mode is displayed. The number of continuous games (including VB mode and special zone) is displayed, and the total payout number of attack mode (including VB mode, special zone and bonus) at the end of the current VB mode is displayed. In addition, in the VB mode end presentation, the speaker 64 is controlled so that a corresponding sound effect (for example, male and female voices saying "It's still going on") is emitted.

If the VB mode end command is not included in step S2111, it is determined in step S2113 whether or not the special zone start command is included in the currently received stop command. When the special zone start command is included, in step S2114, processing for setting the special zone start effect is performed. In the specialized zone start effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 68(a), the auxiliary display section 65 displays characters "Add Challenge!" A character is displayed to indicate that In addition, in the special zone start presentation, the speaker 64 is controlled so that a corresponding sound effect (for example, "Let's go" in a boy's voice) is emitted.

If the special zone start command is not included in step S2113, it is determined in step S2115 whether or not the special zone end command is included in the currently received stopping command. When the special zone end command is included, in step S2116, processing for setting the special zone end effect is performed. In the special zone end presentation, for example, the auxiliary display section 65 displays the total number of games added in the special zone this time. In addition, in the special zone end presentation, the speaker 64 is controlled so that a corresponding sound effect (for example, an electronic sound “kyukyukyukyuuuin!”) is emitted. It is preferable to change the display contents of the auxiliary display section 65 and the sound effects emitted from the speaker 64 according to the total number of additional games.

If the special zone end command is not included in step S2115, it is determined in step S2117 whether or not the bonus end command is included in the currently received stop command. When the bonus end command is included, in step S2118, processing for setting the bonus end effect is performed. In the bonus end effect, for example, the auxiliary display unit 65 displays the total number of payouts acquired during the bonus, and if the bonus is shifted to the attack mode, VB mode, or special zone, the attack mode ( Display the total number of payouts for VB mode, special zone, and bonus). In addition, in the bonus end effect, a character or the like suggesting these contents is performed depending on whether the attack mode is appropriate, whether the challenge mode is appropriate, and the number of additional games.

After executing any one of steps S2104, S2106, S2108, S2110, S2112, S2114, S2116 and S2118, or after making a negative determination in S2117, the process proceeds to S2119. In step S2119, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled so as to execute the additional effect when the additional effect is set. As already explained, the setting of the additional effect is performed at step S1909 in the process of setting the effect at the start.

After that, in step S2120, after setting other effects at the time of stop, the main effect setting process is terminated. In step S2120, for example, control is performed so that the upper lamp 63 is lit in a color corresponding to the winning combination, control is performed so that sound effects corresponding to the number of payouts of the winning combination are emitted from the speaker 64, and control is performed during replay. A sound effect corresponding to the automatic bet is emitted from the speaker 64.例文帳に追加

As described above, based on various commands from the main controller 101, the display control device 81 performs various processes for notifying the transition of the display mode, and the notification is performed by the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like. In addition, on the display control device 81 side, in addition to notification of the transition of the display mode, processing for effects during various games is performed.

<Production processing during various games>
In this embodiment, a continuous effect and a bonus effect are provided as effects during various games. A continuous effect is a effect that makes the player expect an advantageous result (winning a bonus, attack mode, challenge mode, VB mode, etc.), and the game is played a plurality of times (four times in this embodiment). This is an effect that can be continued over a period of time, and is an effect in which it is notified whether or not the advantageous result was obtained in the final game. The effect during the bonus is a effect performed in each game during the bonus state that shifts based on the 1st BB, the 2nd BB, the special 1st BB or the special 2nd BB winning.

The outline of the continuous effect will be described with reference to FIG.

For example, as shown in FIG. 69(a), at the start of the first game in which the continuous effect is set, a display suggesting the number of times the continuous effect is continued is displayed (in the figure, 4 stages are displayed corresponding to the continuous effect of 4 games). It shows the daruma dropping performance). Then, at the end of the first game in which the continuous effect is set, an effect is performed to notify whether or not the continuous effect is to be continued (the figure shows the effect that the first daruma drop is successful, It indicates that the continuous production will continue). If the continuous effect is interrupted, at the end of the first game in which the continuous effect is set, an effect is performed to notify that the continuous effect will end in the middle (for example, an effect that the daruma drop in the first step fails). ). The effects regarding whether or not to continue the continuous effects are the same in each game in the continuous effects.

As shown in FIG. 69(b), at the start of the second game in which continuous effects are set, a display indicating the number of remaining continuous effects is performed (in the figure, the remaining three daruma drop effects). Then, at the end of the second game, an effect is performed to notify whether or not the continuous effect is to be continued (the figure shows the effect that the second daruma drop is successful, and the continuous effect is continued). ).

As shown in FIG. 69(c), at the start of the third game in which the continuous effect is set, a display suggesting the number of remaining continuous effects is performed (in the figure, the remaining two daruma drop effects). Then, at the end of the third game, an effect is performed to notify whether or not the continuous effect is to be continued. ).

As shown in FIG. 69(d), at the start of the final game (fourth game) of the continuous effect, a display indicating that it is the final game of the continuous effect is performed (in the figure, a one-stage daruma drop effect). Then, at the end of the final game, an effect is produced to indicate whether or not the result was advantageous to the player (the drawing shows the effect that the daruma drop in the final stage was successful).

As described above, in the continuous effect, the effect of the previous game is inherited and the effect of the next game is set, and the effect of each game has continuity. In addition, it is possible to clearly recognize what game the current game is from the start of the continuous effect (how many games are there until the end of the continuous effect).

Here, in each game of the continuous effect, whether or not the continuous effect continues to the next game is set so that the continuation rate increases as the game of the continuous effect progresses. That is, at the end of the first game of the continuous effect, the possibility of notifying the discontinuation of the continuous effect is highest, and the more the game progresses, the lower the possibility of notifying the discontinuation. Therefore, in the continuous effect, the player's level of interest greatly differs depending on what game the current game is in the continuous effect, and as the game progresses from the start game to the end game, the player's interest becomes high. .

The setting of the continuous effect is performed in the special combination notification process (step S1907), the bonus notification process (step S1910), and the continuous effect setting process (step S1911) in the start effect setting process (FIG. 58). Therefore, each process will be described in order below.

<Bonus notification processing>
First, the bonus notification process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the bonus notification process, first, in step S2201, based on the lottery result command received this time, it is determined whether or not the game to be started is a bonus winning game. In the case of the bonus winning game, in step S2202, notification game lottery processing for notifying bonus winning is executed. In the informing game lottery process, it is decided by lottery after how many games the bonus winning will be announced. Specifically, one notification game is determined from 0 games (announced in the current game) to 10 games. In the lottery of the notification game, the notification game may differ depending on the winning combination that triggered the winning (whether or not there is a duplicate winning, the type of duplicated minor combination if a duplicate winning, etc.). For example, if the bonus is won with strong cherry overlap, a small number of games is likely to be selected, and if the bonus is won with weak cherry overlap, a large number of games is likely to be selected.

In subsequent step S2203, a process of setting the number of continuous effect games is performed based on the notification game determined by the process of step S2202. Specifically, in step S2203, a continuous effect game is set to a continuous effect counter provided in various counter areas 183b. The continuous effect counter is a counter for grasping the number of games until the result is announced, and is decremented by one for each game. For example, in a configuration in which 4 games are continuously produced, the continuous production is started in the game in which the continuous production counter is 4, and the result is notified in the game in which the continuous production counter is 0. More specifically, for example, when it is determined in step S2202 that bonus winning is notified after 10 games, 10 is input to the continuous effect counter in step S2203. In this case, the continuous effect is started from the game in which the continuous effect counter is 4. When it is determined in step S2202 that bonus winning is notified after 5 games, 5 is input to the continuous effect counter in step S2203. Even in this case, the continuous effect is started from the game in which the continuous effect counter is 4.

It should be noted that, when less than four notification games are set in step S2202, the continuous effect is started from the middle. For example, when it is determined in step S2202 that bonus winning is notified after two games, 2 is input to the continuous effect counter in step S2203. In this case, the continuous effect is started from the current game, and is performed from the third game of the continuous effect shown in FIG. 69(c).

After executing the processing of step S2203, in step S2204, a continuous effect flag is set in the various flag storage area 183a. The continuous effect flag is a flag for the CPU 181 to grasp that the continuous effect is being executed.

If a negative determination is made in step S2201, or if the process of step S2204 has been executed, the process advances to step S2205. In step S2205, it is determined whether or not the bonus game is started from the current game. The bonus game corresponds to the game from the game after winning the 1st BB, 2nd BB, special 1st BB or special 2nd BB to the end of the bonus. The affirmative determination in step S2205 means that the 1st BB, 2nd BB, special 1st BB, or special 2nd BB prize has been won in the previous game. In this case, in step S2206, the number of bonus effect games is set in the effect counter during bonus in the various counter areas 183b of the RAM 183. FIG. The effect counter during bonus is a counter for executing an effect set for each game according to the progress of the bonus game, and the effect corresponding to the counter is performed by the auxiliary display section 65 or the like.

As already explained, in the present embodiment, in the bonus games of the 1st BB and the 2nd BB, 9 medals are paid out in each game, and the bonus ends when 216 medals are paid out. That is, the 1st BB and 2nd BB bonus games end after 24 games. The effect in the bonus game is set to be executed over 24 games, and the effect counter during the bonus is a counter for grasping which game of the 24 games the effect should be performed. is. Then, in step S2206, 24 is set in the bonus effect counter as the number of bonus effect games, and subtraction processing of the bonus effect counter is performed in each game of the bonus game. After the processing of step S2206 is performed, in step S2207, the effect flag during bonus is set in the various flag storage area 183a. The during-bonus effect flag is a flag for the CPU 181 to grasp that the during-bonus effect is being executed. If a negative determination is made in step S2205, or after the process of step S2207 has been executed, this bonus notification process ends.

<Special role notification process>
Next, the specific winning notification process executed in step S1907 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S2301, it is determined whether or not a portent command is included as the command at the start of this time. If no portent command is included, it is determined in step S2302 whether or not an additional command is included as the command at the start of this time. If no add-on command is included, it is determined in step S2303 whether or not a bonus has been won. If the bonus is not won, i.e., if the lottery result is a special combination win, and the lottery for transition to challenge mode, attack mode, or VB mode or the lottery for adding the number of continuous games is not won, In addition, if the bonus has not been won, in step S2304, lottery processing in the pseudo-prediction mode is executed. The pseudo sign mode is visually difficult to distinguish from the sign mode, but in the sign mode, based on the completion of the number of sign games, the player is notified of a result (such as winning the challenge mode) that is advantageous to the player. The pseudo precursor mode is a mode that ends without informing the player of an advantageous result based on the completion of the number of pseudo precursor games.

In step S2304, a table for the pseudo-prediction mode lottery is acquired from the table storage area 182a of the ROM 182, and a lottery counter is acquired from the counter area 183b, and a lottery is performed to determine whether the pseudo-prediction mode is to be executed. conduct. In the table for the pseudo sign mode lottery, the probability of winning the pseudo sign mode lottery is set differently depending on the type of the winning specific combination. It is set so that the probability of winning the lottery in omen mode is high.

In step S2305, based on the result of processing in step S2304, it is determined whether or not the lottery for the pseudo precursor mode has been won. If the lottery has been won, in step S2306, lottery processing for the number of games in the pseudo-prediction mode is performed. This process corresponds to step S808 and the like on the main controller 101 side, and randomly determines the number of pseudo precursor games, which is 1 out of 1 to 32, by lottery. In subsequent step S2307, the number of pseudo precursor games determined in step S2306 is set in a continuous effect counter. In the present embodiment, when an omen mode or a pseudo omen mode is set, the omen mode or the pseudo omen mode is terminated after a continuous effect. By inputting the number of pseudo precursor games to the continuous production counter in step S2307, when the number of remaining games in the pseudo precursor mode corresponds to the start of continuous production (remaining four games), the continuous production is started. It will happen.

In step S2308, a process of setting a pseudo flag indicating the pseudo precursor mode in the various flag storage area 183a is executed. In the following step S2309, a continuous effect flag is set. After that, the special winning notification process is terminated. Also, if the determination is affirmative in any one of steps S2301 to S2303, or if the determination is negative in step S2305, the special combination notification process is terminated.

<Continuous production setting process>
Next, the continuous effect setting process performed in step S1911 of the start time effect setting process (FIG. 58) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S2401, it is determined whether or not a precursor command is included in the start command currently received. If an omen command is included, in step S2402, the number of omen games in the omen mode included in the omen command is input to a continuous effect counter. As a result, when the number of remaining games in the omen mode corresponds to the start of the continuous effect (remaining four games), the continuous effect is started. In the following step S2403, a continuous effect flag is set.

If a negative determination is made in step S2401, or if the process of step S2403 has been executed, the process advances to step S2404. In step S2404, it is determined whether or not the continuous effect flag is set. If the continuous effect flag is set, a process of subtracting 1 from the continuous effect counter is performed in step S2405. Then, in step S2406, it is determined whether or not the continuous effect counter is a number (0 to 3) corresponding to the continuous effect. When the continuous effect counter is the number corresponding to the continuous effect, it is determined whether or not the pseudo flag is set in step S2407. If the pseudo flag is not set, the process advances to step S2408 to acquire the effect table for this portent from the various table storage area 182a. Then, in step S2409, the effect data of the corresponding continuous effect is specified from the present indication effect table and the continuous effect counter, the corresponding effect data is acquired from the normal game effect data storage area 182b of the ROM 182, and the current effect data is obtained. Perform processing to set as a continuous production of. The effect data of the continuous effect specified from the present effect table for indication is effect data indicating that the continuous effect continues until the next game if the continuous effect counter is 1 to 3, and the continuous effect counter is If it is 0, it is effect data indicating that the current continuous effect ends with success.

If it is determined in step S2407 that the pseudo flag is set, the process advances to step S2410. In step S2410, a pseudo-prediction effect table is obtained from the various table storage area 182a. Then, in step S2411, the corresponding effect data of the continuous effect is specified from the pseudo sign effect table and the continuous effect counter, the corresponding effect data is acquired from the normal game effect data storage area 182b of the ROM 182, and the current effect data is obtained. Perform processing to set as a continuous production of. If the continuous effect counter is 1 to 3, the effect data of the continuous effect specified from the effect table for the pseudo precursor is effect data indicating that the continuous effect will continue until the next game or effect data indicating that the continuous effect will not continue. If the continuous effect counter is 0, the effect data indicates that the current continuous effect ends in failure.

Incidentally, the effect data specified from the pseudo-prediction effect table when the continuous effect counter is 1 to 3 includes data for which no continuous effect is set. For example, when the continuous effect counter is 3 and 2, the effect data of the continuous effect is not set, and when the continuous effect counter is 1, the continuous effect indicating that the continuous effect continues until the next game in FIG. When the effect data of the first game of effect is set and the continuous effect counter is 0, the effect data of the second game of continuous effect indicating that the continuous effect is not continued to the next game in FIG. 69(b) is set. By doing so, it is possible to set an effect in which the continuous effect is interrupted in the game in which the number of pseudo-prediction games in the pseudo-prediction mode is 0.

After performing the processing of step S2409 or step S2411, it is determined whether or not the continuous effect counter is 0 in step S2412. When the continuous effect counter is 0, a process of clearing the continuous effect flag and the pseudo flag is performed in step S2413. If the pseudo flag is not set, that state is maintained. When a negative determination is made in step S2406 or step S2412, or after performing the process of step S2413, the continuous effect setting process is terminated.

When it determines with the continuous production|presentation flag not being set in step S2404, it progresses to step S2414. In step S2414, it is determined whether or not the effect flag during bonus is set. When it is set, in step S2415, subtraction processing of the during-bonus effect counter is performed. Specifically, a process of subtracting 1 from the effect counter during bonus is performed. In the following step S2416, a bonus effect table is acquired from the various table storage area 182a. Then, in step S2417, from the bonus effect table and the during-bonus effect counter, the corresponding effect data of the effect during the bonus is specified, and the corresponding effect data is acquired from the normal game effect data storage area 182b, and the current effect data is obtained. Perform processing for setting as an effect during the bonus. In step S2418, it is determined whether or not the effect counter during bonus is zero. When the during-bonus effect counter is 0, a process of clearing the during-bonus effect flag is performed in step S2419. After that, the continuous effect setting process is terminated.

As described above, in the slot machine 10, lottery processing on the side of the main controller 101 is performed based on the insertion of medals as game media and the starting operation of the start lever 41, and each reel 32L, 32M, 32R When the reels 32L, 32M and 32R are started to rotate and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated to stop, and the combination of symbols stopped on the active line corresponds to the result of the lottery process, the corresponding combination is selected. A plurality of RT states with different probabilities of being replayed as a result of lottery processing are provided in a configuration in which a privilege is given, and the RT state shifts when a corresponding promotion replay or falling replay is won. Whether or not the corresponding replay wins a prize is determined by the result of the lottery and the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, and the notification of the order of operation is performed according to the result of the lottery process, and the transition of the display mode. It is done by winning the lottery. A pressing order bell is provided as a result of the lottery process, and depending on the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, it is possible to win a prize for the pressing order bell and obtain medals. Then, by shifting to the second RT state or the third RT state as a game state in which the replay probability is improved, and by shifting to the display mode in which the operation order is notified, in the RT state, the replay probability is improved. It is possible to achieve the winning of the order bell, and to obtain a large amount of medals.

In the above-described game flow, for example, it is difficult for a player who is not accustomed to the game to understand how the transition of the game state or the display mode is performed. You may not be able to enjoy Therefore, in this embodiment, a specific mode is provided in which the above-described game flow can be experienced.

<Overview of specific mode>
The specific mode is set as a 1-bet game, while the normal game mode is set as a 3-bet game or a 2-bet game. In the specific mode, it is possible to simulate the playability of the normal game mode without reducing the number of medals. is paid out, and there is no increase or decrease in medals. In other words, the specific mode is a mode in which all game results result in payouts equal to the number of bets. It is possible to experience the game state transition (RT state transition) and the display mode transition in the normal game mode by each game result of equal payout. The mechanism of the specific mode will be described below.

As already explained, in the 3-bet game, the straight line L4, which is a straight line, is the effective line (Fig. 9(a)), while in the 1-bet game, the curved line L6 is the effective line (Fig. )). In the specific mode implemented as a 1-bet game, the winning symbol combination is different from that in the normal game mode implemented mainly as a 3-bet game.

More specifically, when the lottery result in the 1-bet game is a predetermined result, and the predetermined symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops on the bent line L6, which is an active line, the downward slope which is not an active line in the 1-bet game. A specific symbol combination different from the predetermined symbol combination stops on the line L4. The specific symbol combination is set as a combination that will establish a winning of the specific result when the lottery result in the 3-bet game is the specific result. That is, when a predetermined symbol combination that results in winning a predetermined result in a 1-bet game stops at the bent line L6, a specific symbol combination that results in a winning of a specific result in a 3-bet game descends to the right. It will stop at line L4, and although the same symbols are apparently stopped at the same place in the 3-bet game and the 1-bet game, in the 3-bet game, a specific result will be won, and in the 1-bet game. It is a predetermined result winning, and the winning result is different.

For example, as shown in FIG. 70(a1), in the 3-bet game, the 1st BB is won, and the "Red 7" symbol, the "Red 7" symbol, and the "Red 7" symbol stop on the active line, The first BB prize is established. In the 1-bet game, a special 1BB (1st PBB) is provided as a lottery result corresponding to the 1BB. The combination of symbols is set so that the special first BB winning prize is established by stopping the 7” symbol and the “watermelon” symbol. In this case, as shown in FIG. 70(b1), when the special 1st BB winning symbol combination stops at the bent line L6, which is the valid line for the 1-bet game, the downward-sloping line which is the valid line for the 3-bet game. At L4, the combination of symbols for winning the 1st BB is stopped. However, since the downward-sloping line L4 is not an effective line in the 1-bet game, the first BB winning is not established even if the combination of symbols that will result in the first BB winning is stopped on the downward-sloping line L4 as described above.

For example, as shown in FIG. 70(a2), the 26th small win (watermelon) is won in a 3-bet game, and the "watermelon" symbol, the "watermelon" symbol, and the "watermelon" symbol stop on the active line. Then, the 26th minor winning prize is established. In the 1-bet game, the 26th small winning combination is provided as a lottery result corresponding to the 26th small winning combination. The combination of symbols is set so that the 26th P minor winning prize is established by stopping the symbol "red bell" symbol. In this case, as shown in FIG. 70(b2), when the combination of symbols that result in the 26th P small winning combination stops at the bent line L6, which is the valid line for the 1-bet game, the downward slope that is the valid line for the 3-bet game. The combination of symbols for winning the 26th small winning combination stops on the line L4. However, since the downward-sloping line L4 is not a valid line in the 1-bet game, even if the combination of symbols for winning the twenty-sixth minor winning combination stops on the downward-sloping line L4 as described above, the twenty-sixth minor winning combination will not be established. .

For example, as shown in FIG. 70(a3), in a 3-bet game, the second minor winning combination (bell) is won, and "white bell", "red 7" and "red 7" symbols are displayed on the active line. By stopping, the second minor win is established. In the 1-bet game, a 2P small win is provided as a lottery result corresponding to the 2nd small win, and when the 2P small win is won, a “white bell” symbol and a “red The combination of symbols is set so that the 2P small winning combination is established by stopping the 7 symbol and the “watermelon” symbol. In this case, as shown in FIG. 70(b3), when the combination of symbols that result in the 2P small winning combination stops at the bend line L6, which is the valid line for the 1-bet game, it is a downward sloping line that is the valid line for the 3-bet game. The combination of symbols for the second minor winning combination stops on the line L4. However, since the downward-sloping line L4 is not a valid line in the one-bet game, even if the combination of symbols that will win the second minor winning combination stops on the downward-sloping line L4 as described above, the second minor winning combination will not be established. .

For example, as shown in FIG. 70(a4), in a 3-bet game, the second minor win (Bell) is won, and the "white bell", "red 7" and "watermelon" symbols stop on the active line. As a result, the second minor winning combination is not established, resulting in a so-called bell dropout. This symbol combination is a transition roll. In a 1-bet game, when the 2nd small winning combination is won, the 2nd small winning combination is established by stopping the "white bell", "red 7", and "red bell" symbols on the active line. Without doing so, it becomes a so-called bell dropout. In this case, as shown in FIG. 70(b4), when the combination of symbols that does not result in the 2nd P minor winning combination and results in a so-called bell dropout is stopped at the bent line L6, which is the effective line in the 1-bet game, the 3-bet game. A combination of symbols (transitional eye) that becomes a so-called bell dropout eye without winning the second minor combination stops on the right downward line L4 which is an effective line in .

As described above, in the specific mode, the winning combination is the same as the winning combination in the 3-bet game as the normal game mode, but is different from the winning combination in the 3-bet game.

Here, in the 3-bet game in the normal game mode, the downward-sloping line L4, which is a straight line, is set as the valid line, while in the specific mode, the bending line L6, which is a line that bends, is set as the valid line. . It is believed that the player will be more likely to notice that the winning combination of symbols stops on a straight line rather than on a curved line. For example, as shown in FIG. , In the specific mode, even if the combination of the ``red 7'' symbol, the ``red 7'' symbol, and the ``watermelon'' symbol, which are the first PBB winning prizes, stops on the bent line L6, which is an effective line, the It is considered that the "red 7" symbols stopping in line with the descending line L4 are the first to be seen. Moreover, the stop roll in which the "red 7" symbols are aligned and stopped on the lower right line L4 is the stop roll in which the first BB win is established in the normal game mode.

Then, for a player who is familiar with the stop result, even if the combination of the first PBB winning symbols stopped on the bending line L6 stops in the specific mode, it is not set as an effective line. It is conceivable that the player may be distracted by the combination of symbols for the 1st BB prize stopped on the line L4, and may judge that the 1st BB prize has been established. In other words, by setting the numbers as described above, when the first PBB prize is established in the specific mode, it is possible to make the player think that the first BB prize is established instead of the first PBB prize.

Similarly, as shown in FIG. 70(b2), in the specific mode, the combination of "watermelon", "watermelon", and "red bell" symbols is stopped on the bend line L6, which is an effective line. In the specific mode, it is more eye-catching that the "watermelon" symbols are aligned and stopped on the lower right line L4, which is not the effective line, and when the 26th P small winning combination is established in the specific mode, the 26th P small win is established. It is possible to make the player think that the 26th minor winning combination has been established instead of winning a winning combination.

In addition, the player is more likely to win if a combination of symbols of the same kind is set as a winning combination than if a combination of different symbols is set as a winning combination. can be easily noticed. In that regard, as shown in FIG. 70(a3), even in the normal game mode, the combination of symbols that establishes the second minor win is the "white bell" symbol, the "red 7" symbol, and the "red 7" symbol on the active line. Although it is set as a combination of red 7" symbols, in the stop result, the same kind of "bell" symbols ("white bell" symbol, "red bell" symbol) are aligned and stopped on the upper line L1. Then, when the second minor winning combination is established, it is considered that the bell winning combination is determined as the second minor winning combination based on the symbol stopped on the upper line L1 than the right downward line L4 which is the effective line. be done. Even in the specific mode, the combination of symbols that establishes the 2nd small winning combination is set as a combination of "white bell", "red 7", and "watermelon" on the active line. In the case of the established stop result, similar "bell" symbols are stopped on the upper line L1 in the same manner as in the second minor combination. Then, when the 2P minor winning combination is established, it is considered that the bell winning combination is determined to have won.

That is, in the present embodiment, a bent line is more easily recognized by a player than a straight line, and a winning mode in which the same kind of symbols are aligned is more likely to be recognized by a player than a winning mode in which different symbols are combined. is used to judge the stop roll in the specific mode as if it were the stop roll in the normal game mode, thereby making it possible to reproduce the pseudo game more realistically.

In addition, the bending line L6 set as the effective line in the specific mode and the right downward line L4 set as the effective line in the normal game mode are common symbol stop positions (left reel 32L, middle reel 32M) are set, and different symbol stop positions (lower and middle stages of the right reel 32R) are set for the right reel 32R. In this way, only the stopping pattern of the right reel 32R needs to be changed when matching winning combinations and winning modes between the specific mode and the normal game mode. Therefore, it is possible to relatively easily associate the winning modes between the specific mode and the normal game mode.

Furthermore, the activated lines in the specific mode and the activated lines in the normal game mode are set so that the lines L1 to L6 do not overlap. This is because, if overlapping effective lines are set, when the combination of symbols that result in the winning of the overlapping effective lines stops, the stopping numbers will differ between the specific mode and the normal game mode. This is because, in spite of the fact that the stopping numbers are made common as described above, it is clearly understood that the winning combinations are different when winning is established with different stopping numbers.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 71 to 73, the correspondence relationship between the combination of winning symbols in the specific mode and the privilege given when winning will be described.

As the wins corresponding to the 1st to 32nd minor wins in the normal game mode, the 1st to 32nd P minor wins are set in the specific mode.

In the specific mode, a “red bell” symbol or “white bell” symbol on the left reel 32L, a “red bell” symbol on the middle reel 32M, and a “first replay” symbol or “second replay symbol” on the right reel 32R. , stops on the bend line L6, which is an effective line, the 1st P minor winning combination is won. When the 1P small winning combination is established, one medal is paid out. The 1st small winning combination corresponds to the 1st small winning combination in the normal game mode, and when the combination of the symbols that will win the 1P small winning combination stops on the bend line L6, which is the effective line in the specific mode, it descends to the right. On the line L4, a "red bell" symbol or a "white bell" symbol stops on the upper stage of the left reel 32L, a "red bell" symbol stops on the middle stage of the middle reel 32M, and a "red bell" symbol stops on the lower stage of the right reel 32R. ” The symbol stops. In other words, the "bell" symbol stops on the right downward line L4.

A "red bell" symbol or "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, a "red 7" symbol, a "cherry" symbol, a "BAR" symbol or a "white bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and a "watermelon" symbol on the right reel 32R. ” symbols stop on the bend line L6, which is an effective line, the 2nd P to 17th P minor winning prizes are awarded. When the 2nd P minor winning prize to the 17th P minor winning prize are established, one medal is paid out. The 2P small winning combination to the 17P small winning combination correspond to the 2nd small winning combination to the 17th small winning combination in the normal game mode. When the combination of symbols that result in a 17P small winning prize stops, on the downward right line L4, a "red bell" symbol or a "white bell" symbol stops on the upper stage of the left reel 32L, and a "red bell" symbol stops on the middle stage of the middle reel 32M. The "bell" symbol stops, and the "red bell" symbol stops at the lower stage of the right reel 32R. That is, the "bell" pattern stops on the upper line L1.

Of the 2nd P small win to the 17th P small win, the 2nd P small win, the 3rd P small win, the 6th P small win and the 7th P small win are the same, and the 4th P small win, the 5th P small win, The 8th P small win and the 9th P small win are the same, the 10th P small win, the 11th P small win, the 14th P small win and the 15th P small win are the same rolls, the 12th P small win and the 13th P small win The winning combination, the 16th P small winning combination and the 17th P small winning combination have the same outcome. In other words, the hands of these same numbers are the same in the specific mode. However, in the following explanation, each role is different for comparison with the normal game mode.

The 18th P minor winning combination is a winning mode in which the "Cherry" symbol on the left reel 32L stops at the upper or lower stage. When the 18th P small win is established, one medal is paid out in the 1-bet game. The 18th P small winning combination corresponds to the 18th small winning combination in the normal game mode, and when the combination of symbols for winning the 18P small winning combination stops on the bending line L6, which is the effective line in the specific mode, it descends to the right. The combination of symbols for the 18th minor winning combination stops on the line L4.

"Red 7", "BAR", and "Watermelon" symbols on the left reel 32L, "Red Bell" symbols on the middle reel 32M, and "First Replay" or "Second Replay" symbols on the right reel 32R. , is stopped on the active line, the 19th P small win is won. When the 19th P minor win is established, one medal is paid out in the 1-bet game. The 19th small winning combination corresponds to the 19th small winning combination in the normal game mode, and when the combination of symbols that will win the 19th small winning combination stops on the bend line L6, which is the effective line in the specific mode, it descends to the right. The symbol combination of the 19th minor winning combination stops on the line L4.

The 20th small winning combination to the 24th small winning combination correspond to the 20th small winning combination to the 24th small winning combination in the normal game mode. Then, one medal is paid out. Incidentally, the 20th P small win and the 21st P small win, and the 22nd P small win and the 23rd P small win are wins with the same numbers, and are treated as the same win. However, for comparison with the normal game mode, each will be described as a different role.

The 25th P small winning combination is a winning mode in which the "Cherry" symbol on the left reel 32L stops at the upper or lower stage, like the 18P small winning combination. In the case of the 18th P minor winning prize, only when the special 1st BB or PBB, which is the special 2nd BB, is won, the "Red 7" or "White 7" pattern on the right reel 32R stops in the middle row. (combination of "second replay" symbol, "BAR" symbol, "red 7" symbol or "white 7" symbol), but in the case of winning the 25th P minor winning combination, the right reel 32R is regardless of whether or not the PBB win has been won. A "Red 7" symbol or a "White 7" symbol can be stopped in the middle row. When the 25th P minor win is established, one medal is paid out in the 1-bet game. The 25th P small winning combination corresponds to the 25th small winning combination in the normal game mode, and when the combination of symbols for winning the 25P small winning combination stops on the bending line L6, which is the effective line in the specific mode, it descends to the right. The symbol combination of the 25th minor winning combination stops on the line L4.

When the "watermelon" symbol or "BAR" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "watermelon" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "red bell" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the bent line L6, which is an effective line. is the 26th P minor role winning prize. When the 26th P minor win is established, one medal is paid out in the 1-bet game. The 26th P small winning combination corresponds to the 26th small winning combination in the normal game mode, and when the combination of symbols that will win the 26P small winning combination stops on the bending line L6, which is the effective line in the specific mode, it descends to the right. The symbol combination of the 26th minor winning combination stops on the line L4.

The 27th P small winning combination is a winning mode in which the so-called Watermelon Tenpai is lost, and when the 27th P small winning combination is established, one medal is paid out in the 1-bet game. The 27th P small winning combination corresponds to the 27th small winning combination in the normal game mode, and when the combination of symbols for winning the 27P small winning combination stops on the bending line L6, which is the effective line in the specific mode, it descends to the right. The symbol combination of the 27th minor winning combination stops on the line L4.

"Red bell" or "White bell" pattern on the left reel 32L, "Red 7" pattern, "BAR" pattern, "White bell" pattern, "Cherry" pattern, and "Youth" pattern on the middle reel 32M. When the "first replay" symbol or the "second replay" symbol on the reel 32R stops on the bent line L6, which is an active line, the 28P minor winning combination is won. The 28th P small winning combination is a so-called double-tenpai-missing stop roll. When the 28th P minor win is established, one medal is paid out in the 1-bet game. The 28th P small winning combination corresponds to the 28th small winning combination in the normal game mode, and when the combination of symbols for winning the 28P small winning combination stops on the bending line L6, which is the effective line in the specific mode, it descends to the right. The symbol combination of the 28th minor winning combination stops on the line L4.

When the "watermelon" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "red bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "red bell" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the bent line L6, which is an effective line, the 29th P small win. Win a prize. When the 29th P small win is established, one medal is paid out in the 1-bet game. The 29th small winning combination corresponds to the 29th small winning combination in the normal game mode, and when the combination of symbols that will win the 29th small winning combination stops on the bend line L6, which is the effective line in the specific mode, it descends to the right. The symbol combination of the 29th minor winning combination stops on the line L4.

A "red bell" symbol or a "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, a "red bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and a "watermelon" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the bend line L6 which is an effective line. In that case, the 30th P minor winning prize will be awarded. When the 30th P minor win is established, one medal is paid out in the 1-bet game. The 30P small winning combination corresponds to the 30th small winning combination in the normal game mode, and when the combination of symbols that will win the 30P small winning combination stops on the bend line L6, which is the effective line in the specific mode, it descends to the right. The symbol combination of the 30th minor winning combination stops on the line L4.

The "red bell" symbol or "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "red bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "red 7" symbol or "white 7" symbol on the right reel 32R are valid lines. When it stops on the bending line L6, the 31P minor winning combination is won. When the 31P minor win is established, one medal is paid out in the 1-bet game. The 31P small winning combination corresponds to the 31st small winning combination in the normal game mode, and when the combination of symbols that will win the 31P small winning combination stops on the bend line L6, which is the effective line in the specific mode, it descends to the right. The symbol combination of the 31st minor winning combination stops on the line L4.

When the "watermelon" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "white 7" symbol or "cherry" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "red bell" symbol on the right reel 32R are stopped on the bend line L6 which is an effective line. , it will be the 32nd P small role winning prize. When the 32nd P minor win is established, one medal is paid out in the 1-bet game. The 32nd P small winning combination corresponds to the 32nd small winning combination in the normal game mode, and when the combination of symbols that will win the 32P small winning combination stops on the bend line L6, which is the effective line in the specific mode, it descends to the right. The symbol combination of the 32nd minor winning combination stops on the line L4.

As with the 30th to 32nd minor wins, the 30th P to 32P minor wins are wins that can be won during the bonus.

As already explained, in the normal game mode, the first re-game winning to the eighth re-game winning are given as the prize for replaying the next game without inserting medals. is set. On the other hand, as a replay in the specific mode, a special regame win is set in correspondence with the first regame win. Then, in the specific mode, as a win corresponding to the 2nd replay win to the 8th replay win, the second replay small win is a small win in which one medal is paid out when the win is established instead of the replay. Winning to 8th Rip Minor Winning is set.

That is, the "red bell" pattern or "white bell" pattern on the left reel 32L, the "first replay" pattern or "second replay" pattern on the middle reel 32M, and the "first replay" pattern or " When the "second replay" symbol stops on the bend line L6, which is an effective line, a special replay prize is awarded. When a special replay win is established, the next game can be played as a replay without inserting medals. The special replay corresponds to the first replay in the normal game mode, and as shown in FIG. 74(a), the special replay winning symbol is placed on the bent line L6, which is the effective line in the specific mode. When the combination is stopped, the combination of symbols for the first replay win is stopped on the lower right line L4. In this case, the combination of "replay" symbols is stopped on the middle line L2.

The "BAR" symbol or "watermelon" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "first replay" symbol or "second replay" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "red bell" symbol on the right reel 32R are valid lines. When it stops on the bending line L6, it becomes a second prize for a small winning combination. When the second Rip small winning prize is established, one medal is paid out in the one-bet game. The second minor winning combination corresponds to the second replay in the normal game mode, and as shown in FIG. When the combination of symbols for the second re-game win stops, the combination of symbols for the second re-game win stops on the lower right line L4. In this case, the combination of "replay" symbols stops on the upward right line L5.

The "first replay" symbol or "second replay" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "first replay" symbol or "second replay" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "first replay" symbol or "second replay" symbol on the right reel 32R. When the second replay symbol stops on the bend line L6, which is an effective line, the third replay wins. When the 3rd Rip Small Winning is established, 1 medal is paid out in the 1-bet game. The 3rd minor winning combination corresponds to the 3rd replay in the normal game mode, and as shown in FIG. When the combination of the symbols to become , stops, the combination of the symbols of the third replay winning prize stops on the lower right line L4.

The fourth small winning combination corresponds to the fourth replay in the normal game mode. When the 4th Rip small winning prize is established, one medal is paid out in the 1-bet mode. Then, as shown in FIGS. 74(d) to 74(g), when the combination of symbols for the above-mentioned 4th minor winning combination stops on the bend line L6, which is the effective line in the specific mode, the right down line L4 is displayed. , the combination of symbols for the fourth replay winning prize is stopped.

The "Red 7" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "Red 7" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "Red 7" symbol or "White 7" symbol on the right reel 32R are stopped on the bend line L6 which is an effective line. Or, a bend where the "white 7" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "white 7" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "red 7" symbol or the "white 7" symbol on the right reel 32R are valid lines. If it stops on the line L6, it will win the fifth minor winning combination. When the 5th Rip small winning prize is established, 1 medal is paid out in the 1-bet game. The 5th small winning combination corresponds to the 5th replay in the normal game mode, and as shown in FIGS. When the combination of symbols for the fifth small winning combination stops, the combination of symbols for the fifth replay winning combination stops on the lower right line L4.

"First Replay" symbol or "Second Replay" symbol on the left reel 32L, "First Replay" symbol or "Second Replay" symbol on the middle reel 32M, "BAR" symbol on the right reel 32R, and "Youth" When the symbol or the "watermelon" symbol stops on the bend line L6, which is an effective line, the 6th reply wins a minor role. When the 6th Rip small winning prize is established, one medal is paid out in the 1-bet game. The 6th small winning combination corresponds to the 6th replay in the normal game mode, and as shown in FIG. When the combination of the symbols to become , stops, the combination of the symbols of the sixth replay winning prize stops on the lower right line L4.

When the "first replay" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "BAR" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "BAR" symbol or the "youth" symbol on the right reel 32R are stopped on the bend line L6 which is an effective line. , won the 7th Lip Small Role Award. When the 7th Rip small winning prize is established, 1 medal is paid out in the 1-bet game. The 7th minor winning combination corresponds to the 7th replay in the normal game mode, and as shown in FIG. When the combination of the symbols to become , stops, the combination of the symbols of the 7th re-game win stops on the lower right line L4.

When the "first replay" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "BAR" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "red bell" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the bent line L6, which is an active line, 8 Rip won a small role award. When the 8th Rip small winning prize is established, one medal is paid out in the 1-bet game. The 8th minor winning combination corresponds to the 8th replay in the normal game mode, and as shown in FIG. When the combination of the symbols to become , stops, the combination of the symbols of the third replay winning prize stops on the lower right line L4.

Corresponding to the 1st BB winning, 2nd BB winning and CB winning in the normal game mode, in the specific mode, 1st PBB winning (special 1BB winning), 2nd PBB winning (special 2BB winning), PCB winning (special CB Winning, SB winning) are provided.

The first PBB prize corresponds to the first BB prize. , stops on the bend line L6 which is an effective line, the first PBB prize is won, and the game state shifts to a special bonus state as the bonus is established. Also, when the "white 7" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "white 7" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "watermelon" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the bent line L6, which is an effective line, or the left When the “white bell” symbol on the reel 32L, the “second replay” symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the “watermelon” symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the bent line L6, which is an active line, the second PBB A prize is won, and the game state shifts to a special bonus state as a bonus establishment. A "red bell" pattern or a "white bell" pattern on the left reel 32L, a "red bell" pattern on the middle reel 32M, and a "red bell" pattern on the right reel 32R stop on the bend line L6 which is an effective line. If so, the PCB wins, and the game state shifts to the special CB state as a bonus establishment. Incidentally, in this embodiment, it is set so as not to win the PCB prize, and the PCB prize is not established.

A special transition outcome is set in the specific mode as a stop outcome corresponding to the transition outcome in the normal game mode. A "red bell" symbol or "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, a "red 7" symbol, a "BAR" symbol, a "white bell" symbol or a "cherry" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and a "red bell" symbol on the right reel 32R. "Bell" symbol stops on the bent line L6 as an active line, or "red bell" symbol or "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L and "white 7" symbol and "watermelon" on the middle reel 32M. When the symbol or the "first replay" symbol and the "watermelon" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the bending line L6, a special transition is made. 75(e) and 75(f), when the combination of the special transition symbols stops on the bend line L6, which is the effective line of the specific mode. , the combination of the transitional symbols stops on the downward-sloping line L4.

In addition, in the specific mode, as a combination that does not correspond to the combination in the normal game mode, a first minor combination and a minor combination are provided.

The "first replay" symbol or "second replay" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "red bell" symbol or "watermelon" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "red bell" symbol on the right reel 32R are valid lines. If it stops on a certain bending line L6, it will win the 1st minor winning combination. When the 1st minor winning combination is established, 1 medal is paid out in the 1-bet game. As shown in FIG. 75(g), when the combination of symbols for winning the above-mentioned 1st minor winning combination stops on the bend line L6, which is the effective line of the specific mode, basically, the "first 1 Replay" symbols or "Second Replay" symbols are aligned and stopped.

A bent line L6 in which the "first replay" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "red bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "first replay" symbol or the "second replay" symbol on the right reel 32R are effective lines. If it stops on the top, it will be a small winning prize. When a winning small winning combination is established, one medal is paid out in the one-bet game. As shown in FIG. 75(h), when the combination of symbols that result in the above-mentioned small winning combination stops on the bent line L6, which is the effective line of the specific mode, all the symbols are aligned on each of the straight lines L1 to L5. It does not stop and becomes a loose eye.

A lottery table in the specific mode will be described with reference to FIG. Here, in the specific mode, each RT state is not set as a game state unlike the normal game mode, but a normal game state and a bonus state (special bonus state) are set. The lottery table of FIG. 76 is a lottery table referred to during the normal game state in the specific mode.

By the way, even if the specific mode game is executed during each RT state in the normal game mode, the lottery table for the normal game state in the specific mode can be referred to. Further, when a game in the normal game mode is executed during the normal game state in the specific mode, the lottery table for each RT state in the normal game mode can be referred to.

In the lottery table for the specific mode, 0 is set as the point value PV for all the index values IV=1 to 49, and the winning flag is not set for the index values IV=1 to 49 (affirmative determination in step S305). do not). Note that index values IV=1 to 49 are omitted in the figure.

At the index value IV=50, a winning small combination and a first small winning combination are set as winning combinations. The index value IV=51 corresponds to the normal replay (IV=1) in the normal game mode, and the special replay is set as the winning combination. The index values IV=52-55 correspond to the first promotion replays 1-4 (IV=2-5) in the normal game mode, and are called special first promotion replays 1-4. As the winning combination, in addition to the 1st small winning combination, the 3rd small winning combination, the 6th small winning combination to the 8th small small winning combination, and the small missing winning combination are set. Index values IV=56 to 58 correspond to falling replays 1 to 3 (IV=6 to 8) in the normal game mode, and are called special falling replays 1 to 3. As the winning combination, in addition to the 1st small winning combination, the 2nd small winning combination, the 6th small winning combination to the 7th small small winning combination, and the small missing winning combination are set. Index values IV=59, 60 correspond to second promotion replays 1, 2 (IV=9, 10) in the normal game mode, and are called special second promotion replays 1, 2. As the winning combination, in addition to the first small winning combination, the fourth small winning combination and the fifth small winning combination, the losing small winning combination is set. Index values IV=61, 62 correspond to BAR replays 1, 2 (IV=11, 12) in the normal game mode, and are called special BAR replays 1, 2. As the winning combination, in addition to the first small winning combination, the third small winning combination, the sixth small winning combination to the eighth small small winning combination, and the small missing winning combination are set. The index values IV=63 to 99 correspond to each minor combination and bonus (IV=13 to 49) in the normal game mode, and corresponding winning combinations are set.

If the lottery table shown in FIG. 76 is used to determine whether or not a role is won, the probability of winning the special replay (probability of winning when IV=51) is about 1/7.3, and the probability of winning the special replay is about 1/7.3. The probability of winning (probability of winning when IV = 63) is about 1/263, and the probability of winning special low cherry (probability of winning when IV = 64) is about 1/183. be. The probability of winning a special watermelon (probability of winning when IV = 65) is about 1/154, and the probability of winning special chance A (probability of winning when IV = 66) is about 252 minutes. 1, the probability of winning the special chance B (the probability of winning when IV=67) is about 1/252. The probability of winning the special middle bell (probability of winning when IV=68) is about 1/32800, and the probability of winning the special no-question bell (probability of winning when IV=69) is about 65500. 1/1. The odds of winning special forward-pushing bell 1, special forward-pushing bell 2, special pinch-pushing bell 1, and special pinch-pushing bell 2 (probability of winning when IV=70-73) are about 1/164, respectively. The odds of winning special middle push bell 1, special middle push bell 2, special right push bell 1, and special right push bell 2 (probability of winning when IV=74-77) are about 1/16.4 respectively. be. The probability of winning the special strong cherry stack 1 (probability of winning when IV = 81) is about 1/1770, the probability of winning the special strong cherry stack 2 (probability of winning when IV = 82) ) is approx. The odds of winning on 84) are about 1 in 6550. The probability of winning Special Watermelon Duplication 1 (probability of winning when IV = 85) is about 1/3280, and the probability of winning Special Watermelon Duplication 2 (probability of winning when IV = 86) is It is about 1/6550. The probability of winning Special Chance A Duplication 1, Special Chance A Duplication 2, Special Chance B Duplication 1, Special Chance B Duplication 2 (probability of winning when IV = 87 to 90) is about 1/3280. be. The odds of winning special middle-stage bell overlap 1 and special middle-stage bell overlap 2 (probabilities of winning when IV=91 and 92) are about 1/2620, respectively. The probability of winning the first PBB and the second PBB alone (probability of winning when IV=93 and 94) is about 1/65500, respectively.

That is, in the specific mode, special replay, special strong cherry, special weak cherry, special watermelon, special chance A, B, special middle bell, special unquestioned bell, special forward push bell 1, 2, special sandwich push bell 1, 2, Special middle push bell 1,2, special right push bell 1,2, special strong cherry overlap 1,2, special weak cherry overlap 1,2, special watermelon overlap 1,2, special chance A overlap 1,2, special chance B overlap 1, 2, the probability of winning special middle bell duplication 1, 2, 1st PBB, 2nd PBB, during the normal game state in the normal game mode, normal replay, strong cherry, weak cherry, watermelon, chance A, chance B, middle bell, no question bell, forward push bell 1,2, sandwich push bell 1,2, middle push bell 1,2, right push bell 1,2, strong cherry overlap 1,2, weak cherry overlap 1,2, watermelon overlap 1 , 2, chance A duplication 1, 2, chance B duplication 1, 2, middle bell duplication 1, 2, 1st BB, 2nd BB.

Although each of the above special roles has the same winning probability as each role in the normal game mode, the probability may not be completely the same, and the probability may be slightly different. In this case, the probabilities should be such that the player cannot recognize that the winning probabilities are different.

Also, in the specific mode, when judging whether or not a role is appropriate using the lottery table shown in FIG. Replays 1 and 2, special BAR replays 1 and 2, and a combination of 1 out of position (hereinafter referred to as "special pushing order replay") are won. Specifically, the probability of winning special 1st promotion replays 1-4 (probability of winning when IV = 52-55) is about 1/8.2, and winning special fall replays 1-3 The probability of winning (probability of winning when IV = 56 to 58) is about 1/8.2, and the probability of winning the special second promotion replay 1 and 2 (winning when IV = 59, 60) probability) is about 1/8.2, and the probability of winning special BAR replays 1 and 2 (probability of winning when IV=61 and 62) is about 1/8.2. Then, the probability of winning the winning one-card combination (the probability of winning when IV=50) is about 1/35.

As already explained, PCBs do not win in certain modes. Also, in the specific mode, the probability of not winning any combination in the normal game state is 0, and any combination is always won.

That is, in the specific mode of the present embodiment, the combination corresponding to each combination in the normal game mode is won with the same probability, and the combination corresponding to the combination (special First promotion replays 1-4, special fall replays 1-3, special second promotion replays 1 and 2, special BAR replays 1 and 2, hereinafter collectively referred to as "special transition roles") are also normal games in specific modes win in the state.

As described above, the winning combination of the special transition combination is set so as to include a small winning combination. When the special transition combination is won, depending on the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44, it is different whether the winning small winning combination is established or the winning other small winning combination is established.

FIG. 77 is an explanatory diagram showing the correspondence between the winning combination, the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, and the winning mode established.

As shown in FIG. 77(b), when special first promotion replays 1 to 4 are won, regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44, the winning small winning combination and the winning small winning combination of the first replay , 3rd minor winning combination is always established, and which minor winning combination is established depends on the order of operation of the stop switches 42-44. As shown in FIG. 77(c), when the special fall replays 1 to 3 are won, regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44, the winning small winning prize, the first winning small winning prize, the third One of the two minor winning prizes is always established, and which minor winning prize is established depends on the order of operation of the stop switches 42-44. Also, if you win the special 2nd promotion replay 1, 2, regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44, it is possible to win a small winning role, 4th small winning role, and 5th small winning role. Either one is established without fail, and which minor win is established differs depending on the order of operation of the stop switches 42-44. As shown in FIG. 77(d), when the special BAR replays 1 and 2 are won, regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44, the winning small winning prize, the first winning small winning prize, the Any one of the 6th minor winning combination to the 8th minor winning combination is always established, and which minor winning combination is established depends on the order of operation of the stop switches 42-44.

When winning special first promotion replays 1 to 4, special fall replays 1 to 3, special second promotion replays 1 and 2, and special BAR replays 1 and 2, the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in order from the left. In both cases, the order of operation and the winning mode are related so that a small combination win is established. In other words, in the specific mode, even if these special transition hands are won in the normal game state, as long as the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in order from the left, various small winning prizes are not won. It is set so that winning of a role is established, and even if these special transitional roles are won, unless the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 is matched, various small winnings of a reply will not be established. In other words, even if these special transition roles are won, if the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 is matched, it is possible to establish various small role prizes.

In addition, the single winning combination in the specific mode is set to include a small winning combination as a winning combination. It is different whether the rip small role winning prize is established.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 77(a), in the case of winning the winning combination of one piece of the winning combination, regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44, the winning small winning combination and the first small winning combination are selected. One of the winning combinations is always established, and which minor winning combination is established depends on the order of operation of the stop switches 42-44.

Also in the single winning combination, the operation order and the winning mode are related so that if the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated from the left, a winning small winning combination is established. That is, in the specific mode, in the case of winning the single winning combination in the normal game state, as long as the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in order from the left, the small winning combination is established and the operation order is matched. Unless there is, the 1st Rip Small Role Winning will not be established. In other words, even if the single winning combination is won, if the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the correct order, it is possible to establish the first minor winning combination.

In addition, the special push order bells (special order push bells 1, 2, special sandwich push bells 1, 2, special middle push bells 1, 2, special right push bells 1, 2) in the specific mode are similar to the normal game mode, The order of operation of the stop switches 42-44 and the bell that is established are different, and depending on the timing of operation of the stop switches 42-44, the corresponding winning may not be established.

That is, as shown in FIG. 78, for example, when the special middle-pressing bell 1 is won, the 2nd P minor winning prize or the 5P minor winning prize is established when the left stop switch 42 is operated first. The stop information is set, the stop information is set so that the 1st small winning combination is established when the middle stop switch 43 is operated first, and the 2P small winning combination is won when the right stop switch 44 is operated first. Alternatively, the stop information is set so that the 5th P small winning prize is established. Then, when the corresponding winning prize is not established depending on the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44, the special transition result stops at the bending line L6.

<Switching effect of game mode>
The normal game mode and the specific mode can be switched by the player operating the second effect switch 67 while the game is not being played (the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped). It's becoming In this case, based on the operation of the second effect switch 67, a switching effect between the normal game mode and the specific mode is performed.

When switching to the specific mode, for example, as shown in FIG. 79(a), as an effect at the time of switching to the specific mode, the text "free mode" indicating the specific mode and the fact that the specific mode is a practice mode are displayed. As a display for making the user understand, for example, a phrase with a speech bubble, "Practice with us!", is displayed by a girl character. In addition, in the effect at the time of switching to the specific mode, a display for teaching that the second effect switch 67 is operated again to return to the normal game mode is performed.

When switching to the normal game mode, for example, as shown in FIG. A display is provided to teach that switching to the specific mode is possible.

As described above, the display switching between the normal game mode and the specific mode is performed by the second effect switch 67 connected to the display control device 81 on the sub side. In the slot machine 10, information is output from the main control device 101 side to the display control device 81 by various commands, but information is not output from the display control device 81 side to the main control device 101. . This is intended to reduce the amount of information input to the main controller 101, which mainly performs processing related to the player's profit, as much as possible, thereby making it difficult for the player to illegally enjoy a profit. Therefore, whether or not the game mode switching effect is performed on the display control device 81 side is not specified on the main control device 101 side. It remains to perform switching. By doing so, it is possible to play different games between the normal game mode and the specific mode without significantly increasing the processing load on the side of the main control unit 101, which performs the winning/losing determination (lottery processing) related to the profit of the player. mode is possible.

<Description of processing on main controller 101 side when betting one card>
The flow of processing on the main controller 101 side when the number of bets is one will be described.

In the normal process (FIG. 29), after the start waiting process of step S204 is performed, it is determined whether or not the number of bets is the specified number in step S205. A positive determination in step S205 means a case where it is determined that the number of bets has reached a specified number according to the gaming state. If the number of bets is 1 or 3, it is determined that the prescribed number has been reached. In other words, in step S205, the execution of the specific mode of the 1-bet mode is allowed regardless of whether or not the display control device 81 is performing the switching effect.

In the mode shift notification process in step S206, as shown in FIG. 49, if the number of precursor games is not 0 (step S1101: NO), this notification process is terminated. As for counting the number of precursor games, it is not counted when the number of bets is one, as will be described later. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the phenomenon that the number of premonitory games in the normal game mode is subtracted during the game in the specific mode. Also, if the number of precursor games is 0 (step S1101: YES), regardless of the number of bets, output settings for the challenge mode start command, the attack winning notification command, and the VB mode winning notification command are performed (steps S1105 and S1110). , step S1114). Therefore, when the number of predictive games becomes 0 in the previous game played in the normal game mode, this fact is reliably reported at the time of betting regardless of the number of bets in the next game, for example, in the normal game mode. If an attack mode or the like is won, it is possible to recognize it and play a game in a specific mode.

The bet command set in step S207 in the normal process includes information on the number of bets for the game to be started this time. That is, information that the first credit insertion switch 56 has been operated and three cards have been bet, information that the second credit insertion switch 57 has been operated and one card has been bet, and third credit insertion. Information that the switch 58 has been operated and two cards have been bet is included. This time, since the game is a one-coin bet, the bet command set in step S207 includes information that a one-coin bet has been made.

When the start lever 41 is operated (step S208: YES), a valid line setting process is performed in step S209. Since this time is a 1-bet game, the bend line L6 is set as a valid line, and the other lines L1 to L5 are not set as valid lines.

In the lottery process of step S211, as shown in FIG. 30, in step S302, a lottery table (FIG. 76) for a specific mode corresponding to the number of bets this time is obtained. Then, the winning/failing determination process of steps S303 to S308 is performed based on the lottery table. In other words, only the lottery table used is different depending on the number of bets, and the winning/failure determination process is performed in common regardless of the number of bets.

Incidentally, in the lottery table (FIG. 31, etc.) referred to in the normal game mode, 0 is set as the point value PV for all of the index values IV=50 to 99. Therefore, in the specific mode, it is set not only to not win each combination of the normal game mode, but also to prevent each special combination for the specific mode from being won in the normal game mode.

In the lottery result handling process in step S310, when one card is bet, the specific combination (strong cherry, weak cherry, watermelon, chance A, B, middle bell, overlapping strong cherry 1, 2, overlapping weak cherry 1, 2, watermelon Duplication 1, 2, Chance A duplication 1, 2, Chance B duplication 1, 2, middle bell duplication 1, 2) and push order role (1st promotion replay 1-4, fall replay 1-3, 2nd promotion replay 1, 2, BAR replay 1, 2 "push order replay", forward push bell 1, 2, sandwich push bell 1, 2, middle push bell 1, 2, right push bell 1, 2 ) will not be elected. Therefore, when betting one card, none of the first special combination process, the second special combination process, the third special combination process, and the winning combination process shown in FIG. 45 is performed. In addition, in the special zone process as well, in the add-on lottery table in the add-on lottery process of the attack mode, the number of add-on games is set for the combination that does not win when one is bet. Therefore, even if the process for the special zone is performed by betting one card, the number of games is not increased. By the way, since the number of continuous games in the specialized zone is not counted when one bet is made, even if a game is played in a specific mode during the specialized zone, the number of continuous games in the specialized zone will not be affected. .

In the lottery process (FIG. 30), after the lottery result correspondence process is performed, the lottery result command is set in step S311. Regardless of the number of bets, information on the current lottery result is set in the lottery result command. Therefore, at the time of betting one card, the current lottery result command includes information on any one of the various special roles to be won at IV=50 to 99 (FIG. 76).

After executing the lottery process in the normal process (FIG. 29), the reel control process (step S212) is performed. In the reel control process, regardless of the number of bets, a process for starting rotation (steps S401 to S402) and a process for stopping rotation (steps S403 to S412) are performed, and when all reels are stopped (step S411 : YES), payout determination processing is performed in step S413. In the payout determination process, on the condition that the winning combination corresponds to the win flag, the payout of the number of medals corresponding to the winning combination is set. When one coin is bet, payout of one medal is set as a privilege (FIGS. 71 to 73) associated with each winning combination.

In the winning result handling process, in the game number management process (FIG. 53) of step S1301, if the number of bets is 1 as a specific number in step S1401, each process (steps S1402 to S1427) is not performed. End this management process. Therefore, when betting one card, subtraction processing of the number of omen games, subtraction processing of the number of continuous challenge mode, subtraction processing of the number of continuous attack mode, subtraction processing of the number of continuous VB mode, and subtraction processing of the number of specialized zone continuous are performed. do not have. In addition, since the 3rd to 5th re-game wins and the 7th re-game wins are not established when one card is bet, negative determinations are made in each of the processes in steps S1302, S1308, and S1314, and the process corresponding to the winning results is terminated. .

In the reel control process (FIG. 32), after the winning result corresponding process is performed, the process of setting the winning result command is performed in step S415. Regardless of the number of bets, information on the current winning result is set in the winning result command. Therefore, when betting one card, 1st small win to 32nd small win, special replay, 1st small win to 8th small win, 1st PBB, 2nd PBB, PCB, special transition roll, small loss Information on the winning result of any winning combination is included in the current winning result command.

In the normal process (FIG. 29), in the medal payout process (step S213), one medal is paid out as each privilege when betting one medal. In the RT state process (FIG. 35) of step S214, when one card is bet, neither the transition roll nor the 2nd to 5th regame wins are established, so each RT setting flag is not processed. In other words, the RT state does not shift when one card is bet.

In the bonus state process (FIG. 40) of step S215, the set number of the maximum payout amount in the bonus differs depending on the bonus to be won. Specifically, the special BB determined in step S612 indicates the first PBB or the second PBB, and these bonuses are bonuses that are won only when one is bet. If it is determined in step S612 that the bonus won this time is the special BB, the number of remaining payouts is set to 24 in step S614. The reason why the maximum payout number is different between the first BB and second BB and the first PBB and second PBB will be described later in detail.

In the bonus state process, in the end determination process (FIG. 54), it is determined whether or not there is a minor winning prize regardless of the number of bets in step S1501, and the current payout amount is subtracted from the remaining payout amount (step S1502). . During the bonus state when one coin is bet, the 29th P small winning combination to the 31st P small winning combination are established, and one medal is paid out for each. In other words, when one coin is bet, the number of medals cannot be expected to increase even in the bonus state, and the number of medals does not decrease. When the remaining number of payouts becomes 0 (step S1504: YES), a bonus end command is set (step S1505). Such processing is the same as when three cards are bet.

However, when one card is bet, various mode win flags and various addition flags are not set when the 1st PBB, 2nd PBB is won, and during the bonus state. .

Here, regardless of the number of bets, only one bonus can be won and carried over at one time in each state, and it is set so that when one bonus is won, another bonus will not be won. It is More specifically, regardless of the number of bets, if one of the BBs is won in each state, the other BBs are not won. Therefore, at the time of betting three cards, in the situation where the 1BB is won or in the bonus state based on the 1BB winning, the lottery for the 1BB as well as the 2BB is not performed, and the situation where the 2BB is won or the 2nd BB is not drawn. In the bonus state based on the winning of the 2BB, neither the 2BB nor the 1BB is drawn. In addition, when betting one card, in the situation where the first PBB is won or in the bonus state based on the first PBB winning, the lottery for the second PBB as well as the first PBB is not performed, and the situation where the second PBB is won or the second PBB is not drawn. In the bonus state based on the winning of the 2PBB, the lottery for the 1st PBB as well as the 2nd PBB is not performed.

Furthermore, when betting 3 cards, in a situation where the 1st BB or 2nd BB is won, or in a bonus state based on the 1st BB or 2nd BB winning, even if the game is played with 1 bet, the 1st PBB or the 2nd PBB No lottery will be held. Conversely, when betting 1 card, in a situation where the 1st PBB or 2nd PBB is won, or in a bonus state based on winning the 1st PBB or 2nd PBB, even if the game is played with 3 bets, the 1st BB or the 2nd BB No lottery will be held.

Therefore, in the present slot machine 10, each BB will not be won redundantly, and the bonus state will not be duplicated.

As described above, in a game when one card is bet, the main control device 101 basically sends a bet command including information that one card has been bet, and lottery result information when one card is bet. and a winning result command including information on the winning result when betting one card are output to the display control device 81 . On the display control device 81 side, on the basis of these commands, notification processing is performed to simulate a game in the normal game mode.

<Description of the processing on the side of the display control device 81 when one card is bet>
In the specific mode, the display mode in the normal game mode is simulated. Specifically, in the specific mode, the challenge mode, attack mode, VB mode, and specialized zone in the normal game mode are replaced with a pseudo display challenge mode, display attack mode, display VB mode, and display special zone, respectively. experience it as a transformation zone. These modes for display are shifted based on the result of the lottery at the time of betting one card and the result of winning a prize.

Specifically, the display challenge mode includes special specific roles (special strong cherry, special weak cherry, special watermelon, special chance A, B, special middle bell, special strong cherry overlap 1, 2, special weak cherry overlap 1, 2. Special watermelon duplication 1, 2, special chance A duplication 1, 2, special chance B duplication 1, 2, special middle bell duplication 1, 2) Transfer by winning the transfer lottery performed based on the winning.

Also, the attack mode for display can be shifted by winning the transition lottery based on the winning of the special special combination. However, the attack mode for display is shifted when the shift lottery is won and when the 3rd minor winning combination is established.

The VB mode for display can be shifted to by winning the transfer lottery that is performed when the above special special role is won during the attack mode for display. However, the VB mode for display is shifted to when the transition lottery is won and when the fourth and fifth minor winning prizes are established.

Further, the special zone for display shifts to the VB mode for display when the special BAR replay is won and the 7th replay minor winning prize is established.

Hereinafter, the flow of processing on the side of the display control device 81 when the number of bets is one, which enables transition to each of these display modes, will be mainly described.

The processing at the time of betting one card on the display control device 81 side can be broadly divided into the specific mode betting effect setting processing in the betting effect setting processing (FIG. 57) and the specific mode betting effect setting processing (FIG. 58) at the start of the betting effect setting processing. There is an effect setting process for a specific mode in the effect setting process at the start and the effect setting process at the stop (FIG. 60). Each will be described below.

<Specific mode betting effect setting process>
First, the specific mode betting effect setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. As already described, this effect setting process is a process that is executed when the received betting command is a betting command corresponding to the specific number of bets (1) (step S1801: YES).

The specific mode betting effect setting process is roughly divided into a specific mode start process (steps S2501 to S2506) and a mode transition notification process (steps S2507 to S2521).

That is, as the processing for starting the specific mode, first, in step S2501, it is determined whether or not the specific mode flag is set in the various flag storage area 183a. The specific mode flag is a flag that is set based on the operation of the second effect switch 67, and the CPU 181 identifies the state in which the specific mode flag is set as the specific mode. If not, it is determined in step S2502 whether or not a start command has been received. The start command is a lottery result command or the like output from the main controller 101 based on the operation of the start lever 41 .

If it is determined in step S2502 that the start command has been received, the bet command determined as the bet command corresponds to betting one card, and the start lever 41 is not switched to the specific mode. This is the case when the start operation of is performed. Specifically, for example, the act of winning the 1st BB or the like in the normal game mode and trying to achieve the 1st BB winning by betting 1 card in the next game or later. In this case, after setting other effects at the time of betting in step S2503, this effect setting process is terminated. In step S2503, for example, a process of turning off the built-in lamps of the credit insertion switches 56 to 58 based on the bet operation is performed.

When it determines with not having received the command at the time of a start in step S2502, it progresses to step S2504 and determines whether there was operation of the 2nd production|presentation switch 67 as a switching button. If the second production switch 67 has not been operated, the process returns to step S2502. When the second effect switch 67 is operated, it is determined in step S2505 whether or not the bonus state or the bonus carry-over state is in progress. In this embodiment, during these bonus states and bonus carry-over states, switching between the normal game mode and the specific mode is disabled, and if it is determined in step S2505 that these states are in effect, the process proceeds to step S2502. return. That is, in these states, the operation of the switching button after the bet operation is disabled. If it is determined in step S2505 that these conditions are not met, a specific mode flag is set in step S2506.

If the specific mode flag is set in step S2501, or after the specific mode flag is set in step S2506, processing for notification of mode transition is performed in step S2507 and subsequent steps. The mode change notification process corresponds to the mode change notification process (FIG. 49) on the main controller 101 side.

That is, in step S2507, it is determined whether or not the number of display precursor games is zero. The number of displayed portent games indicates the number of continuous games in the pseudo portent mode in the specific mode. The number of displayed portent games is counted in a specific mode stop effect setting process, which will be described later, and the number of displayed portent games is decremented by one each time one game is completed.

If the number of display precursor games is 0, it is determined in step S2508 whether or not the display challenge mode win flag is set in the various flag storage area 183a. The challenge mode winning flag for display corresponds to the challenge mode winning flag on the main control device 101 side, and is a flag that is set through a transition lottery that is performed when a special special role is won in the specific mode starting effect setting process. be. If the challenge mode win flag for display is set, the challenge mode win flag for display is cleared in step S2509. Then, in step S2510, a display challenge mode flag is set in the various flag storage area 183a. The challenge mode flag for display corresponds to the challenge mode flag on the main controller 101 side. In step S2511, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled so that the challenge mode start effect for display is performed.

In this case, the display control device 81 acquires the image data for the challenge mode start effect from the normal game effect data storage area 182b of the ROM 182, and the image data for identification display from the identification information effect data storage area 182c of the ROM 182. to get Then, image data for identification display is added to the image data for the challenge mode start effect, and then set as image data for the challenge mode start effect for display.

The challenge mode start effect for display is substantially the same effect as the challenge mode start effect, as shown in FIG. 93(a). The difference is that in the display challenge mode start presentation, the display image of the auxiliary display portion 65 includes a stamp 65a as image data for identification display of "free" representing the specific mode, and the stamp 65a is the challenge mode. It is added so as to exist on the near side with respect to the image data of the start effect. That is, the challenge mode start effect for display is the image data for the challenge mode start effect acquired from the normal game effect data storage area 182b, and the image data for the challenge mode start effect acquired from the effect data storage area 182c for identification information. The effect is that the image data of the stamp 65a is added.

As described above, the difference between the display challenge mode start effect and the challenge mode start effect is the presence or absence of the stamp 65a as an identification display. Thus, when the display challenge mode start effect is displayed, the player can clearly understand that the current game mode is the specific mode. In this case, for the display challenge mode start effect, effect data is created using the effect data for the challenge mode start effect. As a result, the storage capacity can be reduced compared to a configuration in which effect data for the display challenge mode start effect is separately stored.

The creation of effect data for other display effects is also the same as described above, so description thereof will be omitted.

In the following step S2512, counting of the display challenge mode continuation number is started. Specifically, the initial value (for example, 10) of the number of continuous games in the challenge mode for display is set in the challenge mode continuation counter for display provided in the various counter areas 183b. The challenge mode continuation counter for display corresponds to the challenge mode continuation counter on the main control device 101 side, and the initial value of the number of continuous games in the challenge mode for display is the same as the initial value of the number of continuous games in the challenge mode. is set.

If it is determined in step S2508 that the challenge mode win flag for display is not set, it is determined in step S2513 whether or not the attack mode win flag for display is set. The attack mode winning flag for display corresponds to the attack mode winning flag on the main control device 101 side, and is a flag that is set through a transition lottery that is performed when a special special role is won in the specific mode starting effect setting process. be. If the attack mode win flag for display is set, the attack mode win flag for display is cleared in step S2514. Then, in step S2515, a display attack notification flag is set in the various flag storage area 183a. The attack notification flag for display corresponds to the notification flag for attack on the main control device 101 side, and it is possible to establish the 3rd minor winning prize in accordance with winning the lottery for transition to the attack mode for display. is a flag for After that, in step S2516, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled so that the attack mode winning notification effect for display is performed.

As shown in FIG. 92(a), the display attack mode winning notification effect is substantially the same effect as the attack mode winning notification effect. The difference is that in the attack mode winning notification effect for display, a stamp 65a exists in the display image of the auxiliary display section 65, and the stamp 65a is present on the near side with respect to the image data of the attack mode winning notification effect. is added to.

If it is determined in step S2513 that the attack mode win flag for display is not set, it is determined in step S2517 whether or not the VB mode win flag for display is set. The VB mode winning flag for display corresponds to the VB mode winning flag on the main control device 101 side, and is a flag that is set through a transition lottery that is performed when a special special combination is won in the specific mode starting effect setting process. be. If the VB mode winning flag for display is set, the VB mode winning flag for display is cleared in step S2518. Then, in step S2519, a notification flag for display VB is set in the various flag storage area 183a. The VB notification flag for display corresponds to the VB notification flag on the main control device 101 side. This is a flag to make it possible. After that, in step S2520, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled so that the VB mode winning notification effect for display is performed.

As shown in FIG. 92(b), the display VB mode winning notification effect is substantially the same effect as the VB mode winning notification effect. The difference is that in the VB mode winning notification effect for display, a stamp 65a is present in the display image of the auxiliary display section 65, and the stamp 65a exists in front of the image data of the VB mode winning notification effect. is added to.

If the display portent mode is not 0 in step S2507, and if the VB mode win flag for display is not set in step S2517, after one of steps S2512, S2516 and S2520 is executed, In step S2521, after setting other betting effects, the main effect setting process is terminated.

<Specific Mode Start Effect Setting Processing>
Next, the specific mode starting effect setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. As already explained, this effect setting process is a process that is executed when the received starting command is a lottery result command corresponding to the specific number (1) (step S1901: YES).

In step S2601, it is determined whether or not the specific mode flag is set. If the specific mode flag is not set, the main effect setting process is terminated. That is, in the game when one bet is started without switching the game mode to the specific mode by operating the second effect switch 67, the start effect is not set.

If it is determined in step S2601 that the specific mode flag is set, the process advances to step S2602. The processing after step S2602 is configured as follows. Step S2602: Specific mode winning combination handling process, Step S2603: Specific mode display mode setting process, Step S2604: Specific mode bonus notification process, Step S2605: Specific mode continuous effect setting process, Step S2606: Other start Time production setting processing. The specific mode display mode setting process is the same process as the display mode setting process (step S1903) in the normal game mode, and specifies the current display mode in the specific mode based on various display mode flags. , controls the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like so that the corresponding effect is performed.

In the following, the specific mode winning hand handling process will be explained, and since the specific mode bonus notification process and specific mode continuous effect setting process are related to continuous effects etc., the specific mode stop effect setting process will be explained. Each will be explained later.

<Process for Winning Combination for Specific Mode>
The specific mode winning combination handling process corresponds to the lottery result handling process (FIG. 45) on the main controller 101 side.

That is, as shown in FIG. 82, in step S2701, based on the received lottery result command, it is determined whether or not the current lottery result is a special special combination. If it is a special special role, in step S2702, the display mode in the current specific mode is none of the display challenge mode, the display attack mode, the display VB mode, and the display special zone. It is determined whether or not it is in mode. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2702, it is determined in step S2703 whether or not the attack mode winning flag for display is set. If a negative determination is made in step S2703, then in step S2704 the first specific combination process for specific mode is executed.

If it is determined in step S2702 that the display normal mode is not set, or if it is determined in step S2703 that the display attack mode winning flag is set, the display mode in the current specific mode is determined in step S2705. is the attack mode for display. If it is the attack mode for display, it is determined at step S2706 whether or not the VB mode winning flag for display is set. If the VB mode winning flag for display is not set, the process for the second specific combination for the specific mode is executed in step S2707.

If it is determined in step S2705 that it is not the display attack mode, or if it is determined in step S2706 that the VB mode win flag for display is set, then in step S2708 the third specific combination process for the specific mode is performed. Execute.

After any one of steps S2702, S2707 and S2708 is executed, at step S2709, a specific mode specific role notification process is executed. The specific mode specific combination notification process corresponds to the specific combination notification process in the normal game mode, and is related to continuous effects, and will be described later.

Also, if it is determined in step S2701 that the special special role is not won, then in step S2710, based on the received lottery result command, the current lottery result will be a special pushing order role ("special pushing order bell ”, and “special pressing order replay”). If it is a special pushing order, a specific mode pushing order process is executed in step S2711.

If a negative determination is made in step S2710, or after the processing of step S2709 or step S2711 is executed, it is determined in step S2712 whether or not the special zone flag for display is set. If the special zone flag for display is set, the process for special zone for specific mode is performed in step S2713. When a negative determination is made in step S2712, or after the process of step S2713 is executed, the main winning combination handling process is terminated.

<First special combination process for specific mode>
This process corresponds to the first special combination process (FIG. 46) on the main controller 101 side.

That is, as shown in FIG. 83, in step S2801, it is determined whether or not the challenge mode for display is in progress. If a negative determination is made in step S2801, then in step S2802 a normal table for display attack mode lottery is obtained from the various table storage area 182a. On the other hand, if the determination in step S2801 is affirmative, in step S2803, the challenge mode table for display attack mode lottery is acquired from the various table storage area 182a. The normal time table and the challenge mode table are the same as the table provided for the normal game mode on the main control device 101 side, and the transition winning rate of strong cherries is replaced with the transition winning rate of special strong cherries. , the transition winning rate of weak cherries is replaced with the transition winning rate of special weak cherries, and so on. Each special special role) is replaced with a special role. This is the same for tables for other specific modes.

After acquiring the attack mode transition lottery table for display in step S2802 or step S2803, attack mode lottery processing for display is executed in step S2804. In this processing, a lottery counter is acquired from the various counter areas 183b and compared with the lottery table acquired in step S2802 or step S2803, thereby performing a lottery for transition to the attack mode for display.

In step S2805, based on the result of processing in step S2804, it is determined whether or not the lottery for switching to the attack mode for display has been won. If the lottery for switching to the attack mode for display is won, a process of setting the attack mode winning flag for display is performed in step S2806.

In the subsequent step S2807, it is determined whether or not the bonus has been won. If a negative determination is made in step S2807, lottery processing for the number of precursor games for display is performed in step S2808. In step S2808, the number of precursor games for display, which is 1 out of 1 to 32, is randomly determined by lottery. In step S2809, based on the processing result of step S2808, the number of display precursor games is input to the display precursor counter in the various counter areas 183b. The display precursor counter is decremented by one each time one 1-bet game is played.

In step S2810, a process of setting a display precursor flag in the various flag storage area 183a is executed. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2807, or after the processing of step S2810 is executed, this special combination processing is terminated.

If it is determined in step S2805 that the lottery for transition to the attack mode for display has not been won, then in step S2811, challenge mode lottery processing for display is executed. In the challenge mode lottery process for display, a table for challenge mode lottery for display is acquired from the various table storage area 182a, and a lottery counter is acquired from the various counter area 183b. The challenge mode lottery table for display is the same as the challenge mode lottery table on the main control device 101 side, and each special combination is replaced with each special combination.

In step S2812, based on the processing result of step S2811, it is determined whether or not the challenge mode for display has been won. If it is determined that the challenge mode for display has been won, it is determined in step S2813 whether or not the challenge mode for display is selected. If it is the display normal mode, in step S2814, a process of setting a display challenge mode winning flag in the various flags storage area 183a is executed.

In the following step S2815, it is determined whether or not the bonus has been won.If the bonus has not been won, lottery processing for the number of precursor games for display is executed in step S2816, and the number of precursor games for display is executed in step S2817. to the precursor counter, and in step S2818, after executing the processing of setting the display precursor flag, the first special combination processing is terminated. The processing of steps S2815 to S2818 corresponds to steps S2807 to S2810.

If it is determined in step S2813 that the challenge mode for display is won again during the challenge mode for display, processing for adding the continuation game of the challenge mode for display is performed in steps S2819 to S2823. That is, in step S2819, it is determined whether or not the bonus has been won. If the bonus has not been won, the process advances to step S2820 to execute lottery processing for the number of additional games in the challenge mode for display. In the lottery process for the number of added games, a table for the challenge mode added game number lottery for display is acquired from the various table storage area 182a, and a lottery counter is acquired from the various counter area 183b. The challenge mode additional game number lottery table for display is the same as the challenge mode additional game number lottery table on the main control device 101 side, and each specific combination is replaced with each special specific combination.

In step S2821, processing for adding the number of games in the challenge mode for display is performed. In this processing, a value corresponding to the number of additional games selected in step S2820 is added to the challenge mode continuation counter for display. Then, in step S2822, setting of the additional effect for display is performed. The additional effect for display is substantially the same effect as the additional effect in the normal game mode, and as the display image of the auxiliary display unit 65, the stamp 65a is on the front side with respect to the display image in the additional effect in the normal game mode. Added to exist. In addition, in step S2822, only the setting of the additional effect for display is performed, and the execution of the additional effect for display is performed in the stop time effect setting process. This is the same for setting processing of other additional effects.

After executing the process of step S2822, the special combination process is terminated. If a negative determination is made in step S2819, the special combination process is terminated after setting the challenge mode addition flag for display in step S2823.

<Second Special Win Process for Specific Mode>
This process corresponds to the second special combination process (FIG. 47) on the main controller 101 side.

That is, as shown in FIG. 84, in step S2901, a process of grasping the rank of the attack mode for display is performed. Also in the specific mode, the display attack mode is provided with four ranks from the first display attack mode to the fourth display attack mode, and each rank has a different probability of transition to the display VB mode. A step S2901 decides which of the first to fourth display attack modes the rank of the current display attack mode is.

In step S2902, the VB mode lottery table for display corresponding to the rank of the attack mode for display grasped in step S2901 is obtained from the table storage area 182a. The VB mode lottery table for display is the same as the VB mode lottery table on the main control device 101 side, and each special combination is replaced with each special combination.

In step S2903, the table acquired in step S2902 and the lottery counters acquired from the various counter areas 183b are used to perform a lottery for transition to the VB mode for display. Then, in step S2904, it is determined whether or not the result of the lottery in step S2903 corresponds to winning the VB mode for display.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2904, then in step S2905 processing is performed to set a VB mode win flag for display in the various flag storage area 183a. Thereafter, in steps S2906 to S2909, similarly to steps S2807 to S2810, processing for setting the number of precursor games for display is performed.

If it is determined in step S2904 that the result of the VB mode lottery process for display is that the VB mode for display has not been won, the flow advances to step S2910. In step S2910, display attack mode promotion lottery processing is performed. In this process, a table for display promotion lottery is acquired from the various table storage area 182a, and a lottery counter is acquired from the various counter area 183b. The promotion lottery table for display is the same as the promotion lottery table on the main control device 101 side, and each special combination is replaced with each special combination.

In step S2911, it is determined whether or not the result of the lottery in step S2910 was promotion winning. If the player wins promotion, in step S2912, display attack mode promotion processing for setting a display rank flag corresponding to the rank of the promotion destination is performed. After that, in step S2913, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled so that the promotion effect for display is performed. In the promotion effect for display, the stamp 65a is added to the display image in the normal game mode promotion effect so that it exists on the near side.

If it is determined in step S2911 that the promotion lottery for display has not been won, or after the processing of step S2913 is executed, processing for adding the number of continuous games in the attack mode is performed in steps S2914 to S2920.

That is, in step S2914, lottery processing for adding the number of games in the display attack mode is performed. In the additional lottery process, a table for display attack mode additional lottery is acquired from the various table storage area 182a, and a lottery counter is acquired from the various counter area 183b. The attack mode additional lottery table for display is the same as the attack mode additional lottery table on the main control device 101 side, and each special combination is replaced with each special combination.

Then, in step S2915, it is determined whether or not the additional lottery has been won. If it is determined that the additional lottery has not been won, the special combination processing is terminated as it is.

If it is determined that the additional lottery has been won, it is determined in step S2916 whether or not the bonus has been won. If the bonus is not won, the process advances to step S2917 to perform lottery processing for the number of additional games in the attack mode for display. In the lottery process for the number of added games, a table for the number of added games for display attack mode lottery is acquired from the various table storage area 182a, and a lottery counter is acquired from the various counter area 183b. The display attack mode additional game number lottery table is the same as the attack mode additional game number lottery table on the side of the main controller 101, and each specific combination is replaced with each special specific combination.

In step S2918, processing for adding the number of games in the attack mode for display is performed. In this process, a value corresponding to the number of additional games selected in step S2917 is added to the attack mode continuation counter for display. Then, in step S2919, the setting of the additional effect for display is performed. After executing the process of step S2919, the special combination process is terminated. If a negative determination is made in step S2916, the specific combination processing is terminated after setting the display attack mode addition flag in step S2920.

<Third special combination process for specific mode>
This process corresponds to the third special combination process (FIG. 48) on the main controller 101 side.

That is, as shown in FIG. 85, in step S3001, the game number addition lottery process of the attack mode for display is performed. Such processing is the same as the processing in step S2914.

In step S3002, it is determined whether or not the result of the lottery in step S3001 was an additional winning result. If it is determined that the additional lottery has been won, it is determined in step S3003 whether or not the bonus has been won. If the bonus is not won, the process advances to step S3004 to perform lottery processing for the number of additional games in the attack mode for display. Then, in step S3005, the processing for adding the number of games in the attack mode for display is performed, and in step S3006, after setting the additional effect for display, the specific combination processing ends. The processing of steps S3003 to S3006 is the same as the processing of steps S2916 to S2919.

If a negative determination is made in step S3002, the special combination processing is terminated as it is. If it is determined in step S3003 that the bonus has been won, then in step S3007 an attack mode addition flag for display is set, and then this special combination processing is terminated.

<Push-out process for specific mode>
This processing corresponds to the pushing first-hand processing (FIG. 51) on the main controller 101 side.

That is, as shown in FIG. 86, in step S3101, based on the received lottery result command, it is determined whether or not the current lottery result is one of the special first promotion replays 1-4. The affirmative determination in step S3101 means that any one of the first minor winning combination, the third minor winning combination, and the minor losing winning combination is won according to the operation order of the current game. In this case, the process advances to step S3102 to determine whether or not the display attack notification flag is set.

If the display attack notification flag is set, it is determined in step S3103 whether or not the display attack mode flag is set, that is, display attack mode, display VB mode, display special zone It is determined whether it is any of When the attack mode flag for display is set, in step S3104, a process for notifying the pressing order of the third minor winning combination is executed. Specifically, the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like is controlled so that the operation order corresponding to the winning of the third minor winning combination among the first minor winning combination, the third minor winning combination, and the minor winning combination is performed. (FIG. 77(b)). Also in the operation order notification effect, the stamp 65a is added to the display image of the operation order notification effect in the normal game mode so that it exists on the front side.

If it is determined in step S3103 that it is in the attack mode for display, the process advances to step S3105 to correspond to the winning of the first minor winning combination among the first minor winning combination, the third minor winning combination, and the small missing winning combination. The auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled so that an operation order notification effect is performed (FIG. 77(b)). After that, the regular running process ends.

If the attack notification flag for display is not set in step S3102, the operation order is not notified, and the main push starting process is terminated. In this case, for example, when the stop operation is performed from the left reel 32L, a winning small winning combination is established.

If it is determined in step S3101 that it is not the special first promotion replays 1-4, it is determined in step S3104 whether or not the current lottery result is one of the special fall replays 1-3. The affirmative determination in step S3103 means that any one of the first minor winning combination, the second minor winning combination, and the minor losing winning combination is won according to the operation order of the current game. In this case, in step S3105, it is determined whether or not the display attack notification flag is set. When the attack notification flag for display is set, in step S3106, processing for notification of the pressing order of the first minor winning combination is executed. Specifically, the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like is controlled so that the notification effect of the operation order corresponding to the first minor winning combination among the first minor winning combination, the second minor winning combination, and the minor winning combination is performed. (FIG. 77(b)). After that, the regular running process ends.

If the attack notification flag for display is not set in step S3105, the operation order is not notified, and the main push-up process is terminated. In this case, for example, when the stop operation is performed from the left reel 32L, any one of the first minor winning combination, the second minor winning combination, and the missing minor winning combination is established.

If it is determined in step S3104 that it is not the special fall replays 1 to 3, it is determined in step S3107 whether or not the lottery result of this time is one of the special second promotion replays 1 and 2. The affirmative determination in step S3107 means that any one of the first minor winning combination, the fourth minor winning combination, the fifth minor winning combination, and the missing minor winning combination is won according to the operation order of the current game. In this case, in step S3108, it is determined whether or not the display attack notification flag is set. If the display attack notification flag is set, it is determined in step S3109 whether or not the display VB notification flag is set.

If the VB notification flag for display is set, in step S3110, a process for notifying the pressing order of the fourth minor winning combination or the fifth minor winning combination is executed. Specifically, among the 1st small role, 4th small role, 5th small role and outlier small role, there is a notification effect of the operation order corresponding to the 4th small role or 5th small role winning. The auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled so as to be performed (FIG. 77(c)). After that, the regular running process ends.

A negative determination in step S3109 means that the attack mode for display and the VB mode for display have not been won. In this case, in step S3106, the processing for notifying the pressing order of the first minor combination is executed, and then the main pressing winning combination processing is terminated. If a negative determination is made in step S3108, the operation order is not notified, and the main push winning process is terminated. In this case, for example, when the stop operation is performed from the left reel 32L, a winning small winning combination is established.

If it is determined in step S3107 that it is not special second promotion replay 1 or 2, it is determined in step S3111 whether or not the lottery result of this time is special BAR replay 1 or 2. Affirmative determination in step S3111 means that any one of the first minor winning combination, the sixth to eighth minor winning winning combinations, and the minor losing winning combination will be won depending on the operation order of the current game. In this case, in step S3112, it is determined whether or not the display attack notification flag is set. If the display attack notification flag is set, it is determined in step S3113 whether or not the display VB notification flag is set. When the display attack notification flag is set and the display VB notification flag is set, in step S3114, processing for notifying the pressing order of the 6th small winning combination to the 8th small winning combination is performed. Execute. Specifically, the operation order corresponding to the 6th minor winning combination to the 8th minor winning combination among the 1st small winning combination, the 6th to 8th small winning combinations, and the small winning combination is notified (Fig. 77 (d)). After that, the regular running process ends.

When a negative determination is made in step S3113, the processing for notifying the pressing order of the first minor combination is executed in step S3106, and then the main pressing winning combination processing is terminated. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S3113, the pushing order process is terminated as it is without performing the pushing order notification process. In this case, for example, when the stop operation is performed from the left reel 32L, a winning small winning combination is established.

If it is determined in step S3113 that the special BAR replays 1 and 2 are not performed, it is determined in step S3115 whether or not the current lottery result is special pressing order bell winning. If the special pressing order bell is won, it is determined in step S3116 whether or not the display attack mode flag is set. If the attack mode flag for display is set and the current state is any one of the attack mode for display, the VB mode for display, and the special zone for display, then in step S3117, it corresponds to the 1st small winning combination. A process for notifying the pressing order is executed to notify the operation order (FIG. 78). After that, the regular running process ends.

If a negative determination is made in step S3116, the main pushing order process is terminated without performing the process for notifying the pushing order.

If it is determined in step S3115 that the special pressing order bell is not won, it is determined in step S3118 whether or not the result of the current lottery is a single winning combination. The affirmative determination in step S3118 means that the first minor winning combination or the losing minor winning combination is won depending on the operation sequence of the current game. In this case, in step S3119, it is determined whether or not the display attack mode flag is set. When the display attack mode flag is set, in step S3120, a process for notifying the pressing order for notifying the operation order corresponding to the winning of the first minor winning combination is executed (FIG. 78). After that, the regular running process ends.

If a negative determination is made in step S3119, the main pushing order process is terminated without performing the pushing order notification process. In this case, for example, when the stop operation is performed from the left reel 32L, a winning small winning combination is established.

<Processing for special zone for specific mode>
This process corresponds to the specialized zone process (FIG. 55) on the main controller 101 side.

That is, as shown in FIG. 87, in step S3201, the result of the current lottery process is grasped. In the subsequent step S3202, a lottery process for the number of additional games in the attack mode for display is performed. In the subsequent step S3203, processing for adding the number of games in the attack mode for display is performed. Then, in step S3204, after setting the additional effect for display, the special zone processing for the specific mode ends. The processing of steps S3202 to S3204 is the same as the processing of steps S2917 to S2919. However, the number of games to be selected is larger in the number-of-addition-games lottery process in step S3202 than in the number-of-addition-games lottery process in step S2917.

<Specific mode stop effect setting process>
Next, the stop effect setting process for the specific mode will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. As already described, this effect setting process is a process that is executed when the received stop command is a winning result command corresponding to the specific number (1) (step S2101: YES).

The specific mode stop effect setting process includes a specific mode game count management process in step S3301, a specific mode winning result handling process in step S3302, and a specific mode bonus end process in step S3303. Each will be described below.

<Specific Mode Game Number Management Processing>
This process corresponds to the number-of-games management process (FIG. 53) on the main controller 101 side.

That is, as shown in FIG. 89, in step S3401, it is determined whether or not a bonus has been won or a bonus state has been reached. If the determination in step S3401 is affirmative, in step S3402, the display challenge mode flag, the display attack mode flag, the display VB mode flag, the display specialized zone flag, etc. are cleared, and then this number-of-games management process is performed. exit.

If the determination in step S3401 is negative, it is determined in step S3403 whether or not the number of precursor games for display is zero. If it is not 0, in step S3404, a process of subtracting 1 from the number of precursor games for display is performed. If the number of display precursor games is 0 in step S3403 (if the display precursor mode is not set), or after the processing of step S3404 is executed, in steps S3405 to S3427, the number of continuous games in each mode is Perform count processing.

That is, in step S3405, it is determined whether or not the display challenge mode is set. If it is the display challenge mode, the process advances to step S3406 to perform processing for subtracting 1 from the display challenge mode continuation counter. Then, in step S3407, it is determined whether or not the display challenge mode continuation counter is zero. If it is not 0, this management process is terminated as it is. If it is 0, the display challenge mode flag is cleared in step S3408, and the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like is controlled to perform a display challenge mode end effect in step S3409.

The challenge mode end effect for display is substantially the same effect as the challenge mode end effect, as shown in FIG. 93(b). In the challenge mode end effect for display, a stamp 65a is added to the image data of the display image of the challenge mode end effect on the auxiliary display portion 65 so as to exist on the near side.

If it is determined in step S3405 that the display challenge mode is not set, it is determined in step S3410 whether or not the display attack mode is set. If it is the attack mode for display, the process advances to step S3411 to perform processing for subtracting 1 from the attack mode continuation counter for display. Then, in step S3412, it is determined whether or not the display attack mode continuation counter is zero. If it is not 0, this management process is terminated as it is. If it is 0, the display attack mode flag is cleared in step S3413, and the display attack notification flag is cleared in step S3414. After that, in step S3415, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled so as to perform attack mode termination effects.

The display attack mode end effect is substantially the same as the attack mode end effect, as shown in FIG. 94(b). In the attack mode end effect for display, a stamp 65a is added to the image data of the display image of the attack mode end effect on the auxiliary display portion 65 so as to exist on the near side. The display of the number of games and the number of wins during the attack mode for display will be described later.

If it is determined in step S3410 that the display attack mode is not set, the flow advances to step S3416 to determine whether or not the display VB mode is set. If it is the VB mode for display, it is determined in step S3417 whether or not it is an additional specialized zone for display. If the zone is not the special zone for display, the VB mode continuation counter for display is decremented by 1 in step S3418. Then, in step S3419, it is determined whether or not the display VB mode continuation counter is zero. If it is not 0, this management process is terminated as it is. If it is 0, the display VB mode flag is cleared in step S3420, and the display VB notification flag is cleared in step S3421. After that, in step S3422, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled so as to perform a VB mode end effect for display.

The VB mode end effect for display is, as shown in FIG. 95(b), substantially the same effect as the VB mode end effect. In the VB mode end effect for display, a stamp 65a is added to the image data of the display image of the VB mode end effect on the auxiliary display portion 65 so as to exist on the near side. The display of the number of games and the number of winnings in the VB mode for display will be described later.

If it is determined in step S3417 that the zone is an additional special zone for display, the flow advances to step S3423 to perform processing for subtracting 1 from the special zone continuation counter for display. Then, in step S3424, it is determined whether or not the special display zone continuation counter is zero. If it is 0, the special zone flag is cleared in step S3425, and the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like is controlled in step S3426 to perform a display special zone end effect. The special zone end effect for display is almost the same effect as the end effect of the special zone, and similarly to other display effects, the stamp 65a is placed in front of the image data of the end effect of the special zone. added to exist.

If a negative determination is made in step S3407, step S3412, step S3419, step S3416, or step S3424, or after the processing of step S3409, step S3415, step S3422, or step S3426 is executed, the process proceeds to step S3427. In step S3427, an additional notification process is executed. In such processing, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled so as to execute the set additional effect for display (step S2822, step S2919, step S3006 and the like). The additional effect for display is as described above. After executing the processing of step S3427, this management processing ends.

<Processing for Winning Result for Specific Mode>
This process corresponds to the winning result handling process (FIG. 52) on the main controller 101 side.

That is, as shown in FIG. 90, in step S3501, it is determined whether or not the result of the current stop is the third minor winning combination. If the third reply small winning prize has been established, it is determined in step S3502 whether or not the attack notification flag for display is set. If the attack notification flag for display has been set, it is determined in step S3503 whether or not the attack mode flag for display has been set. If the attack mode flag for display is set, it means that the attack mode for display has already been set, so the corresponding processing is terminated. On the other hand, if the attack mode flag for display is not set, the attack mode flag for display is set in step S3504. In the subsequent step S3505, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled so as to perform a display attack mode start effect.

The attack mode start effect for display is substantially the same effect as the attack mode start effect, as shown in FIG. 94(a). In the display attack mode start effect, the stamp 65a is added to the image data of the display image of the attack mode start effect on the auxiliary display portion 65 so that it exists on the near side.

After that, in step S3506, the count of the display attack mode continuation count is started. Specifically, an initial value (for example, 50) of the number of continuous games in the display attack mode is set in the display attack mode continuation counter. The attack mode continuation counter for display corresponds to the attack mode continuation counter on the main control device 101 side, and the initial value of the number of continuous games in attack mode for display is the same as the initial value of the number of continuous games in attack mode. is set. After performing the process of step S3506, this handling process ends.

If it is determined in step S3501 that the 3rd minor winning combination has not been established, the process proceeds to step S3507. In step S3507, it is determined whether or not the 4th and 5th reply small wins have been established as a result of this stop. If the 4th and 5th minor winning prizes have been established, it is determined in step S3508 whether or not the display VB notification flag is set. If the display VB notification flag is set, it is determined in step S3509 whether or not the display VB mode flag is set. If the VB mode flag for display is set, the VB mode for display is already set, so the corresponding processing is terminated. On the other hand, if the VB mode flag for display has not been set, processing for setting the VB mode flag for display is performed in step S3510. After that, in step S3511, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled so as to perform a VB mode start effect for display.

The VB mode start effect for display is substantially the same effect as the VB mode start effect, as shown in FIG. 95(a). In the VB mode start effect for display, a stamp 65a is added to the image data of the display image of the VB mode start effect on the auxiliary display portion 65 so as to exist on the near side.

After that, in step S3512, the count of the display VB mode continuation number is started. Specifically, an initial value (for example, 60) of the number of continuous games in the display VB mode is set in the display VB mode continuation counter. The VB mode continuation counter for display corresponds to the VB mode continuation counter on the main control device 101 side, and the initial value of the number of continuous games in the VB mode for display is the same as the initial value of the number of continuous VB mode games. is set. After performing the process of step S3512, this handling process ends.

If it is determined in step S3507 that the 4th and 5th minor role winnings have not been established, it is determined in step S3513 whether or not the 7th minor role winning has been established as a result of this stop. do. If the seventh reply small winning prize has been established, it is determined in step S3514 whether or not the display VB notification flag is set. If the VB notification flag for display has been set, processing for setting the special zone flag for display is performed in step S3515. After that, in step S3516, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled so as to perform a special display zone start effect.

The special zone start effect for display is, as shown in FIG. 96, almost the same effect as the special zone start effect. In the special zone start effect for display, a stamp 65a is added to the image data of the display image of the special zone start effect on the auxiliary display section 65 so as to exist on the near side. The auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled so as to perform

After that, in step S3517, counting of the number of continuations of the special display zone is started. Specifically, the initial value (for example, 5) of the number of continuous games in the specialized zone is set in the specialized zone continuation counter for display. The special zone continuation counter for display corresponds to the special zone continuation counter on the main control device 101 side. The same value as the value is set. After executing the process of step S3517, this handling process ends. If a negative determination is made in step S3513 or step S3514, this handling process ends.

<Bonus end processing for specific mode>
This process corresponds to the end determination process (FIG. 54) on the main controller 101 side.

That is, as shown in FIG. 91, in step S3601, it is determined whether or not a bonus end command has been received. The bonus end command is a command set at step S1505 in the end determination process on the main controller 101 side. If the bonus end command has not been received, the end processing is ended as it is.

If the bonus end command has been received, it is determined in step S3602 whether or not the display attack mode winning flag is set. If the attack mode winning flag for display is set, a lottery process for the number of precursor games for display is performed in step S3603, the number of precursor games for display is set in step S3604, and the number of precursor games for display is set in step S3605. Set the portent flag. The processes of steps S3603 to S3605 are the same as the processes of steps S2808 to S2810. After executing the processing of step S3605, the end processing ends.

If the display attack mode win flag is not set in step S3602, it is determined in step S3606 whether or not the display challenge mode win flag is set. If the challenge mode winning flag for display is set, the processes for the indication mode for display in steps S3603 to S3605 are performed, and then this termination process is terminated. If the display challenge mode win flag is not set in step S3606, it is determined in step S3607 whether or not the display VB mode win flag is set. If the VB mode winning flag for display is set, the process for the precursor mode for display in steps S3603 to S3605 is performed, and then this termination process is terminated.

If the VB mode winning flag for display is not set in step S3607, the process proceeds to step S3608. In step S3608, it is determined whether or not the display attack mode addition flag is set. If the attack mode addition flag for display is set, in step S3609, the number of games to be added in the attack mode for display is selected, and in step S3610, the number of games in the attack mode for display is added, and in step S3611. Set up additional effects for display. The processing of steps S3609 to S3611 is the same as the processing of steps S2917 to S2919. However, the additional effect for display set in step S3611 is executed at this timing. After executing the process of step S3611, the termination process is terminated.

If the display attack mode addition flag is not set in step S3608, it is determined in step S3612 whether or not the display challenge mode addition flag is set. If the challenge mode addition flag for display is set, the number of games added in the challenge mode for display is selected in step S3613, the number of games added in the challenge mode for display is processed in step S3614, and the number of games added in the challenge mode for display is processed in step S3615. Set up additional effects for display. The processing of steps S3613 to S3615 is the same as the processing of steps S2820 to S2822. However, the additional effect for display set in step S3615 is executed at this timing. If a negative determination is made in step S3612, or if the process of step S3615 has been executed, this termination process is terminated.

<Game flow of each game mode>
As described above, in the present embodiment, the normal game mode implemented in the 3-bet mode or the 2-bet mode can be simulated in the 1-bet mode. Therefore, with reference to FIGS. 97 to 100, the flow and differences of each game mode will be described. 97 and 98 show the flow of the game in the normal game mode, and FIGS. 99 and 100 show the flow of the game in the specific mode.

In the normal game mode, when the game state is the normal game state or the first RT state, the display mode is basically the normal mode. At the timing of ta1 in this situation, when a specific role is won (winning a prize), a lottery for shifting the display mode to the challenge mode or the attack mode is performed. For example, when the lottery for transition to the attack mode is won, after passing through the portent mode, at the timing of ta2, the attack mode winning notification effect is performed by the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like. After the attack mode winning notification effect is performed, the pressing order notification is executed by the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like. done.

When the first promotion replay 1 to 4 is won at the timing of ta3, since the pushing order notification is executed as described above, the pushing order notification is performed so that the third replay winning prize is established. . As a result, the third replay win is established, and the attack mode start effect is performed by the auxiliary display section 65 and the like.

By the way, after the attack mode win notification effect is performed, the state until the attack mode start effect is performed is the state in which the attack mode is being prepared, the notification of the pressing order is performed, and the game state is in the state. This is the case of the normal game state or the first RT state. In this case, it can be expected that the number of medals will decrease by about 0.61 each time one game is played. On the other hand, when the second re-game winning is established and the attack mode transitions from the state in preparation to the attack mode, the pushing order is notified and the game state shifts to the second RT state. In this case, an increase of about 1.90 medals can be expected for each game, and more medals than in the preparation state can be obtained. Therefore, it is advantageous for the player to shift to the attack mode earlier after the attack mode winning notification effect is performed. On the other hand, if it is difficult to win the first promotion replays 1 to 4, etc., there is a possibility that the medals will gradually decrease even though the transition to the attack mode has been confirmed. Therefore, after the notification of winning the attack mode (more specifically, after winning the attack mode), it is possible to increase the number of continuous games in the attack mode by winning a specific role. . Therefore, even if the transition to the attack mode is delayed, the player can fully enjoy the game during that time.

When the attack mode is started at the timing of ta3, the game state becomes the second RT state, and the winning probability of the pressing order replay becomes higher than in the first RT state and the normal game state. For example, when falling replays 1 to 3 are won at the timing of ta4, the pressing order notification that the first replay win is established is performed during the attack mode. Therefore, during the attack mode, the phenomenon that the RT state falls due to the second regame winning is avoided. In addition, even when winning the bell for the order of pushing during the attack mode, the order for pushing the bell to win a prize is notified. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of an event in which the transition result is stopped due to the failure of the push order bell and the RT state falls.

When a player wins a specific role (winning a prize) at the timing of ta5 during the attack mode, a lottery for switching the display mode to the VB mode and a lottery for adding the number of games to be continued in the attack mode are performed. For example, when the lottery for switching to the VB mode is won, the VB mode winning notification effect is performed by the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like at the timing of ta6 after the precursor mode. After the VB mode winning notification effect is performed, the pressing order notification for the VB mode is executed by the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like. Pressing order notification capable of establishing the fifth regame winning is performed.

When the second promotion replay 1, 2 is won at the timing of ta7, since the pushing order notification is executed as described above, the pushing order notification is made so that the fourth and fifth replay winning prizes are established. is done. For example, when the fourth replay win is established, the auxiliary display section 65 or the like performs a VB mode start effect.

By the way, the state after the VB mode win notification effect is performed and before the VB mode start effect is performed is the state in which the VB mode is being prepared, the notification of the pushing order is performed, and the game state is completed. This is the second RT state. In this case, it can be expected that the number of medals will increase by about 1.90 each time one game is played. Moreover, the subtraction of the number of continuous games in the attack mode is stopped in the game from when the VB mode win notification effect is performed until when the VB mode start effect is performed. Therefore, for example, if the first re-game winning is established without complying with the pressing order notification that enables the fourth and fifth re-game winnings to be established, A game may be played without reducing the number of continuous games in the attack mode by not starting the VB mode. Therefore, for example, if the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 that do not comply with the press order notification is performed after the VB mode winning notification effect is performed and before the VB mode start effect is performed, a predetermined penalty is imposed. may be Predetermined penalties include subtracting the number of games played in the attack mode, lowering the rank of the attack mode, and terminating the attack mode. Further, as a configuration in which the VB mode is performed in the second RT state, a configuration in which the game state does not change between the attack mode and the VB mode may be employed. In this case, the VB mode can be started without going through the fourth and fifth replay winnings, and the difference between the execution game of the VB mode win notification performance and the execution game of the VB mode start performance can be eliminated.

During the VB mode, there is a possibility of winning BAR replays 1 and 2 because the third RT state is entered. If BAR replays 1 and 2 are won and if the BAR matching lottery is won, the 7th replay winning (middle BAR matching) can be established, and the 7th replay winning will be special. transition to the decommissioning zone. The specialized zone continues until the number of continuous games in the specialized zone reaches 0, and returns to the VB mode when it reaches 0.

At timing ta8, when the number of continuous games in the VB mode becomes 0, the auxiliary display section 65 or the like performs a VB mode end effect. When the VB mode ends, the display mode shifts to attack mode. Although the RT state is still in the 3rd RT state, when winning the BAR replays 1 and 2, since the pressing order notification for establishment of the 6th to 8th replay prizes is not performed, the 3rd replay prize is established. A possibility arises. When the third replay winning is established at the timing of ta9, the game state shifts to the second RT state.

At the timing of ta10, when the number of continuous games in the attack mode becomes 0, the auxiliary display section 65 or the like performs an attack mode ending effect. When the attack mode ends, the display mode shifts from attack mode to normal mode. Although the RT state is still in the 2nd RT state, when the second replay win is established when falling replays 1 to 3 are won, or when the bell in the order of pushing is won and the bell is missed (When the transition rolls stop), the game state shifts to the first RT state.

On the other hand, in the specific mode, the game state is not changed. Below, for example, a case where the specific mode is executed in a situation where the game state is the normal game state in the normal game mode will be described.

At the timing of tb1, which is the normal mode for display, when a special special role is won (winning), a lottery for transition to the challenge mode for display or the attack mode for display is performed. In this case, since the special specific role stop roll is the same as the specific role stop roll, the player can switch to the challenge mode or attack mode when the specific role is won in the normal game mode. A lottery can be simulated in a specific mode.

For example, if a special specific role won at the timing of tb1 wins the lottery for transition to the attack mode for display, the mode is shifted to the portent mode for display. When the display attack mode determination notification effect is performed at the timing tb2, the pressing order notification is performed by the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like.

If you win the special 1st promotion replay 1 to 4 at the timing of tb3, the push order notification is executed as described above, so it is possible to establish the 3rd reply minor winning prize. A notification is given in advance. As a result, the third minor winning combination is won, and the display attack mode start effect is performed by the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like, and the display attack mode is started.

In this case, the stop roll of the third replay winning that triggers the start of the attack mode for display is the same as the stop roll of the third replay winning that triggers the start of the attack mode in the normal game mode. ing. Therefore, the player can virtually experience the start of the attack mode by winning the third replay by winning the third minor winning combination. Also, the attack mode start effect and the attack mode start effect for display have substantially the same content displayed by the auxiliary display section 65 in terms of appearance. Therefore, it is possible to simulate the start of the attack mode even when the start effect is performed.

On the other hand, there is a difference between the attack mode start effect and the attack mode start effect for display in the presence or absence of the stamp 65a. Therefore, for example, the manager of the game hall can easily confirm in which game mode the game is being played. , the stamp 65a will inevitably appear in the image, and it may be a trigger for wanting an actual experience in the normal game mode instead of a pseudo-experience. The effect of displaying the stamp 65a is the same for other display effects.

By the way, after the display attack mode win notification effect is performed, the state until the display attack mode start effect is performed is a state in which the display attack mode is being prepared, and the notification of the special pressing order is performed. However, if you win special fall replays 1 to 3, special second promotion replays 1 and 2, or special BAR replays 1 and 2, you will not be notified of the push order on the condition that it is not the attack mode for display. A minor role can be established. That is, when the special first promotion replay 1 to 4 is won and when the special push order bell is won, the push order notification is performed. On the other hand, when the attack mode for display is started at the timing of tb3, for example, at the timing of tb4, if special fall replays 1 to 3 are won, it is possible to establish the first replay minor role winning. Even if the order notification is performed and the special second promotion replays 1 and 2 are won, the push order notification capable of establishing the first replay minor winning prize is performed. In addition, when the attack mode for display is started, even when the winning one-piece winning combination is won, the pressing order information that enables the establishment of the winning of the first minor winning combination is performed. Therefore, by starting the attack mode for display with the winning of the third replay minor winning combination, it is possible to virtually experience as if the winning probability of the replay is improved.

At the timing of tb5, when a special special role is won (awarded), a lottery for transition to the VB mode for display and a lottery for the number of continuous games in the attack mode for display are added. For example, when a lottery for switching to the VB mode for display is won, after passing through the portent mode, at the timing of tb6, the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like performs a VB mode winning notification effect for display. After the display VB mode winning notification effect is performed, the pressing order notification for the display VB mode is executed by the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like, and when special second promotion replays 1 and 2 are won, , the pressing order notification that can establish the fourth and fifth minor winning combination is performed.

When special second promotion replays 1 and 2 are won at the timing of tb7, push order notification is performed so that special 4th and 5th replay small role winnings are established. For example, when the 4th minor winning combination is established, the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like performs a VB mode start effect for display.

In this case, the stopping numbers of the 4th and 5th replay winnings that trigger the start of the VB mode for display are the stopping numbers of the 4th and 5th replay winnings that trigger the start of the VB mode in the normal game mode. is the same result as Therefore, the player can virtually experience the start of the VB mode by winning the fourth and fifth replay wins by winning the fourth and fifth small wins. In addition, the VB mode start effect and the VB mode start effect for display have substantially the same contents displayed by the auxiliary display section 65 in terms of appearance. Therefore, the start of the VB mode can be simulated by performing the start effect.

In the display VB mode, if you win special BAR replays 1 and 2 and if you win the BAR matching lottery, it is possible to establish the 7th rep small role winning (middle BAR matching). Then, by winning the 7th Rip small role, it will move to a special zone for display. The special display zone continues until the number of continuous games in the special display zone becomes 0, and when it becomes 0, the display VB mode is restored.

When the number of continuous games in the VB mode for display becomes 0 at the timing of tb8, the VB mode for display end effect is performed by the auxiliary display section 65 or the like. When the VB mode for display ends, the attack mode for display is entered. However, along with the transition of the RT state in the normal game mode, when the special BAR replays 1 and 2 are won, a push-forward notification is given that makes it possible to establish the 3rd replay small winning prize. When the 3rd minor winning combination is established at the timing of tb9, the gaming state is pseudo-shifted to the 2nd RT state (not actually shifted).

At the timing of tb10, when the number of continuous games in the display attack mode becomes 0, the auxiliary display section 65 or the like performs a display attack mode termination effect. When the display attack mode ends, the display attack mode is switched to the display normal mode. In this embodiment, by shifting from the display attack mode to the display normal mode, the display attack mode flag and the display attack notification flag are cleared, and the pressing order notification is not performed. Therefore, from the viewpoint of a pseudo RT state transition, the RT state transitions to the first RT state at the timing of tb10.

In addition, according to the fall of the RT state in the normal game mode, this configuration is used until the second reply small winning prize is established even after the end of the display attack mode, or until the special transition roll stops (for example, tb11 (until timing) may be configured such that the push order notification is performed when special fall replays 1 to 3 or a special push order role other than the special push order bell is won. In this way, it is possible to allow the player to experience that the state in which the replay probability is improved continues until the RT state falls.

As described above, in the pseudo game in the specific mode performed as a 1-bet game, there is no RT state, etc., and the normal game state until the first PBB or the second PBB is won, the first PBB or the second PBB. A bonus state based on 2PBB wins is set. In both the normal game state and the bonus state, one medal is paid out in each game with one bet, and the number of medals does not increase or decrease. By doing so, it is possible to experience the playability in the normal game mode in the specific mode without worrying about the increase or decrease in medals.

In this case, in this embodiment, it is not necessary to insert medals (the game can be executed by inserting 0 medals). game can be executed. In other words, the specific mode can be executed by at least receiving medals from the game hall, and the action of simply playing the game in the specific mode for free is suppressed. In addition, in a game hall where tokens are lent out in units of a predetermined number (for example, 50 tokens), after experiencing a pseudo game with the minimum number of tokens, a game is played in the actual normal game mode with the remaining tokens. It can be a motivation to

In addition, as a mode in which the number of medals does not increase or decrease, it is possible to win a combination in which one payout such as various special roles (special watermelon role) is performed instead of realizing all as replay roles. If the number of medals does not increase or decrease, all lottery results may be used as a replay role, and in this way, the betting operation can be omitted, so it is considered that the operability of the specific mode is improved. However, if all the lottery results are used as a replay role in this way, one card is automatically inserted at the end of each game in the specific mode, setting for replay is performed, and the specific mode ends. can be difficult. In this case, for example, even if the setting for replaying is performed, the setting may be canceled, or the power may be turned off/on to set the game mode again. There is a need. In that respect, as described above, it is possible to win a combination in which one payout is performed, so it is possible to switch from the specific mode to the normal game mode (reset the number of bets) except for the replay role winning game. , it becomes possible to add a novel game property of a specific mode to one gaming machine without adding a new configuration.

The normal game mode and the specific mode differ in the medal payout rate (ball payout rate) per game. Therefore, in order to make the simulated experience of the normal game mode more realistic in the specific mode, it is necessary to make the outcomes, effects, winning probability of each role, etc. common to both game modes. For, it is necessary to be able to specify in which game mode the game is being played. Therefore, by adding a stamp 65a as an identification display in the specific mode to each display image of the auxiliary display section 65, it becomes possible to easily specify that the game mode being executed is the specific mode.

In addition, by displaying the fact that the specific mode is in progress on the display image of the auxiliary display unit 65 in this way, for example, when taking a commemorative photo of the display of the number of acquisitions displayed in the attack mode end effect, a pseudo It is possible to easily judge after the fact whether it is the number of acquisitions in the game that was actually experienced or the number of acquisitions in the actual normal game mode.

In particular, since such identification display is performed not on the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R but on the auxiliary display section 65, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are rotated based on the operation of the start lever 41, and the lottery for the combination is performed. Based on the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped to determine whether or not the win of the winning combination is determined. It is possible to make the pseudo-experience of the normal game mode more realistic without the identification display being a hindrance to the experience. In other words, for example, if the identification display is seen when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated, the pseudo mode is inevitably remembered, and there is a possibility that the so-called eye pressing is neglected. Therefore, as described above, when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated, an identification display is performed in places that are difficult to see, so that even if it is a pseudo-experience, you can enjoy the game with the same level of attention as in the normal game mode. It is possible to make the player want it, and it is possible to improve the pseudo-playability.

<About continuous production>
The continuous performance is a performance that is started when the number of precursor games in the precursor mode reaches a predetermined number in the normal game mode, and ends when the number of precursor games becomes 0, and is a production spanning the predetermined number of games. is. In the specific mode in this embodiment, it is also possible to experience continuous production during the normal game mode. For example, when a lottery for switching to the attack mode for display is won during the normal mode for display, it is notified that the attack mode for display has been won via the sign mode for display as described above. When the number of display portent games in the display portent mode reaches a predetermined number, the continuous effect is started, and when the number of display portent games becomes zero, the continuous effect is terminated.

Hereinafter, processing for executing continuous effects in the specific mode will be described. The processing for executing the continuous effect includes a specific mode bonus notification process, a specific mode specific combination notification process, and a specific mode continuous effect setting process.

<Special mode bonus notification process>
This process corresponds to the bonus notification process (FIG. 61) in the normal game mode.

That is, as shown in FIG. 101, in step S3701, based on the lottery result command received this time, it is determined whether or not the game to be started is a special bonus (first PBB, second PBB) winning game. In the case of a special bonus winning game, in step S3702, notification game lottery processing for notifying bonus winning in the specific mode is executed. In such information game lottery processing, a shorter number of games is likely to be selected than in the information game lottery processing in the normal game mode. Specifically, one notification game is determined from 0 game (announced in the current game) to 4 games.

In subsequent step S3703, a process of setting the number of continuous effect games for display is performed based on the notification game determined by the process of step S3702. Specifically, in step S3703, the continuous effect game for display is set in the continuous effect counter for display. The continuous effect counter for display corresponds to the continuous effect counter in the normal game mode, and is decremented by one each time a 1-bet game is executed. After executing the process of step S3703, the continuous effect flag for display is set in step S3704.

If a negative determination is made in step S3701, or if the process of step S3704 has been executed, the process advances to step S3705. In step S3705, it is determined whether or not the current game corresponds to the start of the bonus game. When an affirmative determination is made at step S3705, at step S3706, the number of bonus effect games is set in the effect counter during bonus for display. The display bonus effect counter corresponds to the bonus effect counter in the normal game mode. In this embodiment, 24 is set as the maximum number of payouts for the special bonus. Also, in the bonus game in the special bonus, a small combination of paying out one coin is established in each game. Therefore, in the special bonus, 24 games are played as bonus games. Therefore, in step S3706, 24 is input to the effect counter during display bonus.

After that, in step S3707, a display bonus during effect flag is set. If a negative determination is made in step S3705, or if the process of step S3707 has been executed, this notification process ends.

<Processing for specific role notification for specific mode>
This process corresponds to the specific combination notification process (FIG. 62) in the normal game mode.

That is, as shown in FIG. 102, in step S3801, it is determined whether or not the display precursor flag is set. The display precursor flag can be set in the immediately preceding special mode first special combination process (FIG. 83) or special mode second special combination process (FIG. 84). If the display precursor flag is not set, it is determined in step S3802 whether or not the additional effect for display is set. The setting of the additional effect for display is performed in the immediately preceding specific mode first special combination processing (Fig. 83), specific mode second special combination processing (Fig. 84), or specific mode third special combination processing (Fig. 85). can be done. If the additional effect for display is not set, it is determined whether or not the bonus is won in step S3803. If the bonus is not won, i.e., if the special role is won as a lottery result, a lottery for transition to the display challenge mode, display attack mode, or display VB mode, or a lottery for adding the number of continuous games If neither has been won nor won the bonus, in step S3804, a lottery process for the pseudo-prediction mode for display is executed. The pseudo precursor mode for display corresponds to the pseudo precursor mode in the normal game mode.

In step S3804, a table for display pseudo-prediction mode lottery is acquired from various table storage areas 182a, a lottery counter is acquired from various counter areas 183b, and it is determined whether or not to execute the display pseudo-prediction mode. hold a lottery. The table for the display pseudo-prediction mode lottery is the same as the table for the pseudo-prediction mode lottery, and each specific combination is replaced with each special specific combination.

In step S3805, based on the processing result of step S3804, it is determined whether or not the lottery for the display pseudo-prediction mode has been won. If the lottery has been won, in step S3806, lottery processing for the number of games in the display pseudo-prediction mode is performed. Such processing corresponds to lottery processing for the number of games in the pseudo-prediction mode in the normal game mode. In the subsequent step S3807, the number of pseudo precursor games for display determined in step S3806 is set in the continuous effect counter for display.

In step S3808, a process of setting a pseudo-display flag indicating that the pseudo-prediction mode for display is set is executed. In the following step S3809, a continuous effect flag for display is set. After that, the notification processing is terminated. If an affirmative determination is made in any one of steps S3801 to S3803, or if a negative determination is made in step S3805, this notification processing is terminated.

<Continuous production setting process for specific mode>
This process corresponds to the continuous effect setting process (FIG. 63) in the normal game mode.

That is, as shown in FIG. 103, in step S3901, it is determined whether or not the display precursor flag is set. If the display precursor flag is set, in step S3902, the number of display precursor games in the display precursor mode is input to the display continuous effect counter. In the following step S3903, a continuous effect flag for display is set.

If a negative determination is made in step S3901, or if the process of step S3903 has been executed, the process advances to step S3904. In step S3904, it is determined whether or not the continuous effect flag for display is set. When the continuous effect flag for display is set, a process of subtracting 1 from the continuous effect counter for display is performed in step S3905. Then, in step S3906, it is determined whether or not the continuous effect counter for display is a number (0 to 3) corresponding to the continuous effect. When the continuous effect counter for display is the number corresponding to the continuous effect, it is determined in step S3907 whether or not the pseudo flag for display is set. If the pseudo-flag for display is not set, the process proceeds to step S3908 to acquire the main effect table for display from the various table storage area 182a. Then, in step S3909, the performance data of the corresponding continuous performance is specified from the main indication performance table for display and the continuous performance counter for display, and the corresponding performance data is acquired from the normal game performance data storage area 182b. At the same time, the effect data for the identification information is acquired from the identification information effect data storage area 182c, and a process of setting it as the current continuous effect is performed.

The effect data of the continuous effect specified from the main indication effect table for display is the same as the effect data of the continuous effect specified from the main effect effect table for the main sign in the normal game mode, and similarly to other display effects, A stamp 65a is added so as to exist on the near side with respect to the image data of the continuous effect in the normal game mode.

If it is determined in step S3907 that the pseudo display flag is set, the process advances to step S3910. In step S3910, the pseudo-predictive effect table for display is acquired from the various table storage area 182a. Then, in step S3911, the corresponding continuous effect effect data is specified from the display pseudo-predictive effect table and the display continuous effect counter, and the normal game effect data storage area 182b and the identification information effect data storage area are specified. The effect data is acquired from 182c, and the process of setting it as the current continuous effect is performed.

The effect data for the continuous effect specified from the pseudo-sign effect table for display is the same as the effect data for the continuous effect specified from the effect table for the pseudo-sign in the normal game mode, and is similar to other display effects. , a stamp 65a as an identification display is added so as to exist on the front side of the image data of the continuous effect in the normal game mode.

After performing the process of step S3909 or step S3911, it is determined whether the display continuous effect counter is 0 in step S3912. When the continuous effect counter for display is 0, a process of clearing the continuous effect flag for display and the pseudo flag for display is performed in step S3913. If the pseudo flag for display is not set, that state is maintained. If a negative determination is made in step S3906 or step S3912, or if step S3913 has been performed, this setting process ends.

If it is determined in step S3904 that the continuous effect flag for display is not set, the process proceeds to step S3914. In step S3914, it is determined whether or not the effect flag during display bonus is set. When it is set, in step S3915, subtraction processing of the effect counter during display bonus is performed. In the subsequent step S3916, the effect table for display bonus is acquired from the various table storage area 182a. Then, in step S3917, the effect data of the corresponding effect during bonus is specified from the display bonus effect table and the display bonus effect counter, and the normal game effect data storage area 182b and the identification information effect data storage are specified. Effect data is acquired from the area 182c, and a process of setting it as the present bonus effect is performed.

The effect data for the mid-bonus effect specified from the display bonus effect table is the same as the effect data for the mid-bonus effect specified from the bonus effect table in the normal game mode, and is similar to other display effects. , the stamp 65a is added so as to exist on the front side with respect to the image data of the effect during the bonus in the normal game mode.

In step S3918, it is determined whether or not the display bonus effect counter is zero. When the effect counter during the display bonus is 0, a process of clearing the effect flag during the display bonus is performed in step S3919. After that, the setting process is terminated. If a negative determination is made in step S3914 or step S3918, this setting process ends.

As described above, in the present embodiment, even in the game in the specific mode, based on the winning of the challenge mode for display, the attack mode for display, and the VB mode for display, the display portent mode in which continuous effects are finally performed is selected. set. Further, the continuous effect is set based on the winning of the bonus. In addition, at the time of winning a special role, if the transition lottery of each mode is not won and the additional lottery is not won, the pseudo precursor mode for display corresponding to the pseudo precursor mode is set. Therefore, in the normal game mode, it is possible to virtually experience in the specific mode how a specific role or the like is won and the result is reported through the precursor mode and the continuous effect.

Here, counters are provided separately for the normal game mode and the specific mode for grasping the execution game of the continuous effect and grasping the number of the game during the continuous effect. Therefore, for example, while the continuous production is being executed in the normal game mode, even if it is switched to the specific mode, when the normal game mode is returned again, during the continuous production in the normal game mode before switching It is possible to resume from

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 104, for example, it is assumed that the normal game mode is switched to the specific mode at the timing when the first game of the continuous effect and the second game of the continuous effect are completed. In this case, in the specific mode, it is possible to play the above-described pseudo game regardless of the progress of the continuous effects in the normal game mode and the subsequent results. Then, in the specific mode, when a pseudo-display challenge mode or the like is won, the result is notified through a continuous effect. For example, after that, when the game mode is switched to the normal game mode, the continuous effect being digested in the normal game mode is restarted. In this case, as a continuation of the completed first game and second game, the continuous effect is restarted from the third game.

By doing so, when a continuous effect occurs in the normal game mode, for example, it is predicted that the winning notification of the attack mode will be performed after that, and in what manner the winning notification is performed in the specific mode. After preparing in advance how the game state will be changed and how the game state will shift after that, it is possible to make the continuous performance of the normal game mode desired.

Moreover, as described above, the continuous effect counter and the display continuous effect counter start counting as the precursor mode and the display precursor mode from the game before the continuous effect occurs. Therefore, for example, when a situation arises in which a continuous performance can occur with the winning of a specific role as a trigger, it is possible to prepare for the specific mode as described above before starting the continuous performance. In this way, the continuous performance need not be interrupted in the middle, and the continuous performance can be fully enjoyed from the start.

On the other hand, the continuous effect becomes the final game, and after an advantageous result or an unadvantageous result is notified, if any of the credit insertion switches 56 to 58 is operated, the winning notification effect is performed. (Processing for mode change notification in FIG. 49). In other words, even if the second credit insertion switch 57 is operated to play the 1-bet game after the result has been reported through the continuous effect in the 3-bet game, the winning notification effect in the 3-bet game is performed. After the above-mentioned result is notified through the continuous effect in the 1-bet game, even if the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated to play the 3-bet game, the winning notification effect in the 1-bet game is performed. This is, for example, when a continuous effect occurs while playing a game in the normal game mode, and the continuous effect continues until the final game, and when the advantageous result is notified, the following This is because an act of trying to establish a 1st BB prize or a 2nd BB prize by betting one game is conceivable. In other words, in such a case, when switching to the specific mode occurs based on the bet of one card, the winning of the 1st BB or the 2nd BB is reported through the continuous effect, and the player's feelings are heightened. This is because there is a possibility that the screen for practice will be displayed and the player will feel depressed, and the production effect of the long-awaited continuous production may be reduced.

In addition, in the present embodiment, it is possible to specify the game number of the effect in the normal game mode and the specific mode, respectively, for the effect during the bonus. The during-bonus effect will be described with reference to FIG.

As shown in FIG. 105(a), the during-bonus effect in the normal game mode and the during-bonus effect in the specific mode both have the same continuity of the number of games. Specifically, the effect during the bonus in the normal game mode is a story effect in the form of a live-action moving image in which the story progresses for each game, and the story is completed in 24 games. A story is assigned to each game, and the story production of the story is performed for a predetermined period of time. The predetermined period is set longer than the shortest period (approximately 4.1 sec) required from the start of the game (operation of the start lever 41) to the completion of medal payout. When each game is completed in the shortest period of time and the next game start operation is immediately performed, each story presentation being executed ends in the middle and the story presentation corresponding to the next game is started.

In the bonus state based on the 1st BB and the 2nd BB in the normal game mode, the maximum number of payouts is set to 216. Then, in each game, one of the BB middle and small roles 1, the BB middle red 7 matching role, and the BB middle BAR matching role (IV = 28 to 30) is won, and any one of the 1st small role to the 32nd small role wins. do. Even if any combination wins, as a privilege obtained, 9 medals are paid out, and the upper limit of payouts is reached after 24 games.

That is, in the normal game mode, the bonus state is set to end after 24 games, which is the predetermined number of games, and the effect during the bonus is set to end after 24 games, which is the predetermined number of games.

On the other hand, in the bonus state (special bonus state) based on the first PBB and the second PBB in the specific game mode, the maximum number of payouts is set to 24. Then, in each game, any one of the special BB medium and small role 1, the special BB medium red 7 matching role, and the special BB medium BAR matching role (IV = 78 to 80) is won, and any of the 1st small role to the 32nd small role Kaga wins. Even if any combination wins, the benefit obtained is one medal payout, and the payout upper limit is reached after 24 games.

That is, the bonus state in the specific mode is also set to end after 24 games, which is the predetermined number of games, similarly to the bonus state in the normal game mode. The effect during the bonus in the specific mode is similar to the effect during the bonus in the normal game mode, and the effect during the bonus is common in each number of games in the bonus state. The difference is that, like the other effects, during the bonus effect in the specific mode, the display image of the auxiliary display section 65 has a stamp 65a that says "free" representing the specific mode, and the stamp 65a is in the normal game mode. It is added so as to exist on the front side with respect to the image data of the effect during the bonus in .

Furthermore, in the during-bonus effect, the display of the number of remaining payouts to be paid out during the bonus and the display of the number of medals obtained during the bonus are performed. In the normal game mode, the remaining number of payouts is 216 as described above. is displayed. Then, in the second game during the bonus effect, the display of the remaining number of payouts is reduced to 207 and the display of the number of winnings is increased to 9, corresponding to the acquisition of 9 medals in the first game. . This display update is repeated in each game, and for example, in the bonus effect of the fifth game in FIG. In addition, in the 23rd game during bonus effect in FIG. 105(b3), the display of the number of remaining payouts is 18, and the display of the number of winnings is 196. 105(b4), in the final game (24th game) during the bonus effect, the display of the remaining number of payouts is 9, and the display of the number of winnings is 207. When the payout is performed in the final game, the number of remaining payouts becomes 0, and the bonus state ends.

In the bonus-during effect in the specific mode, the display of the remaining payout number to be paid out during the bonus and the display of the number of medals obtained during the bonus are performed. However, these displays in the specific mode are not the actual remaining payout number (maximum payout number of 24) or the actual acquisition number (maximum acquisition number of 24), but the remaining payout when replaced with the bonus state in the normal game mode. It is displayed as a number (upper limit payout number 216) or acquisition number (upper limit acquisition number 216).

For example, as shown in FIG. 105(c1), in the first game, the display of the number of remaining payouts of 216 and the number of winnings of 0 are displayed as the effect during the bonus in the specific mode. The displayed numbers are the same as those in FIG. 105(b1). In other words, the remaining payout number and the acquired number are displayed in a display different from the actual remaining payout number of 24 and the acquired number of 0. . Then, in the second game during the bonus effect, although one medal was obtained in the first game, nine medals were obtained in the normal game mode, so the display of the remaining number of payouts decreased to 207. However, the display of the acquired number increases to nine. This display update is repeated in each game, and for example, in the bonus effect of the fifth game in FIG. The displayed numbers are the same as those in FIG. 105(b2). In other words, the remaining payout number and the acquired number are displayed in a display different from the actual remaining payout number of 20 and the actual acquired number of 4. . In addition, in the 23rd game during bonus effect in FIG. 105(c3), the display of the number of remaining payouts is 18, and the display of the number of winnings is 196. Such display numbers are the same as those shown in FIG. 105(b3). In other words, the display of the remaining payout number and the acquisition number is performed in a display different from the actual remaining payout number of 2 and the actual acquisition number of 22. . 105(c4), in the final game (24th game) during the bonus effect, the display of the remaining number of payouts is 9, and the display of the number of winnings is 207. The displayed numbers are the same as those in FIG. 105(b4). In other words, the remaining payout number and the acquired number are displayed in a display different from the actual remaining payout number of 1 card and the actual acquired number of 23 cards. . When the payout is performed in the final game, the number of remaining payouts becomes 0, and the bonus state ends.

As described above, by winning the first PBB and the second PBB and shifting to the special bonus, the bonus state in the normal game mode can be simulated to be explored. Since the numbers when the first PBB or the second PBB is won are common to the numbers when the first BB or the second BB are won in the normal game mode, the transition to the bonus state is performed on the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. The player can experience the game in an easy-to-understand manner, and after shifting to the bonus state, the performance during the bonus state is common, so that the bonus in the specific mode can be enjoyed as a bonus in the normal game mode. .

Furthermore, since the number of continuous games in the bonus state is made common, and the effects of each game during the bonus state are made common, it is possible to share data between the normal game mode and the specific mode, resulting in a large amount of memory. It is possible to reduce the capacity. In particular, the effect during the bonus during the bonus state is in the form of a live-action moving image, and although the effect of increasing the attention of the bonus state is enormous, the storage capacity may increase. In this regard, as described above, since the effect during bonus in the specific mode is configured to divert the effect during bonus in the normal game mode, it is possible to ensure a good balance between effect and storage capacity.

In addition, the display of the remaining number of payouts and the number of acquisitions during the bonus effect is configured to use the display of the normal game mode instead of the display of the actual remaining number of payouts and the number of acquisitions during the specific mode. Therefore, even in the specific mode, it is possible to simulate the experience of winning a bonus and earning medals by redeeming the bonus.

Here, in this embodiment, when the first PBB or the second PBB is won during the specific mode, and the first PBB or the second PBB is not won, the so-called first PBB or the second PBB carryover state. The lottery table used for the lottery is different. Therefore, in the carryover state, the lottery table used for winning/losing determination will be described with reference to FIG. 106 .

As shown in FIG. 106, in the carryover state of the 1st PBB and the 2nd PBB, the point values of the index values IV=63 to 92 and 95 to 99 are the same as before the winning of the 1st PBB and the 2nd PBB (FIG. 72). , while the point values of the index values IV=50 to 62, 93, 94 are set to zero. In other words, when carrying over the 1st PBB or the 2nd PBB, 1 piece role, special 1st promotion replay 1-4, special fall replay 1-3, special 2nd promotion replay 1, 2, special BAR replay 1, 2 not elected to Therefore, when the first PBB or the second PBB is carried over, there is a case where the result is a loss without winning any combination. By doing so, it is possible to avoid the phenomenon that the first PBB or the second PBB cannot be won even though the player has won the first PBB or the second PBB. In other words, even during the above-mentioned carryover, if the gaming nature of one bet and one payout is maintained for each game, the bonus cannot be won by the control that prioritizes the small winnings over the bonus winnings, resulting in a failure. This is because it can force players to play 3-bet games and 2-bet games that include results.

When the 1st BB or 2nd BB won in the normal game mode is carried over, in the 3-bet game, the lottery table for the normal game state (BB's duplicate hand and BB's point value PV is 0) is referred to, and in the 1-bet game, the above. The lottery table in FIG. 106 is referred to. Therefore, even if the 1st BB win is aimed at by betting 1 coin when the 1st BB etc. is carried over, the 1st BB win etc. can be realized without being disturbed by the 1-coin payout combination.

In addition, in the carryover state, in place of or in addition to the configuration using the lottery table provided with the above-mentioned outliers, in the carryover state, the priority of attracting bonus prizes is higher than that of small wins. may be In other words, in a situation in which both the bonus and the minor combination are won, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R may be controlled to stop so that the bonus award is established with priority over the minor combination. Even in this way, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of not being able to win a bonus by winning a minor combination. Also, the control of prioritizing the bonus winning over the minor win is not limited to the bonus carry-over, and may be performed in the bonus winning game or the bonus non-winning state.

<Display of the number of continuous games and the number of acquisitions>
As described above, during the bonus state in the specific mode, it is assumed that nine medals have been paid out in each game, and the number of remaining payouts and the number of earned medals are displayed. In this embodiment, the number of wins corresponding to the normal game mode is displayed not only during the bonus state, but also in the attack mode for display, the VB mode for display, and the special zone for display.

FIG. 107 is a flow chart showing the counting process executed by the CPU 181 of the display control device 81. As shown in FIG. The count process is a process for counting the number of continuous games such as attack mode and attack mode for display, and the number of wins, and is started at a predetermined cycle (for example, a cycle of 1.49 msec).

In step S4001, it is determined whether or not the count condition is satisfied. The count condition is satisfied by starting the attack mode or starting the attack mode for display. When the count condition is established, a count flag corresponding to the game mode is set in the various flag storage area 183a in step S4002. The count flag is a flag for the CPU 181 to recognize that the count condition is already satisfied. For example, when the count condition is satisfied in the normal game mode (when the attack mode is started), , The count flag for the normal game mode is set, and when the count condition is satisfied in the specific mode (when the attack mode for display is started), the count flag for the specific mode is set.

If a negative determination is made in step S4001, or if the process of step S4002 has been executed, the process proceeds to step S4003. In step S4003, it is determined whether or not any count flag is set. If any count flag is set, the process advances to step S4004 to determine whether or not it is time to start the game. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a start command has been received from main controller 101 . If the game has started, the process advances to step S4005 to determine whether the specific mode flag is set. As already explained, the specific mode flag is a flag indicating that the game mode is the specific mode, the state in which the flag is set is the specific mode, and the state in which the flag is not set is the normal game mode.

In the normal game mode, in step S4006, addition processing of the game counters provided in the various counter areas 183b is performed. Specifically, 1 is added to the game counter. In the following step S4007, subtraction processing of the payout counters provided in the various counter areas 183b is performed. Specifically, a process of subtracting a value corresponding to the current bet number (1 to 3) from the payout counter is performed.

If it is determined in step S4005 that the game mode is the specific mode, in step S4008, addition processing is performed on the game counter for the specific mode provided in the various counter areas 183b. Specifically, 1 is added to the game counter for the specific mode. In the following step S4009, the payout counter for the specific mode provided in the various counter areas 183b is decremented. Specifically, instead of the current bet number (1), a value corresponding to the bet number in the normal game mode (uniformly 3 in this process) is subtracted from the specific mode payout counter.

If a negative determination is made in step S4004, or after the processing of step S4007 or step S4009 is executed, the process proceeds to step S4010. In step S4010, it is determined whether or not it is time to end the game. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a winning result command has been received from the main controller 101 . If the game has ended, it is determined in step S4011 whether or not there has been a payout in the current game. In step S4011, it is determined that there is a payout when the replay wins.

If there is a payout, it is determined in step S4012 whether or not the specific mode flag is set. If the specific mode flag is not set and the normal game mode is set, then in step S4013, a process of grasping the number of payouts is performed. In addition, at the time of winning a replay, the number of payouts is grasped assuming that the same number of payouts as the number of bets have been made. Then, in step S4014, a process of adding the current payout number to the payout counter is performed.

When it is determined in step S4012 that it is in the specific mode, in step S4015, processing for grasping the current winning mode is performed, and in step S4016, based on the winning mode, the number of payouts in the normal game mode is grasped. process. For example, as the winning mode this time, if the 1P small winning combination (special bell) winning has been established, instead of the actual payout number of 1 based on the 1P small winning combination, the 1P in the normal game mode Nine coins, which is the number of payouts at the time of winning the first minor combination corresponding to the minor combination, is grasped as the pseudo number of payouts. Also, for example, as the winning mode of this time, when the 26th P small winning combination (special watermelon) winning is established, instead of the actual number of payouts based on the 26th P small winning combination of 1, the normal game mode Five coins, which is the payout number at the time of winning the 26th minor combination corresponding to the 26P minor combination, is grasped as the pseudo payout number.

In step S4017, a process of adding the pseudo number of payouts grasped in step S4016 to the payout counter for the specific mode is performed. As a result, the payout counter for the specific mode becomes a value as if the payout was received in the normal game mode.

If a negative determination is made at step S4010 or step S4011, or after executing the process at step S4014 or step S4017, it is determined at step S4018 whether or not the count clear condition is established. The count clear condition is met by the end of the attack mode or the end of the attack mode for display. When the count clear condition is satisfied, the count flag corresponding to the game mode in which the count clear condition is satisfied is cleared in step S4019, and the corresponding game counter and payout counter are reset. Specifically, when the attack mode ends and the count clear condition is satisfied, the count flag for the normal game mode is cleared, and the game counter and payout counter for the normal game mode are reset to zero. When the display attack mode ends and the count clear condition is satisfied, the count flag for the specific mode is cleared, and the game counter and payout counter for the specific mode are reset to zero.

When a negative determination is made in step S4003 or step S4018, or after the processing of step S4019 is executed, this count processing ends.

In the normal game mode, for example, during the attack mode, as an effect during the attack mode, as shown in FIG. The total number of games corresponding to the value of the game counter for the normal game mode is displayed, and the number of wins corresponding to the value of the payout counter is displayed. Also, the number of remaining games in the attack mode or VB mode is displayed in an area arranged side by side with the display area for the total number of games. In addition, in the normal game mode, in the attack mode end effect setting process (step S2108 in the stop time effect setting process in FIG. 60) and the VB mode end effect setting process (step S2112 in the stop time effect setting process in FIG. 60) , the number of continuous games and the number of wins are displayed by referring to the game counter and payout counter for the normal game mode (FIGS. 66(b) and 67(b)).

In the specific mode, for example, during the display attack mode, even in the display attack mode, as shown in FIG. , the total number of games corresponding to the value of the game counter for the specific mode is displayed, and the number of wins corresponding to the value of the payout counter for the specific mode is displayed. Also, the number of remaining games in the attack mode for display or the VB mode for display is displayed in an area arranged side by side with the display area for the total number of games. By doing so, for example, during the display attack mode, it is possible to simulate how many medals can be obtained in each game.

In addition, the display attack mode end effect setting process (step S3415 in the specific mode game number management process in FIG. 89) and the display VB mode end effect setting process (specific mode game number management process in FIG. 89) In step S3422), the number of continuous games and the number of wins are displayed by referring to the game counter and payout counter for the specific mode (FIG. 94(b)), FIG. 95(b). In other words, the display of the number of wins in the specific mode is not the actual number of wins (one win in each game), but the number of wins obtained by measuring the number of payouts corresponding to the normal game mode. On the other hand, the number of continuous games is the actual number of games. As a result, it is possible to virtually experience in the specific mode how many games the attack mode or the like will continue for and how many wins will be obtained.

<Switching between normal game mode and specific mode>
Next, specific mode switching processing for switching between the normal game mode and the specific mode will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The specific mode switching process is a process that is started at a predetermined cycle (for example, 1.49 msec cycle) by the CPU 181 of the display control device 81 on the sub side when the game is stopped (the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped). be.

In step S4101, it is determined whether or not the second production switch 67 as a switching button has been operated. If the operation has been performed, it is determined in step S4102 whether or not the player is in any bonus state or bonus carry-over state. If it is in the bonus state, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled so as to perform a switching-impossible effect in step S4103. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 110(a), the auxiliary display unit 65 displays "mode switching NG" to notify that switching between the normal game mode and the specific mode cannot be performed. . After the processing of step S4103 is performed, the switching processing ends without performing the following processing for mode switching.

That is, in the present embodiment, switching between the normal game mode and the specific mode is disabled in the bonus state or in the carry-over state, which is before the winning of the bonus, although the bonus has been won. By doing so, not only the configuration of the lottery table referred to at the time of carrying over, but also the switching between both modes is substantially prevented, and the bonuses are duplicated in both game modes. catastrophic events are avoided.

If a negative determination is made in step S4102, the process proceeds to step S4104. In step S4104, it is determined whether or not the specific mode flag is set in the various flag storage area 183a. If the specific mode flag is not set, it means that the operation of the second effect switch 67 was performed during the normal game mode. In this case, in step S4105, processing for setting a specific mode flag is executed. Further, in step S4106, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled so as to execute the specific mode switching effect. The specific mode switching effect is as already explained, and as shown in FIG. teaches that it is possible to return to the normal game mode. After setting the specific mode switching effect, in step S4107, the game contents are stored. Specifically, various flags and various counters for the normal game mode are made unrewritable (inaccessible), and various flags and various counters for the specific mode are made rewritable (accessible). Then, in step S4108, specific mode setting processing is executed. Such processing will be described later in detail.

If the specific mode flag is set in step S4104, it means that the operation of the second effect switch 67 was performed during the specific mode. In this case, in step S4109, processing for clearing the specific mode flag is executed. Further, in step S4110, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled so as to execute the normal game mode switching effect. The effect at the time of switching to the normal game mode is as already explained, and as shown in FIG. Teaching is made that it is possible to return to a specific mode by an operation.

After the processing of step S4110 is executed, game content is stored in step S4111. Specifically, various flags and various counters for the specific mode are made unrewritable (inaccessible), and various flags and various counters for the normal game mode are made rewritable (accessible).

If a negative determination is made in step S4101, or after the processing of step S4108 or step S4111 is executed, the process proceeds to step S4112. In step S4112, it is determined whether or not the specific mode flag is set. If it is set, it is determined in step S4113 whether or not the game non-execution period has elapsed for a predetermined specific period (3 minutes) or more. The game non-execution period is a state in which bets are not set, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are not rotating, and medals are not paid out. is completed, counting is started by predetermined timer processing. Then, for example, the count of the timer processing is reset on the condition that any one of various operation units such as the start lever 41, the stop switches 42 to 44, and the credit input switches 56 to 58 is operated. Therefore, for example, after the payout of medals for a predetermined game is completed, if a specific period of time elapses without any operating unit being operated, an affirmative determination is made in step S4113.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S4113, it is determined in step S4114 whether it is in the bonus state or the bonus carryover state. If it is not in either state, a process of clearing the specific mode flag is executed in step S4115, and in subsequent step S4116, the normal game mode switching effect is set.

That is, when the game non-execution period passes the specific period in the specific mode, it is forcibly switched to the normal game mode on the condition that the bonus state or the bonus carry-over state is not set. As a result, for example, when a player who has practiced a game in the specific mode ends the game without switching to the normal game mode, the next player who takes a seat continues to play in the specific mode without noticing. It is suppressed that it will be lost.

After the processing of step S4116 is executed, game content storage processing is executed in step S4117. Such processing is the same as the processing in step S4111. After performing the process of step S4117, this switching process is terminated.

If it is in the bonus state or the bonus carry-over state in step S4114, the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like is controlled so that the bonus consumption instruction effect is performed in step S4118. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 110(b), the auxiliary display section 65 displays "Please redeem the bonus" to notify that the bonus in the specific mode should be redeemed. After performing the process of step S4118, this switching process is terminated.

For example, when a game ends in a bonus state or in a bonus carry-over state in a specific mode, and a succeeding player tries to play in the normal game mode without noticing it, a non-switching performance can be executed. In this case, there is a risk of being mistaken for a malfunction of the gaming machine, and the above-described bonus redemption instruction effect is configured to suppress the occurrence of such misunderstanding.

<Specific mode setting processing>
The specific mode setting process executed in step S4108 of the specific mode switching process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S4201, it is determined whether or not the switching effect period has elapsed. The switching effect period is a period for maintaining the state after performing the specific mode switching effect, and is set to, for example, about 4.1 sec (corresponding to the period required to complete one game). In this period as well, the elapse of the period from the execution timing of the effect at the time of switching to the specific mode is grasped by predetermined timer processing.

When the effect period at switching has passed, in step S4202, the auxiliary display section 65 is controlled so as to display the specific mode setting screen. On the specific mode setting screen, for example, whether to take over the game content of the specific mode performed last time and carry out the game of the specific mode this time, or reset the game content of the specific mode performed last time and play the game of this specific mode to choose whether to implement For example, as shown in FIGS. 112(a) and 112(b), a button image displaying "Continued from last time" indicating that the game contents are to be handed over, and a button image displaying "Reset to reset" indicating that the game contents are reset. A button image displaying "Start" is alternately highlighted every predetermined period (for example, 1 sec), and a predetermined button operation (for example, operation of the first effect switch 66) is performed at the timing of the highlighted display. When prompted, allow selection of the highlighted side.

After displaying the setting screen in step S4202, in step S4203, it is determined whether or not any of the above selections (selection to take over the game content or selection to reset the game content) has been made. do. If no selection has been made, the process advances to step S4204 to determine whether or not a start operation has been performed, that is, whether or not a start command from main controller 101 has been received. If the command at start has not been received, the process returns to step S4203, and if the command at start has been received, in step S4205, the game content is set to take over, and this setting process ends. In step S4205, a process of reading various flags and various counters for the specific mode made accessible in the process of step S4108 is performed. That is, when the start lever 41 is operated without making any selection, the previous game contents are automatically taken over.

If it is determined in step S4203 that any selection has been made, it is determined in step S4206 whether or not a selection to take over the game content has been made. If handover is selected, the process advances to step S4205 to perform handover setting processing, and then this setting processing ends.

If it is determined in step S4206 that resetting of the game content has been selected instead of taking over the game content, reset processing of the specific mode game content is performed in step S4207. In this processing, processing for initializing various flags and various counters for the specific mode made accessible in the processing of step S4108 is performed. As a result, the game content of the specific mode is set to the state (normal mode for display) when the power is turned on.

In the following step S4208, a reset screen is displayed. As the reset screen, for example, as shown in FIG. 113(a), along with the display of "free mode reset" indicating that the game content of the specific mode has been reset, a display challenge is displayed as an option of the state to be started after the reset. "From challenge mode" option corresponding to mode, "From attack mode" option corresponding to attack mode for display, "From VB mode" option corresponding to VB mode for display, Special zone for display support The option "from the specialized zone" to be displayed, and the option "from the beginning" corresponding to the normal mode for display are displayed. Further, on the reset screen, for example, an image of one option among the options is highlighted, and the option to be highlighted is switched every predetermined period (for example, 1 sec). Then, when a predetermined button operation (for example, operation of the first effect switch 66) is performed at the highlighted timing, the highlighted option can be selected.

In step S4209, it is determined whether or not an operation for selecting an option corresponding to the challenge mode for display has been performed among the displayed options. When the display challenge mode is selected, in step S4210, a process of setting a display challenge mode flag is performed. This allows the specific mode to start from the display challenge mode.

In the subsequent step S4211, processing for setting the challenge mode start effect for display is performed. This allows the player to understand that the specific mode is started from the challenge mode for display (that the selection operation for the challenge mode for display is valid). In the challenge mode start effect for display in this case, for example, as shown in FIG. Each button image is highlighted alternately every predetermined period (for example, 1 sec).

In the following step S4212, a process of starting counting the number of continuous games in the challenge mode for display is performed.

If it is determined in step S4209 that an operation for selecting the challenge mode for display has not been performed, it is determined in step S4213 whether an operation for selecting an option corresponding to the attack mode for display has been performed. When the display attack mode is selected, in step S4214, a process of setting a display attack notification flag is performed. As a result, the specific mode can be started from the state of the attack mode for display at the time of notification of winning.

In the following step S4215, processing for setting attack mode winning notification effects for display is performed. As a result, the player can recognize that the specific mode is started from the game in which winning notification of the attack mode for display is performed (that the operation for selecting the attack mode for display is valid). In this case, in the attack mode winning notification effect for display, for example, as shown in FIG. Then, each button image is highlighted alternately every predetermined period (for example, 1 sec).

If it is determined in step S4213 that the operation for selecting the attack mode for display has not been performed, it is determined in step S4216 whether or not the operation for selecting an option corresponding to the VB mode for display has been performed. When the display VB mode is selected, in step S4217, a process of setting each flag of a display attack notification flag, a display attack mode flag, and a display VB notification flag is performed. As a result, the specific mode can be started from the state of the VB mode for display at the time of notification of winning.

In the following step S4218, a process for setting the display VB mode winning notification effect is performed. As a result, the player can recognize that the specific mode is started from the game in which the winning notification of the VB mode for display is performed (that the selection operation of the VB mode for display is valid). In the VB mode winning notification effect for display in this case, for example, as shown in FIG. Then, each button image is highlighted alternately every predetermined period (for example, 1 sec).

If it is determined in step S4216 that the operation for selecting the VB mode for display has not been performed, it is determined in step S4219 whether or not the operation for selecting an option corresponding to the specialized zone for display has been performed. If a special zone for display has been selected, in step S4220, an attack notification flag for display, an attack mode flag for display, a notification flag for VB for display, a VB mode flag for display, and a special zone flag for display are set. is set. As a result, the specific mode can be started from the start game in the special zone for display.

In step S4221, a process of setting a special display zone start effect is performed. As a result, the player can understand that the specific mode is started from the start game of the special display zone (that the selection operation of the special display zone is effective). In the specialized display zone start effect in this case, for example, as shown in FIG. Then, each button image is highlighted alternately every predetermined period (for example, 1 sec).

After executing the processing in step S4212, step S4215, step S4218, or step S4222, or when a negative determination is made in step S4219, it is determined in step S4223 whether or not a determination operation has been performed. Specifically, at the timing when the "Enter button" image is highlighted among the "Enter button" image and the "Back button" image displayed in each effect image set above, a predetermined button operation ( For example, it is determined whether or not the operation of the first effect switch 66) has been performed. Further, in step S4223, an affirmative determination is also made when the option "from the beginning" corresponding to the normal mode for display is selected among the options in FIG. 113(a). If the determination in step S4223 is affirmative, this setting process is terminated, and if the determination is negative, the process returns to step S4209.

As described above, by making it possible to set the starting state of the specific mode, it is possible to improve the versatility of the specific mode for practice. That is, if a player can select which state he wants to practice (pseudo-experience) in a specific mode, he does not have to play the game with the content he already understands, and concentrates on the state he wants to practice or experience. It becomes possible to practice or experience by doing.

In this case, when the attack mode for display or the VB mode for display is selected, instead of setting the start of the attack mode for display (start effect) or the start of the VB mode for display (start effect), was configured to set As a result, it is possible to experience that the attack mode is started after winning the third replay, through the appearance that the attack mode for display is started after winning the third small winning combination. In addition, it is possible to make the player experience that the VB mode is started after winning the fourth and fifth replays through the VB mode for display being started after winning the fourth and fifth minor winning combinations. In other words, the discomfort of starting the attack mode without going through the third replay winning (without going through the third replay winning), and without going through the fourth and fifth replay winning (fourth replay winning) It is possible to avoid giving a sense of incongruity that the VB mode is started without going through the 5th character prize winning.

On the other hand, when the special display zone is selected, the special display zone start effect is set (the game is started from the start game of the special display zone). This is a mode that shifts to the special display zone when special BAR replays 1 and 2 are won, and when the 7th replay small role winning is established in the game. This is because unlike the VB mode, the winning game and the starting game cannot be different. By doing so, it is possible to artificially start the special zone without the seventh replay winning (without the seventh replay minor winning). In this case, for example, at the time of starting the special zone for display, it is possible to display the message "This is the mode that starts when the bar is ready" and explain the difference between the stop roll and the starting mode. .

<Modification 1>
In Modification 1, the winning probabilities of various special roles in the specific mode are different from the winning probabilities of the corresponding specific roles in the normal game mode. FIG. 114 is a lottery table in the specific mode in Modification 1. FIG.

For example, the point value PV corresponding to the special special combination with index values IV=63-77, 81-92 is set to be 10 times the point value PV (FIG. 31, etc.) of the corresponding special combination in the normal game mode. As a result, the winning probability of the special specific combination becomes 10 times the corresponding specific combination in the normal game mode. By doing so, by winning a special role, it is possible to experience that a lottery for transition to the challenge mode, attack mode, VB mode, special zone, etc. Thus, the transition lottery and the additional lottery can be experienced with a higher probability than the transition lottery and the additional lottery in the normal game mode. In other words, it is possible to increase the possibility that the shift lottery or the additional lottery will occur in the number of games that is smaller than in the normal game mode.

In Modification 1, as shown in FIG. 114, in addition to the winning probability of the special special combination, the winning probability of the first PBB and the second PBB are also made different from the winning probability of the corresponding first BB and second BB in the normal game mode. , Specifically, it is configured to be elected with a probability of 10 times that of the normal game mode. As a result, the player can experience the bonus state with a higher probability than in the normal game mode, in other words, it is possible to increase the possibility of bonus winning occurring in a smaller number of games than in the normal game mode.

As described above, when the winning probability of the special special combination is increased, the winning probability of other combinations must be lowered. In that respect, in this modification 1, as shown in FIG. 4 and second promotion replays 1 and 2 with the same probability of winning, the winning probability of other special replays (special fall replays 1 to 3, special BAR replays 1 and 2) is set to other replays corresponding to the normal game mode is lower than the probability of This avoids the inconvenience that the attack mode for display or the VB mode for display does not start for a long time despite winning the lottery for transition to the attack mode for display or the VB mode for display based on the winning of the special special role. It is for

On the other hand, for special fall replays 1 to 3 and special BAR replays 1 and 2, even if the winning probability is reduced, the display attack mode and display VB mode are configured to end when the number of games is counted. There is no effect on the game, and even if the above is done, it is unlikely that any inconvenience will occur.

<Modification 2>
In this modified example, the configuration regarding the setting of the effect during the bonus during the specific mode is different. In the bonus state (special bonus state) in the specific mode in this modification, a 3-bet game is possible in addition to the 1-bet game.

In this case, as shown in FIG. 115(a), as a combination that can be won during the special bonus state, benefits corresponding to the 30P minor winning combination to the 32P minor winning combination are differentiated according to each betting game. That is, when the 30th small winning combination to the 32nd small winning combination are established in the 1-bet game, the same medal payout as the number of bets is given as a privilege, and the 30th small winning combination to the 30th small winning combination in the 3-bet game. When a 32P minor winning prize is established, the payout of 3 medals, which is the same as the number of bets, is given as a privilege. By doing so, even if the special bonus state is canceled in the 3-bet game, it is possible to prevent the medals from increasing or decreasing.

As shown in FIG. 115(b), for example, when all the games in the special bonus state are played as 3-bet games, 3 medals are paid out per game, and a total of 8 games are played in the special bonus state. The maximum number of payouts will be reached. This makes it possible to shorten the consumption of the special bonus that requires 24 games.

FIG. 116(a) shows part of the specific mode continuous effect setting process in the second modified example.

If it is determined in step S3904 in FIG. 103 that the continuous effect flag for display is not set, it is determined in step S4301 whether or not the effect flag during display bonus is set. This processing is the same as the processing in step S3914, and if it is not set, the setting processing ends. If the display bonus in-progress flag is set, it is determined in step S4302 whether or not the game to be started this time is a 3-bet game. If the game is not a 3-bet game but a 1-bet game, in step S4303, a process of subtracting 1 from the effect counter during the display bonus is performed. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S4302 that the game to be started this time is a 3-bet game, in step S4304, a process of subtracting 3 from the display bonus effect counter is performed.

After the execution of the process of step S4303 or step S4304, the process proceeds to step S3916 in FIG. 103, the display bonus medium effect table is obtained, and then the bonus medium effect setting process corresponding to the value of the display bonus medium effect counter value is performed. etc. are performed.

For example, if all the games in the special bonus state are played as 3-bet games, as shown in FIG. Effect data for the 1st game of the effect during the bonus is obtained, effect data for the 4th game of the effect during the bonus is obtained for the 2nd game, and effect data for the 7th game of the effect during the bonus is obtained for the 3rd game. Effect data is obtained by skipping three games. By doing so, even if the number of games played in the special bonus state is reduced, the difference between the effect content of each game and the number of games played can be reduced.

<Modification 3>
In this modification 3, it is configured such that the PCB can be won during the special bonus. FIG. 117 is a lottery table for the special bonus in the third modification. The PCB (special CB) in this embodiment is a so-called single bonus (SB), and one JAC game is executed based on the winning of the PCB (SB). In the JAC game, special CB small and medium combinations 1 to 4 with index values IV of 96 to 97 are won with a high probability.

As shown in FIG. 117, in the special bonus in this modified example, in addition to the index values IV=78 to 80, the point value PV is also assigned to the index value IV=95. It wins with a probability of 1 when the index value IV=95 (it becomes a special CB win).

FIG. 116(b) shows part of the end determination process in the third modification.

In step S4401, it is determined whether or not the PCB (SB) winning has been established, and if the PCB (SB) winning has been established, the remaining payout amount is set to 0 in step S4402. If a negative determination is made in step S4401, or after the processing of step S4402 is executed, the processing from step S1501 onward in FIG. 54 is performed. Then, the number of remaining payouts is set to 0 in step S4402, so that an affirmative determination is made in step S1504, and processing for ending the bonus is performed.

That is, by performing the modification 3, it is possible to reduce the number of games played in the special bonus state. As a result, the bonus state in which the number of medals does not increase or decrease can be terminated early.

In the special bonus state, the probability of winning the PCB is not limited to the above, and may be higher or lower than the above. If the probability is high, the special bonus state can be terminated earlier, and if the probability is low, it is possible to reduce the divergence from the effect during the bonus in the normal game mode.

It should be noted that, for example, the above configuration may be combined with Modification 2 so as to make it possible to win the PCB in the 3-bet game in the special bonus state, but not to win the PCB in the 1-bet game. When the special bonus state is canceled in the 3-bet game, it can be considered that the player has made a decision to cancel the special bonus state at an early stage. This is because it is considered that the player will not feel discomfort even if the divergence occurs.

In the end determination process, the remaining payout number at the time of PCB (SB) winning may be set to 1 or more, and the bonus may be ended after the special CB state (state in which one JAC game can be executed) is executed. In this case, the game in the special CB state is configured to be executed in the 2-bet mode together with the 2-bet mode in the normal game mode, and two medals are paid out as a privilege based on the winning of each winning combination in the special CB state. should be By doing so, a bonus state in which an increase in medals cannot be expected can be achieved.

In the configuration in which the bonus state is ended after each game in the special CB state is executed, for example, the number of remaining payouts at the time of PCB winning is set to 3, and each game in the special CB state is executed in the 2-bet mode. It is also possible to provide a configuration in which an increase of one medal can be expected by, for example, paying out two medals as a privilege based on the establishment of each winning combination during the CB state. When the first PBB or the second PBB is won, a transition to a bonus state is performed, but medals are not paid out. Therefore, if the specific mode shifts to the bonus state, the number of medals will be reduced by one. In that respect, if the bonus state is configured so that an increase of one medal can be expected as described above, it is possible to eliminate the increase or decrease of medals by deducting the decrease of one medal at the time of winning.

It should be noted that, as a configuration in which the number of medals is increased during the bonus and the total amount of medals is zero when the bonus is won, a configuration that does not involve the PCB state may be used. The number of payouts is set to 2, each game in the special bonus state is executed in a 1-bet mode, and two medals are paid out as a privilege based on the establishment of each winning combination in the special bonus state. Therefore, it may be configured such that an increase of one medal can be expected.

<Modification 4>
In Modified Example 4, the specific mode is set from the demo screen. The demo screen is a screen that is displayed when the effect switch (first effect switch 66) provided in the slot machine 10 is operated when the game is not in progress. As a demo screen, for example, as shown in FIG. "Volume setting" option for setting a specific mode, "Free mode setting" option for setting a specific mode, and "Mobile-linked service" option for setting using a player's mobile terminal, etc. etc. are displayed respectively. Also, on the demo screen, for example, an image of one of the options is highlighted, and the highlighted option is switched every predetermined period (for example, 1 sec). Then, when a predetermined button operation (for example, operation of the first effect switch 66) is performed at the highlighted timing, the highlighted option can be selected.

Then, when the selection operation of the option "free mode setting" is performed, the free mode setting image is displayed on the auxiliary display portion 65 as shown in FIG. In the free mode setting image, an image of a "YES button" corresponding to resetting and an image of a "NO button" not corresponding to resetting are displayed as options for whether or not to reset the gaming history of the specific mode. The highlighted display of the button image is switched every predetermined period (for example, 1 sec). Then, when a predetermined button operation (for example, operation of the first effect switch 66) is performed at the highlighted timing, the highlighted option can be selected.

For example, when the image selection operation of the "YES button" is performed, the specific mode setting screen of FIG. 112 is displayed. The specific mode setting screen and the subsequent reset operation are as described above.

On the other hand, when the image selection operation of the "NO button" is performed, the demo screen shown in FIG. 118(a) is displayed again.

By doing so, the operability of setting the specific mode is improved. That is, it is possible to set the specific mode only by operating the first effect switch 66 without operating the second effect switch 67 . As a result, for example, even if the second effect switch 67 is not always operable, and can be operated based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, it is possible to set (initialize, etc.) the specific mode. Become.

<Modification 5>
In this modification 5, on the demo screen (FIG. 118(a)) shown in modification 4, a specific mode is set in the mobile-linked service.

In the demo screen, when an operation for selecting the option "mobile-linked service" is performed, a mobile-linked service image is displayed on the auxiliary display section 65 as shown in FIG. In the mobile-linked service image, you can choose whether to use the service in normal game mode or use the same service in specific mode. A non-corresponding image for "specific mode" is displayed, and the highlight display of each image is switched every predetermined period (for example, 1 sec). Then, when a predetermined button operation (for example, operation of the first effect switch 66) is performed at the highlighted timing, the highlighted option can be selected.

Information input/output processing relating to the cell-phone-linked service will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The information input/output process is started at a predetermined cycle (for example, every 1.49 msec) by the CPU 181 of the display control device 81 when the game is stopped.

In step S4401, it is determined whether or not the cell-phone-linked service has been selected on the demo screen. If the cell-phone-linked service is not selected, the input/output processing is terminated. If the mobile-linked service is selected, the auxiliary display unit 65 is controlled to display the mobile-linked service image (FIG. 119(a)) in step S4402.

In step S4403, it is determined whether or not an operation for selecting an option for the normal game mode has been performed in the mobile-linked service image. When the selection operation of the option for the normal game mode is performed, in step S4404, the auxiliary display unit 65 is controlled so as to display the game information for the normal game mode. In the display of the game information for the normal game mode, for example, as shown in FIG. number of wins in zone, number of additional games, maximum number of additional games, number of longest continuous games in attack mode, maximum number of acquired games in attack mode, etc.) are displayed by QR code (registered trademark) or the like so that they can be acquired by a portable terminal or the like. Also, in the display of the game information for the normal game mode, for example, a password input section may be provided so that the password can be input by the player's operation. The password is set according to, for example, the game history, and by inputting the password, the player can continue the previous game on the gaming machine.

In step S4405, it is determined whether or not information has been entered using the password or the like. When information input is performed, in step S4406, as update processing of the game information for the normal game mode, the information of the currently stored game history is rewritten to the game history corresponding to the input password. I do. The password and the game history are stored in the ROM 182 of the display control device 81 in one-to-one correspondence. If a negative determination is made in step S4405, or if the process of step S4406 has been executed, this input/output process ends.

If it is determined in step S4403 that the selection operation for the option for the normal game mode has not been performed, the process proceeds to step S4407. In step S4407, it is determined whether or not an operation for selecting an option for a specific mode has been performed. When the selection operation of the option for the specific mode is performed, in step S4408, the auxiliary display section 65 is controlled to display the game information for the specific mode. In the display of the game information for the specific mode, for example, as shown in FIG. number of wins in special zone for display, number of wins in special zone for display, number of additions, maximum number of games to be added, maximum number of continuous games in attack mode for display, maximum number of acquired attack mode for display, etc.) It is indicated by a code (registered trademark) or the like. In the display of the game information for the specific mode, a password input section is provided to allow the player to input the password, as in the case of the display of the game information for the normal game mode.

In step S4409, it is determined whether information has been input using the password or the like. When the information is input, in step S4410, as a process of updating the game information for the specific mode, the process of rewriting the currently stored game history information to the game history corresponding to the input password is performed. conduct. If a negative determination is made in step S4407 or step S4409, or if the process of step S4410 is executed, this input/output process ends.

As described above, by performing the modification 5, for example, when the practice in the specific mode is stopped in the middle, the game table, the game hall, the game day, etc. are changed, and the practice is restarted from the middle. It becomes possible to

<Modification 6>
In this modification 6, in the normal game mode, when the number of continuous games in the game state equal to or higher than the second RT state as the game state reaches a predetermined number of games, the game state is forcibly set to the normal game state. FIG. 121 is a flow chart showing the advantageous section processing in Modification 6. As shown in FIG. The advantageous section indicates a section of a game that is played in a state where the gaming state is the second RT state or the third RT state. The advantageous section process is started by the CPU 102 of the main control device 101 at predetermined intervals (for example, every 1.49 msec).

In step S4501, it is determined whether or not transition to the second RT state has occurred. Such determination can be made depending on whether or not the third replay win has been established. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4501, then in step S4502 a game number counting flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d.

If a negative determination is made in step S4501 or after the processing of step S4502 is executed, it is determined in step S4503 whether or not the game number counting flag is set. If it has not been set, the processing for the advantageous interval ends. If it is set, the number of games is counted in step S4504. In the game number counting process, it is determined whether or not it is time to start one game, and if it is time to start one game, a process of adding 1 to the number-of-games counter for advantageous section in the various counter areas 106e is performed.

In the following step S4505, it is determined whether or not the number of continuous games in the advantageous section has reached the upper limit number of games (for example, 1500 games) based on the result of the game count measurement process. If the game has not reached the upper limit game, the processing for this advantageous interval ends. If the upper limit number of games has been reached, processing for clearing flags and counters for each display mode is performed in step S4506. Through such processing, the display mode shifts to the normal mode. As a result, the notification of the order of pressing is not performed, and the game state also shifts from the RT state to the normal game state when the fall replay winning is established. It should be noted that the RT setting flag may be cleared in step S4506 to forcibly shift the game state to the normal game state. After that, in step S4507, the forced end command is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81, and then this advantageous section processing ends. Upon receiving the forced termination command, the display control device 81 performs processing (processing for resetting various flags and various counters) corresponding to the forced switching of the display mode such as the attack mode to the normal mode. The auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled so as to notify that the reset has been performed. As a notification of the compulsory resetting, for example, the auxiliary display section 65 displays the content of "The end upper limit has been reached. Shifting to the normal game state."

In this case, in the game number counting process (step S4505), the advantageous interval game number counter is added regardless of the number of bets. Then, for example, if practice is performed in the specific mode during the advantageous section, the number of games that can be played in the advantageous section will be reduced by the number of games that the specific mode is played.

Therefore, for example, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 122(a), in the specific mode switching process in Modification 6, in step S4601, when it is determined that the second effect switch 67 as a switching button has been operated. , in step S4602, it is determined whether or not it is in the bonus state or the bonus carry-over state. The processing of steps S4601 and S4602 is the same as the processing of steps S4101 and S4102 described above.

If it is determined in step S4602 that the bonus is in progress, the specific mode switching process is terminated after setting a switching disabled effect in step S4603. The processing of step S4603 is the same as the processing of step S4103.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4602 that the game is not in the bonus mode, it is determined in step S4604 whether it is in the attack mode, VB mode, or special zone in the normal game mode. That is, it is determined whether or not it is in the advantageous section. If it is determined in step S4604 that it is in the advantageous section, then in step S4603 a switching-impossible effect is set, and then this specific mode switching process is terminated. If a negative determination is made in step S4604, the process proceeds to step S4104. The processing after step S4104 is as described above.

By doing so, it is possible to prevent the number of executable games in the advantageous section in the normal game mode from decreasing due to the execution of the specific mode during the advantageous section.

<Modification 7>
In Modification 7, in Modification 6, attention is called at the time of switching while enabling switching to the specific mode during the advantageous section.

For example, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 122(b), steps S4701 to S4704 are performed in the same manner as steps S4601 to S4604. In step S4704, if it is determined that the mode is any of attack mode, VB mode, and special zone, unlike step S4604, the process advances to step S4705 to perform an attention calling effect. It controls the display unit 65 and the like.

As a warning effect, as shown in FIG. 123, along with the display "in the advantageous section" indicating that it is in the advantageous section, it is recommended to play in the 3-bet game, "Because the advantageous section is reduced, 3 cards are displayed." Please return to the bet." is displayed. If a negative determination is made in step S4704 or after the processing of step S4705 is performed, the process proceeds to step S4104.

In other words, the modification 7 is configured so that the game mode can be switched even during the advantageous section, and left to the judgment of the player.

For example, the continuation upper limit of the advantageous section is not only the completion of the upper limit number of games (for example, 1500 games), but also the acquisition of the upper limit number of medals (for example, 3000). If the forced end effect is different depending on the situation, some players may want the game to be forced to end by completing the maximum number of games instead of acquiring the maximum number of wins. Therefore, as described above, if the specific mode can be executed at the will of the player even during the advantageous section, it is possible to prevent the game from being forcibly terminated when the maximum number of games is exhausted based on the player's decision. can be made possible.

For example, when the game is forcibly terminated due to the completion of the upper limit number of games, the setting value of the slot machine 10 is suggested as a forced termination effect. In this case, after winning the attack mode in the normal game mode, the game mode is switched from the normal game mode to the specific mode, the game is executed until the upper limit number of games is reached, and then the normal game mode is switched to the attack mode. Although the number of medals acquired in the mode is reduced, the number of medals does not decrease during the specific mode, so it is possible to execute a forced termination effect without reducing the number of medals. By doing so, the game property of steadily acquiring medals in the attack mode and the game property of executing the forced end effect while selecting not to perform the addition of the attack mode, etc. It is also possible to let the person choose.

<Modification 8>
In Modification 8, the operability of the first credit insertion switch 56 is different, and the number of medals to be inserted based on the operation of the first credit insertion switch 56 is different depending on the situation. FIG. 124 is a flow chart showing the MAX bet switching process regarding the operation of the first credit insertion switch 56. As shown in FIG. The MAX bet switching process is started by the CPU 102 of the main controller 101 at a predetermined cycle (for example, a cycle of 1.49 msec).

In step S4801, the operation of the second credit insertion switch 57 is performed, and it is determined whether or not a single bet operation has occurred. When a one-card bet operation has been performed, it is determined in step S4802 whether or not a one-card bet mode flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. The one-card bet mode flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to specify the number of inserted medals based on the operation of the first credit insertion switch 56. When the one-card bet mode flag is set, the first credit insertion switch 56 is activated. is operated, one virtual medal is inserted, and three virtual medals are inserted when the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated in a state where the one-card bet mode flag is not set.

Specifically, when it is determined in step S4802 that the one-card bet mode flag is not set, that is, the second credit insertion switch 57 is operated in a situation where the one-card bet mode flag is not set. In this case, in step S4803, processing for setting the number of medals inserted based on the operation of the first credit insertion switch 56 to one is performed. In the following step S4804, a one-card bet mode flag is set.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4802 that the one-card bet mode flag is set, that is, if the second credit insertion switch 57 is operated while the one-card bet mode flag is set, step At S4805, processing for setting the number of inserted medals to three based on the operation of the first credit insertion switch 56 is performed. In the subsequent step S4806, the one-card bet mode flag is cleared.

After the processing of step S4804 or step S4806 is performed, a bet number switching command is set as an output target to the display control device 81 in step S4807. If it is determined in step S4801 that the second credit insertion switch 57 has not been operated, or if the processing of step S4807 has been executed, this switching processing ends.

That is, in Modification 8, the number of inserted medals is switched based on the operation of the first credit insertion switch 56 based on the operation of the second credit insertion switch 57 . By doing so, for example, when trying to play a game in a specific mode, when the second credit insertion switch 57 is operated once, the number of medals inserted based on the operation of the first credit insertion switch 56 corresponds to the specific mode. Therefore, in the specific mode, it is possible to operate the first credit insertion switch 56 instead of the second credit insertion switch 57 to play the game. In other words, although the number of bets differs between the normal game mode and the specific mode, the operation buttons for inserting medals are common, and in the specific mode, the simulated experience of the normal game mode can be made more realistic. can.

For example, in the normal game mode, in the normal game state or bonus state, the specified number is 3 bets, and in the CB state, the specified number is 2 bets. It is possible to vary the number of inserted virtual medals. On the other hand, switching between the normal game mode and the specific mode is performed only in the display control device 81 and not via the main control device 101 . Therefore, if the game mode is switched, the number of inserted virtual medals at the time of MAX bet is also automatically switched (three virtual medals are inserted in the normal game mode, and one virtual medal is inserted in the specific mode). ) If it is configured, the operation information of the second effect switch 67 for switching the game mode is output from the display control device 81 to the main control device 101, and the second effect switch 67 is connected to the main control device 101 It becomes necessary to Then, the processing load of the main controller 101 may increase, and the increase in the information input to the main controller 101 makes it easier for fraudulent acts to occur. I don't like it. Therefore, by adopting the configuration described above, it is possible to improve the operability of the game in the specific mode without increasing the information input to the main control device 101 .

Incidentally, if switching to the game mode automatically switches the number of inserted virtual medals at the time of MAX betting, the second effect switch 67 is connected to the main control device 101 to switch the game mode. It is sufficient if the main controller 101 can grasp the fact.

In the eighth modification, the second credit insertion switch 57 does not have to be the same size or substantially the same size as the first credit insertion switch 56, and for example, the third credit insertion switch 58 is provided with the same size or substantially the same size. may be As a result, the size of the second credit input switch 57 is reduced, so that the area where the credit input switches 56 to 58 are installed can be narrowed, and the installation locations for other accessories (effect buttons, etc.) can be secured. becomes possible.

<Modification 9>
In the ninth modification, the configuration of the identification display indicating that the specific mode is in progress is different.

As shown in FIGS. 125(a) and 125(b), in Modification 9, an identification accessory 65b and a switching drive section 65c for switching the position of the identification accessory 65b are provided. there is The switching driving portion 65c is connected to the display control device 81, and the switching driving portion 65c is controlled by the CPU 181 so that the identification accessory 65b is set to a position that does not overlap the auxiliary display portion 65 in the front-rear direction. 125(a)) and a specific position (FIG. 125(b)) set to overlap the auxiliary display portion 65 in the front-rear direction.

When the game mode is set to the normal game mode, the CPU 181 drives and controls the switching drive unit 65c so as to place the identification accessory 65b at the normal position, and when the game mode is set to the specific mode. Then, the switching drive unit 65c is driven and controlled so as to place the identification accessory 65b at a specific position.

By doing so, it becomes easier to see whether the game mode is the specific mode or not, and each performance data of the normal game mode can be used as it is in the specific mode. As a result, there is no need to incorporate the image data of the stamp 65a into the effect data of the normal game mode, and the processing load during the specific mode can be significantly reduced.

Regarding the normal position of the identification accessory 65b and the position where the switching driving part 65c is provided, for example, it is set on the back side of the upper lamp 63 so that it is invisible or difficult to see from the front of the game machine. good. As a result, in the normal game mode, the identifying accessory 65b and the switching drive unit 65c do not interfere, and the player can play the game without being particularly conscious of the specific mode.

<Second embodiment>
In this embodiment, handling of a specific mode by a 1-bet game is different from that in the first embodiment. Specifically, the specific mode of the 1-bet game in this embodiment can be executed when a predetermined condition is met in the normal game mode of the 3-bet game.

FIG. 126 is a front view of the slot machine 10 in this embodiment.

In this embodiment, the second credit insertion switch 57 in the first embodiment is formed with the same or substantially the same size as the third credit insertion switch 58, and is arranged to the left of the first credit insertion switch 56. ing. Also, in this embodiment, the second effect switch 67 for switching between the normal game mode and the specific mode is not provided.

A fourth credit input switch 69 is provided on the decorative panel 80 arranged below the locations where the stop switches 42 to 44 are provided. The fourth credit insertion switch 69 is for inserting one virtual medal. The fourth credit input switch 69 is connected to the main controller 101 . More specifically, a fourth credit insertion detection sensor (not shown) for individually detecting the operation of the fourth credit insertion switch 69 is connected to the CPU 102 via the input/output port 104 of the main controller 101. When the 4-credit insertion switch 69 is operated, a detection signal from the 4th-credit insertion detection sensor is output to the CPU 102 via the input/output port 104 . The CPU 102 determines that one virtual medal has been inserted based on the reception of such a detection signal.

The fourth credit input switch 69 is a switch that can be pressed from the front side to the back side of the slot machine 10, and can be operated in conjunction with the other credit input switches 56 to 58 that can be pressed downward. different directions. Further, the fourth credit input switch 69 is provided larger than the other credit input switches 56 to 58. Specifically, the fourth credit input switch 69 has an elliptical shape (major axis: about 15 cm, minor axis: about 8 cm) the size of an adult's palm. ing. Therefore, it is an operation button that attracts the player's attention more easily than the other credit insertion switches 56 to 58, and when the fourth credit insertion switch 69 is operated, the operation position and the operation direction are different from those of the others. , it is easy to give the impression that you are performing a special action.

FIG. 127 shows a lottery table for a specific mode in this embodiment.

In this embodiment, unlike the lottery table (FIG. 76) in the first embodiment, point values PV are assigned to index values IV=51, 63 to 65, 68, 79, while other index values The IV point value PV is set to zero. Therefore, index value IV=51 (special replay), index value IV=63 (special strong cherry), index value IV=64 (special weak cherry), index value IV=65 (special watermelon), index value IV=68. (special middle bell), index value IV = 79 (special red 7 match), while other index value IV = 50, 52 ~ 62, 66 ~ 67, 69 ~ 78, 80 ~ 99 not be elected in that case. Also in this embodiment, in the lottery table of the specific mode, the point values PV of the index values IV=0 to 49 are all set to 0, and the combination that can be won during the normal game mode is not elected to In addition, in the first embodiment, the case of winning with the index value IV=79 was during the special bonus state, but in the present embodiment, the winning with the index value IV=79 also occurs during the normal game state. can. Therefore, the winning combination with the index value IV=79 was referred to as the "special BB middle red 7 matching combination" in the above-described first embodiment, but in the present embodiment, it may simply be referred to as the "special red 7 matching combination". and

A substantially equal point value PV is set for each index value IV=51, 63 to 65, 68, 79. FIG. That is, in the game during the specific mode, there is a probability of about 1/6 to win the special replay, a probability of about 1/6 to win the special strong cherry, and a probability of about 1/6 to win the special weak. Win the cherry, win the special middle bell with a probability of about 1/6, and win the special red 7 matching role with a probability of about 1/6.

The winning modes and benefits of special replay, special high cherry, special low cherry, special middle bell, and special red 7 matching combination are the same as in the first embodiment, and all of them are replay winning and high in the normal game mode. A prize is won by stopping the same numbers as those for a cherry winning prize, a weak cherry winning prize, a middle tier bell winning prize, and a red 7 matching winning prize on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. Also, the pay line set according to each bet number is the same as in the first embodiment.

The specific mode by the 1-bet game in the present embodiment can be executed in some cases when winning a lottery to increase the number of games to be continued in the attack mode.

<Outline of addition by specific mode>
With reference to FIG. 128, an outline of addition by the specific mode in this embodiment will be described.

In the normal game mode, in a situation where the display mode is attack mode or higher, if a specific role such as watermelon, strong cherry, weak cherry, middle bell, chance eyes A, B, etc. is won, as in the first embodiment, In addition to a display mode transition lottery according to the current display mode, an attack mode addition lottery is also held.

In the case of winning the additional lottery, in this embodiment, the number of continuous games is added based on the table of the number of games to be added according to the specific role won in the additional lottery, and the role won by executing the specific mode. The number of continuous games may be added depending on the number of times. In the following description, the add-on performed at the table corresponding to the specific role won in the add-on lottery is called normal add-on, and the add-on according to the win by executing the specific mode is called special add-on.

In the normal addition, after the game in which the specific role is won or the bonus is completed, the number of games is added according to the specific role in which the additional lottery is won, and the number of games to be added is notified by the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like. It is executed as an additional effect.

On the other hand, in the special addition, first, a special bet instruction effect prompting the operation of the fourth credit input switch 69 is performed on the auxiliary display section 65 or the like. In the special bet instruction effect, for example, the fourth credit insertion switch 69 is referred to as a “dodeca button”, and a display of “press the dodeca button!” A sound effect is emitted from the speaker 64 . The sound effect is set as, for example, a loud electronic sound “Zubababababang!!”, which allows the player to clearly recognize that an operation different from a normal betting operation should be performed.

After the special bet instruction effect, after the fourth credit insertion switch 69 is operated, a special start instruction effect prompting the operation of the start lever 41 is performed on the auxiliary display section 65 and the like. In the special start instruction effect, for example, the auxiliary display section 65 displays a message “Keep fighting and hit the lever!”. Then, when the start operation (operation of the start lever 41) is performed based on the special start instruction rendering, the speaker 64 emits a sound effect for the special start operation instruction rendering. As the sound effect, for example, a low electronic sound "dung" is emitted, and a start operation having a different effect from a normal start operation (for example, a high electronic sound "dung" in a normal start operation) is performed. The sound is set as a sound that prompts the player to calmly perform the stop operation so that the player can grasp that fact and expect the game contents to follow.

One medal is inserted based on the operation of the fourth credit insertion switch 69 . When the start lever 41 is operated in the state where one bet is made, the game is started as a one-bet game, and the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start rotating. In the 1-bet game, as described above, any one of the special replay, special strong cherry, special weak cherry, special middle bell, and special red 7 combination combination is won.

When the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated and the reels 32L, 32M and 32R are stopped, a special winning prize is established for one of the special winning prizes. The figure shows, for example, that a special watermelon prize has been won. In the special addition, the number of games to be added this time is determined based on the winning special watermelon, and the addition performance corresponding to the determined number of games is performed by the auxiliary display section 65 or the like.

In the special add-on through the game in the specific mode, the add-on of a larger number of games is more likely to occur than in the normal add-on that does not involve the game in the specific mode. Therefore, when winning a specific role and an extra win occurs, the player expects that a special extra win will occur.

<Processing for special addition>
Processing when the number of continuous games in the attack mode is increased in this embodiment will be described below.

FIG. 129 is a flow chart showing the second special combination process in this embodiment. As already explained, the second special combination process is a process executed as one process of the lottery result handling process in the main controller 101 (FIG. 47).

That is, if a negative determination is made in step S911 in the flowchart of FIG. 47, or after executing the process of step S913 (after executing the process for promoting the attack mode), the process proceeds to step S4901 shown in FIG. In step S4901, as in the processing of step S914, lottery processing for adding the number of games in the attack mode is performed.

In subsequent step S4902, based on the processing result of step S4901, it is determined whether or not the additional lottery has been won. If not won, the second special combination processing is terminated as it is. If it has been elected, the process proceeds to step S4903, whether or not the bonus winning flag is set, that is, if it is elected in a double role with the bonus as this particular role winning, or if it is won during the bonus carryover state. It is determined whether or not it is a role. Such processing is the same as the processing of step S916.

If the bonus winning flag is not set, a special extra lottery process is executed in step S4904. In the special addition lottery process, a special addition occurrence table is acquired from the various table storage area 105a, and a lottery counter is acquired from the various counter area 106e. In the special addition occurrence table, the probability of occurrence of the special addition differs depending on the type of the specific combination won in the addition lottery.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 130, a pattern is set such that the higher the winning probability of each specific role, the lower the probability of occurrence of the special addition, and the higher the probability of winning the specific role, the higher the probability of occurrence of the special addition. There is a pattern that is set to increase the probability of occurrence. For example, the probability of winning a watermelon is about 1/144 (including overlapping watermelons 1 and 2, FIG. 31, etc.), and the probability of winning a strong cherry is about 1/218 (including overlapping 1 and 2 of strong cherries, FIG. 31, etc.). 31 etc.), and the probability of winning a strong cherry is lower than the probability of winning a watermelon. In addition, in the special addition generation table, the special addition is more likely to occur at the time of the addition based on the strong cherry winning than at the time of the addition based on the watermelon winning.

On the other hand, the probability of winning a weak cherry is about 1/169 (including overlapping weak cherries 1 and 2, FIG. 31, etc.), and the probability of winning a watermelon is higher than the probability of winning a weak cherry. Further, in the special addition generation table, the special addition is more likely to occur at the time of addition based on the watermelon winning than at the time of addition based on the weak cherry winning.

That is, in the special addition occurrence table, the occurrence probability of the special addition is set regardless of the relationship between the high and low winning probability of the specific combination in the normal game mode.

In step S4905, it is determined whether or not special addition winning is made based on the processing result of step S4904. In the case of non-winning, at steps S4906 to S4908, the same processes as steps S917 to S919 are performed, and then the second special combination process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4905 that special addition winning has been made, in step S4909 processing is performed to add 1 to the addition counter in the various counter areas 106e. In subsequent step S4910, a process of setting a special addition flag in the various flag storage area 106d is performed. The add-on counter is a counter for the CPU 102 to grasp the number of occurrences of the special add-on, and the special add-on flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to grasp that the special add-on should be executed.

In subsequent step S4911, the special addition command is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81. FIG. The special addition command is a command for causing the display control device 81 to recognize that a special addition will occur in the next game, that is, that the next game should be executed in a specific mode. The display control device 81 that has received the special add-on command controls the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like so as to execute the special bet instruction effect as the effect at the end of the current game.

If it is determined in step S4903 that the bonus winning flag has been set, this is the case that the addition to the current game will be carried over after the bonus is finished, and in this case the process proceeds to step S4912. In step S4912, a special addition lottery process is executed as in step S4904. Then, in step S4913, it is determined whether or not special addition is won, and if not, in step S4914, processing for setting an attack mode addition flag is performed. Such processing is the same as the processing of step S920. In the case of special addition winning in step S4913, a process of adding 1 to the addition counter is performed in step S4915.

After executing the processing of step S4908, step S4911, step S4914 or step S4915, the second special combination processing is terminated.

The third special combination processing in this embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. As already explained, the third special combination process is a process executed as one process of the lottery result handling process in the main controller 101 (FIG. 48).

In step S5001, lottery processing for adding the number of games in the attack mode is executed. Such processing is similar to step S1001. In step S5002, based on the processing result of step S5001, it is determined whether or not an additional prize is won. If not won, the third special combination processing is terminated as it is. If the player has won the lottery, in steps S5003 to S5015, the same processes as in steps S4903 to S4915 are performed. That is, for example, in step S5005 or step S5012, the special addition lottery process is performed, and if the special addition lottery is not won, the normal addition process is performed, and if the special addition lottery is won, the special addition lottery process.

Next, the end determination processing in this embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. As already explained, the end determination process is a process executed as one process of the bonus state process in main controller 101 (FIG. 54).

FIG. 132 shows processing when a negative determination is made in step S1511 in FIG. That is, when the number of remaining payouts becomes 0 (step S1504: YES), and each winning flag of the attack mode winning flag, the challenge mode winning flag, and the VB mode winning flag is not set at the end of the bonus, in step S5101, the attack mode wins. It is determined whether or not the mode addition winning flag is set. If it is set, in steps S5102 to S5204, processing for normal addition is performed in the same manner as in steps S1513 to S1515.

If it is determined in step S5101 that the attack mode addition flag is not set, it is determined whether or not the addition counter is 0 in step S5105. As described above, when the special addition is performed after the bonus is completed, the addition processing of the addition counter is performed (step S4915, step S5015). If it is determined in step S5105 that the add-on counter is 0, the process advances to step S1516 to perform a challenge mode add-on process. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S5105 that the addition counter is not 0, in steps S5106 and S5107 processing for special addition is performed in the same manner as in steps S4910 and S4911. After executing the process of step S5104 or step S5107, the end determination process is terminated.

Next, the specialized zone processing in this embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. As already explained, the specialized zone process is a process executed as one process of the lottery result handling process in main controller 101 (FIG. 55).

In step S5201, as in step S1601, processing for grasping the lottery result of the current game is performed. In subsequent step S5202, a special addition lottery process is executed in the same manner as in step S4904 and the like. Note that the lottery process in step S5202 may be made different from the occurrence probability of the special addition in the other lottery process, and specifically, the special addition may occur more easily than in the other lottery process.

In step S5203, it is determined whether or not special addition winning is achieved based on the processing result of step S5202. In the case of non-winning, in steps S5204 to S5206, processing for normal addition is performed in the same manner as in steps S1602 to S1604. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S5203 that special addition has been won, processing for special addition is performed in steps S5207 to S5209 in the same manner as in steps S4909 to S4911. After executing the processing of step S5206 or step S5209, the specialized zone processing ends.

Next, the lottery result handling process at the time of special addition will be described.

FIG. 134(a) is a flowchart showing part of the lottery result handling process in this embodiment. As already explained, the lottery result handling process is a process executed as one process of the lottery process in the main controller 101 (FIG. 45).

In this embodiment, first, in step S5301, the number of bets for the current game is determined. When the number of bets is not one bet corresponding to the specific mode, the process proceeds to step S701 and performs processing for the normal game mode. On the other hand, if the current game is a one-coin bet, then in step S5302, the lottery result handling process for the specific mode is executed, and then this handling process ends.

FIG. 134(b) is a flowchart showing the lottery result handling process for the specific mode.

In step S5401, it is determined whether or not the special addition flag is set. That is, also in this embodiment, the 1-bet game can be executed in a mode other than the specific mode, and it is determined in step S5401 whether or not the game was executed in the specific mode. If the mode is not the specific mode, the corresponding processing is terminated as it is.

If it is the specific mode, the process advances to step S5402 to determine whether or not the current lottery result is a special watermelon. When the special watermelon is won, in step S5403, a process of acquiring a special watermelon table as the current addition table from the various table storage area 105a is performed.

FIG. 135(a1) shows a special watermelon table selected as an add-on table when a special watermelon is won, and FIG. 135(b1) shows a watermelon table selected as an add-on table when a watermelon is won. As shown in FIGS. 135(a1) and 135(b1), the number of games that can be selected as the number of additional games when the special watermelon is won is different from the number of games that can be selected as the number of additional games when the watermelon is won. A larger number of games is selected at the time of winning than at the time of winning watermelon.

If a negative determination is made in step S5402, it is determined in step S5404 whether or not the lottery result of this time was a special strong cherry winning. If a special strong cherry is won, in step S5405, a process of acquiring a special strong cherry table as the current addition table from the various table storage area 105a is performed.

FIG. 135(a2) shows a special strong cherry table selected as an add-on table when a special strong cherry is won, and FIG. 135(b2) shows a strong cherry table selected as an add-on table when a strong cherry is won. there is As shown in FIGS. 135(a2) and 135(b2), the number of games that can be selected as the number of additional games when winning a special strong cherry is different from the number of games selected as the number of additional games when winning a strong cherry. A larger number of games is selected when a special strong cherry is won than when a strong cherry is won.

If a negative determination is made in step S5404, it is determined in step S5406 whether or not the lottery result of this time was a special low cherry win. If the special weak cherry is won, in step S5407, a process of acquiring a special weak cherry table as the current addition table from the various table storage area 105a is performed.

FIG. 135(a3) shows a special weak cherry table selected as an add-on table when a special weak cherry is won, and FIG. 135(b3) shows a weak cherry table selected as an add-on table when a weak cherry is won. there is As shown in FIGS. 135(a3) and 135(b3), the number of games that can be selected as the number of additional games when winning a special low cherry is different from the number of games selected as the number of additional games when winning a low cherry. When the special weak cherry is won, more games are selected than when the weak cherry is won.

If a negative determination is made in step S5406, it is determined in step S5408 whether or not the current lottery result was a special middle-level bell winning. When the special middle bell is won, in step S5409, a process of acquiring a special middle bell table as the current additional table from the various table storage area 105a is performed.

FIG. 135(a4) shows a special middle bell table selected as an additional table when special middle bell is won, and FIG. 135(b4) shows a middle bell table selected as an additional table when middle bell is won. there is As shown in FIGS. 135(a4) and 135(b4), the number of games that can be selected as the number of additional games when the special middle bell is won is different from the number of games that can be selected as the number of additional games when the middle bell is won. A larger number of games is selected when the special middle bell is won than when the middle bell is won.

If a negative determination is made in step S5408, it is determined in step S5410 whether or not the current lottery result is special replay winning. If the special replay is won, in step S5411, a process of acquiring a special replay table as the current additional table from the various table storage area 105a is performed.

FIG. 135(a5) shows a special replay table selected as an add-on table when special replay wins, and FIG. 135(b5) shows a replay table selected as an add-on table when replay wins. Unlike other special special roles, in the normal game mode, no addition occurs when replay is won during the attack mode. When replay winning is added, it is only in the special zone, and this replay table shows the table for the special zone. As shown in FIGS. 135(a5) and 135(b5), the number of games that can be selected as the number of additional games when winning a special replay is different from the number of games selected as the number of additional games when winning a replay in a special zone. When the special replay is won, a larger number of games are selected than when the replay is won in the special zone. That is, even when compared with the combination added in the special zone, the addition of the number of games at the time of winning the special combination occurs more. In addition, even in the add-on table in the specialized zone for other special roles, when compared with the add-on table for winning the special role, the number of games to be added when winning the special role is higher than the number of games for winning the special role in the corresponding specific zone It is larger than the number of additional games at the time of winning the role.

A negative determination in step S5410 means that the result of the lottery in the current specific mode is the winning of the special red 7 combination. In this case, in step S5412, a process of acquiring a special red 7 combination combination table from the various table storage area 105a as the current additional table is performed.

FIG. 135(a6) shows a special red 7 matching table selected as an additional table when special red 7 is aligned, and FIG. 135(b6) shows a red 7 matching table selected as an additional table when red 7 is aligned. showing. Unlike other special special roles, in the normal game mode, the red 7 match occurs only during the bonus. The red 7 matching table shows the table during the bonus. As shown in FIGS. 135(a6) and 135(b6), the number of games that can be selected as the number of additional games when the special red 7 is aligned is different from the number of games selected as the additional number of games when the red 7 is aligned during the bonus. A larger number of games are selected when the special red 7 is matched than when the red 7 is matched during the bonus.

After executing the processing of step S5403, step S5405, step S5407, step S5409, step S5411 or step S5412, in step S5413, attack mode game number addition processing is executed. In this processing, the number of additional games for the current special addition determined by referring to the table and lottery counter acquired in each of the above processings is added to the number of continuous games in the attack mode being executed.

After that, in step S5414, processing for setting the add-on command as an object to be output to the display control device 81 is performed, and then this handling processing ends. The display control device 81 that has received the add-on command controls the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like so as to generate the add-on effect corresponding to the end of the current game (when all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped).

As described above, in the present embodiment, using each special specific role corresponding to each specific role that can be added to the attack mode, the number of games to be added in each specific role is different from the number of games to be added. I do. As shown in the first embodiment, each specific combination and each special combination are different combinations, but the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have the same stopping numbers in appearance.

Specifically, for example, if it is a watermelon role, the "watermelon" symbol stops on the upper stage of the left reel, the "watermelon" symbol stops on the middle stage of the middle reel, and the "watermelon" symbol stops on the lower stage of the right reel. Winning the role of watermelon is established. Then, an additional effect for the number of games corresponding to the watermelon combination may occur. On the other hand, if it is a special watermelon role, the "watermelon" symbol stops on the upper stage of the left reel, the "watermelon" symbol stops on the middle stage of the middle reel, and the "watermelon" symbol stops on the lower stage of the right reel. The "red bell" pattern stops in the middle stage, and the special watermelon winning prize is established. In this case, the "watermelon" symbol is stopped at the bottom of the right reel, and the appearance of the special watermelon win is the same as the watermelon win. Then, an additional effect for the number of games corresponding to the special watermelon combination may occur. Therefore, judging from the results of stopping the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R and the situation in which the addition has occurred, it is possible for the player to think that the addition effect corresponding to the special watermelon role was generated by the watermelon role. can. By doing so, it is possible to show the additional effect corresponding to the winning of the special role such as the special watermelon role as a kind of the additional effect corresponding to the winning of the special role such as the watermelon role.

Here, as a type of additional effect corresponding to the winning of a specific role such as a watermelon role, a configuration is also conceivable in which a special additional effect is set in which the number of games is increased, such as the above-mentioned special watermelon role. However, if you do so, the additional effects corresponding to winning a specific role may become complicated, and winning a specific role becomes a condition for the special addition. Inconvenience such as not being able to win the specific role may occur even though it is desired to generate it. On the other hand, if the winning probability of the specific combination is increased too much, problems such as the payout rate may occur. Therefore, as in the present embodiment, since the specific role and the special specific role are set as different roles, each role is associated with the additional effects, and only the additional effects corresponding to the winning of the specific role become complicated. does not occur, and by adjusting the winning rate of each combination, it is possible to suitably generate the additional effects corresponding to the winning of the specific combination and the above-mentioned special additional effects.

Moreover, both the special combination and the special special combination can be generated without going through the transition of the game state due to, for example, winning a bonus. Specifically, in the normal game state, if you play in the normal game mode of a 3-bet game or a 2-bet game, you can win a specific role, and if you play in a specific mode of a 1-bet game, you can win a special role. can be elected. In other words, the specific combination and the special specific combination can be won by simply changing the bet numbers in the same game state without going through the transition of the game state. In this case, it is not possible to identify which combination has been won/won depending on the game state.

And, as described above, since the number of bets is changed to determine which role is won/winning, if you want to generate the above-mentioned special additional effect by the special specific role, it can be easily generated simply by switching the number of bets. It is possible to By doing so, it is possible to generate the above-mentioned special additional effect at the timing as designed.

In addition, in this embodiment, in addition to the commonality of the stop numbers, various measures are taken to reduce the distinguishability between the special combination and the special special combination. Each will be described below.

<Structure for reducing the distinguishability between the special special role and the special role>
As described above, the special special role including the special replay and the special red 7 combination and the corresponding special role have the common stop numbers of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R at the time of winning, and any of the roles wins. It is difficult to identify whether In this embodiment, in addition to the commonality of the stop numbers, there is a configuration for reducing the distinguishability between the special special combination and the special combination.

<Commonality of production at the time of betting>
As a configuration for lowering the distinguishability between the special special combination and the special combination, first, the commonality of the effects at the time of betting will be described.

As shown in FIG. 136, at the time of betting in the normal game mode including the normal addition, for example, if the situation before the bet is in the attack mode, the auxiliary display section 65 displays the winning during the current attack mode. The total number of acquisitions is displayed as "number of acquisitions" (the figure shows that 54 have been acquired). In addition, the number of coins paid out after establishing a winning in the previous game is displayed in the payout number display section 62 (the drawing shows that 9 coins were paid out in the previous game). The number of credited virtual medals is displayed in the credit display section 60 (the figure shows that 50 virtual medals, which is the maximum number, are credited).

In the above situation before betting, for example, when the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated and three cards are bet, the display of the total winning number on the auxiliary display section 65 corresponds to the number of bets this time. More specifically, the display is updated to show the total number of acquisitions reduced by three. Further, based on the bet operation, the display of the payout number display section 62 is turned off to indicate that the next game can be started. Then, in the credit display section 60, the display of the credit amount before the bet is updated to the display of the credit amount with the current bet amount reduced.

In addition, the speaker 64 emits a sound effect corresponding to the current bet operation (sound effect when betting 3 cards). For example, in the sound effect when betting 3 cards, "bebebebe" is emitted three times corresponding to the number of bets. It should be noted that the sound effect when betting one card is "be", and the sound effect when betting two cards is "bebe". Other betting sound effects may be used as long as the player can identify the number of bets.

As an effect at the time of the bet operation in the special addition, for example, as a situation before the bet, if the above-mentioned special bet instruction effect is performed on the auxiliary display unit 65, the number of each game during the attack mode and the total number of wins are displayed. No display. Also, at the timing when the special bet instruction effect is started, the display of the payout number display section 62 and the display of the credit display section 60 are turned off.

In this situation, when the fourth credit input switch 69 is operated and one bet is placed according to the instruction of the special bet instruction effect, the auxiliary display section 65 changes the special bet instruction effect to the special start instruction effect. The screen switches to Even in the special start instruction effect, the display of the number of each game in the attack mode and the total number of wins are not displayed. Therefore, the display of the total winning number is not updated based on the main betting operation unlike the normal betting. Also, the credit display section 60 is OFF as described above. Therefore, the display of the number of credits on the credit display section 60 is not updated based on the current betting operation.

In addition, from the speaker 64, although the current bet operation corresponds to a 1-coin bet, a 3-coin bet sound effect corresponding to a 3-coin bet is emitted. In other words, normally, the sound effect when betting one card corresponding to the betting of one card is "B" once, but when betting one card in the special bet, the sound effect when betting three cards is, "Bebebe" and "Be" are uttered three times.

<Bet operation processing>
Processing for performing each of the above effects will be described.

FIG. 137 is a flowchart showing processing for bet operation. The bet operation process is executed as one process in the in/out counter process of the number of bets in step S109 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 27) in the main controller 101. FIG. The bet operation process is started at the timing when the bet operation becomes possible (all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped and medal payout is completed) in the in-out counter process of the number of bets.

In step S5501, it is determined whether or not the special addition flag is set. If the special addition flag is set, it indicates that the game to be started next is a game in which special addition is performed. set. Upon receiving the special operation instruction command, the display control device 81 controls the auxiliary display part 65 or the like so as to generate the special operation instruction performance based on the end of the game in which the special addition flag is set. In the following step S5503, credit display invisible processing is executed. Specifically, the display of the credit display section 60 and the payout number display section 62 is turned off.

If a negative determination is made in step S5501, or after the processing of step S5503 is executed, it is determined in step S5504 whether or not any of the credit insertion switches 56 to 58, 69 has been operated. wait until If any operation has been performed, the process advances to step S5505.

In step S5505, it is determined whether or not the current operation was the operation of the first credit input switch 56. If the operation is the first credit insertion switch 56, a 3-card bet process is executed in step S5506. This processing is processing for effectively betting three virtual medals according to the number of credits. For example, if the number of credits is less than three, it is processed that the betting operation is not valid. In this case, the process returns to step S5504, for example.

When 3 virtual medals are effectively betted, in step S5507, a process of subtracting 3 corresponding to the current bet number from the credit counter is performed. In this case, the display on the credit display section 60 is updated to the value obtained by subtracting 3. Incidentally, when the display of the credit display section 60 is OFF, only subtraction of the credit counter is performed. Then, in step S5508, the speaker 64 is controlled so as to emit a sound effect (bebebebebe) when three cards are bet, and then the bet operation processing is terminated.

If it is determined in step S5505 that the first credit insertion switch 56 was not operated, it is determined in step S5509 whether or not the third credit insertion switch 58 was operated. If the operation is the third credit insertion switch 58, a two-card bet process is executed in step S5510. This processing is processing for effectively betting two virtual medals according to the number of credits. For example, if the number of credits is less than two, it is processed that the betting operation is not valid. In this case, the process returns to step S5504, for example.

If two virtual medals are effectively betted, in step S5511 a process of subtracting 2 corresponding to the current bet number from the credit counter is performed. In this case, the display on the credit display section 60 is updated to the value obtained by subtracting 2. Incidentally, when the display of the credit display section 60 is OFF, only subtraction of the credit counter is performed. Then, in step S5512, the speaker 64 is controlled so as to emit a sound effect (bebe) when two cards are bet, and then the bet operation process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S5509 that the third credit insertion switch 58 was not operated, it is determined in step S5513 whether or not the second credit insertion switch 57 was operated. If the second credit insertion switch 57 has been operated, a one-card bet process is executed in step S5514. This process is a process for effectively betting one virtual medal according to the number of credits. For example, if the number of credits is less than one (zero), the betting operation is treated as invalid. do. In this case, the process returns to step S5504, for example.

When one virtual medal is effectively bet, in step S5515, a process of subtracting 1 corresponding to the current bet number from the credit counter is performed. In this case, the display on the credit display section 60 is updated to a value decremented by one. Incidentally, when the display of the credit display section 60 is OFF, only subtraction of the credit counter is performed. Then, in step S5516, the speaker 64 is controlled so that a single-bet sound effect (B) is emitted, and then the bet operation processing ends.

If it is determined in step S5513 that the second credit insertion switch 57 was not operated, it means that the current credit insertion switch operation was the fourth credit insertion switch 69 operation. In this case, in step S5517, a one-card bet process is executed. Such processing is the same as the processing in step S5514. In the following step S5518, as in the process of step S5515, the process of subtracting 1 corresponding to the current bet number from the credit counter is performed.

In step S5519, it is determined whether or not the special addition flag is set. If the special addition flag is not set, in step S5520, similarly to the processing in step S5516, the speaker 64 is controlled so that the bet sound effect (B) is emitted when one is bet, and then the bet operation processing is performed. finish.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S5519 that the special addition flag has been set, then in step S5521 the speaker 64 is controlled so as to emit a sound effect (bebebebe) when three cards are bet. Then, in step S5522, after the special start instruction command is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81, the bet operation process is terminated. Upon receiving the special start instruction command, the display control device 81 controls the auxiliary display section 65 and the like so as to generate the special start instruction effect.

As described above, when the special add-on flag is set and the fourth credit insertion switch 69 is operated, a three-coin bet sound effect is produced. Therefore, it is possible to make the player think that the specific mode of the current 1-bet game is a 3-bet game.

Moreover, in the game started with the special addition flag set, the display of the credit display section 60 is turned off. Therefore, only subtraction of the credit counter is performed at the time of betting, and the credit display section 60 is not updated. As a result, it is possible to clearly distinguish between a one-coin bet and a three-coin bet just by looking at the credit display portion 60 .

When the display of the credit display section 60 is turned off, the display of the payout number display section 62 is also turned off. Thereby, it is possible to reduce the unnaturalness compared to the configuration in which only the display of the credit display section 60 is turned off. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the special operation presentation or the like.

Even if the special add-on flag is set, if the second credit insertion switch 57 is operated instead of the fourth credit insertion switch 69, processing for betting one card is performed and the bet is performed. The time effect sound is configured to set the sound effect at the time of betting one card corresponding to betting one card. This is because, in a situation where such a special addition is performed in the first place, the player who operates the second credit insertion switch 57 instead of the fourth credit insertion switch 69 can bet one card by operating the fourth credit insertion switch 69. This is because it is thought that they are aware that they will be Therefore, a sound effect is set at the time of betting one card to confirm that the betting of one card is effectively performed.

In each game, a bet may be made by inserting medals from the medal inserting slot 45 in addition to operating the credit inserting switch. Although the description of the processing in this case is omitted, regardless of the presence or absence of the special addition flag, a bet effect sound (B) is emitted for each inserted medal.

By the way, the case where the special addition flag is set means that a specific role winning (winning) has occurred in the previous game, and at least three medals have been paid out. Then, in a game in which a special addition is performed, a situation in which the credit counter is 0 is unlikely to occur normally, and a bet operation can be performed by operating the fourth credit insertion switch 69 without inserting medals from the medal insertion slot 45. It has become. A situation in which the credit counter is 0 means that the settlement switch 59 is operated before a game in which a special addition is performed. It is highly possible that the player recognizes that a one-card bet will be made by operating the fourth credit insertion switch 69, as in the case of the above situation.

<Commonality of performance at the time of winning>
As a configuration for reducing the distinguishability between the special special role and the special role, the commonality of the prize-winning effects will be described next.

As shown in FIG. 138, in the case where a normal addition occurs, for example, when the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped with all "watermelon" symbols and a watermelon win is established, the positions corresponding to these "watermelon" symbols are displayed. The reel is illuminated by a predetermined light emitting part, and a flash effect is generated as a watermelon payout. Note that the flash effect can be realized by controlling an existing light emitting unit or the like. When the watermelon prize is established, five medals are paid out as a privilege corresponding to the watermelon prize. In this case, the speaker 64 emits a watermelon payout sound effect (for example, a low-pitched sound of "do-do-do-do") as the medal payout sound effect. Then, an additional effect of the number of games based on the watermelon table when the watermelon is won is generated.

On the other hand, when a special addition occurs, for example, when the "watermelon" symbol, the "watermelon" symbol, and the "red bell" symbol stop on the respective reels 32L, 32M, and 32R and a special watermelon prize is established, these Instead of each pattern (watermelon, watermelon, red bell) corresponding to the special watermelon, the reel at the position corresponding to the “watermelon” pattern is illuminated with a predetermined light emitting part, and a flash effect is generated as the above watermelon payout. do. In other words, although it is a special watermelon prize, at the time of special addition, the watermelon payout appearance, which is an effect that occurs when a watermelon prize is won, occurs. When the special watermelon prize is established, one medal is paid out as a privilege corresponding to the special watermelon prize. In this case, the watermelon payout sound effect is emitted from the speaker 64 as the medal payout sound effect. That is, in the case of special watermelon winning, the number of medals to be paid out is one, but at the time of special addition, a watermelon payout effect sound is generated as the medal payout effect sound at the time of watermelon winning. Then, an additional performance of the number of games based on the special watermelon table when the special watermelon is won is generated.

<Payment determination process>
Processing for performing each of the above effects will be described.

FIG. 139 is a flowchart showing payout determination processing in this embodiment. As already explained, the payout determination process is a process executed as one process (step S413) of the reel control process (FIG. 32) in the main controller 101. FIG.

In step S5601, it is determined whether or not a payout can occur as a result of winning this time. If a payout can occur, then in step S5602, payout processing is performed, and then this payout determination processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S5601 that no payout will occur, it is determined in step S5603 whether or not any replay winning has been established. If any of the replay wins have been established, the replay processing is performed in step S5604, and then the payout determination processing is terminated.

The payout process and the replay process will be described below.

<Processing for withdrawal>
In the payout process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 140, first, in step S5701, it is determined whether or not the special addition flag is set. When the special addition flag is not set and the game played this time is not a game corresponding to the special addition, payout setting for the normal game mode is performed in steps S5702 to S5705. On the other hand, if the special addition flag is set and the game played this time corresponds to the special addition, the payout setting for the specific mode is performed in steps S5706 to S5728.

As the payout setting for the normal game mode, first, in step S5702, the number of payouts is grasped. This process specifies the number of bets and the winning mode of this time, and grasps the number of payouts corresponding to the specified number of bets and the winning mode. For example, if the number of bets this time is 3 and the bell (first minor combination) win is established, it is understood that 9 medals will be paid out. Also, if the number of bets this time is 3 and a prize of watermelon (26th minor combination, etc.) is established, it is understood that 5 medals will be paid out. Also, if the number of bets this time is 3, and there is a strong cherry (25th small win, etc.), a weak cherry (18th small win, etc.), and a middle bell (29th small win), It is understood that three medals will be paid out. Then, in the bonus, if the number of bets this time is 3 and a winning combination of 7 reds (the 30th minor combination) is established, it is understood that 9 medals will be paid out.

On the other hand, if the number of bets this time is 1 and a special bell (1st P small win) win is established, it is understood that 1 medal will be paid out. Also, if the number of bets this time is 1 and a special watermelon (26th P small win, etc.) wins, it is understood that 1 medal will be paid out. In addition, the number of bets this time is 1, and special strong cherry (25th P small win, etc.) prize, special weak cherry (18th P small win, etc.) prize, and special middle bell (29th P small win) have been established. If so, it is determined that one medal will be paid out. In addition, if the number of bets this time is 1 and a special red 7 matching (30th P small win) win is established, it is understood that 1 medal will be paid out.

After performing the process of step S5702, in step S5703, the payout process of paying out the medals of the payout number ascertained in step S5702 is executed. Specifically, the hopper device 51 is controlled so that the grasped number of medals to be paid out is paid out. In this case, the number of payouts is added to the credit counter, and the hopper device 51 is controlled so that the medal payout exceeding the upper limit value of the credit counter is performed. That is, if the number of payouts added to the credit counter is equal to or less than the upper limit of the credit counter, no medals are paid out from the hopper device 51 .

In the subsequent step S5704, a payout sound effect corresponding to the winning combination is set. For example, if a watermelon (26th minor combination) win is established, the speaker 64 is controlled so that a watermelon payout effect sound is emitted. In addition, if the special watermelon (26th P small winning combination) win is established, the speaker 64 is controlled so that the payout effect sound for the special watermelon is emitted. The payout effect sound for watermelon and the payout effect sound for special watermelon are set to different sounds to the extent that the player can distinguish between them. , The special watermelon payout sound is set to a low-pitched sound that is shorter than the watermelon payout sound effect. Note that the payout effect sound for the other special combination and the payout sound effect for the special special combination are also set to different sounds to the extent that the player can distinguish between them. In this case, regardless of whether or not medals are to be paid out from the hopper device 51, the payout effect sound is set. That is, even if the number of payouts is only added to the credit counter, the payout effect sound is set.

In the subsequent step S5705, a payout appearance corresponding to the winning combination is set. For example, if a watermelon (26th minor role) win is established, a flash effect is generated as a payout appearance for watermelon. In addition, as the watermelon payout, the payout number display unit 62 is controlled so that the number 5 is displayed on the payout number display unit 62 in association with the five medal payouts. If the special watermelon (26th P small role) winning is established, as the payout appearance for the special watermelon, an extinguishing performance for extinguishing the light-emitting parts that illuminate the respective reels 32L, 32M and 32R is generated. As the special watermelon payout, the payout number display unit 62 is controlled so that the number 1 is displayed on the payout number display unit 62 corresponding to the payout of one medal. That is, the payout for watermelon and the payout for special watermelon have different effects so that the player can distinguish between them. The payout appearance of other specific roles and the payout appearance of special special roles are also set with different effects so that the player can distinguish between them. It can be identified by the difference and the difference in the payout number displayed on the payout number display section 62 .

After performing the process of step S5705, this payout process ends.

As the payout setting for the specific mode, first, in step S5706, it is determined whether or not the number of bets in the current game is 1 as the specific number. If it is not one, the process advances to step S5702, and the payout setting for the normal game mode is performed.

If the special addition flag is set and the game is played with one bet, the process proceeds to step S5707. In step S5707, processing for subtracting 1 from the addition counter is performed. Then, in step S5708, it is determined whether or not the addition counter has become zero. If it is 0, the special addition flag is cleared in step S5709. It should be noted that the processing of steps S5707 to S5709 is processing when a plurality of special add-on games occur consecutively.

If a negative determination is made in step S5708, or if the process of step S5709 has been executed, the process advances to step S5710. In step S5710, it is determined whether or not a special watermelon (26th P small combination) prize has been won. When the special watermelon prize is established, payout processing corresponding to the special watermelon prize is performed in step S5711. In this case, unlike the payout process in step S5703, it is unlikely that the current payout number will be added to the credit counter and the event will exceed the upper limit of the credit counter. In other words, the credit counter is decremented by 1 due to the bet of 1 in the specific mode this time, and even if 1, which is the number of payouts this time, is added, the upper limit of the credit counter will not be exceeded. When the upper limit of the credit counter is not exceeded, medals are not paid out, and only when the upper limit of the credit counter is exceeded, the hopper device 51 is controlled to pay out medals, as described above. Note that the actual medal payout occurs when the credit counter is at the upper limit before starting the specific mode, and the specific mode is executed by inserting one medal from the medal slot 45. . Such payout processing is the same for other special special combination winning prizes.

In the subsequent step S5712, the speaker 64 is controlled so as to emit a watermelon payout effect sound corresponding to the watermelon winning instead of the special watermelon winning, which is the result of this winning. In this case, regardless of whether or not medals are actually paid out, the payout effect sound is set. Then, in step S5713, control is performed so that the payout for watermelon is performed in correspondence with the watermelon winning instead of the special watermelon winning, which is the result of this winning. Specifically, a flash effect is generated as a payout appearance for watermelon. However, since the display of the payout number display unit 62 is OFF when the special addition occurs as described above, the process for displaying the number of payouts is not performed.

If it is determined in step S5710 that the special watermelon winning prize has not been established, it is determined in step S5714 whether or not the special strong cherry (25th P small combination, etc.) winning prize has been established. When the special strong cherry winning prize is established, payout processing corresponding to the special strong cherry winning prize is performed in step S5715.

In the subsequent step S5716, the speaker 64 is controlled so as to emit the payout effect sound for strong cherries corresponding to the strong cherry winning instead of the special strong cherry winning, which is the winning result of this time. Then, in step S5717, control is performed so that the strong cherry payout is performed in correspondence with the strong cherry winning instead of the special strong cherry winning, which is the winning result of this time. Specifically, a flash effect is generated as a payout appearance for strong cherries. However, since the display of the payout number display unit 62 is OFF when the special addition occurs as described above, the process for displaying the number of payouts is not performed.

If it is determined in step S5714 that the special strong cherry winning prize has not been established, it is determined in step S5718 whether or not the special weak cherry winning prize (18P minor combination, etc.) has been established. When the special low cherry winning prize is established, payout processing corresponding to the special low cherry winning prize is performed in step S5719.

In the following step S5720, the speaker 64 is controlled so as to emit the payout effect sound for weak cherries corresponding to the weak cherry winning instead of the special weak cherry winning, which is the winning result of this time. Then, in step S5721, control is performed so that the weak cherry payout is performed in correspondence with the weak cherry winning instead of the special weak cherry winning, which is the winning result of this time. Specifically, a flash effect is generated as a payout appearance for weak cherries. However, since the display of the payout number display unit 62 is OFF when the special addition occurs as described above, the process for displaying the number of payouts is not performed.

If it is determined in step S5718 that the special weak cherry winning prize has not been established, it is determined in step S5722 whether or not the special middle bell (29th P small combination, etc.) winning prize has been established. If the special middle bell winning has been established, payout processing corresponding to the special middle bell winning is performed in step S5723.

In the subsequent step S5724, the speaker 64 is controlled so as to generate the payout effect sound for the middle bell in response to the middle bell winning instead of the special middle bell winning, which is the result of this winning. Then, in step S5725, control is performed so that the payout appearance for the middle bell is performed in correspondence with the middle bell winning instead of the special middle bell winning, which is the result of this winning. Specifically, a flash effect is generated as a payout for the middle bell. However, since the display of the payout number display unit 62 is OFF when the special addition occurs as described above, the process for displaying the number of payouts is not performed.

If it is determined in step S5722 that the special middle bell winning has not been established, this means that the winning result in the specific mode this time was a special red 7 combination (30P minor combination) winning. In this case, in step S5726, payout processing corresponding to special red 7 matching winning is performed.

In the following step S5727, the speaker 64 is controlled so as to produce a payout effect sound for the red 7 matching, not the special red 7 matching winning, which is the result of this time, but the red 7 matching winning. Then, in step S5728, control is performed so that the payout appearance for red 7 matching is performed in correspondence with the red 7 matching winning instead of the special red 7 matching winning, which is the winning result of this time. Specifically, a flash effect is generated as a payout appearance for red 7 matching. However, since the display of the payout number display unit 62 is OFF when the special addition occurs as described above, the process for displaying the number of payouts is not performed.

After performing any one of steps S5713, S5717, S5721, S5725 and S5728, the payout setting for the specific mode is completed, and the payout process ends.

<Replay processing>
Next, the replay processing in the payout determination processing (FIG. 139) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S5801, it is determined whether or not special addition is set. When the special addition is not set, the processing for normal game mode is performed in steps S5802 and S5803. On the other hand, if the special addition flag is set, the processing for the specific mode is performed in steps S5804 to S5809.

That is, as the processing for the normal game mode, in step S5802, bet sound effect setting processing is performed. In this processing, a betting sound effect is set corresponding to the fact that a number of re-bets are made according to the number of bets on the game that has been executed this time. Specifically, when a replay win occurs in a 3-bet game, a 3-bet sound effect (bebe-bebe) is set, and when a re-play win occurs in a 2-bet game, a 2-bet sound effect is set. A sound effect (bebe) is set, and when a replay win occurs in a one-bet game, a sound effect (bebe) at the time of betting one card is set. These set betting effect sounds are output from the speaker 64 when virtual medals are automatically inserted in the next game based on the replay win. Specifically, the automatic insertion process is performed in the start waiting process in the normal process (FIG. 28), and the betting effect sound set in accordance with this automatic insertion is output.

The subsequent re-betting process of step S5803 is a process of preparing to automatically bet a number corresponding to the number of bets of the game executed this time in the start waiting process (step S204) of the normal process (FIG. 28). is. Specifically, in the case of a 3-bet game, a 3-piece automatic insertion flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d so that 3-piece betting is performed in the start waiting process, and in the case of a 2-bet game, 2-piece betting starts. A 2-card automatic insertion flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d so as to be performed in the waiting process, and if it is a 1-bet game, 1 card is placed in the various flag storage area 106d so that 1-card bet is performed in the start waiting process. Set the auto-submit flag. In the start waiting process, by confirming these automatic insertion flags, it is possible to specify that a replay win was established in the previous game, and the number of virtual tokens automatically inserted according to the set automatic insertion flag. process. Then, at the time of the automatic insertion, the betting effect sound set in step S5802 is output. After performing the processing of step S5803, the replay processing is terminated.

If the special addition flag is set in step S5801, it is determined in step S5804 whether or not the current game is a 1-bet game as processing for the specific mode. If it is not a 1-bet game, the process advances to step S5802 to perform normal game mode processing. If it is a 1-bet game, subtraction processing of the addition counter is performed in step S5805. Then, in step S5806, it is determined whether or not the add-on counter is 0. If it is 0, processing for clearing the special add-on flag is performed in step S5807. The processing of steps S5805 to S5807 corresponds to the processing of steps S5707 to S5709.

If the add-on counter is not 0 in step S5806, or after the processing in step S5807 is executed, in step S5808, the processing for setting the effect sound when betting 3 cards is performed. Then, in step S5809, as special re-bet processing, a one-card automatic insertion flag is set so that a one-card bet is performed in the start waiting processing. As a result, in the next game when a special replay prize is established in the special addition, one virtual medal is automatically inserted, and an effect sound is output when three medals are bet. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize that the game in which the special addition was made was a 1-bet game. After that, the replay process is terminated.

As described above, in the specific mode in which the special addition is performed, when the special special role winning is established, one medal payout, which is the corresponding privilege, is performed, while the payout sound effect and the payout appearance are special special role winning Payout sound effects and payout appearances corresponding to specific roles are set instead of those corresponding to . As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to understand which of the specific combination winning prize and the special specific combination winning prize has been won.

On the other hand, even if the special role winning is established, if the game is played in a situation where the special addition flag is not set, the special specific role winning will not be the payout sound effect or payout Those corresponding to winnings are set. As a result, the player can clearly recognize that the special add-on is not effective. It is possible to prevent people from thinking that things that do not occur are unnatural.

In the special addition, when a special replay winning prize is established, one virtual medal is automatically inserted, and an effect sound is emitted when three medals are bet. By doing this, it is possible to clearly distinguish whether the special replay winning was established in the game in which the special addition was performed, or whether the special replay winning was established simply by playing a 1-bet game regardless of the special addition. can be made

<Modification 1>
In this modification 1, the game result that triggered the special addition is taken into consideration when determining the additional game for the special addition. In other words, it is a configuration in which the privilege in the specific mode is determined in consideration of not only the game result in the specific mode but also the game result in the normal game mode that causes the specific mode to be executed.

FIG. 142 shows a lottery table for special addition in Modification 1. As shown in FIG. The lottery table for special addition is acquired in each process (step S5403, step S5405, step S5407, step S5409, step S5411, step S5412) of the lottery result handling process for the specific mode.

The special watermelon table, the special strong cherry table, the special weak cherry table, and the special middle bell table in Modification 1, as shown in FIGS. The number of additional games is set to be different according to the type of special combination. In this case, the number of additional games is set to be the largest when the winning combination that triggered the addition and the special combination of this time correspond (successively).

That is, in the special watermelon table, when the trigger for the extra winning is the watermelon winning, and in the specific mode as the special extra winning, when the special watermelon winning occurs, the game stops as if two consecutive watermelon winnings occurred. The number of games is set to be consecutive, and in this case, the number of special addition games is set to be the largest. Also, in the special strong cherry table, if the trigger for the extra win is a strong cherry win, and in the specific mode as the special add-on that is implemented after that, if the special strong cherry win occurs, whether the strong cherry win has occurred two times in a row. Such games with stop rolls will be continued, and in this case, the number of special addition games is set to be the largest. In the special low cherry table, when the trigger for the extra winning is the low cherry winning, and in the specific mode as the special extra winning, when the special low cherry winning occurs, it is as if two weak cherry winnings have occurred in succession. In this case, the game is set so that the number of special addition games is the largest. As for the special middle bell table, if the opportunity for the additional winning is the middle bell winning, and in the specific mode as the special additional winning, if the special middle bell winning is won, the middle bell winning has occurred twice in a row. In this case, the number of games of special addition is set to be the largest.

In the special replay table and the special red 7 matching table, unlike the above-mentioned other special special combination tables, the special combination and the corresponding special special combination are not consecutively won. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 142(e) and 142(f), in the special replay table and the special red 7 matching table, the number of additional games is increased according to the type of specific role that triggered the additional winning this time. configured differently.

By doing so, the number of additional games is determined in consideration of the game results in the normal game mode that triggered the occurrence of the special addition. improves.

In this case, for example, when various specific roles are won consecutively in the normal game mode, the number of additional games may be determined by a different lottery table from the case of not winning consecutively. In this way, the continuity between the winning of the specific role in the normal game mode and the winning of the special role in the specific mode can be associated with the continuity of the winning of the specific role in the normal game mode, and the normal game mode and the specific mode The continuity with can be made difficult to distinguish from the continuity in the normal game mode.

<Modification 2>
In Modification 2, a special BAR replay 1 (IV=61) is set as a winable combination in the lottery table in the specific mode instead of the special replay.

As shown in FIG. 143, when the index value IV=61, the possible wins when the special BAR replay is won are the 1st special replay, the 6th special replay, and the 7th special replay, unlike in the first embodiment. A special replay and an eighth special replay are set.

Each of these special replays is provided with a replay as a privilege at the time of winning. As shown in FIG. 144, in the first special replay, the "first replay" symbol or "second replay" symbol stops on the left reel 32L, the "red bell" symbol stops on the middle reel 32M, and the right reel 32M stops. The "Red Bell" symbol stops at 32R. In addition, in the sixth special replay winning prize, the "first replay" symbol or "second replay" symbol stops on the left reel 32L, and the "first replay" symbol or "second replay" symbol stops on the middle reel 32M. Then, any one of the "BAR" symbol, the "young man" symbol, and the "watermelon" symbol stops on the right reel 32R. In the seventh special replay winning prize, the "first replay" symbol stops on the left reel 32L, the "BAR" symbol stops on the middle reel 32M, and the "BAR" symbol or "young man" symbol stops on the right reel 32R. , is set as a prize mode similar to the above-mentioned 7th minor winning combination. In the eighth special replay winning prize, the "first replay" symbol stops on the left reel 32L, the "BAR" symbol stops on the middle reel 32M, and the "red bell" symbol stops on the right reel 32R. It is set as a prize mode similar to the small role.

When the special BAR replay 1 is won, as shown in FIG. 145, one of the special replays is won regardless of the operation order of the stop switches 42-44. In this case, when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated at the timing when the 7th special re-game (aligned in the middle of the BAR) winning can be established, the 7th special re-game winning is established and the 7th special re-game winning. When the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated at the timing when the above is not established, another special regame prize is established.

When the special BAR replay 1 is won during the special addition during the attack mode, VB mode winning is granted. In this case, after the special addition is completed, the VB mode winning notification is performed without going through the VB mode sign mode, and after the 4th and 5th replay wins are established when the 2nd promotion replay 1 and 2 are won, Switch to VB mode.

The state of the special addition in Modification 2 will be described with reference to FIG. 146 .

As described above, in the lottery table in the specific mode in the present modified example 2, there is a case where the special BAR replay 1 is won. is executed. That is, in the lottery table in this modification 2, the special watermelon, the special strong cherry, the special weak cherry, and the special red 7 combination are won with a probability of 5/6, and the probability is 1/6. Win special BAR replay 1 with probability. In the case of winning the special special role with a probability of 5/6, the lottery table for special addition is acquired as described above, the number of games to be added is determined, and the number of games in attack mode is added. Occur.

On the other hand, if the player wins the special BAR replay 1 with a probability of 1/6, the VB mode win is given as a privilege at the time of winning as well as the replay. Then, in the auxiliary display portion 65, a display of "VB+1" indicating that the VB mode has been won is displayed.

In the present modified example 2, the special addition does not end due to the replay win, and the special addition is performed in the next game. Then, there is a possibility that special BAR replay 1 will be won in the next game with a probability of 1/6. If the special BAR replay 1 is won, a VB mode win is given as well as a replay as a prize at the time of winning, as in the above. Then, in the auxiliary display portion 65, a display of "VB+1" indicating that the VB mode has been won is displayed.

As described above, a special addition is performed in the next game as well due to the replay win. In the example of FIG. 146, in the current game, special watermelon is won as a special special role instead of special BAR replay 1, and the corresponding number of games is added. And this time's special add-on is finished by winning a special special role.

In the example of FIG. 146, the VB mode has been won twice. In this case, when the special addition ends, the VB mode winning notification is performed, and the VB mode is executed for the first time after winning the fourth and fifth regames. When the first VB mode ends, the normal game state shifts to the 1st RT state according to the transition rolls, and then shifts to the 2nd RT state due to the 3rd re-game winning, and then 2 due to the 4th and 5th re-game winnings. VB mode is executed for the second time. When the second VB mode ends, the normal game state shifts to the second RT state and also shifts to the attack mode.

By doing so, the playability is improved when the special addition is performed. That is, by preventing the special addition from ending when the replay win is won, the inconvenience of executing the normal game mode in the 1-bet game after the special addition is eliminated.

Note that the above configuration may be used, for example, in a specialized zone. Specifically, the second embodiment is used for the special addition occurring during the attack mode, and the modification 2 is used for the special addition occurring during the special zone. By doing so, it is possible to reproduce the inconvenience caused by winning a replay by taking advantage of the fact that additional bonuses are continuously generated in the specialized zone.

<Modification 3>
In the present modification 3, in a situation where the special addition flag is set, if the game is executed by betting 3 pieces instead of betting 1 piece, addition according to the lottery result in the normal game mode by betting 3 pieces is performed. generate. It should be noted that, in the present variation 3, in the lottery result handling process (FIG. 134(a)), if the number of bets is 3 bets in the process of step S5301, if the special addition flag is not set, step S701 If the special addition flag is set, the process proceeds to processing substantially similar to the specific mode lottery result handling process in FIG. 134(b). That is, in the case where the number of bets is 3 bets and the special addition flag is set, in the processing of steps S5402 to S5414 in the flow of FIG. It is applied by replacing it with a specific role. For example, in the step S5402, it is determined whether or not the watermelon is won, and if the watermelon is won, a watermelon table is obtained as a special combination table for special addition in step S5403.

FIG. 147 shows a special special combination table for special addition and a special combination table for special addition. The special special hand tables of FIGS. 147(a1) to 147(a6) are the same as those of FIGS. 135(a1) to 135(a6). On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 147(b1) to 147(b4), the special combination table for special combination is set so that the number of games selected is larger than the number of games added in the special combination table. It is

On the other hand, in the replay table shown in FIG. 147(b5), the number of additional games is not set, and no additional game is generated. Also, the number of additional games is not set in the red 7 matching table shown in FIG. 147(b6).

That is, in the success/failure determination in the normal game mode, the probability of winning the special role is lower than the probability of winning the special role in the specific mode. In that respect, if the special addition is executed in the normal game mode and the special combination is won, a larger number of games will be added than when the special addition is executed in the specific mode and the special special combination is won. In this way, by allowing the player to select significantly different gameplay characteristics, such as the special addition performed in the specific mode and the special addition performed in the normal game mode, it is possible to greatly improve the gameplay during the special addition. Become.

In addition, when the special addition is performed in the normal game mode, the addition is prevented from occurring at the time of winning the replay. As a result, by winning replays with a relatively high probability, it is possible to eliminate the imbalance in which extra money is generated even in the normal game mode.

<Modification 4>
In this modification 4, when the fourth credit insertion switch 69 is operated, there are cases where a one-coin bet is made and there are cases where a three-coin bet is made. FIG. 148 shows part of the bet operation process in the fourth modification.

That is, if it is determined in step S5513 in FIG. 137 that the fourth credit insertion switch 69 has been operated instead of the second credit insertion switch 57, the process advances to step S5901. In step S5901, it is determined whether or not the special addition flag is set. When the special addition flag is set, in steps S5902 to S5904, the processing for betting one card in steps S5517 and S5518 and the sound effect setting processing for betting three cards in step S5521 are performed.

When the special addition flag is not set in step S5901, 3-card bet processing is performed in step S5905, processing of subtracting 3 from the credit counter is performed in step S5906, and effect when 3-card bet is performed in step S5907. set the sound. Such processing is the same as the processing of steps S5506 to S5508. After performing the processing in step S5904 or step S5907, the processing for this operation ends.

By doing so, the fourth credit insertion switch 69 can be used even in the normal game mode. In this case, for example, in a game in which a normal addition occurs in the normal game mode, it may be possible to operate the fourth credit insertion switch 69 . For example, instead of or in addition to the configuration in which the number of add-on games is notified at the end of one game (when all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped) in the normal add-on, the number of add-on games is notified at the time of betting operation for the next game. do. Then, as the betting operation for the next game, a special operation instruction effect is generated to prompt the operation of the fourth credit insertion switch 69, and based on the operation of the fourth credit insertion switch 69, the number of additional games is notified. In this way, in the normal game mode, in a game in which a specific role is won in a situation where an addition to the attack mode may occur, the number of additional games is notified at the end of the game, and the bet for the next game. There are cases where it is performed at the time of operation (at the time of operation of the fourth credit insertion switch 69) and cases where it is performed at the end of the next game.

In this case, the number of games notified at the time of the betting operation of the next game is likely to be larger than the number of games notified at the end of the special winning game in the normal game mode, and the number of games notified at the time of the betting operation of the next game is likely to be larger. The number of games notified at the end of the next game is likely to be larger than the number of games to be played. By doing so, it is possible to expect that the later the timing of notification is, the more advantageous it is, and it is possible to draw a great deal of attention to the situation in which the additional notification is performed.

The number of games notified at earlier timing may be rewritten with the number of games notified at later timing. For example, at the end of the game when the specific combination is won as a previous timing, for example, an additional 10 games may be announced, and based on the operation of the fourth credit insertion switch 69, for example, 30 games may be added. Based on the result of the game in the mode, it may be rewritten to add, for example, 100 games at the end of the game. In this way, step-by-step addition can be performed with the player's operation, so that the enjoyment of each operation can be greatly improved.

<Modification 5>
As in Modification 4 above, in a configuration in which both 1 bet and 3 bets are possible based on the operation of the fourth credit insertion switch 69, the number of bets based on the operation of the fourth credit insertion switch 69 is determined by the player. It is good also as a structure which is hard to be identified by. For example, in Modified Example 4, when a special operation instruction effect is generated, the game started by operating the fourth credit insertion switch 69 and operating the start lever 41 can be started by the player in a specific mode with one bet. It is difficult to understand whether it is a normal game mode with 3 bets or whether it is a normal game mode. In this case, if the special addition is won, the game is a game in the specific mode, and if the special addition is not won, the game becomes the normal game mode.

As described above, by making it difficult to distinguish between the 1-bet game and the 3-bet game even from the betting operation, it becomes more difficult for the player to understand which of the two games is being played. Role) It is thought that the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated while wishing for winning. Therefore, it is possible to draw a higher interest in the game.

In particular, since the 1-bet game and the 3-bet game can be switched without going through the game state transition, it is even more difficult to understand which game is being played. As described above, since it is possible to move between the 1-bet game and the 3-bet game without going through the transition of the game state, it is possible to make the move between the 1-bet game and the 3-bet game occur at various timings. It is possible to shift from a 3-bet game to a 1-bet game not only in the case of winning a special addition as in the embodiment, but also in the case of wanting to generate some kind of effect or giving some kind of privilege. .

<Modification 6>
In Modification 6, the configuration of the fourth credit input switch 69 is changed. FIG. 149 is a perspective view of the slot machine 10 in Modification 6. FIG.

In this modification 6, a fifth credit input switch 75 is provided on the side opposite to the start lever 41 with the stop switches 42 to 44 interposed therebetween. The fifth credit input switch 75 is a lever-type operating portion that can be switched up and down. Normally, it is arranged at the upper initial position, and when the fifth credit insertion switch 75 is operated toward the lower operation position, the operation of the fifth credit insertion switch 75 is regarded as valid, and the operation detection signal is mainly emitted. It is output to the control device 101 . Based on the operation detection signal, the main controller 101 determines that a single bet operation has been performed. Inside the fifth credit insertion switch 75, there is provided an unillustrated biasing means (such as a plate spring) that biases from the operating position toward the initial position. The 5-credit input switch 75 automatically returns to its initial position.

A second start lever 76 is provided on the right hand side of the fifth credit input switch 75 . The second start lever 76 has a function equivalent to that of the first start lever 41, and when the conditions for starting each game are satisfied, operating the second start lever 76 starts the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. When the rotation of the game is started, a lottery for the game is performed.

At the tip of the fifth credit insertion switch 75, a first operation portion 75a having a left-right half (left half) spherical shape is provided. At the tip of the second start lever 76, there is provided a second operation portion 76a having a left and right half (right half) spherical shape. A fifth credit insertion switch 75 and a second start lever 76 are placed close to each other so that a spherical shape is formed by the two operating portions 75a and 76a. Therefore, the first operation portion 75a of the fifth credit input switch 75 and the second operation portion 76a of the second start lever 76 can be operated simultaneously, and when the fifth credit input switch 75 is operated, When the second start lever 76 is operated, the fifth credit input switch 75 is also easily operated.

In the fifth credit insertion switch 75, the first lever body 75b, which is closer to the slot machine 10 body than the first operation part 75a, has a second start lever 76, which is closer to the slot machine 10 body than the second operation part 76a. A credit-side cover 75c is provided to cover the two-lever main body 76b from above. With the credit side cover 75c provided, when the fifth credit insertion switch 75 is operated downward, the second lever main body 76b of the second start lever 76 is directed downward by the credit side cover 75c. When pressed, the second start lever 76 is operated. As a result, when the fifth credit input switch 75 is operated, the second start lever 76 is also operated.

With the configuration as described above, it is possible to start the rotation of each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R without having to separately operate the start lever when a special addition or the like occurs. As a result, it is possible to strengthen the impression that the game in the specific mode is a special game while reducing the distinguishability of the game in the specific mode from the game in the normal game mode.

Further, as described above, the operation of the second start lever 76 is performed based on the operation of the fifth credit input switch 75. Therefore, not only is the operability improved when a special addition or the like occurs, but also the bet operation is performed. The period from to the start of the game is shortened compared to the configuration in which each operation is performed separately. By doing so, it is possible to make it difficult to confirm the fact that the credit is subtracted based on the betting operation and the setting of the effective line in the game when the special addition or the like occurs. This makes it possible to lower the distinguishability between the specific mode and the normal game mode.

As described above, while the second start lever 76 is operated based on the operation of the fifth credit insertion switch 75, the second credit insertion switch 57 capable of operating one bet and the start lever 41 are separately provided. is provided. Therefore, it is possible to separately perform the betting operation and the starting operation in a game in which a special addition or the like occurs. By doing so, the fifth credit input switch is set to the extent that the game is started based on the player's operation and the game is ended based on the operation of the slot machine 10, so long as the game is not spoiled. The operability of the lever 75 and the second start lever 76 can be improved.

<Third Embodiment>
In this embodiment, the configuration of the auxiliary tank 54 is different from the above embodiments. The present embodiment will be described below with reference to FIGS. 150 to 153. FIG. FIG. 150 is a perspective view of the auxiliary tank 54 facing downward, FIG. 151 is an explanatory view showing the installation state of the auxiliary tank 54 corresponding to the FF line section in FIG. 150, and FIG. 152 is the auxiliary tank 54 facing upward. FIG. 153 is a partially enlarged view of the bottom part in the case of , and FIG. In these figures, the same reference numerals are assigned to the same configurations as in the above-described embodiments, and the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 150 and 151, the auxiliary tank 54 has a substantially box-shaped tank body 601 . The tank main body 601 is made of transparent synthetic resin, and the inside can be visually recognized from the outside. A bottom plate portion 602 of the tank body 601 is provided with a lower opening portion 603 penetrating the bottom plate portion 602 in the thickness direction. The lower opening 603 has a vertically long substantially rectangular shape extending along the longitudinal direction of the tank main body 601 in a plan view, and is arranged in the central portion of the bottom plate portion 602 .

An inclined portion 604 is provided on the back surface 602 b of the bottom plate portion 602 so as to surround the lower opening portion 603 . The inclined portion 604 includes a front inclined portion 604a and a rear inclined portion 604b provided on both sides of the lower opening 603 in the longitudinal direction of the bottom plate portion 602, and both sides of the lower opening 603 in the lateral direction of the bottom plate portion 602. A right slanted portion 604c and a left slanted portion 604d provided on the . Each of these inclined portions 604a to 604d is inclined downward toward the lower opening 603, and medals from the guide plate 52a (see FIG. 5) are distributed along the inclination of each of the inclined portions 604a to 604d. is guided to the lower opening 603.

Thus, in this embodiment, medals from the guide plate 52a are once dropped onto the back surface 602b and collected in the lower opening 603. As shown in FIG. Therefore, the lower opening 603 has an opening size in plan view smaller than that of the lower opening 512 (see FIG. 13) according to each of the above-described embodiments, and has an elongated shape.

A bottom plate protruding portion 605 that protrudes upward is provided on the back surface 602b of the bottom plate portion 602 . The bottom plate protruding portion 605 is circumferentially continuous along the peripheral portion of the bottom plate portion 602 and formed over the entire circumference of the bottom plate portion 602 . The upper surface 605a of the bottom plate protrusion 605 when the auxiliary tank 54 is in the downward posture (the installation surface with the bottom plate 11a when the auxiliary tank 54 is in the upward posture) is flat, and the auxiliary tank 54 is in the upward posture. It is substantially parallel to the upper surface of the flange portion 571 in the case. The bottom plate projecting portion 605 is integrally formed with the tank body 601 and has a predetermined height.

As shown in FIG. 152, the surface 602a of the bottom plate portion 602 is provided with a bottom lid 606 that opens and closes the lower opening 512, and a support portion 607 that supports the bottom lid 606. As shown in FIG. The support portion 607 moves the bottom lid 606 between a closed position (see FIG. 151) for closing the lower opening 603 and an open position for opening the lower opening 603 by turning the bottom lid 606 inward of the tank body 601 from the closed position. position (see FIG. 153(b)).

The support portion 607 is composed of an upright portion 608 that rises inwardly of the tank body 601 from the surface 602 a around the lower opening 603 . The standing portions 608 include a front standing portion 608a and a rear standing portion 608b provided on both sides of the lower opening 512 in the longitudinal direction of the bottom plate portion 602, and both sides of the lower opening 512 in the short direction of the bottom plate portion 602. A right side upright portion 608c and a left side upright portion 608d are provided. These standing portions 608a to 608d are continuous in a frame shape in plan view.

Each of the standing portions 608a to 608d is integrally formed with the tank body 601, and is spaced outward from the periphery of the lower opening 603 by a predetermined distance. That is, the distance between the front upright portion 608a and the rear upright portion 608b is greater than the longitudinal dimension of the lower opening 603, and the distance between the right upright portion 608c and the left upright portion 608d is greater than the length of the lower opening 603. It is larger than the transverse dimension. As a result, a recess 609 having a substantially prismatic shape is formed by the upright portions 608a to 608d and the surface 602a of the bottom plate portion 602 inside the upright portions 608a to 608d.

As shown in FIG. 153(b), the bottom lid 606 has a lid body 610 that is substantially rectangular in plan view. The lengthwise and widthwise dimensions of the lid body 610 are larger than those of the lower opening 603 , and the entire lower opening 603 can be closed from the inside of the tank body 601 by the bottom lid 606 . It is possible. In addition, each dimension of the lid body 610 is smaller than that of the recess 609, and the thickness dimension of the bottom lid 606 is smaller than the depth dimension of the recess 609, that is, the height dimension of each of the standing portions 608a to 608d. It's becoming

Therefore, when the bottom lid 606 is positioned at the closed position, the lid body 610 is housed inside the recess 609 . At this time, as shown in FIG. 151, the back surface 606b of the bottom lid 606 abuts against the surface 602a (see FIG. 152(b)) of the bottom plate portion 602 inside each of the upright portions 608a to 608d, so that the bottom lid 606 is Rotation to the outside of the tank body 601 beyond the closed position is restricted.

A columnar through hole 612 is provided in one long side of the lid body 610 so as to extend through the lid body 610 in the longitudinal direction. On the other hand, through holes 614a and 614b corresponding to the through hole 612 are provided in the front upright portion 608a and the rear upright portion 608b, respectively. These through-holes 614a and 614b are cylindrical and extend in the thickness direction of the upright portions 608a and 608b, and are arranged coaxially with each other. A round bar-shaped rod shaft 615 is inserted through the through holes 612, 614a, 614b with the bottom lid 606 accommodated in the recess 609. and are connected.

As shown in FIG. 152(a), a notch portion 618 is formed by notching a portion of the lid body 610 in a rectangular shape on one side of the lid body 610 of the bottom lid 606 in the longitudinal direction. A coil spring 617 is arranged in the notch 618 to bias the bottom cover 606 toward the closed position. A rod shaft 615 is inserted through a winding portion 617a of a coil spring 617. One arm portion 617b of the coil spring 617 is locked in a locking hole 606f of the bottom cover 606, and the other arm portion 617c is on the left side. By being hung on the standing portion 608d, it is bridged between the bottom cover 606 and the left standing portion 608d. As shown in FIG. 151, the biasing force of the coil spring 617 is strong enough to hold the bottom lid 606 in the closed position without rotating the bottom lid 606 downward due to its own weight when the auxiliary tank 54 is in the downward posture. is set to

In the above configuration, when the auxiliary tank 54 is adapted for automatic recovery, the auxiliary tank 54 is installed in the housing 11 in a downward posture. In this case, when a portion of the bottom lid 606 is exposed upward from the lower opening 603, the medals are not overflowing from the storage tank 52 and no medals are placed on the bottom lid 606. The biasing force at 617 holds the bottom lid 606 in the closed position, closing the lower opening 603 (see FIG. 151).

When the medals overflow from the storage tank 52, the medals fall onto the right inclined portion 604c provided on the rear surface 602b of the bottom plate portion 602, as shown in FIG. 153(a). Tokens falling on the right slope 604 c fall along the slope of the right slope 604 c and are guided to the lower opening 603 . In this case, even if the token moves vigorously on the right inclined portion 604c and passes through the lower opening portion 603, the left inclined portion 604d reversely inclines, so the left inclined portion 604d causes the medal to open again. It is guided toward the part 603 . Also, when the momentum of the medal is so strong that it climbs up the left inclined portion 604 d and reaches the peripheral edge of the bottom plate portion 602 , the medal contacts the bottom plate projecting portion 605 . As a result, further movement of the medal is restricted, and dropping to the outside of the tank main body 601 is suppressed.

The medal reaching the lower opening 603 is placed on the rear surface 606b of the bottom lid 606 exposed from the lower opening 603. As shown in FIG. Such a flow is repeated each time medals are discharged from the storage tank 52 . As long as the medal weight on the back surface 606b is less than the predetermined weight and the biasing force of the coil spring 617 overcomes the weight of the medal, the bottom lid 606 is maintained in the closed position. As a result, medals accumulate on the back surface 606b of the bottom lid 606 and its surroundings.

When the weight of the medal on the back surface 606b reaches a predetermined weight, the weight of the medal overcomes the biasing force of the coil spring 617, and the bottom cover 606 rotates downward. As a result, as shown in FIG. 153(b), the lower opening 603 is opened, and medals on and around the back surface 606b fall into the tank body 601. As shown in FIG. These medals pass through the inside of the tank body 601 to reach the medal discharge hole 15 and are supplied to an automatic recovery device located below the slot machine 10 .

After the medals on the back surface 606b are dropped, the bottom lid 606 returns to the closed position and the lower opening 603 is closed again. Thereafter, in the same manner as described above, medals from the storage tank 52 are temporarily stored on the back surface 606b of the bottom lid 606, and each time the weight of the medals on the back surface 606b reaches a predetermined weight, the lower opening 603 is opened. be done. In this manner, since the lower opening 603 is opened by the weight of the medal, manual operation of opening the bottom lid 606 can be eliminated. For this reason, automatic recovery can be made possible by simply installing the auxiliary tank 54 facing downward, and convenience is improved.

In this case, in this embodiment, the medals on the back surface 606b are guided to the lower opening 603, so that the weight of the medals can be easily concentrated on the bottom lid 606. FIG. For example, if the weight of medals discharged from the storage tank 52 is dispersed on the bottom plate portion 602, the response of the bottom lid 606 is delayed and the time until the lower opening portion 603 opens tends to become longer. As a result, the medals may overflow on the bottom plate portion 602 and fall outside the tank body 601 to be scattered in the housing 11 . In this respect, according to the present embodiment, the weight of medals is easily concentrated on the bottom lid 606, so that the opening responsiveness of the bottom lid 606 can be improved, and the occurrence of the above inconvenience can be suppressed.

Furthermore, since the medals on the back surface 606b are guided to the lower opening 603, the lower opening 603 can be made smaller, and the size of the bottom lid 606 can be accordingly reduced. . This makes it possible to suppress interference with the upper sensor rod 16a when the bottom cover 606 is opened and closed. In this case, the size of the lower opening 603 and the bottom lid 606, the position of the rotation shaft 606c, and the like are adjusted so that the dimension from the rotation shaft 606c of the bottom lid 606 to the end 606d on the rotation tip side is , is shorter than the distance from the rotating shaft 606c to the upper sensor rod 16a, the interference can be reliably avoided.

When the slot machine 10 is transported, the auxiliary tank 54 is installed in the housing 11 in a downward posture as in the case of automatic recovery. In this case, the biasing force of the coil spring 617 holds the bottom cover 606 at the closed position, closing the lower opening 603 (see FIG. 151). That is, in the present embodiment, the lower opening 603 can be closed while the slot machine 10 is being transported.

In this case, the space above the medal discharge hole 15 (the space within the tank body 601) can be blocked by the auxiliary tank 54 by placing the auxiliary tank 54 facing downward so as to cover the medal discharge hole 15. FIG. As a result, even if a foreign object or a hand enters the medal discharge hole 15, unauthorized access to the inside of the slot machine 10 is blocked by the auxiliary tank 54, and such unauthorized actions can be suppressed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the bottom lid 606 is positioned at the closed position, the back surface 606b of the bottom lid 606 and the front surface 602a of the bottom plate portion 602 are brought into contact with each other, so that the bottom lid 606 is positioned outside the tank main body 601. rotation is restricted. With such a configuration, when the slot machine 10 is transported, even if the bottom lid 606 is pushed up by a foreign object or a hand entering from the medal discharge hole 15, the bottom lid 606 does not rotate and the bottom opening is opened. The opening of the part 603 can be made difficult. As a result, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to the inside of the slot machine 10 by opening the lower opening 603, and to strengthen countermeasures against unauthorized access. By the way, with such a configuration, when the auxiliary tank 54 is installed upward for manual collection, the weight of the medals in the auxiliary tank 54 prevents the bottom of the auxiliary tank 54 from coming off.

Furthermore, when the bottom lid 606 is in the closed state, the periphery of the bottom lid 606 is surrounded by the standing portion 608 (the bottom lid 606 enters the recess 609). In this case, the upright portions 608a to 608d can cover the peripheral end surface of the bottom lid 606, making it difficult for foreign objects or hands to get caught on the bottom lid 606. As a result, it is possible to prevent the foreign matter from being caught on the bottom lid 606 and pulled to rotate the bottom lid 606 toward the open position.

In particular, in the present embodiment, the height dimension of the standing portion 608 (the depth dimension of the recessed portion 609) is larger than the plate thickness dimension of the bottom lid 606, so that the bottom lid 606 can be deeply inserted into the recessed portion 609. can be done. As a result, it is possible to make the bottom lid 606 less likely to be caught by the above-described foreign matter, etc., and to strengthen fraud countermeasures.

Here, when the auxiliary tank 54 is installed in a downward posture, the weight of the medals causes the bottom lid 606 to open and the medals enter the tank. In this case, when the medal enters the tank and its weight is reduced, the bottom lid 606 returns to the closed position due to the biasing force of the coil spring 617 . At that time, if medals remain on the bottom lid 606 , the medals may be thrown off by the force of the bottom lid 606 returning to the closed position and scattered within the housing 11 . In this regard, in the present embodiment, since the bottom plate protruding portion 605 is erected around the bottom plate portion 602 (receiving portion for receiving medals from the storage tank 52), even if the medals are bounced, the medals It is possible to prevent the liquid from reaching the outside of the auxiliary tank 54 .

Also in the present embodiment, when the auxiliary tank 54 is installed facing downward, the right side flange portion 571c of the auxiliary tank 54 and the engaging portion 574 are engaged with each other, thereby restricting the auxiliary tank 54 from floating (Fig. 151). Therefore, when the slot machine 10 is transported, even if a foreign object or a hand enters from the medal ejection hole 15 and pushes up the auxiliary tank 54, it is difficult to create a gap between the auxiliary tank 54 and the bottom plate 11a. It is possible to make it difficult to expand the gap. As a result, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to the inside of the slot machine 10 by inserting a foreign object such as a wire into the gap.

In addition, even when used in correspondence with automatic collection, for example, when the player hits the slot machine 10 and the impact is applied, the auxiliary tank 54 is prevented from bouncing within the housing 11. be done. As a result, displacement of the auxiliary tank 54 due to impact is suppressed, and the problem that medals from the storage tank 52 are not guided to the medal ejection hole 15 can be suppressed.

<Modification 1>
This modified example differs from the third embodiment in the configuration of the bottom lid 606 and the bottom plate portion 602 . The auxiliary tank 54 according to this modified example will be described with reference to FIG. 154 is a partially enlarged sectional view showing the configuration of the auxiliary tank 54. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 154, in this modified example, an inclined surface is formed on the rear surface 606b of the bottom lid 606 toward the end of the bottom lid 606 on the rotating front end side in a state in which the auxiliary tank 54 is in a downward posture. It is In this modified example, the bottom cover 606 and the support portion 607 are all inclined to form the inclined surface, but only the back surface 606b may be inclined.

With such a configuration, the back surface 606b of the bottom lid 606 can guide the medals placed on the back surface 606b toward the end of the bottom lid 606 on the rotating front end side. As a result, medals can be brought closer to the end of the bottom cover 606 on the tip end side of the rotation, and the weight of the medals can be easily concentrated on that portion. As a result, the opening responsiveness of the bottom lid 606 is enhanced, and it is possible to prevent medals from overflowing and falling on the back surface 606b.

In particular, since the right inclined portion 604c of the bottom plate portion 602 is inclined downward toward the lower opening portion 603 (bottom lid 606), the V-shaped groove is formed by the back surface 606b of the bottom lid 606 and the right inclined portion 604c. can be configured. As a result, medals can be collected more easily in the portion of the bottom lid 606 on the tip end side of rotation, and the opening responsiveness of the bottom lid 606 can be favorably enhanced.

The following effects are also expected from the above configuration. As already explained, when the bottom lid 606 returns to the closed position by the urging force of the coil spring 617, if medals remain on the bottom lid 606, the medals will be removed by the force of the bottom lid 606 returning to the closed position. There is a risk of being bounced. In this regard, since the back surface 606a of the bottom lid 606 (the surface on which the medals are placed) is inclined downward toward the tip of the rotation of the bottom lid 606, the medals are less likely to remain on the bottom lid 606. hopping can be suppressed. Also, since the medals can be drawn into the tank even if the bottom cover 606 is opened by a relatively small amount, the amount of rotation required for closing is reduced, and even if the medals remain, the flight amount of the medals can be kept small.

It should be noted that the entire back surface 606b of the bottom lid 606 does not necessarily have to be tilted, and only the portion exposed upward from the lower opening 603 may be tilted, or a portion of the portion may be tilted.

<Modification 2>
In this modified example, the configuration of the bottom cover 606 is different from that in the first modified example. The auxiliary tank 54 according to this modified example will be described with reference to FIG. 155 is a partially enlarged sectional view showing the configuration of the auxiliary tank 54. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 155(a), the rear surface 606b of the bottom lid 606 is provided with a rear projection 621 projecting upward from the rear surface 606b. The rear projection 621 is integrally formed with the lid body 610 and provided in an exposed portion 606e that is exposed upward from the lower opening 603 when the bottom lid 606 is positioned at the closed position.

The height dimension of the rear projection 621 is such that it does not interfere with the bottom plate 602 (surrounding wall surface of the lower opening 603) when the bottom cover 606 is opened and closed, and the rear projection is sufficient when the auxiliary tank 54 is in a downward posture. The tip of the portion 621 is set to have a predetermined dimension within a range that does not protrude below the bottom plate projecting portion 605 . Specifically, the height is set to be higher than when a plurality of medals (for example, about 5 medals) are stacked flat, and the height is such that the medals guided by the right inclined portion 604c can be blocked.

The rear surface projecting portion 621 is arranged at a position near the rotating shaft 606c when viewed in the axial direction of the rotating shaft 606c, and extends from the wall portion 603a of the peripheral wall portion of the lower opening portion 603 on the tip end side of the rotating portion by a predetermined distance. separated by a distance. As a result, in the exposed portion 606e of the bottom lid 606, a space is secured in which the token can be placed in the portion closer to the leading end of the rotation than the rear projection portion 621 is. Further, the rear surface projecting portion 621 is formed linearly from one end to the other end of the exposed portion 606e so as to traverse the exposed portion 606e in the axial direction of the rotation shaft 606c in plan view.

With such a configuration, the medal guided by the right inclined portion 604c can be blocked by the rear projection portion 621. As shown in FIG. As a result, the tokens can be collected on the front side of the rear surface projecting portion 621 in the exposed portion 606e, and the tokens can be moved to the portion away from the rotating shaft 606c. As a result, the weight of the medal is likely to be concentrated on such a portion, and the opening responsiveness of the bottom lid 606 can be enhanced.

At this time, since the rear surface projecting portion 621 is separated from the wall portion 603a by a predetermined distance, and a space is secured in which the medal can be placed in the exposed portion 606e, the blocked medal can be preferably placed on the bottom lid 606. can be done. As a result, the damming prevents the tokens from remaining on the right inclined portion 604 c side, and the weight of the tokens discharged from the storage tank 52 can be efficiently applied to the bottom lid 606 .

The structure for blocking the medals is not limited to the back surface 606b of the bottom lid 606, and may be provided on the back surface 602b of the bottom plate portion 602 as well. As such a configuration, for example, as shown in FIG. be done.

In this case, in the radial direction of the rod shaft 615, the lower opening 603 is arranged to be biased toward the leading end of the rotation with respect to the bottom lid 606, so that the portion of the back surface 606b of the bottom lid 606 closer to the leading end of the rotation is more open. It is preferable to adopt a configuration in which the exposed portion 606e is the majority. As a result, the weight of the dammed tokens can be efficiently applied to the portion on the tip side of the rotation, and the opening responsiveness of the bottom lid 606 can be enhanced.

In addition, the configuration in which the lower opening 603 is biased toward the tip of the rotation with respect to the bottom lid 606 is not limited to this modified example, and can be applied to each of the above-described embodiments and other modified examples. . Alternatively, the medals may be dammed up by providing both of the rear projections 621 and 622 or by increasing the height of the wall 603b. Furthermore, in this modification, the rear surface 606b of the bottom lid 606 is inclined as in the first modification, but the rear surface 606b may be substantially horizontal as in the third embodiment.

<Fourth Embodiment>
In this embodiment, the connection structure between the auxiliary tank 54 and the housing 11 is different from the above embodiments. The present embodiment will be described below with reference to FIGS. 156 to 159. FIG. 156 is a plan view of the auxiliary tank, FIG. 157(a) is a perspective cross-sectional view along the GG line of FIG. 156, (b) is a perspective cross-sectional view along the GG line of the tank main body, and FIG. 158 is a HH of FIG. 159A is a perspective view of the bottom lid 704, and FIG. 159B is a rear perspective view of the bottom lid 704. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 156, the auxiliary tank 54 has a tank body 701 which has a substantially box-like shape with an open top and a bottom. The tank body 701 has a bottom plate portion 701a that is substantially rectangular in plan view, and a front wall portion 701b, a rear wall portion 701c, a right side wall portion 701d, and a left side wall portion 701e that rise from the bottom plate portion 701a so as to surround the bottom plate portion 701a. An upper opening 702 having a substantially rectangular shape in a plan view and opening upward is formed in the upper portion thereof.

As shown in FIGS. 156 to 158, the tank body 701 has a lower opening 703 provided in the bottom plate portion 701a and a bottom lid 704 that opens and closes the lower opening 703. As shown in FIG. The bottom lid 704 is rotatably supported by a support portion 705 provided on the bottom plate portion 701a.

The lower opening 703 has a substantially rectangular shape in plan view, and penetrates the bottom plate portion 701a in the thickness direction. The lower opening 703 is opened vertically except for a portion of the peripheral edge of the bottom plate 701a, and is arranged near the front wall 701b as a whole. A bottom plate rear portion 701g and a bottom plate front portion 701f are arranged on both sides of the lower opening portion 703 in the bottom plate portion 701a, and the bottom plate rear portion 701g is longer than the bottom plate front portion 701f in the longitudinal direction.

As shown in FIG. 159, the bottom lid 704 includes a substantially rectangular lid body 706 in plan view and a shaft portion 707 integrally formed with the lid body 706 . The lid body 706 is larger than the lower opening 703 in each dimension in the longitudinal direction and the transverse direction, and has a size capable of closing the lower opening 703 . The shaft portion 707 is provided on one of the short sides of the lid body 706 that face each other in the longitudinal direction, and is shaped like a round bar extending along the width direction of the lid body 706 (extending direction of the short side). . The length dimension of the shaft portion 707 is larger than the width dimension of the lid body 706 , and both ends of the shaft portion 707 in the axial direction protrude more laterally than both ends of the lid body 706 in the width direction. .

As shown in FIGS. 156 to 158, the support portion 705 includes a right support portion 708 and a left support portion 709 provided at both ends in the width direction of the bottom plate portion 701a in the bottom plate front portion 701f.

The right support portion 708 has a right bulging portion 710 that bulges upward from the surface of the bottom plate portion 701a. The bulging dimension (height) of the right bulging portion 710 is larger than the shaft diameter of the shaft portion 707 of the bottom lid 704 . Inside the right bulging portion 710, a right hole 711 having a bell-shaped vertical cross section and extending in the width direction of the bottom plate portion 701a is provided. The right hole portion 711 has an open end on the left support portion 709 side and a closed end on the opposite side. The depth dimension from the open end of the right hole portion 711 is larger than the projection dimension of the shaft portion 707 from the lid body 706 .

The left support portion 709 has the same configuration as the right support portion 708 except that it is bilaterally symmetrical. That is, it has a left bulging portion 713 that bulges upward from the surface of the bottom plate portion 701 a and a left hole portion 714 provided in the left bulging portion 713 .

Both ends of the shaft portion 707 are inserted into the holes 711 and 714 of the right support portion 708 and the left support portion 709 with the bottom lid 704 disposed inside the tank body 701 . As a result, the bottom lid 704 is connected to the tank body 701 in a vertically rotatable state, and a closed state in which the bottom lid 704 closes the lower opening 703 from the inside of the tank body 701; It is possible to switch between an open state in which the lower opening 703 is opened by rotating the lower opening 704 upward.

As shown in FIG. 157(a), the front wall portion 701b of the tank main body 701 is provided with a front wall bulging portion 716 that bulges forward. The front wall bulging portion 716 is arranged on the upper portion of the front wall portion 701 b and has a width slightly larger than that of the lid body 706 . A part of the lid main body 706 can be inserted into the inside of the front wall bulging portion 716 when the bottom lid 704 is rotated toward the open position.

Each of the wall portions 716a facing each other in the width direction of the front wall bulging portion 716 is provided with a projecting portion 716b projecting from each wall portion 716a toward the inner side of the front wall bulging portion 716 in a semicircular shape. Each of these protrusions 716b is arranged at the upper end of each wall 716a at a predetermined distance rearward from the front portion 716c of the front wall bulging portion 716. As shown in FIG. The distance between the projections 716b in the width direction of the front wall bulge 716 is slightly narrower than the width of the lid main body 706, and the bottom lid 704 is turned toward the inside of the front wall bulge 716. When it is pushed, the lid body 706 is elastically deformed and enters between the protruding portion 716b and the front portion 716c. With such a configuration, it is possible to keep the bottom lid 704 in the open position.

A handle portion 718 is provided on the front wall portion 701 b of the tank body 701 . Since the handle portion 718 has the same configuration as the handle portion 503 according to each of the above-described embodiments, description thereof is omitted.

Here, in the present embodiment, the first state in which the auxiliary tank 54 is engaged with the engaging portion 721 in the housing 11 to restrict the movement of the auxiliary tank 54, and the state in which the engagement is released and the housing 11 It is configured to be switchable between a second state in which the auxiliary tank 54 is allowed to be taken out from the inside. Such a configuration will be described below with reference to FIGS. 160 to 163 in addition to FIGS. 156 to 159. FIG. 160 is an explanatory diagram showing the installation state of the auxiliary tank 54 corresponding to the HH line cross section of FIG. 156, FIG. 161 is an explanatory diagram showing the state before engagement, FIG. 162 is an explanatory diagram showing the engaged state, FIG. 163 is an explanatory diagram showing a disengaged state. In addition, in FIG. 163, illustration of medals in the auxiliary tank 54 is omitted for the sake of convenience.

As shown in FIGS. 156 to 158, the bottom plate portion 701a of the auxiliary tank 54 is provided with a cylindrical bottom-side through hole 720 penetrating through the bottom plate portion 701a in the thickness direction. The bottom-side through-hole 720 is arranged in the bottom plate rear portion 701g of the bottom plate portion 701a and positioned at the rear end portion of the auxiliary tank 54 . As shown in FIGS. 160 and 161, the bottom plate 11a of the housing 11 is provided with an engaging portion 721 that can be engaged with the bottom-side through hole 720. As shown in FIGS. The engaging portion 721 includes an accommodating portion 722 provided in the bottom plate 11a and an engaging projection 723 accommodated in the accommodating portion 722 so as to project upward from the surface of the bottom plate 11a.

The engaging protrusion 723 includes a vertically extending substantially cylindrical shaft portion 724 and a head portion 725 connected to the upper end portion of the shaft portion 724. The shaft portion 724 and the head portion 725 are integrally formed. there is The head portion 725 has a substantially disk shape, and its diameter is larger than that of the shaft portion 724 .

The housing portion 722 has a bottomed vertical hole shape that opens upward. and a second hole portion 727 provided up to the position. Each of the first hole portion 726 and the second hole portion 727 has a substantially columnar shape extending in the vertical direction. The diameter of the first hole portion 726 is larger than the diameter of the head portion 725 of the engaging protrusion 723 , and the depth dimension of the first hole portion 726 is sufficiently larger than the thickness dimension of the head portion 725 . Therefore, it is possible to accommodate the head portion 725 inside the first hole portion 726 . The second hole portion 727 is formed to extend downward from the center of the bottom surface 726a of the first hole portion 726, and the shaft portion 724 of the engaging projection 723 is inserted into the second hole portion 727. As shown in FIG. The diameter of the second hole portion 727 is slightly larger than the diameter of the shaft portion 724, and the engagement projection 723 is supported by the second hole portion 727 so as to be able to move up and down.

A coil spring 729 is arranged between the lower surface 725 a of the head portion 725 and the bottom surface 726 a of the first hole portion 726 . The coil spring 729 is arranged with the shaft portion 724 inserted therethrough, and the biasing force of the coil spring 729 biases the engaging projection 723 upward.

Here, the diameter Dc of the head portion 725 is smaller than the minimum diameter Dd (see FIG. 158) of the bottom-side through hole 720 of the auxiliary tank 54 . Therefore, when the bottom-side through-hole 720 is located above the head 725 and they face each other, the head 725 can be inserted into the bottom-side through-hole 720 . When the head portion 725 is inserted into the bottom side through hole 720, the peripheral wall portion 720a of the bottom side through hole 720 and the peripheral surface 725b of the head portion 725 come into contact with each other, thereby restricting the movement of the auxiliary tank 54 in the front, rear, left, and right directions. be done.

In the present embodiment, the thickness dimension of the head 725 is smaller than the dimension of the bottom side through-hole 720 in the vertical direction (the direction in which the head 725 is inserted), but they may be the same. , the former may be larger than the latter.

The arrangement position of the engagement portion 721 (engagement projection 723) in the front-rear direction (the depth direction of the housing 11) is the same as that of the engagement portion 721 when the auxiliary tank 54 is inserted to a predetermined installation position in the housing 11. are set to face and engage with the bottom-side through hole 720 of the auxiliary tank 54 . More specifically, as shown in FIG. 160, the rear end of the auxiliary tank 54 is positioned close to the back plate 11b of the housing 11. In other words, even if the front door 12 (see FIG. 3) is closed, This is the position where the rear surface of the door 12 does not collide with the auxiliary tank 54 . By setting such a position as the installation position, the front door 12 and the auxiliary tank 54 do not interfere with each other even when the front door 12 is closed while the bottom side through hole 720 and the engaging portion 721 are engaged. , damage to the auxiliary tank 54, the front door 12, and the engaging portion 721 due to the closing of the front door 12 is avoided.

On the other hand, the arrangement position of the engaging portion 721 in the left-right direction (width direction of the housing 11) is such that the end (right flange portion) of the housing 11 on the right side plate 11c side of the auxiliary tank 54 contacts the right side plate 11c. The left and right positions of the engaging portion 721 and the bottom-side through hole 720 are set to match each other when the bottom side through hole 720 is opened. In this case, the engagement portion 721 and the bottom-side through-hole 720 can be aligned simply by placing the auxiliary tank 54 at a position where it abuts against the right side plate 11c. As a result, not only can the engaging work be facilitated, but also the auxiliary tank 54 can be installed close to the right side plate 11c, which is advantageous in securing the installation space for the hopper device 51 and other mounted parts.

As shown in FIGS. 158 and 159(b), the rear surface 706a of the lid body 706 is provided with a push-in protrusion 733 and two support protrusions 734 arranged on both sides of the push-in protrusion 733. ing. The push-in protrusion 733 and the support protrusion 734 are formed integrally with the lid body 706 .

The push-in projection 733 is formed at the end of the lid body 706 opposite to the shaft 707 , and arranged at a position corresponding to the bottom-side through hole 720 . As shown in FIG. 158, the push-in protrusion 733 has a columnar shape extending downward, and its tip end is chamfered in a tapered shape. The diameter De of the push-in protrusion 733 is smaller than the minimum diameter Dd of the bottom-side through hole 720 , so that the push-in protrusion 733 can be inserted into the bottom-side through hole 720 .

The height dimension of the pushing protrusion 733 corresponds to the depth dimension of the bottom-side through-hole 720 . Specifically, the pushing protrusion 733 is arranged such that the remaining dimension Ha obtained by subtracting the height dimension of the support protrusion 734 is equal to or slightly larger than the depth dimension of the bottom-side through hole 720 . height dimension is set.

Each support protrusion 734 has a substantially semi-circular cross-section and is arranged at a corner at the end of the lid body 706 opposite to the shaft portion 707 . When the bottom lid 704 is in the closed position and the lower opening 703 is closed, a space corresponding to the lower opening 703 is formed below the bottom lid 704 , so that the auxiliary tank 54 accommodates the tank. The bottom cover 704 may bend due to the weight of the medals. Even if such bending occurs, the support protrusion 734 contacts the surface of the bottom plate portion 701a, so that the bottom lid 704 can be supported in a well-balanced manner.

As shown in FIGS. 156 to 158, the tank body 701 has an upper sensor insertion hole 731a through which the upper sensor rod 16a (see FIG. 6) is inserted, and a lower sensor insertion hole through which the lower sensor rod 16b is inserted. 731b are provided. Each of these sensor insertion holes 731a and 731b is formed in a horizontally long shape, and its height position corresponds to the height position of each sensor rod 16a and 16b. Specifically, the distance from the lower end of the auxiliary tank 54 to the lower end of the upper sensor insertion hole 731a is the same as or the distance Lj (see FIG. 160) from the surface of the bottom plate 11a to the lower end of the upper sensor rod 16a. It is slightly shorter than Lj. Further, the distance from the lower end of the auxiliary tank 54 to the lower end of the lower sensor insertion hole 731b is equal to or slightly shorter than the distance Lm (see FIG. 160) from the surface of the bottom plate 11a to the lower sensor rod 16b. is shorter than

Therefore, when the auxiliary tank 54 is installed at the above installation position, the auxiliary tank 54 and the sensor rods 16a and 16b come into contact or approach each other at the lower ends of the sensor insertion holes 731a and 731b. As a result, even if the auxiliary tank 54 tries to move upward, it is restricted by the sensor rods 16a and 16b, and the lifting of the auxiliary tank 54 from the bottom plate 11a is suppressed.

In this embodiment, both the distance from the lower end of the auxiliary tank 54 to the lower end of the upper sensor insertion hole 731a and the distance from the lower end of the auxiliary tank 54 to the lower end of the lower sensor insertion hole 731b. correspond to the distances Lj and Lm, respectively, but only one of them may be performed. Further, as shown in FIG. 160, the vertical width of each sensor insertion hole 731a, 731b is substantially the same as the diameter (vertical width) of each sensor rod 16a, 16b. The vertical width of each sensor insertion hole 731a, 731b may be larger than the diameter of each sensor rod 16a, 16b. However, from the viewpoint of preventing medals from falling out of the sensor insertion holes 731a and 731b when the medals are stored, the configuration of the present embodiment is preferable.

Next, a method of engaging the bottom-side through hole 720 and the engaging portion 721 will be described with reference to FIGS. 161 and 162. FIG.

In order to engage the bottom-side through hole 720 with the engaging portion 721, first, the auxiliary tank 54 is placed on the bottom plate 11a with the front surface of the housing 11 opened. In this case, the auxiliary tank 54 is placed so that the rear wall portion 701c of the auxiliary tank 54 is located on the front side of the tip portions of the sensor rods 16a and 16b. At this time, as already described, by guiding the auxiliary tank 54 by the right side plate 11c, the right and left positions of the bottom side through-hole 720 and the engaging portion 721 can be easily aligned.

From this state, the auxiliary tank 54 is pushed in toward the inside of the housing 11, and the auxiliary tank 54 is slid on the bottom plate 11a. Then, as shown in FIG. 161, when the bottom-side through-hole 720 of the auxiliary tank 54 and the engaging portion 721 approach each other to some extent, the front end portion of the bottom plate portion 701a and the engaging projection projecting from the surface of the bottom plate 11a 723 abut.

Here, in the present embodiment, an engaging inclined portion 745 is provided at the front end portion of the bottom plate portion 701a (the contact portion with the head portion 725). The engaging inclined portion 745 has a narrower distance from the bottom plate 11a as it goes from one end on the engaging projection 723 side toward the bottom side through hole 720. It has a sloped shape. An arcuate portion 746 that protrudes outward is provided above the engaging inclined portion 745, and the engaging inclined portion 745 and the front wall portion 701b are connected by the arcuate portion 746. As shown in FIG.

Since the engaging projection 723 is urged by the coil spring 729, the engaging projection 723 protrudes from the bottom plate 11a. There is a risk of In this respect, the provision of the arcuate portion 746 and the engaging inclined portion 745 allows the engaging projection 723 to be pushed down and guided into the accommodating portion 722 . As a result, the auxiliary tank 54 can be smoothly slid to the position where the engaging projection 723 and the bottom-side through hole 720 are engaged, and damage to the engaging projection 723 and the like due to installation of the auxiliary tank 54 can be suppressed. becomes.

When the engaging projection 723 is pushed down, the coil spring 729 is compressed accordingly and a restoring force is stored. Then, as shown in FIG. 162, when the auxiliary tank 54 reaches the installation position described above and the bottom-side through-hole 720 is positioned above the engaging projection 723, the downward force on the engaging projection 723 disappears. The restoring force of the coil spring 729 raises the engagement projection 723 . As a result, the engaging protrusion 723 is inserted into the bottom side through hole 720 and the two are engaged. This makes it possible to restrict the movement of the auxiliary tank 54 .

Therefore, when the slot machine 10 is transported, if the auxiliary tank 54 is installed in the housing 11 in the manner described above, it is possible to prevent the auxiliary tank 54 from rattling in the housing 11. and peripheral members can be prevented from being damaged by collision.

Next, a method of releasing the engagement between the bottom-side through hole 720 and the engaging portion 721 will be described with reference to FIGS.

Disengagement of the engagement is required when used for manual recovery. Install in the installation position. In this case, as shown in FIG. 162, the lower surface of the pushing projection 733 contacts the upper surface of the head 725 of the engaging projection 723, and the pushing projection 733 is pushed up together with the engaging projection 723. As shown in FIG.

As a result of the bottom lid 704 being pushed up along with this, the bottom lid 704 is in a state of floating by a predetermined height from the surface of the bottom plate portion 701a, in other words, in a state of being slightly rotated upward, as shown in FIG. stand still. In addition, the engagement protrusion 723 and the bottom side through hole 720 are engaged with each other by the engagement protrusion 723 rising and being inserted into the bottom side through hole 720 .

After that, when the medals overflowing from the storage tank 52 are successively stored in the auxiliary tank 54 , the weight of the medals acts on the bottom lid 704 by placing the medals on the bottom lid 704 . Since the load of the medal also acts on the coil spring 729 through the push-in protrusion 733 and the engaging projection 723, the coil spring 729 is gradually compressed as the weight of the medal on the bottom lid 704 increases, and the bottom lid is closed. 704 gradually rotates downward. As a result, the engaging projection 723 is pushed down by the push-in protrusion 733 , and the head 725 is gradually pulled out of the bottom-side through hole 720 .

Then, when the amount of medals stored in the auxiliary tank 54 reaches or exceeds a predetermined amount, the head 725 is completely pushed out from the bottom-side through hole 720 as shown in FIG. 163 . As a result, the engagement between the bottom-side through-hole 720 and the engaging projection 723 is released, and the movement of the auxiliary tank 54 is permitted. In other words, when medals are accumulated in the auxiliary tank 54 to some extent, the auxiliary tank 54 is naturally allowed to be taken out, and the medals in the auxiliary tank 54 can be collected.

Incidentally, the amount (weight) of medals to be disengaged is less than the amount of medals to be stored (full state) at which each sensor rod 16a, 16b conducts, and is reached before the full state is detected. do it. In this case, the engagement can be released well in advance of the work timing of the token collection (taking out the auxiliary tank 54) by the staff of the game hall, and it is possible to prevent the collection work from being hindered.

The engagement between the engaging portion 721 and the bottom-side through hole 720 can also be released manually. That is, by inserting a hand into the auxiliary tank 54 and pushing the bottom lid 704 downward, the engagement between the two can be released. With such a configuration, even if no medals are stored in the auxiliary tank 54 or the amount of stored medals is small, the engagement can be released as necessary, and the auxiliary tank 54 can be taken out as appropriate. becomes possible.

By the way, for example, when the auxiliary tank 54 is temporarily set aside in an attempt to pick up the medals scattered in the housing 11, the auxiliary tank 54 does not contain any medals or the medal capacity is small. However, an operation to remove the auxiliary tank 54 may be performed. In this case, if the bottom-side through-hole 720 and the engaging projection 723 are engaged with each other, the auxiliary tank 54 and the engaging portion 721 may be damaged if a forcible removal operation is performed.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 158, a releasing inclined portion 741 is provided on the peripheral wall surface of the bottom-side through-hole 720 in order to cope with the removal operation as described above. The release inclined portion 741 is provided on a peripheral wall surface of the bottom-side through hole 720 that is located on the opposite side of the head portion 725 from the extraction direction (pull-out direction) of the auxiliary tank 54 . The distance between the release inclined portion 741 and the bottom plate 11a becomes narrower as it goes from one end on the engagement projection 723 side toward the rear wall portion 701c side. It has a sloped shape.

When the auxiliary tank 54 is removed, the engaging projection 723 comes into contact with the release slope portion 741 and is pushed downward along the slope of the release slope portion 741 while sliding on its surface. Therefore, if the auxiliary tank 54 is pulled out with a certain degree of pulling force, the engagement projection 723 can be retracted from the bottom-side through hole 720 accordingly. As a result, damage to the auxiliary tank 54 and the engaging portion 721 can be suppressed even when a forcible removal operation is performed.

In the bottom-side through-hole 720 , a peripheral wall surface 743 on the side opposite to the release inclined portion 741 is not inclined and is formed substantially parallel to the peripheral surface of the head portion 725 . That is, when sliding in the installation direction, the head 725 is positively hooked on the peripheral wall surface 743 to restrict the movement of the auxiliary tank 54 . As a result, even if the auxiliary tank 54 is forcefully pushed in when installing the auxiliary tank 54, the auxiliary tank 54 is restricted from advancing beyond the installation position, and the auxiliary tank 54 does not violently collide with the back plate 11b. Suppressed.

Next, a case where the auxiliary tank 54 is adapted to automatic recovery will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 164 is an explanatory view when the auxiliary tank 54 is used in correspondence with automatic collection.

When the auxiliary tank 54 is used for automatic recovery, the auxiliary tank 54 is once removed from the housing 11 with the front surface of the housing 11 opened, and the bottom lid 704 is rotated upward and downward. The side opening 703 is opened. At this time, the bottom lid 704 is rotated until a portion of the lid main body 706 enters between the projecting portions 716b and the front portion 716c at the front wall swelling portion 716. As shown in FIG. In this state, the auxiliary tank 54 is placed on the bottom plate 11a. In this case, the auxiliary tank 54 is placed so that the rear wall portion 701c of the auxiliary tank 54 is located on the front side of the tip portions of the sensor rods 16a and 16b.

From this state, the auxiliary tank 54 is pushed in toward the inside of the housing 11, and the auxiliary tank 54 is slid on the bottom plate 11a. Then, the auxiliary tank 54 is advanced to a position where the lower opening 703 and the medal discharge hole 15 communicate with each other. At this time, the auxiliary tank 54 is stopped at the front side position where the bottom-side through-hole 720 and the engaging portion 721 are engaged with each other so that the bottom-side through-hole 720 and the engaging portion 721 are not engaged with each other. Installation of the auxiliary tank 54 is completed by the above operation.

In this embodiment, the longitudinal dimension of the bottom lid 704 is sufficiently larger than the height dimension of the tank body 701 . Therefore, when the bottom lid 704 is rotated to the open position, the end 704 a of the bottom lid 704 on the tip side of the rotation is positioned above the upper end of the tank body 701 . A guide plate 52a (see FIG. 5) is arranged above the tank main body 701 so as to protrude from the storage tank 52 toward the auxiliary tank 54 side.

In the present embodiment, the position of the guide plate 52a, the longitudinal dimension of the auxiliary tank 54, and the bottom cover 704 are arranged so that the guide plate 52a is positioned midway between the bottom cover 704 from the open position to the closed position. The open position, etc. are adjusted. Therefore, even if the slot machine 10 receives a strong impact such that the bottom lid 704 rotates toward the bottom plate portion 701a, the bottom lid 704 does not come into contact with the outer surface of the front wall portion 52b of the guide plate 52a. , the rotation of the bottom cover 704 is restricted. As a result, the bottom lid 704 is prevented from falling down to the closed position, and the inconvenience of closing the lower opening 703 can be prevented.

Moreover, by bringing the bottom lid 704 into contact with the outer surface of the front wall portion 52b of the guide plate 52a, the rotation of the bottom lid 704 in the closing direction is restricted. Therefore, the bottom lid 704 is prevented from blocking the medal discharge port of the guide plate 52a and from interposing the bottom lid 704 between the guide plate 52a and the lower opening 703. Even if the bottom lid 704 is kept leaning against the guiding plate 52a, the medals from the storage tank 52 can be continuously guided to the lower opening 703, and the medals can be continuously supplied to the automatic recovery device. It becomes possible.

Note that the protrusion 716b may be omitted in the present embodiment. However, the tilting of the bottom lid 704 is double-protected by the guide plate 52a, and the number of collisions of the bottom lid 704 with the guide plate 52a is reduced, thereby suppressing the occurrence of abnormal noise due to the collision. In view of the above, it is preferable to adopt the configuration of the above-described embodiment.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

A structure comprising a bottom side through hole 720 provided in the auxiliary tank 54 and an engaging portion 721 provided in the housing 11, and switching between engagement and non-engagement according to the storage state of medals in the auxiliary tank 54. and Therefore, when the slot machine 10 is transported, by engaging the bottom-side through hole 720 with the engaging portion 721, the auxiliary tank 54 can be prevented from rattling. On the other hand, when collecting the medals stored in the auxiliary tank 54, the bottom side through-hole 720 and the engaging portion 721 can be switched to the non-engaged state in response to accumulation of the medals in the auxiliary tank 54. It becomes possible to allow removal of the auxiliary tank 54 from within the body 11 .

When medals are not stored in the auxiliary tank 54, the bottom side through-hole 720 and the engaging portion 721 are brought into an engaged state, and when medals are stored in the auxiliary tank 54, the bottom side through-hole 720 is engaged. 721 is in a non-engaged state. In this case, the movement of the auxiliary tank 54 is restricted by the bottom-side through-hole 720 and the engaging portion 721 during transportation when no medals are expected to be stored in the auxiliary tank 54. Taking out of the auxiliary tank 54 is naturally allowed according to the tokens being stored in the . As a result, it is possible to eliminate the need for the switching operation by the hall staff and not only to contribute to the elimination of troublesomeness, but also to prevent the inconvenience of damaging the engaging portion 721 and the like due to the taking-out operation while forgetting to switch.

A bottom lid 704 is provided that is displaced downward by the weight of medals when medals are stored in the auxiliary tank 54. As the bottom lid 704 is displaced downward, the engaging portion 721 (engaging projection 723) is displaced. It is configured such that it is pushed out from the bottom-side through hole 720 and moved to the non-engagement position.

According to the above configuration, there is no need for a sensor for detecting weight, a drive unit for driving the engaging projection 723, and a control configuration for controlling the drive unit according to the detection result of the sensor, which simplifies the configuration and reduces the cost. be advantageous to In addition, since the bottom lid 704 can efficiently receive the weight of the medals stored in the auxiliary tank 54, the displacement of the bottom lid 704 can be used to move the engaging portion 721, thereby changing the stored state of the medals. It is possible to improve the responsiveness of the engaging portion 721 to changes in . As a result, it is possible to prevent troubles in taking out the auxiliary tank 54 due to a delay in switching to the disengaged state.

The bottom lid 704 is configured such that the push-in protrusion 733 is provided at a position on the back side of the housing 11 , and the bottom-side through hole 720 and the engaging portion 721 are provided on the back side of the housing 11 .

When the auxiliary tank 54 is pulled out from the housing 11 by a hall employee, the front side of the auxiliary tank 54 is lightly lifted, and in this state, it is slid forward along the bottom plate 11a. In this case, for example, if the push-in protrusion 733, the bottom-side through-hole 720, and the engaging portion 721 are arranged on the front side of the housing 11, the push-in protrusion 733 is displaced as the auxiliary tank 54 is lifted. is separated from the engaging portion 721, and as a result, switching from the disengaged state to the engaged state is unintentionally performed.

In this regard, since the pushing projection 733, the bottom-side through hole 720, and the engaging portion 721 are arranged on the back side of the housing 11, the pushing of the engaging portion 721 by the pushing projection 733 is easily maintained. Thus, it is possible to suppress unintentional switching from the disengaged state to the engaged state. As a result, the auxiliary tank 54 can be drawn out smoothly.

When the sensor rods 16a and 16b are inserted through the sensor insertion holes 731a and 731b, the peripheral edges of the sensor insertion holes 731a and 731b and the sensor rods 16a and 16b come into contact with or approach each other, It is configured so that movement is restricted. As a result, the movement of the auxiliary tank 54 can be additionally restricted separately from the engagement of the bottom-side through-hole 720 and the engaging portion 721, and the rattling suppression of the auxiliary tank 54 can be strengthened. In this case, since the sensor rods 16a and 16b are utilized, there is no need to separately provide a dedicated configuration for engagement, and an increase in the number of mounted parts can be suppressed.

By sliding the auxiliary tank 54 placed on the bottom plate 11a, the bottom-side through hole 720 and the engaging portion 721 are engaged with each other. In this case, both can be engaged by moving the auxiliary tank 54 on the bottom plate 11a without directly operating the bottom side through-hole 720 and the engaging portion 721, and the engaging operation can be easily performed. be possible. In addition, with such a configuration, the bottom side through-hole 720 and the engaging portion 721 can be arranged in places that are difficult for the operator (person who performs the engaging operation) to reach. degree improves.

Moreover, since the bottom-side through-hole 720 and the engaging portion 721 are engaged with each other by sliding backward in the housing 11, further simplification of the engaging operation can be promoted. That is, when closing the front door 12 after installing the auxiliary tank 54, it is necessary to push the auxiliary tank 54 deep inside the housing 11 in advance so that the front door 12 and the auxiliary tank 54 do not interfere with each other. According to the present embodiment, it is possible to perform the pushing operation of the auxiliary tank 54 and the engaging operation of the bottom-side through-hole 720 and the engaging portion 721 by one operation. At that time, since engagement is naturally achieved by performing normal installation work, it is possible to contribute to prevention of forgetting to engage.

The bottom-side through-hole 720 and the engaging portion 721 are configured to engage with each other in the front-rear direction. In this case, the movement of the auxiliary tank 54 in the front-rear direction can be restricted by the engagement between the bottom-side through hole 720 and the engaging portion 721 . As a result, when the auxiliary tank 54 is slid to be installed, the movement is restricted, so that it is possible to recognize that the auxiliary tank 54 is installed at the proper position.

When the bottom lid 704 is in the open state, the end 704a of the bottom lid 704 on the side of the tip of rotation is positioned above the upper end of the tank main body 701, and is positioned above the tank main body 701 in the housing 11. The guide plate 52a is provided at a position where the guide plate 52a abuts on the bottom lid 704 in the open state at a predetermined open position. As a result, even if the bottom lid 704 tilts due to impact or vibration applied to the slot machine 10, the rotation of the bottom lid 704 can be regulated by the guide plate 52a, and unintended closure of the lower opening 703 can be prevented. .

At this time, the closed state of the bottom lid 704 is rotated forward to switch to the open state, so that the bottom lid 704 in the open state can be positioned on the front door 12 side with respect to the guide plate 52a. can be done. As a result, the medals supplied from the guide plate 52a to the auxiliary tank 54 can be prevented from hitting the bottom lid 704, jumping toward the front door 12, and hitting the front door 12. In addition, it is possible to prevent the medal from entering between the front door 12 and the tank main body 701 .

<Modification 1>
In this modified example, when the auxiliary tank 54 is slid toward the installation position in a form compatible with automatic recovery, a configuration is added to define the forward end position of the auxiliary tank 54. is different from the embodiment of This modification will be described below with reference to FIGS. 165 to 168. FIG. 165 is a perspective view of the bottom lid 704, FIG. 166 is a plan view of the tank body 701, FIG. 167(a) is an explanatory view showing the state of the extension plate 751 when closed, and (b) is an extension plate when opened. FIG. 168 is an explanatory diagram showing the state of 751, and FIG. 168 is an explanatory diagram showing how the movement of the auxiliary tank 54 is restricted.

As shown in FIG. 165, the bottom cover 704 is provided with an extension plate 751 extending outward from the short side portion on the shaft portion 707 side. The extension plate 751 is provided on the opposite side of the lid body 706 with the shaft portion 707 interposed therebetween, and is integrally formed with the shaft portion 707 . The extension plate 751 has a substantially rectangular shape extending in the axial direction of the shaft portion 707 in a plan view, and is arranged in the central portion of the shaft portion 707 . The length of the extending plate 751 in the extending direction is such that the distance from the rotating shaft 707a of the shaft portion 707 (see FIG. 167(a)) to the tip portion 751a of the extending plate 751 is the distance from the rotating shaft 707a to the bottom plate portion. It is set to be longer than the distance to the back surface of 701a.

As shown in FIG. 166, in the tank main body 701, a notch portion 752 is formed in the bottom plate front portion 701f of the bottom plate portion 701a so as to correspond to the extension plate 751. As shown in FIG. The notch 752 has a rectangular shape in a plan view, and is sized so that the extending plate 751 of the bottom lid 704 can pass therethrough.

In such a configuration, when the bottom cover 704 is in the closed position, the extension plate 751 is positioned above the notch 752 and accommodated inside the tank body 701, as shown in FIG. 167(a). there is On the other hand, when the bottom lid 704 is rotated upward toward the open position, as shown in FIG. The tip portion 751a protrudes downward from the rear surface of the bottom plate portion 701a through the notch portion 752. As shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 168, the bottom plate 11a of the housing 11 is provided with a recess 754 formed by cutting out a part of the surface of the bottom plate 11a. The concave portion 754 is located in front of the medal ejection hole 15 in the movement path of the auxiliary tank 54 when the auxiliary tank 54 is slid toward the installation position (the position where the bottom-side through hole 720 and the engaging portion 721 are engaged). side (see two-dot chain line in FIG. 6). More specifically, the concave portion 754 is arranged on the passage area through which the tip portion 751a of the extension plate 751 passes when the auxiliary tank 54 is slid toward the installation position on the bottom plate 11a. The depth of the recess 754 is deeper than the projection length of the extension plate 751 from the back surface of the bottom plate portion 701a, so that the extension plate 751 can enter the recess 754 when passing over the recess 754. (See FIG. 168(a)).

Then, when the auxiliary tank 54 moves forward toward the installation position with the extension plate 751 entering the recess 754, the boundary between the recess 754 and the surface of the bottom plate 11a is formed as shown in FIG. A tip portion 751a of the extension plate 751 is caught by a stepped portion 755 formed in the . As a result, the advance of the auxiliary tank 54 is restricted, and the movement end position of the auxiliary tank 54 is defined.

In this modification, the position of the stepped portion 755 is set so that the tip portion 751a of the extension plate 751 contacts the stepped portion 755 of the recessed portion 754 before the auxiliary tank 54 reaches the installation position. Further, the position of the stepped portion 755 in this case is such that when the entire auxiliary tank 54 enters the housing 11 and the front door 12 is closed, the rear surface of the front door 12 and the front end of the auxiliary tank 54 (front door 12 side) ) are positioned so as not to interfere with each other.

Therefore, if the bottom lid 704 is rotated to the open position, the auxiliary tank 54 is allowed to move forward to the position where the front door 12 can be closed, and the auxiliary tank 54 is opened in front of the installation position. can be stopped. Therefore, even if the worker (employee of the game hall) who performs the pushing operation does not pay special attention to the position of the auxiliary tank 54, the bottom side through-hole 720 and the engaging portion 721 do not engage and the front door 12 does not engage. Auxiliary tank 54 can be installed at a proper position where the can be closed.

On the other hand, when the bottom cover 704 is positioned at the closed position and the auxiliary tank 54 is adapted for transporting the slot machine 10 or manual recovery, the extension plate 751 is housed inside the tank main body 701, as already explained. The tip portion 751a does not protrude downward from the back surface of the bottom plate portion 701a. Therefore, the tip portion 751a and the stepped portion 755 do not get caught, and the auxiliary tank 54 can be smoothly advanced to the installation position.

<Modification 2>
In this modified example, the configuration for releasing the engagement between the bottom-side through hole 720 and the engaging portion 721 is different from that of the fourth embodiment. This modification will be described below with reference to FIG. FIG. 169 is an explanatory diagram showing the installation state of the auxiliary tank 54. As shown in FIG. In this modified example, the bottom lid 514 of the auxiliary tank 54 and the structure related to its support are the same as those of the first embodiment. These components are denoted by the same reference numerals as in the drawings of the first embodiment, and descriptions thereof are omitted.

As shown in FIG. 169, the bottom plate 11a of the housing 11 is provided with an engaging driving portion 761 for driving the engaging protrusion 723 of the engaging portion 721. As shown in FIG. The engagement driving portion 761 has a solenoid as a drive source and a transmission mechanism as a driving force transmission means for connecting the solenoid and the engagement projection 723 to transmit the driving force of the solenoid to the engagement projection 723 . ing. The solenoid is electrically connected to main controller 101 and driven based on a drive signal from main controller 101 .

When the output of the drive signal from the main controller 101 is stopped and the solenoid is in a non-driven (non-excited) state, the engaging projection 723 is held at the raised position (engaged position) by the biasing force of the coil spring 729. , and the bottom-side through hole 720 and the engaging portion 721 are engaged. On the other hand, when a drive signal is output from the main controller 101 and the solenoid is driven (excited), the engagement protrusion 723 moves from the raised position to the lowered position (disengaged position). As a result, the engaging projection 723 is disengaged from the bottom-side through hole 720 and the engagement between the two is released, allowing the auxiliary tank 54 to move.

In this modified example, the main controller 101 monitors the conduction state between the upper sensor rod 16a and the lower sensor rod 16b, and grasps that they are conducting, that is, that the auxiliary tank 54 is full. In this case, the drive signal is output to the drive unit 761 for engagement.

In such a configuration, when transporting the slot machine 10, the auxiliary tank 54 is installed in the housing 11 using the engaging method (see FIGS. 161 and 162) described in the fourth embodiment. do. During transportation, the power supply device 91 of the slot machine 10 is not connected to an external power source and power is not supplied to the slot machine 10. A drive signal is not output. Therefore, the bottom-side through-hole 720 and the engaging portion 721 are engaged with each other, and movement of the auxiliary tank 54 within the housing 11 can be restricted. As a result, it is possible to suppress rattling of the auxiliary tank 54 during transportation, and it is possible to suppress damage due to collision between the auxiliary tank 54 and peripheral members.

When the auxiliary tank 54 is used for manual recovery, the auxiliary tank 54 is installed inside the housing 11 in the same manner as described above. In this case, the power supply device 91 of the slot machine 10 is connected to the external power supply (commercial power supply of the gaming hall), and power is being supplied to the slot machine 10 . However, when no medals are stored in the auxiliary tank 54, the upper sensor rod 16a and the lower sensor rod 16b are in a non-conducting state, so that the drive signal is not output from the main controller 101. , the bottom-side through-hole 720 and the engaging portion 721 are engaged.

Even when the slot machine 10 is connected to an external power supply, if the auxiliary tank 54 is empty before opening the hall or after closing the hall or during inspection or game setting, the auxiliary tank 54 does not need to be moved. Instead, it is desirable that the auxiliary tank 54 is immovable for work convenience. In this respect, even when the power is supplied to the slot machine 10, if the amount of tokens stored in the auxiliary tank 54 is less than the predetermined amount, the bottom side through-hole 720 and the engaging portion 721 are engaged, When it is not necessary to move the auxiliary tank 54, the unnecessary movement can be suppressed, and an advantageous configuration can be realized for work and the like.

After that, when the number of medals stored in the auxiliary tank 54 reaches a predetermined amount and the two sensor rods 16a and 16b become conductive, the drive signal is output from the main controller 101 to the drive section 761 for engagement. As a result, the engaging driving portion 761 is driven, the engaging protrusion 723 descends, and the engagement between the bottom-side through-hole 720 and the engaging portion 721 is released.

Further, when both sensor bars 16a and 16b are electrically connected, an external signal indicating that the hall is full is output to the management device of the game hall through the external common terminal board 121, as already described. After that, the employee who received the notification goes to the bottom of the slot machine 10 and takes out the auxiliary tank 54 in order to collect the medals in the auxiliary tank 54 . In this case, in this modified example, the engagement between the bottom-side through-hole 720 and the engaging portion 721 has already been released, and the removal of the auxiliary tank 54 is permitted. Therefore, the auxiliary tank 54 can be taken out without difficulty, and medals can be collected.

After collecting the medals, when the auxiliary tank 54 is installed in the housing 11 again, the bottom side through-hole 720 and the engaging portion 721 are engaged with each other, and thereafter both the sensor rods 16a and 16b are electrically connected. is disengaged again in response to

When the auxiliary tank 54 is used for automatic recovery, the auxiliary tank 54 may be turned upside down and installed in the housing 11 as in the first embodiment. may be configured to hold the auxiliary tank 54 at the open position, such as by locking the tank main body 701 with a locking claw or the like, and then the auxiliary tank 54 may be installed in an upward posture.

As described above, according to this modification as well, it is possible to restrict the movement of the auxiliary tank 54 during transportation of the slot machine 10 while avoiding adverse effects on the removal operation of the auxiliary tank 54 during manual collection, thereby improving convenience. improve markedly.

In the above modification, the engagement between the bottom-side through hole 720 and the engaging portion 721 is released in response to detection of the full state of the auxiliary tank 54. However, before the full state is detected, It is good also as composition which cancels engagement of both.

Specifically, apart from the sensor rods 16a and 16b, detection means for detecting that the amount of tokens stored in the auxiliary tank 54 has reached a specific amount less than the full capacity is provided, and detection by the detection means is provided. It is possible to adopt a configuration in which driving control of the engagement driving portion 761 is performed based on the result. In this case, the detecting means is electrically connected to the main controller 101, and when the main controller 101 recognizes that the specified amount of medals has been received, the main controller 101 outputs a drive signal. do it. This allows removal of the auxiliary tank 54 prior to the full condition.

By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to respond to the timing of taking out the auxiliary tank 54 when it is detected to be full with a sufficient margin. In addition, since the auxiliary tank 54 can be taken out even if it is not full, it is possible to deal with the case where some of the medals in the storage tank 52 are transferred to the auxiliary tank 54 and collected. becomes.

As the detection means, a load sensor is attached to the bottom plate 11a of the housing 11, or a light emitting element is attached to the auxiliary tank 54 (tank main body 701) at a height lower than the upper sensor rod 16a. In addition, a light-receiving element may be provided, and light from the light-emitting element may be continuously blocked by the medals in the auxiliary tank 54 for a predetermined period to detect the amount of stored medals.

<Modification 3>
This modification differs from the above-described fourth embodiment in that a sensor that detects the storage state of medals in the auxiliary tank 54 is used to realize engagement and disengagement with the auxiliary tank 54. . The configuration of this modification will be described below with reference to FIGS. 170 to 173. FIG. 170 is an explanatory view showing the installation state of the auxiliary tank 54, FIG. 171(a) is a perspective view of the lower sensor section 801 and its surroundings, (b) is a partially enlarged view of the lower sensor section 801, and FIG. 173 is a perspective cross-sectional view of the auxiliary tank 54, FIG. 173 is a perspective cross-sectional view of the tank body 701, and FIG.

As shown in FIG. 171(a), in this modified example, a lower sensor section 801 is provided in place of the lower sensor rod 16b (see FIG. 6). 170, the lower sensor portion 801 is configured to engage with the bottom lid 802 with the rear wall portion 701c of the tank body 701 interposed therebetween. A combination of the lower sensor portion 801, the rear wall portion 701c, and the bottom lid 802 will be described below. Since the upper sensor rod 16a has the same structure as that of each of the above-described embodiments, the explanation thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 171(a), the lower sensor section 801 has a substantially L-shaped longitudinal section and is formed by bending a metal plate having a predetermined thickness. The lower sensor section 801 includes an attachment section 811 for attaching the lower sensor section 801 to the housing 11 and a sensor main body 812 provided at the lower end of the attachment section 811 .

The mounting portion 811 extends along the back plate 11b of the housing 11, and a through hole (not shown) is formed in the central portion of the mounting portion 811 so as to penetrate the mounting portion 811 in the thickness direction. A shaft portion 813a (see FIG. 170) of a screw 813 is inserted through the through-hole from the inside of the housing 11, and a nut 814 is screwed onto the shaft portion 813a of the screw 813 from the rear side of the back plate 11b. . Thereby, the lower sensor section 801 is fixed to the back plate 11b. A wire is connected to the shaft portion 813a or the nut 814 via a connection terminal, and the lower sensor portion 801 and the main controller 101 are electrically connected through the wire.

The sensor main body 812 includes an extending portion 821 extending forward from the lower end of the mounting portion 811, a bent portion 822 bent downward from the tip of the extending portion 821, and an engaging portion rising obliquely upward from the tip of the bent portion 822. and an inclined portion 823 for use. As shown in FIG. 171(b), the distal end portion 823a of the engaging sloped portion 823 extends to substantially the same height as the upper end portion 822a of the bent portion 822. are approximately equal.

As shown in FIG. 170, the extension dimension of the sensor main body 812 from the mounting portion 811 corresponds to the length dimension of the upper sensor rod 16a. Specifically, in the extending direction of the extending portion 821, the distance from one end portion 821a of the extending portion 821 on the side of the back plate 11b (see FIG. 171(a)) to the tip portion 823a of the engaging inclined portion 823 is , and the distance from the back plate 11b of the upper sensor rod 16a to the tip of the sensor rod 16a. As a result, even if the shape of the lower sensor part 801 is different from that of the lower sensor rod 16b (see FIG. 6), the lower sensor part 801 is brought into proper contact with the medals in the auxiliary tank 54. Therefore, the full state can be detected satisfactorily.

As shown in FIGS. 172(b) and 173, the rear wall portion 701c of the tank body 701 is provided with a lower sensor insertion hole 831 corresponding to the lower sensor portion 801. As shown in FIGS. The lower sensor insertion hole 831 penetrates the rear wall portion 701c in the thickness direction, and is formed in a size that allows the bent portion 822 and the engaging inclined portion 823 of the lower sensor portion 801 to pass therethrough.

As shown in FIGS. 172(a) and 173, the bottom lid 802 rises from a substantially rectangular lid body 835 in plan view and an end portion 835a of the lid body 835 opposite to the shaft portion 832. It has an engaging upright portion 836 and has a substantially L-shaped cross section. The distance from the shaft portion 832 (rotation center) to the end portion 835a in the lid body 835 is substantially the same as the distance from the shaft portion 832 to the end portion on the rear wall portion 701c side on the surface of the bottom plate portion 701a. The lid main body 835 extends so as to cover substantially the entire surface of the bottom plate portion 701a. The engagement standing portion 836 stands in the vicinity of the rear wall portion 701c so as to substantially follow the inner surface of the rear wall portion 701c, and is above the lower sensor insertion hole 831 and below the upper sensor insertion hole 731a. It extends to a predetermined height position.

A lid sensor insertion hole 837 is provided in the upper portion of the engaging upright portion 836 . The lid sensor insertion hole 837 penetrates the engaging upright portion 836 in the thickness direction, and has a size that allows the bent portion 822 and the engaging inclined portion 823 of the lower sensor portion 801 to pass through. The lid sensor insertion hole 837 is arranged in correspondence with the lower sensor section 801 so as to be positioned in front of the lower sensor insertion hole 831 of the rear wall section 701c in a front view of the engaging upright section 836 .

As shown in FIGS. 172(b) and 173, a coil spring 839 is arranged in a bottom plate rear portion 701g located between the lower opening 703 and the rear wall portion 701c in the bottom plate portion 701a. The coil spring 839 is fixed on a spring pedestal 840 formed by recessing a portion of the surface of the rear bottom plate 701g downward, and is arranged so as to exert an upward biasing force.

When the lid body 835 of the bottom lid 802 approaches the bottom plate portion 701a, a coil spring 839 is interposed between the lid body 835 and the bottom plate portion 701a, and the coil spring 839 biases the bottom lid 802 upward. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 173, when the bottom lid 802 closes the lower opening 703 and no medals are placed on the lid main body 835, the bottom lid 802 is pushed downward from the surface of the bottom plate portion 701a by a predetermined amount. The bottom lid 802 is lifted by the height, and accordingly, the engaging upright portion 836 of the bottom lid 802 is also stationary at the raised position.

When the engaging upright portion 836 is positioned at the raised position, the height position of the lid sensor insertion hole 837 is raised, so that the lower end portion 837a of the lid sensor insertion hole 837 becomes the upper end portion of the lower sensor insertion hole 831. It is located above 831a. As a result, the vertical width of the space connecting the lower sensor insertion hole 831 and the lid sensor insertion hole 837 in the insertion direction of the lower sensor portion 801, that is, the upper end portion 831a of the lower sensor insertion hole 831 is connected to the lid sensor insertion hole 837. A distance Lq to the lower end portion 837a of the insertion hole 837 is reduced compared to when the engagement standing portion 836 (bottom lid 802) is lowered. In this case, the distance Lq is smaller than the vertical width dimension Hb (see FIG. 171(b)) of the bent portion 822 and the engaging inclined portion 823 of the lower sensor portion 801. The inclined portion 823 is impassable or difficult to pass.

Next, a method of engaging the lower sensor portion 801 and the bottom lid 802 and a method of releasing the same will be described with reference to FIGS. 174 and 175. FIG. FIG. 174(a) is an explanatory diagram showing the state before engagement, (b) is an explanatory diagram showing the engaged state, and FIG. 175 is an explanatory diagram showing the disengaged state. In addition, in FIG. 175, illustration of medals in the auxiliary tank 54 is omitted for the sake of convenience.

First, a method of engaging the lower sensor portion 801 and the bottom lid 802 will be described. In engaging the lower sensor portion 801 and the bottom lid 802, the auxiliary tank 54 is placed on the bottom plate 11a with the front surface of the housing 11 opened. In this case, the auxiliary tank 54 is placed so that the rear wall portion 701c of the auxiliary tank 54 is located on the front side of the tip portions of the upper sensor rod 16a and the lower sensor portion 801. FIG. At that time, as in the fourth embodiment, the auxiliary tank 54 can be placed on the right side plate 11c for alignment in the left-right direction.

From this state, the auxiliary tank 54 is pushed in toward the inside of the housing 11, and the auxiliary tank 54 is slid on the bottom plate 11a. Then, as shown in FIG. 174(a), when the auxiliary tank 54 approaches the back plate 11b to some extent, a portion of the front end side of the engaging inclined portion 823 of the lower sensor portion 801 moves toward the rear wall portion of the tank main body 701. It passes through the lower sensor insertion hole 831 provided in the bottom cover 801c and abuts on the lower end portion 837a of the lid sensor insertion hole 837 provided in the engaging upright portion 836 of the bottom cover 802 .

Here, since the engaging inclined portion 823 is inclined downward when viewed in the moving direction of the auxiliary tank 54, the lower end portion 837a of the lid sensor insertion hole 837 moves toward the engaging inclined portion 823 as the auxiliary tank 54 advances. It slides upward and is gradually pushed downward along the slope of the engaging slope portion 823 . Along with this, the bottom cover 802 descends together with the engaging rising portion 836, and the coil spring 839 is compressed to store a restoring force.

In addition, as the engaging rising portion 836 descends, the height position of the lower end portion 837a of the lid sensor insertion hole 837 is lowered, and the lower end portion of the lid sensor insertion hole 837 is moved from the upper end portion 831a of the lower sensor insertion hole 831 to the lower end portion of the lid sensor insertion hole 837. The distance Lq to 837a is extended. Further, as the auxiliary tank 54 advances, the distance Lq increases, and finally becomes equal to or larger than the vertical width dimension Hb of the bent portion 822 and the engaging inclined portion 823 . This allows the entirety of the bent portion 822 and the engaging inclined portion 823 to pass through the lower sensor insertion hole 831 and the lid sensor insertion hole 837 .

When the auxiliary tank 54 advances further and the engaging inclined portion 823 passes through the lower sensor insertion hole 831 and the lid sensor insertion hole 837, the downward pressing force on the lower end portion 837a of the lid sensor insertion hole 837 disappears. do. Along with this, the engaging upright portion 836 rises due to the restoring force of the coil spring 729 . As a result, as shown in FIG. 174(b), a portion of the engaging upright portion 836 below the cover sensor insertion hole 837 (the portion including the lower end portion 837a) is bent to the bent portion 822 and the back plate 11b. , and the lower sensor portion 801 and the bottom lid 802 engage with each other.

In this case, even if an attempt is made to move the auxiliary tank 54 in the direction opposite to the back plate 11b, the engaging upright portion 836 contacts the bent portion 822 of the lower sensor portion 801, so that the auxiliary tank 54 cannot be moved. Regulated. On the other hand, the movement of the auxiliary tank 54 toward the back plate 11b is restricted by the contact of the rear wall 701c of the tank body 701 with the screw 813 that fixes the lower sensor section 801. FIG. That is, in this modified example, the rear wall portion 701c and the engaging upright portion 836 are sandwiched between the bent portion 822 and the screw 813, thereby restricting the forward and backward movement of the auxiliary tank .

The upward movement of the auxiliary tank 54 is restricted by the upper sensor rod 16a and the upper sensor insertion hole 731a, as described in the fourth embodiment.

In this way, when the auxiliary tank 54 is restrained from moving back and forth and upward, the entire auxiliary tank 54 can be accommodated within the housing 11. The rear surface does not collide with the auxiliary tank 54. - 特許庁That is, in this modified example, the position of the auxiliary tank 54 when the lower sensor portion 801 and the bottom lid 802 are engaged corresponds to the installation position referred to in the fourth embodiment.

Therefore, when the slot machine 10 is transported, if the auxiliary tank 54 is installed in the housing 11 in the manner described above, it is possible to prevent the auxiliary tank 54 from rattling in the housing 11. and peripheral members can be prevented from being damaged by collision.

Next, a method for releasing the engagement will be described. Disengagement of the engagement is required when used for manual recovery. Install in the installation position.

When the medals overflowing from the storage tank 52 are sequentially stored in the auxiliary tank 54 , the weight of the medals acts on the bottom lid 704 by placing the medals on the bottom lid 704 . Since the load of the medal also acts on the coil spring 839 through the bottom lid 704, as the medal weight on the bottom lid 704 increases, the coil spring 839 is gradually compressed, and the bottom lid 704 rotates downward little by little. continue. As a result, the engaging upright portion 836 descends, and the distance Lq from the upper end portion 831a of the lower sensor insertion hole 831 to the lower end portion 837a of the lid sensor insertion hole 837 is expanded.

When the number of medals stored in the auxiliary tank 54 reaches a predetermined amount or more, as shown in FIG. It is larger than the vertical width dimension Hb of the combined inclined portion 823 . As a result, the bent portion 822 and the engaging inclined portion 823 as a whole can pass through the lower sensor insertion hole 831 and the cover sensor insertion hole 837, and the restriction on movement of the auxiliary tank 54 in the drawing direction is released. be done. That is, when medals are accumulated in the auxiliary tank 54 to some extent, the auxiliary tank 54 is allowed to be taken out, and the medals in the auxiliary tank 54 can be collected.

When the auxiliary tank 54 is adapted to automatic collection, similarly to the fourth embodiment, the auxiliary tank 54 is once removed from the housing 11 with the front surface of the housing 11 opened, and the bottom lid is removed. 704 is rotated upward to open the lower opening 703 . After that, the auxiliary tank 54 is installed at the installation position with the lower opening 703 left open.

<Other embodiments>
It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the contents described in each of the above-described embodiments, and may be carried out, for example, as follows. Incidentally, each of the following configurations may be individually applied to each of the above-described embodiments, or may be applied to each of the above-described embodiments by combining a part or all of them. Moreover, it is also possible to arbitrarily combine all or part of the various configurations shown in the above embodiments. In this case, it is preferable that the technical significance (effects exhibited) of each configuration to be combined is ensured. Each of the following configurations may be applied individually to a new configuration made up of a combination of the embodiments, or a part or all of them may be combined and applied.

(1) In the first embodiment, the probability of winning each special role is the same as the probability of winning each corresponding role in the normal game mode, but a part may be different, or all may be different. may be For example, if the probability of winning a special specific role corresponding to a specific role is set to be higher than the probability of winning a specific role, in the game in the specific mode, the lottery for transition to the attack mode, etc. in the normal game mode, and the addition, etc. It becomes easier to experience the lottery. On the other hand, if the probability is set to be lower than that of the specific combination, in the game in the specific mode, the transition lottery such as the attack mode in the normal game mode and the lottery such as the addition are not easily performed. As a result, the player, who has experienced that the lottery for transition to the attack mode or the like is not easily performed in the specific mode for practice, can easily feel that the frequency of execution of the lottery for transition to the normal game mode is high.

Further, the winning probability of the first PBB or the second PBB in the specific mode may be different from the probability of the first BB or the second BB in the normal game mode, for example, may be higher than the first BB or the second BB, or the first BB or the second BB. A lower probability than A high probability makes it easier for the player to experience the 1st BB or the 2nd BB, while a low probability causes the transition to a bonus state (special bonus state) during a specific mode, thereby terminating the bonus state. It is possible to make it difficult to generate the phenomenon that the lottery of the 1st BB and the 2nd BB in the normal game mode is not performed until.

(2) In the first embodiment, the lottery table in the specific mode is set to be equivalent to the lottery table in the normal game state in the normal game mode, but the lottery table in another game state (for example, bonus state) can be set to be equivalent to

(3) In the first embodiment, the end condition of the first PBB or the second PBB is the condition that the game will end when the number of times of execution of the game is combined with the number of executions of the first BB or the second BB (payout of 24 coins). However, in order to make it possible to end the game earlier, it may be configured to end with a smaller number of payouts (for example, 3) than 24 payouts. For example, in the case of a configuration that ends with the payout of 3 cards, 3 games in a 1-bet game (1 bet, 3 games with 1 payout), and 1 game in a 3-bet game (1 game with 3 bets, 3 payouts). As a result, it is possible to end the process earlier than in the first embodiment.

(4) Although the first PBB and the second PBB are provided in the first embodiment, the configuration may be such that the first PBB and the second PBB are not provided. Instead, the same winning mode as the winning mode of the 1st PBB and the 2nd PBB, that is, a one-coin payout combination of winning with the same outcome as the winning of the 1BB and the 2nd BB in the normal game mode is provided. Then, when the one-card payout combination is won (at the time of winning), it is preferable to generate an effect that the first PBB or the second PBB is won (winning). In this case, if the 1-card payout combination can be won in a winning game as a winning combination, there is no need to provide a process corresponding to the state in which the 1st PBB or the 2nd PBB is carried over.

Furthermore, in this case, a special combination (such as the 30th minor combination) corresponding to the combination (such as the 30th minor combination) that can be won during the bonus state is added to the special combination that can be won during the normal game state and the stop switches 42-44. Winning/non-winning are different depending on the difference in the order of operation. Then, the operation order of the special combination corresponding to the combination that can be won during the bonus state is reported, and the special combination winning is established. As a result, it is possible to experience a pseudo-bonus state over a predetermined number of games.

In addition, as the winning combination, a plurality of types of the above-mentioned small winning combination are provided, and a configuration is provided in which a winning combination in which a plurality of small winning combinations are set is provided. That is, when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the first order of operation, the first winning small winning combination is established, and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the second order of operation. In this case, the second winning combination is established. Then, if the 1-card payout combination corresponding to the 1st PBB or the 2nd PBB is won, and the combination corresponding to the 1st PBB or the 2nd PBB win is not won ) is configured to pay out one medal and vary the type of the losing minor combination to be notified when the winning combination is won. That is, before winning the one-coin payout combination corresponding to the first PBB or the second PBB, the first operation order is notified or the first operation order is normally performed so that the first small winning combination can be easily won. An easy operation order (order to stop from the left reel, etc.) is set, and after winning one payout corresponding to the first PBB or the second PBB, the operation order of the second small winning combination is notified. By doing so, it is possible to make a so-called reach number appear by differentiating the numbers in the carryover state and the non-carryover state.

(5) In the first embodiment, the specific mode is basically performed using a 1-bet game, but it may be configured to perform the specific mode using a 2-bet game. A 1-bet game or a 2-bet game may be used instead of the bet game, and the specific mode may be a 3-bet game.

(6) In the first embodiment, each RT state is set in addition to the normal game state and the bonus state even in the 1-bet game, and the transition to each RT state (promotion/fall) corresponds to each replay. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which a special replay or a special transition roll is used as a roll. In this case, if at least a small winning combination in which one coin is paid out is provided, the 1-bet game can be played in a free mode with no (small) increase or decrease of medals.

(7) In the first embodiment, even in the lottery process of the 1-bet game, it is possible to provide a result of a complete loss in which no index value is won.

(8) In the first embodiment, whether the normal game mode or the specific mode is being implemented may be configured to be externally outputtable. The external output destination may be, for example, a hall computer in a game hall or a data display machine installed in the game hall. In this case, the game history of the normal game mode and the specific mode may be separately managed by the hall computer or the data display machine. may not be managed.

(9) In the first embodiment, the configuration that enables discrimination between the normal game mode and the specific mode is not limited to the stamp 65a and the identification accessory 65b described above, and may be another configuration. For example, if the content displayed on the auxiliary display section 65 is identifiable, the background color or the like may be changed between the normal game mode and the specific mode instead of or in addition to the stamp 65a. In this case, when the display content in the specific mode is determined by the display control device 81, the effect data of the corresponding effect content in the normal game mode is acquired, and the color data in the effect data is rewritten. The display contents in the specific mode may be used. As a result, the storage capacity can be greatly reduced compared to the configuration in which the performance data for the specific mode is separately stored. In addition, when the identification accessory 65b is made identifiable, if a position protruding (for example, upward) from the slot machine 10 is set as a specific position, the manager of the game hall or the like can remotely recognize that the specific mode is in progress. can also be easily comprehended.

In addition, an upright wall that protrudes forward and extends vertically is provided at the side end of the slot machine 10 (for example, on the right side opposite to the rotating shaft side). Then, the wall portion of the upright wall may be used for the identification display. As a result, the player who is playing the game while visually recognizing the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, the stop switches 42 to 44, the auxiliary display section 65, etc., does not mind, and the manager of the game hall, etc. It is possible to perform identification display at a position where it can be confirmed immediately. In this case, for example, the wall portion of the upright wall facing inward (player side) may not display the identification display, and the wall portion of the upright wall facing outward (adjacent game machine side) may display the identification display. By doing so, it is possible to provide a display that does not bother the player who is playing the game. In addition, by doing so, a player who is playing a game at an adjacent gaming machine can easily grasp that the game at the adjacent gaming machine (this gaming machine) is in the specific mode. Also, it is possible to suppress the misrecognition of the game characteristics of the game machine, in which medals do not decrease, as cheating.

(10) In the first embodiment, the lottery table in the specific mode was set so that all winable hands are different between the normal game state and the bonus state (special bonus state). The winning combination may be duplicated, or all the combinations may be duplicated, and at least the odds of winning each combination may be different between the normal game state and the bonus state.

(11) In the first embodiment, in the specific mode, in both the normal game state and the bonus state, a game of one bet and one payout is performed. If the expected number of payouts for the number of inserted medals is equal to the number of inserted medals, for example, in the normal game state, one bet and one payout game is performed (expected payout number for the number of inserted medals = 1/1), In the bonus state, a game of betting 3 coins and paying out 3 coins may be played (expected number of payouts to number of inserted medals=3/3). In addition, in the normal game state and the bonus state, the explanation has been given assuming that there is no loss result. It is sufficient if the expected payout number for the number is equivalent.

(12) In the first embodiment, the first PBB and the second PBB that can be won in the 1-bet game may be set as a so-called no-lost combination. By doing so, it is possible to reliably establish the first PBB prize and the second PBB prize in the game in which the first PBB and the second PBB are won. As a result, it is possible to eliminate the loss of medals that occurs when the first PBB or the second PBB is carried over.

(13) In the first embodiment, the first PBB and the second PBB that can be won in the 1-bet game may be set as a combination in which one medal is paid out when winning. As a result, it is possible to eliminate the loss of medals that occurs in games where the first PBB prize is won or the second PBB prize is won.

(14) In the first embodiment, when a special regame win is established in a specific mode, automatic betting may not be performed. In this way, it is possible to eliminate the difference between the presence or absence of the betting operation and the small winning combination. Further, when a small winning prize is established, one medal may be automatically bet instead of paying out one medal. Even in this way, it is possible to eliminate the difference between the presence or absence of the bet operation between the small winning prize and the special replay winning prize.

(15) In the second embodiment, the configurations of the fourth credit insertion switch 69 and the fifth credit insertion switch 75 for performing the betting operation for the specific mode are not limited to those described above. good. For example, the entire cosmetic panel 80 may be configured as an operating unit that can be operated by pressing, and the operating unit of the cosmetic panel 80 may be used to perform the bet operation for the specific mode. Also, a touch sensor or a non-contact sensor may be provided, and detection of a part of the player's body such as a hand by these sensors may be used as a bet operation in the specific mode. Also, a MAX bet button may be provided, and the number of bets to be betted by operating the MAX bet button may be changed depending on whether or not there is a special add-on flag.

(16) In the second embodiment, the wins that can be won during the specific mode are not limited to the above, and may include other wins or none of the above wins. For example, the first PBB and the second PBB may also be elected. If you win the 1st PBB or 2nd PBB, you will be in a bonus state over the specified number of games (until the specified number of payouts are made). It is also possible to shift to a bonus state with , and further add to each game during the bonus state (that is, treat as a specialized zone).

Further, for example, although the special replay and the special red 7 matching are provided, the special replay and the special red 7 matching may not be provided.

A non-winning result in which no winning combination is won may be provided, or an unsuccessful small combination may be provided as in the first embodiment. The number of additional games may be reduced for these non-winning results and small winning combinations, or the additional games may be prevented from occurring.

Special watermelons, special strong cherries, special weak cherries, special middle bells, special replays, and 7 special red combinations are provided as special special roles, but one or more of them may be selected. Also, a plurality of lottery tables in a specific mode may be provided, and the winning combination and the easy winning combination may be different for each table. In this case, for example, in the normal game mode, if the second RT state (corresponding to the attack mode), a lottery for a specific mode is performed on the table that wins the special watermelon, and if it is the third RT state (corresponding to the VB mode) For example, the lottery table in the specific mode may differ depending on the game state in the normal game mode, such as the lottery in the specific mode being performed at the table for winning the special red 7 match.

(17) In the second embodiment, it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which a winning combination is included as a winning combination in the specific mode, or that every combination is a winning combination. As the pushing order role, for example, the pushing order role of special watermelon and special strong cherry is set, and the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 for winning the corresponding special special role is notified according to the number of winning additional games. may be configured. For example, between the special watermelon and the special strong cherry, the special strong cherry is set so that the number of additional games is generally larger. Therefore, when a relatively large number of additional games are selected in the lottery of the specific mode in the special addition, the operation sequence of winning a special strong cherry prize is notified, and when a small number of additional games are selected, a special watermelon prize is awarded. Notify the operation sequence. By doing so, it is possible to further associate the winning combination with the number of additional games.

In addition, as a pushing order role, each special special role in the second embodiment and a special role that notifies the grant of a predetermined bonus or the like (for example, the fourth minor role in the first embodiment or the second 5 small hands) and a push-up hand may be provided. In addition, it is also possible to provide a winning hand for notifying that a privilege such as a predetermined bonus is to be given, and a pushing order hand for a small losing hand. Then, regardless of whether or not the special addition is won, the game is played in the specific mode, and when the special addition is won, the award of the above-mentioned predetermined bonus or other benefits is announced. It is also possible to notify the order of operation, and to notify the order of operations for a small winning combination or a special special winning combination if the win is not won.

(18) In the second embodiment, the timing for executing a game in the specific mode is not limited to when the attack mode is added, and may be other timing. For example, in the normal mode, it may be used as a winning notification effect in the challenge mode or the attack mode. In this case, for example, as in (17) above, each combination in the specific mode is set to be the winning combination that informs of the provision of a privilege such as a predetermined bonus. Then, when the challenge mode or the attack mode is won, the operation order in which the winning combination for notifying the award of the privilege can be won is notified, and when the winning is not performed, the special specific role or the loser is notified. It is preferable that the operation order in which a small win can be won is notified.

(19) In the second embodiment, when a specific role is won during the normal game mode and when a prize is generated (when there is a payout), a special addition due to the specific mode is likely to occur, and a prize is generated. A configuration may be adopted in which special additions due to the specific mode are less likely to occur if the payout is not made (when there is no payout due to a dropout). By doing so, it is possible to improve the significance of not causing a dropout by performing a so-called spotting when a special combination is won. Moreover, by doing so, the event that the credit counter is 0 at the start of the specific mode is less likely to occur. As a result, it is possible to suitably realize the game property of operating the fourth credit insertion switch 69 in the specific mode.

(20) In the second embodiment, the closer the value of the credit counter is to the upper limit, the less likely the special addition by the specific mode occurs, and the further from the upper limit (the smaller the value of the credit counter), the more special addition by the specific mode. It is good also as a structure which is easy to generate|occur|produce. At the time of special addition in the specific mode, even if one card is paid out, it is configured to generate a sound effect corresponding to the payout effect sound in the normal game mode. A sound is output and 1 is added to the credit counter. In this case, if the value of the credit counter is close to the upper limit value (for example, 49) and the special watermelon prize is established, the credit counter should be incremented by 1 to correspond to the payout of 5 watermelon prizes. While the upper limit value (50) is set and four medals are dispensed from the hopper device 51, in the case of winning a special watermelon, only the credit counter is added and no medals are dispensed. Then, the fact that the special watermelon prize is won is clearly specified through the fact that medals are not paid out from the hopper device 51 even though the performance at the time of the special watermelon prize is set. Therefore, if the smaller the value of the credit counter is, the more likely it is that special additions due to the specific mode will occur, it is possible to prevent the contradiction of whether or not medals will be paid out in pseudo-generating a specific role winning prize. Become. In this case, for example, if the credit counter is 41 or less, special addition by the specific mode occurs so that even if 9 coins corresponding to the maximum number of payouts for a special win are paid out, only the credit counter is added. A configuration may be adopted in which the occurrence of the error is made easy, and when the error exceeds 41, the occurrence of the error is made difficult.

(21) In the second embodiment, as a special addition in the specific mode, the number of continuous games in the attack mode and the VB mode are added, but the benefits of the game in the specific mode are not limited to these. For example, as a privilege of the game in the specific mode, a configuration may be adopted in which a rare image is provided, or a configuration may be provided in which a password or the like is provided to change the effect during the normal game mode. In the configuration in which a rare image is provided, the rarity of the given rare image may be varied according to the type of special special role won in the game in the specific mode. Further, in the configuration in which a password or the like is provided, it may be configured such that the changeable effects in the normal game mode are changed according to the type of the special specific role won in the game in the specific mode.

(22) In the second embodiment, in the credit display invisible processing in step S5503, the display of the credit display unit 60 and the like is turned off. A configuration that reduces the visibility of the display (for example, a configuration that displays more faintly than usual) may be used, or the visibility of the credit display section 60 and the like may be improved by performing an effect at a position overlapping the credit display section 60 and the like. It may be configured to lower (for example, a configuration in which the accessory overlaps the credit display section 60 or the like in the front-rear direction).

(23) In the second embodiment, the privilege of the special role that triggers the special addition may be different from the above. For example, instead of paying out five medals based on winning the watermelon combination, three medals may be paid out. In this case, in a game played as a 3-bet game, a watermelon winning prize is established in which 3 medals are paid out, and in a game played as a 1-bet game, a special watermelon is paid out with 1 medal. It becomes difficult to actually pay out medals in both the situation in which a winning combination is established and in both cases (there is only an increase or decrease in the credit counter), which is preferable in terms of reducing the distinguishability between the two situations. In other words, by setting the number of bets, ie, 3 or less, for the privilege of the special combination that triggers the special addition, it is possible to preferably lower the identifiability with the situation in which the special special combination wins.

(24) Display modes such as normal mode, challenge mode, attack mode, VB mode, special zone configuration, transition timing, transition probability, number of continuous games, etc. are not limited to the above, and other configurations may be used. good too. For example, in each of the above-described embodiments, the specialized zone is configured to shift to the seventh replay prize during the VB mode, but it may be configured to shift to the attack mode. For example, it may be part of a special role such as watermelon.

(25) The structure of the normal game state, RT state, and bonus state as the game state, transition timing, transition probability, number of continuous games, etc. are not limited to those described above, and other configurations may be used. In this case, for example, in the above-described first embodiment, it is preferable to set a special combination in which a prize is won by a stop roll appearing when the game state is changed, in the specific mode.

(26) The effective lines set for the 3-bet game and the 1-bet game are not limited to the downward-sloping line L4 and the bending line L6. For example, in a 3-bet game, a bending line L6 may be set, and in a 1-bet game, a downward-sloping line L4 may be set. In this case, it is preferable to set the winning mode of each winning combination so that, for example, a winning is achieved when the winning number is stopped in the 3-bet game in each of the above-described embodiments.

(27) Although the auxiliary display unit 65 is configured to notify the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44, the configuration is not limited to such a configuration. For example, the operation order is notified by outputting a sound from the speaker 64 Alternatively, the lamp of the stop switch to be operated next may be illuminated in a different color from that of the other stop switches to suggest the order of operation. It may be configured to indicate the reel to be stopped next by lighting or extinguishing, or may be configured to provide another display device or accessory device to notify the operation order by the device. Moreover, it is good also as a structure which alert|reports an operation order by the combination of these structures.

(28) A configuration may be adopted in which a player is given a penalty depending on the order in which the stop switches 42-44 are operated. For example, when an operation is performed in an operation order different from the operation order notified at the time of winning the pushing order (when an operation is performed to win a winning combination different from the winning combination to be notified) It may be configured to give a penalty, in spite of not being in a state in which notification of the operation order is performed at the time of winning the first order, or even though notification of the order of operations is not performed at the time of winning the first order. In spite of this, if an operation is performed in an operation order different from a predetermined operation order (for example, the operation order in which the left stop switch 42 is operated first), a penalty may be given. Penalty is imparted, for example, based on the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 in the reel control process by the main control device 101, an operation subject to penalty (a specific operation subject to a predetermined penalty) is performed. The main control device 101, for example, prevents the lottery such as challenge mode or attack mode from being performed over a predetermined number of games, or performs a lottery that adds the number of continuous games such as challenge mode or attack mode. It is preferable that the penalties are executed such that the lottery is not performed, or the lottery is performed but the lottery with the lower winning probability than the situation where the penalty is not given is performed.

Further, in this case, it is preferable that the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like notifies the penalty notification that the specific operation subject to the predetermined penalty has been performed. This notification may be configured to be performed by the display control device 81 . In this case, the display control device 81 can grasp that the specific operation has been performed by the command output when the main control device 101 identifies that the specific operation has been performed, and It becomes possible to execute processing for performing penalty notification.

Then, for example, the main control device 101 performs the penalty processing when the specific operation is performed in the normal game mode, but does not perform the penalty processing when the specific operation is performed in the specific mode. may The specific mode is a game mode that prevents medals from increasing or decreasing by returning the same number of cards. This is because an event that is contrary to the significance of providing the specific mode, such as the provision of , may occur.

In this case, the display control device 81 performs the penalty notification when the specific operation is performed in the normal game mode, and also performs the penalty notification when the specific operation is performed in the specific mode. good. In this way, in a configuration in which the specific mode is set as the practice mode, it is possible to notify that a penalty will be given if such a specific operation is performed in the normal game mode, and practice. The significance of being in the mode for use can be improved.

Furthermore, the display control device 81 may be configured to notify the content of the penalty when the specific operation is performed in the specific mode. The content notification is preferably a notification explaining that the lottery such as the attack mode is more disadvantageous than usual, as described above. By doing so, it is possible to improve the significance of providing the specific mode as the practice mode.

(29) Although the normal game mode and the specific mode are realized by different numbers of bets, they may be realized by other configurations. For example, even if the number of bets is the same, when the changeover switch capable of switching between the first position and the second position is switched to the first position, the normal game mode can be executed, and the switch is switched to the second position. In some cases, a specific mode may be made executable. The change-over switch may be provided at a position where the player can switch (for example, the front surface of the slot machine 10), or may be provided at a position where the player cannot switch (for example, the back of the slot machine 10). good. Further, it may be configured such that the normal game mode and the specific mode are switched by a set value that makes the winning probability of each combination different in the lottery by the lottery means. Specifically, when the set value is 1, which is the lowest value, or 3, which is the intermediate value, the specific mode can be executed, and when the set value is another set value, the normal game mode can be executed.

(30) The effective line between the normal game mode and the specific mode is not limited to the above. For example, in the normal game mode, in a 3-bet game or a 2-bet game, instead of the downward-sloping line L4, other straight lines L1 to L5 may be set as effective lines. It may be configured to be set as a valid line. Further, even in the specific mode, the straight lines L1 to L5 may be set as effective lines, or other bent lines may be set as effective lines. The number of activated lines in the normal game mode and the specific mode is not limited to one, and may be two or more, or the number of activated lines may differ between the two game modes. If either or one of the active lines in both game modes is composed of a plurality of active lines, any of the active lines may overlap in both game modes. Any configuration that includes non-overlapping active lines is acceptable.

(31) Although the auxiliary display section 65 is configured to perform various effects, it may be configured to perform various effects by other effect means. For example, the game panel 25 provided so as to cover the entire display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R while making the respective reels 32L, 32M, and 32R visible is a liquid crystal display panel. Alternatively, various effects may be performed on the decorative panel 80 below the stop switches 42 to 44, or various effects may be performed using movable accessories or the like.

(32) Although slot machines having BB states (first BB, second BB, first PBB, second PBB), CB states (CB, PCB) and RT states as bonus states have been described, the configuration is not limited to this. It may be a slot machine that does not have a BB state or a CB state, or a slot machine that has other game states such as a regular bonus (RB) state or a single bonus (SB) state. good.

(33) In the normal game mode, the game can be started when 3 to 1 medals are bet, but it may be configured such that the game cannot be started when 1 medal or 2 medals are bet. In this case, in the first embodiment, it is possible to bet one by switching to a specific mode by operating the second effect switch 67, and in the second embodiment, the special addition flag is set to make one bet. It is preferable to allow a single bet. When these one bets are permitted, other bets (three bets and two bets) may be prohibited.

(34) As the privilege to be granted, in addition to the privilege of changing the game state and the privilege of replaying, it is configured to include the privilege of paying out medals, but it is not limited to this configuration. Any configuration may be used as long as it provides some kind of privilege. For example, instead of paying out medals, prizes other than medals may be paid out. In particular, when a game is played in a specific mode as a free mode as in the first embodiment, the number of medals does not increase or decrease. Not expected. Therefore, for example, when the number of pseudo acquisitions reaches or exceeds a predetermined number, a configuration may be adopted in which a privilege such as displaying a rare image is given.

(35) Although the slot machine has three reels and corresponding stop buttons arranged side by side, and has four effective lines, it is not limited to such a configuration. , or a slot machine having 7 active lines. From the viewpoint of suppressing erroneous operations in stopping the reels, at least two reels and corresponding stop buttons are sufficient.

(36) In each of the above embodiments, the bottom plate portions 501a, 602, 701a are provided with the bottom side through holes 720, which are opened and closed by the bottom lids 514, 606, 704, 802. A configuration may be adopted in which the whole is opened and the opening is opened and closed by the bottom lid 514 or the like.

(37) In each of the above embodiments, the auxiliary tank 54 is installed on the bottom plate 11a of the housing 11. A configuration in which an auxiliary tank 54 is installed at a location may be employed.

(38) In each of the above embodiments, a rod-shaped sensor is used as the storage state detection means for detecting the storage state of medals in the auxiliary tank 54, but other sensors such as a load sensor attached to the bottom plate 11a may be used. may

(39) In each of the above embodiments, the right side plate 11c of the housing 11 is configured to guide the left and right positions of the auxiliary tank 54. Such a guide is, for example, a predetermined guide member extending in the front-rear direction on the bottom plate 11a. It may be configured by other than the right side plate 11c, such as by providing a . Further, the configuration is not limited to the configuration in which the auxiliary tank 54 is guided only on the left and right sides, and may be configured to be guided on both the left and right sides.

(40) In each of the above embodiments, the two sensor rods, the upper sensor rod 16a and the lower sensor rod 16b, are provided, but the lower sensor rod 16b may be omitted. In this case, for example, a conductive plate may be placed on the bottom plate portion 501a of the tank body 501, and the main controller 101 may monitor the conduction state between the conductive plate and the upper sensor rod 16a.

(41) In the first and third embodiments, the lower openings 512 and 603 may be omitted, the bottom plate portions 501a and 602 may be closed, and the bottom lids 514 and 606 may be omitted. . In this case, by installing the auxiliary tank 54 facing downward, not only is the auxiliary tank 54 fixed to the housing 11 , but also the medal discharge hole 15 can be blocked by the auxiliary tank 54 . In addition, in the case where the structure without the lower openings 512 and 603 and the bottom lids 514 and 606 is adapted for automatic collection, the auxiliary tank 54 can be removed from the housing 11 .

Further, when the lower openings 512, 603 and the bottom lids 514, 606 are omitted, it is not always necessary to set the auxiliary tank 54 downward so as to be engaged. Alternatively, it may be installed in a lying posture so as to face the right side, or installed in a standing posture so that the upper opening 502 faces forward or backward, thereby engaging. Even in such a case, it is possible to notice at a glance that it is installed in a manner different from the normal installation manner, and it is possible to promote awareness of engagement (immobilization).

Furthermore, even in the configuration in which the lower openings 512 and 603 and the bottom lids 514 and 606 are provided, it is possible to adopt a configuration in which they are engaged in the above lying or standing posture. In that case, it is not necessary to share the posture of the auxiliary tank 54 when transporting the slot machine 10 and when using it for automatic recovery. In the case of automatic recovery, it can be in a downward posture. In particular, in the downward posture, there is an advantage that the upper opening 502 can be used to secure the medal moving path from the lower openings 512, 603 to the medal discharge hole 15. Therefore, the auxiliary tank 54 is placed in the downward posture. A configuration that supports automatic collection is preferable. In view of the fact that the posture of the auxiliary tank 54 does not have to be changed every time during transportation and during automatic collection, the configuration of the above embodiment is preferable.

(42) In the first and third embodiments, the bottom lids 514 and 606 are configured to rotate. may be configured to open the lower openings 512 and 603 by descending. In this case, it is preferable to form an inclined surface that descends toward the upper opening 502 (the medal ejection hole 15) on the rear surface of the bottom lid (the surface that becomes the upper surface when the auxiliary tank 54 is in the downward posture). With such a configuration, the medals that have passed through the lower openings 512 and 603 and reached the back surface can be favorably guided toward the medal discharge hole 15 .

(43) In the first and third embodiments, the engaging portion 574 for engaging the auxiliary tank 54 is provided on the bottom plate 11a of the housing 11. The auxiliary tank 54 may be configured to be engaged with a mounted component inside the housing 11, such as by providing an auxiliary tank 54. In this case, it is not always necessary to engage the flange portion 571 of the auxiliary tank 54 with the engaging portion. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which a portion other than the flange portion 571 is engaged, such as by providing an engaged portion that can be mated. At that time, the height position of the engaged portion is changed according to the posture of the auxiliary tank 54, and the engaging portion and the engaged portion do not reach each other in the upward posture, and only in the downward posture. It is preferable to have a configuration in which both can reach each other. As a result, when the auxiliary tank 54 is installed in an upward posture, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience that the two are unintentionally engaged and the movement of the auxiliary tank 54 is restricted.

(44) In the above-described first and third embodiments, when the auxiliary tank 54 is installed in the housing 11, only the left side of the auxiliary tank 54 is engaged. The bottom plate 11a, the back plate 11b, and the right side plate 11c may be provided with engaging portions that engage with the left side flange portion 571d and the rear side flange portion 572b of 501, so that the right side and the rear side are also engaged. Note that the engagement point is not limited to the left side of the auxiliary tank 54, but in the configuration in which the auxiliary tank 54 is installed in the right corner of the housing 11, the engagement point is arranged on the left side of the auxiliary tank 54. As a result, there is an advantage that it is easier to visually confirm the engagement position and the presence or absence of the engagement, compared to the case of arranging it on the right side or the rear side. Considering this point, it is preferable to arrange the engagement point on the left side of the auxiliary tank 54 . Incidentally, when the auxiliary tank 54 is installed in the left corner of the housing 11 , it is preferable to arrange the engaging portion on the right side of the auxiliary tank 54 .

(45) In the first and third embodiments, the flange portion 571 is used as the first engaging portion. It is good also as a structure which uses a part as a 1st engaging part. In this case, the projecting portion does not necessarily need to be provided over the entire periphery of the tank body 501, and may be provided corresponding to a portion of the periphery.

(46) In the first and third embodiments, the engaging portion 574 is integrally formed with the hopper mounting plate 22, but the engaging portion may be provided independently of the hopper mounting plate 22. Alternatively, the hopper mounting plate 22 may be integrally formed with a peripheral member (for example, the hopper device 51).

(47) In the first and third embodiments, when the right flange portion 571c of the auxiliary tank 54 and the engaging portion 574 are engaged with each other, the upper surface of the right flange portion 571c and the projecting portion of the engaging portion 574 578 and the lower surface are in contact with each other (see FIG. 18(c)), but they may remain close to each other and a gap may be formed between them. In other words, engagement does not necessarily involve abutment.

(48) In the above-described first and third embodiments, a display section on which predetermined information is displayed is provided on the rear surface of the bottom plate section 501a (the surface that becomes the upper surface when the auxiliary tank 54 is in a downward posture). may be configured such that the predetermined information is hidden when the . With such a configuration, when the auxiliary tank 54 is installed facing downward, it is possible to call attention to the worker (employee of the game hall) who performs the takeout operation, and suppress the unreasonable takeout operation. It becomes possible. Conversely, when the auxiliary tank 54 is in an upward posture, the predetermined information becomes invisible or difficult to see, thereby suppressing the confusion of the operator due to the display of the predetermined information and preventing the medal collection work from being hindered. can. As the predetermined information, for example, information explaining a releasing method for releasing the engaged state (for example, "Slide and take out!") can be considered.

The display portion (predetermined display) may be provided not only on the bottom plate portion 501a but also on another wall portion such as the front wall portion 501b. In this case, the predetermined information may be reversed when the auxiliary tank 54 is in an upward posture. Accordingly, when the auxiliary tank 54 is in the upward posture, the predetermined information is difficult to visually recognize (difficult to identify the contents), and when it is in the downward posture, it is easy to visually recognize the predetermined information (easy to identify the contents). Further, the predetermined information may not be directly visible, and may be indirectly visible such as through a mirror or the like.

(49) In the first and third embodiments, the bottom lids 514 and 606 are arranged inside the tank bodies 501 and 601. may be placed. At that time, it is preferable to provide a restricting means for restricting the bottom lids from rotating to the outside of the tank main bodies 501 and 601 beyond the closed position. As a result, even if the bottom covers do not come into contact with the surfaces of the bottom plate portions 501a and 602, it is possible to prevent the auxiliary tank 54 from bottoming out.

(50) In the third and fourth embodiments, similarly to the first embodiment, the bottom lids 606, 704, 802 are tilted at a predetermined rotation angle between the closed position and the open position. It may be configured such that the connection between the bottom lids 606, 704, 802 and the tank main bodies 601, 701 can be released by moving them in a predetermined removal direction. Conversely, in the first embodiment, the bottom lid 514 may be configured to be non-removable.

(51) In the first embodiment, the bottom lid 514 may be engaged with the tank body 501 at the closed position. In this case, the bottom lid 514 can be held in the closed position, and the slot machine 10 can be transported with the lower opening 512 closed.

(52) In the above-described first embodiment, the rotation restricting means (protruding portion 535) is provided on the lid body 521 of the bottom lid 514. It may be provided on the right side wall portion 501d.

(53) In the first embodiment, the tank main body 501 and the bottom lid 514 are configured to be transparent, but they may be configured to be opaque. With such a configuration, when an attempt is made to visually check the internal structure of the slot machine 10 from the outside of the slot machine 10 through the medal discharge hole 15, the tank main body 501 and the bottom lid 514 can block this. In this case, both the tank main body 501 and the bottom lid 514 do not necessarily have to be made opaque, and only one of them may be made opaque, or part of them may be made opaque. This also applies to other embodiments.

(54) In the third embodiment, the bottom cover 606 is biased toward the closed position by the coil spring 617 (elastic member). may be However, for example, when the bottom lid 606 is opened through the medal discharge hole 15 during transportation of the slot machine 10, the bottom lid 606 is automatically returned to the closed position to hinder fraudulent activity. It is preferable to use the configuration of the embodiment or the configuration using both the elastic member and the magnetic force. Also in the fourth embodiment, instead of or in addition to the coil springs 729 and 839, a magnetic force (repulsive force) may be used to urge the engagement projection 723 and the bottom lid 802. FIG.

(55) In the first modification of the third embodiment, the back surface 606b of the bottom lid 606 is inclined, and the tokens are guided to the tip of the rotation of the bottom lid 606 by the inclination. An air blowing device for blowing air onto the medals on the lid 606 or the bottom plate portion 602 is provided in the housing 11 or in the tank body 601, and the medals are guided by a configuration other than an inclination, such as guiding the medals by air from the device. Alternatively, the guide means may be provided at a location other than the bottom lid 606 . However, in order to simplify the configuration and improve the guidance accuracy, the configuration of the above embodiment is preferable.

(56) In the modification 2 of the third embodiment, the rear projection 621 is configured to extend from one end to the other end of the rear surface 606b along the rotation axis of the bottom lid 606. Alternatively, a plurality of rear projections may be intermittently arranged. In the latter case, it is preferable to make the interval between the rear surface protrusions smaller than the medal diameter. As a result, medals from the storage tank 52 are prevented from slipping through the rear surface projecting portion and the damming efficiency is reduced.

(57) In the modification 2 of the third embodiment, the medals from the storage tank 52 are blocked on the back surface 606b of the bottom lid 606. It is good also as a structure which guides to 606b.

(58) In the fourth embodiment, the installation position of the auxiliary tank 54 (the position where the bottom side through-hole 720 and the engaging portion 721 are engaged, or the position where the lower sensor portion 801 and the engaging rising portion 836 are engaged). The position where the front door 12 can be closed (the position where the front door 12 does not interfere with the auxiliary tank 54 even if the front door 12 is closed) was set to a position behind the front door 12, but the front door 12 can be closed. It may be set to a position just as low as In this case, the space between the rear surface of the front door 12 and the auxiliary tank 54 can be eliminated or narrowed. behavior can be suppressed.

(59) In the above-described fourth embodiment, when the auxiliary tank 54 is slid toward the installation position, the engaging inclined portion 745 and the arcuate portion 746 that guide the engaging projection 723 toward the lowered position are assisted. Although it is configured to be provided on the tank 54 side, instead of or in addition to this, for example, a configuration that is provided on the auxiliary tank 54 side, such as providing an inclination at the contact portion of the head 725 of the engaging projection 723 with the auxiliary tank 54 good too. In this case, the inclination of the auxiliary tank 54 side should be opposite to the inclination of the engaging inclined portion 745 .

(60) In the fourth embodiment, the diameter De of the pushing projection 733 may be made larger than the opening diameter of the accommodating portion 722 (the diameter of the first hole portion 726). In this case, the push-in projection 733 is prevented from entering the accommodation portion 722 when it descends due to the weight of the medal, and the height dimension of the push-in projection 733 is set to the depth dimension of the bottom side through-hole 720 (when descending). The stroke of the pushing projection 733) can be made sufficiently large. As a result, even if the height dimension of the push-in projection 733 is reduced due to wear or the like, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience of being unable to push out the engaging projection 723 from the bottom-side through hole 720 .

(61) In the fourth embodiment, the peripheral wall surface 743 of the bottom through-hole 720 on the side opposite to the release inclined portion 741 stands upright and is substantially parallel to the peripheral surface of the head portion 725. However, the peripheral wall surface 743 may be inclined in a direction opposite to that of the release inclined portion 741 . In this case, the inclination angles of both inclinations may be the same or different.

In the latter case, the inclination angle of the releasing inclined portion 741 (the angle between the upper surface of the head portion 725 and the releasing inclined portion 741) should be smaller than the inclination of the peripheral wall surface 743. That is, when the auxiliary tank 54 is taken out (pulled out), the auxiliary tank 54 and the engaging projection 723 come into contact with each other at the initial stage, and when the auxiliary tank 54 is installed (pushed in), it engages with the auxiliary tank 54 at the final stage. It is assumed that a stronger load is applied to the engaging protrusion 723 in the take-out operation where the protrusion 723 abuts. In this case, by making the releasing inclined portion 741 relatively flat, damage to the engaging projection 723 can be suppressed. On the other hand, as for the inclination of the peripheral wall surface 743, by increasing the angle of inclination and making it relatively upright, the head 725 and the peripheral wall surface 743 are less likely to be caught on the back side of the auxiliary tank 54. It is possible to easily regulate the progression to

(62) In the above-described fourth embodiment, the release inclined portion 741 is provided on the peripheral wall surface of the bottom-side through-hole 720 to reduce the catching of the auxiliary tank 54 when the auxiliary tank 54 is taken out. Alternatively, the head 725 of the engaging projection 723 may be provided on the auxiliary tank 54 side, such as by providing an inclination at the contact portion of the auxiliary tank 54 . In this case, the inclination on the side of the auxiliary tank 54 is preferably opposite to that of the release inclination portion 741 . Also, as in (61) above, in the case of providing an inclination to reduce catching when the auxiliary tank 54 is pushed in, instead of or in addition to the peripheral wall surface of the bottom-side through-hole 720, the head of the engaging projection 723 725 may be provided.

(63) In the fourth embodiment, both the upper sensor rod 16a and the lower sensor rod 16b are used to restrict the floating of the auxiliary tank 54, but only one of them may be used. Also in the first and second embodiments, at least one of the upper sensor rod 16a and the lower sensor rod 16b may be used to restrict the auxiliary tank 54 from floating.

(64) In the fourth embodiment, the widths of the upper sensor insertion hole 731a and the lower sensor insertion hole 731b correspond to the widths of the upper sensor rod 16a and the lower sensor rod 16b (substantially the same size), A configuration may be adopted in which the movement of the auxiliary tank 54 in the horizontal direction is restricted by the upper sensor rod 16a and the lower sensor rod 16b. This also applies to other embodiments. In this case, it is not necessary to match the widths of both the upper sensor insertion hole 731a and the lower sensor insertion hole 731b, and only one of them may be matched.

(65) In the fourth embodiment, the entire bottom lid 704 is transparent, but when the bottom lid 704 is positioned at the open position, the bottom lid 704 is located above the upper end of the tank body 701. A portion or only a part of the portion may be transparent. Even with such a configuration, the inside of the housing 11 and the tank body 701 can be viewed through the bottom lid 704, and a part of the bottom lid 704 protrudes upward, which tends to increase the height dimension of the auxiliary tank 54. Despite this configuration, it is possible to suppress adverse effects on the visibility of the inside of the housing 11 and the inside of the tank body 701 . The entire bottom lid 704 is transparent, and the front wall portion 701b of the tank body 701 (the wall portion overlapping the bottom lid 704 from the front when the bottom lid 704 is in the open position) is transparent. With such a configuration, the inside of the tank body 701 can be seen through both the front wall portion 701b and the bottom lid 704, and inspection and confirmation work such as whether medals are clogged in the tank body 701 can be facilitated.

(66) In the fourth embodiment, the bottom lid 704 is configured to abut on the guide plate 52a. It is good also as a structure made to contact|abut. This is the same for each modification according to the fourth embodiment.

(67) In the fourth embodiment, the lid main body 706 of the bottom lid 704 is a movable bottom plate so as to include a movable member that receives substantially all the weight of medals in the auxiliary tank 54. However, for example, the bottom plate A movable member may be provided on a part of the portion 701a or a peripheral wall portion such as the front wall portion 701b so that the movable member receives part of the weight of the medal. In short, it is sufficient if the engagement can be released according to the increase in medal weight, and it is arbitrary how much of the medal weight the movable member receives. This also applies to Modification 3 of the fourth embodiment.

(68) In the fourth embodiment, the bottom lid 704 is provided with both the lid main body 706 as the movable bottom plate and the engaging rising portion 836 as the first engaging portion, and they are integrally formed. However, the movable bottom plate and the first engaging portion may be separated from each other, and the two may be interlocked via a transmission mechanism that transmits the displacement (power) of the movable bottom plate to the first engaging portion. This also applies to Modification 3 of the fourth embodiment.

(69) In the above-described fourth embodiment, a cushioning member (elastic member) such as rubber or sponge may be arranged at the contact portion between the bottom cover 704 and the guide plate 52a. As a result, damage to the bottom lid 704 and the guide plate 52a due to impact when the bottom lid 704 collides with the guide plate 52a is suppressed. In this case, the interference member may be arranged on the bottom lid 704 side or may be arranged on the guide plate 52a side. This is the same for each modification according to the fourth embodiment.

(70) In the modified example 2 of the fourth embodiment, when the slot machine 10 is not connected to the external power source, the bottom side through-hole 720 and the engaging portion 721 are engaged (the engaging projection 723 is However, even if the slot machine 10 is connected to an external power supply, if the slot machine 10 is not powered on (if the power switch 71 is not turned on), the bottom side through hole It is good also as a structure which 720 and the engaging part 721 engage.

Also, when releasing the engagement, even if the slot machine 10 is connected to the external power supply, it may not be released unless the slot machine 10 is powered on, or the slot machine 10 is connected to the external power supply. It may be configured so that it is not released if it is not.

It should be noted that the engagement may be released even if the slot machine 10 is not connected to the external power source, such as by mechanically interlocking with the ON operation of the power switch 71 to release the engagement. Considering that the power switch 71 may switch to the ON side when the slot machines collide with each other during transport, it is preferable to make the connection to an external power source a condition.

(71) In the modification 2 of the fourth embodiment, the bottom side through-hole 720 and the engaging portion 721 are disengaged regardless of the detection result of the upper sensor rod 16a and the lower sensor rod 16b. may be That is, the engagement may be released under the condition that the slot machine 10 is connected to an external power source, or that the power is turned on while being connected to the external power source.

(72) In the modification 3 of the fourth embodiment, the lid sensor insertion hole 837 is provided in the engaging upright portion 836, and the lower sensor portion 801 is inserted into the lid sensor insertion hole 837. It is also possible to omit the portion above the lower end portion of the lid sensor insertion hole 837 in the engaging upright portion 836 so that the lid sensor insertion hole 837 is not provided. That is, the height of the engaging upright portion 836 is set to a position corresponding to the height position of the lower end portion of the cover sensor insertion hole 837, and the upper end portion of the engaging upright portion 836 is positioned between the bent portion 822 and the rear wall portion. The auxiliary tank 54 and the lower sensor section 801 may be engaged with each other by moving in and out of the space formed between the tank 701c.

(73) In the modification 3 of the fourth embodiment, when the engaging upright portion 836 and the lower sensor portion 801 are engaged with each other, the lower end portion of the lower sensor insertion hole 831 in the engaging upright portion 836 is Although a gap is formed between the lower sensor part 801 and the extension part 821 of the lower sensor part 801 so that the two remain close to each other, they may be brought into contact with each other.

(74) In the fourth embodiment and its modification 3, these configurations are not necessarily alternatives, and both configurations may be combined.

(75) In each of the above embodiments, the auxiliary tank 54 can be disengaged by performing a specific operation using the operating means provided in the slot machine 10 so that the employee of the gaming hall can release the engagement at any time. A configuration in which the engagement is released may be adopted. When taking out the auxiliary tank 54 from the slot machine 10, it is necessary to open the front door 12 as a preliminary operation.

Specifically, an unlocking operation for the locking device 20 (key cylinder 21) (for example, an operation for rotating a key inserted into the key cylinder 21 to the left) can be considered. For example, after the engagement portion on the housing 11 side is made movable so as to be switchable between the engagement state and the non-engagement state (for example, the configuration of Modified Example 2 of the fourth embodiment), A link mechanism that transmits the movement of the locking device 20 to the engaging portion is provided between the engaging portion and the locking device 20, or a configuration is provided that detects an unlocking operation and controls the driving of the engaging portion, It is preferable that the engaging portion is switched from the engaged state to the disengaged state based on the unlocking operation being performed.

In the above configuration, disengagement by the specific operation may be provided together with the disengagement configuration in each embodiment, or may be provided in place of those configurations. In the latter case, when an operation different from the specific operation (for example, an operation to close the front door 12) is performed using the operation means or an operation means different from it, the movable type may be configured to switch from the non-engaged state to the engaged state.

(76) Although a specific example of the slot machine 10 has been shown, it may be applied to a gaming machine in which a slot machine and a pachinko machine are combined. That is, the slot machine may be a game machine having a ball-inserting and ball-paying function like a pachinko machine instead of the medal-inserting and medal-paying functions. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the balls can be treated as game value in the game hall. It is possible to solve the problems such as the burden on the equipment due to the separate handling of the medals and the balls and the restrictions on the installation location of the game machine.

<Invention groups extracted from the above embodiments>
Characteristic configurations extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be described below, showing effects and the like as necessary. In the following description, for ease of understanding, configurations corresponding to the above-described embodiments are appropriately shown in parentheses or the like, but the specific configurations shown in parentheses or the like are not limited.

The inventions shown in the following characteristic groups A to H are known as "a pachinko machine, a slot machine, etc., as types of gaming machines. In these gaming machines, an internal A configuration is known in which a lottery is held and a privilege is given to a player according to the result of the internal lottery. is operated, an internal lottery is carried out and the rotation of the reels is started, and if the stop button is operated during rotation of the reels, the rotation of the reels is stopped. corresponds to the result of the internal lottery, a privilege corresponding to the result is given (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-295707). In gaming machines, it is necessary to improve the enjoyment of games, and in this respect there is still room for improvement."

<Characteristic group A>
Feature A1. a plurality of revolving bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction;
a display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern for each of the surrounding bodies;
Receiving means for receiving game media or virtual game media (medal insertion slot 45, credit insertion switches 56 to 58, 69);
A bet amount setting means (steps S204 and S205 by the main control device 101) for setting a game bet number up to a predetermined number as an upper limit after grasping that the game medium or virtual game medium has been received by the receiving means. function to perform processing) and
a starting operation means (start lever 41) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when operated;
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the circulation of each of the circulation bodies when operated;
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the starting operation means is operated, and stopping the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the stop operation means is operated function to perform processing) and
When the lottery result of the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at a valid position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized through the display unit, Privilege giving means (function for executing payout determination processing by the main control device 101) for giving the player a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result;
A gaming machine comprising
As the bet amount set by the bet amount setting means, a first bet number (3) and a second bet number (1 bet, 2 bets) different from the first bet amount are provided. cage,
Valid position setting means for setting the valid position according to the bet number set by the bet number setting means (function for executing valid line setting processing by the main controller 101);
A first specified result (for example, a watermelon combination as a 26th minor combination, replay) is provided as a result that can be won in the lottery by the lottery unit when the first bet amount is set by the bet amount setting means. cage,
When the second bet amount is set by the bet amount setting means, a second specified result different from the first specified result (for example, a special win as a 26P minor winning combination) is a possible result of winning the lottery by the lottery means. Watermelon role, special replay) is provided,
The privilege granting means is
The lottery result by the lottery means is the first specified result, and the first specified pattern is placed at the first valid position (lower right line L4) set by the valid position setting means in correspondence with the first bet number. When the combination stops, a first privilege corresponding to the first specified result (for example, 5 medals when winning a watermelon, replay) can be given,
The lottery result by the lottery means is the second specified result, and the first specified pattern is placed on the second valid position (bending line L6) set by the valid position setting means in correspondence with the second bet number. When a second specific pattern combination different from the combination stops, a second privilege corresponding to the second specific result (for example, one medal when winning a special watermelon, replay) can be given,
The circular body has a position that is not set as a valid position by the valid position setting means when the second specific symbol combination is stopped at the second valid position and the second betting number is reached. The pattern is attached so that the first specific pattern combination stops at a specific position set as the first valid position by the valid position setting means when the number of bets is one. game machine.

According to the above configuration, when a game is played with the first number of bets, if the first specified result is won, the first specified pattern combination stops at the first valid position and the first privilege is awarded. When a game is played with a second bet number different from one bet number, if a second specified result different from the first specified result is won, the first specified pattern combination stops at the first valid position, The second specific symbol combination stops at the second valid position and the second privilege is awarded. Therefore, it is possible to obtain different benefits with the same stop number when playing the game with the first bet number and when playing the game with the second bet number. In other words, it is possible to realize a game in which different benefits are given by playing games with different numbers of bets even if the winning numbers are apparently the same. By doing so, it is possible to diversify the game.

Feature A2. The privilege granting means is capable of paying out a specific number of game media equal to or greater than the first bet number as the first privilege or causing a replay to be performed, and the second privilege as the second privilege. The gaming machine according to feature A1, characterized in that it is possible to pay out the same number of game media as the number of bets or to execute a replay.

According to the above configuration, even if the game played with the first bet number and the game played with the second bet number have the same stop result in appearance, the game medium played with the first bet number is equal to or greater than the bet number. On the other hand, in a game played with the second bet amount, the same number of game media as the bet amount is paid out or replayed, and an increase in the amount of game media cannot be expected. In this way, by providing a clear difference in the degree of advantage for the player between the game with the first bet amount and the game with the second bet amount, the outcome of the game with both bet amounts can be made common to improve the game performance. Even if it resembles the game machine, it is possible to have completely different game characteristics, and it is possible to secure the significance of incorporating a plurality of game characteristics into one game machine.

Feature A3. A plurality of types of the second specific result are provided as a result that can be won in the lottery by the lottery means when the second bet amount is set by the bet amount setting means,
In a predetermined state (normal game state), when the second bet amount is set and a lottery is performed by the lottery means, one of the plurality of types of the second specified results is won. The gaming machine according to feature A2, characterized in that it is set as follows.

According to the above configuration, when the second specific win is established, the same number of game media as the second bet amount is paid out or replay is awarded. If either of the second specified results or the replay combination is won in the game played, the game played with the second bet amount in the predetermined state is configured so that the game medium does not increase or decrease. As a result, the game played with the second number of bets can be used, for example, as a practice game, or used as an effect in the game played with the first number of bets. Therefore, by utilizing the commonality with the game with the first number of bets, it is possible to realize novel game characteristics in which the number of game media does not increase or decrease with the second number of bets.

Feature A4. As the first identification result, a transition result (for example, a third replay as the first promotion replays 1 to 4) in which the probability of winning a predetermined combination (replay) before and after the transition is different is provided,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the transition result and the first specific pattern combination for transition as the first specific pattern combination stops at the first valid position, the game state is changed to a predetermined state (RT state) (function for executing RT state processing by main controller 101),
As the second specified result, there is provided a second payout result in which the same number of game media as the second bet amount are paid out as the second benefit,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the second payout result and the second specific pattern combination for payout as the second specific pattern combination stops at the second valid position, the second bet amount is a configuration in which the same number of game media is paid out,
Said pattern is attached to said circular body so that said first specific pattern combination for transition stops at said specific position when said second specific pattern combination for payout stops at said second effective position. The game machine according to any one of features A1 to A3, characterized in that

According to the above configuration, in the game with the first number of bets, the transition results in winning and the game state is shifted to the predetermined state is reproduced in the game with the second number of bets by paying out the same number of game media as the second number of bets. be able to. By doing so, for example, it is possible to simulate the transition of the gaming state to a predetermined state in the game with the first number of bets in the game with the second number of bets without increasing or decreasing the game medium. becomes.

In addition, although the configuration is such that the "payout of the same number of game media as the second bet amount" is performed as the "second privilege" corresponding to the "second payout result", the "second privilege" is "a predetermined number of game media It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which "payout of" is performed. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to provide a game medium while giving a game medium to experience the transition of the game state to a predetermined state in the game with the first number of bets in the game with the second number of bets. becomes possible.

Feature A5. Execution of a first predetermined effect capable of executing a predetermined effect (e.g., attack mode start effect) by predetermined notification means (e.g., auxiliary display section 65) based on shifting the game state to the predetermined state by the transition means. Means (a function of performing processing for executing an attack mode start effect by the display control device 81);
The lottery result of the lottery means performed in a situation where the second bet amount is set by the bet amount setting means is the second payout result, and the first specific pattern combination for transition is placed at the specific position. When the second specific pattern combination for payout stops at the second effective position, a second predetermined effect executing means ( a function of performing processing for executing a display attack mode start effect in the display control device 81;
The gaming machine according to feature A4, characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, when the game state is shifted to the predetermined state at the second bet amount, a predetermined effect that is common to the effect is generated, making it possible to make the experience more realistic. becomes. By doing so, the practice game with the second number of bets can be brought closer to the game with the first number of bets.

Feature A6. Identification means (stamp 65a, identification role A gaming machine according to feature A5, characterized in that it comprises an object 65b).

According to the above configuration, whether the game is played with the first number of bets or the game with the second number of bets is played while making the game similar to the first number of bets and the game with the second number of bets. can be identified by looking at the predetermined effect. By doing so, it is possible to make the outcome of the revolving body common, and to further standardize the performance, for example, when the manager of the game hall confirms the status of the ball being released, it is possible to clearly distinguish between the two games. can be distinguished.

Feature A7. The gaming machine according to any one of features A4 to A6, wherein the predetermined state is a state in which the probability of winning a replaying combination as the predetermined combination changes before and after transition.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to experience a transition to a so-called RT state as the transition to the predetermined state. In addition to the RT state in which the replay probability changes, the bonus state in which the small win probability changes is also assumed as the state in which the game state shifts and the probability of the lottery result changes. It can be said that the specific patterns such as patterns can shift together, and it is visually easy to understand, and it can be said that the players are familiar with the fact that the specific patterns such as the seven patterns shift to the bonus state together. On the other hand, the transition to the RT state is less familiar than the transition to the bonus state. Therefore, as in the configuration of the feature A4, by applying the game property of experiencing the transition of the game state with the second number of bets to the transition of the RT state, such an incomprehensible transition of the game state can be experienced. It is possible to make a great use of it to make the player fully understand the game property.

Feature A8. The lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result of winning the predetermined combination (replay) as the first specified result, and the first specified combination of symbols is placed at the first valid position. When one specific pattern combination is stopped, a predetermined privilege (replay) corresponding to the predetermined result is granted as the first privilege,
The lottery result by the lottery means is the result for the second predetermined combination (for example, the one-off winning combination) as the second payout result, and the predetermined combination as the second specific pattern combination is placed at the second effective position. When a second specific symbol combination for a role (for example, a symbol combination that establishes a first minor winning combination) is stopped, the same number of game media as the second bet number is paid out,
The circular body has the symbols such that when the second specified symbol combination for the predetermined role stops at the second effective position, the first specified symbol combination for the specified role stops at the specified position. is attached,
A first means (for example, main When the control device 101 wins a single winning combination, the function of executing the processing for notifying the pressing order for establishing the first minor winning combination) and the second specific pattern combination for the predetermined combination. A second means for not stopping at the second effective position (for example, a function of executing a process for notifying the pressing order to establish a winning small winning combination when a single winning combination is won by the main controller 101) ), the game machine according to any one of features A4 to A7.

According to the above configuration, in the game with the second bet amount, the transition result wins, the probability of winning the predetermined combination changes, and the probability of receiving the predetermined privilege changes in the game with the second bet amount. It is possible to reproduce by stopping the second specific pattern combination for the predetermined role when the result of the second predetermined role is won, or by not stopping the second specific pattern combination for the predetermined role. . Moreover, if the second specific combination of symbols for the second predetermined combination stops, the same number of game media as the second bet number will be paid out. It is possible to experience it without being accompanied.

Feature A9. When the first bet amount is set by the bet amount setting means, as a result of being able to win the lottery by the lottery means, a payout combination (e.g., bell) is awarded as a privilege to pay out game media before and after the transition. A first specific transition outcome (first BB, second BB) with different probabilities is provided,
As a result of winning the lottery by the lottery means when the second bet amount is set by the bet amount setting means, winning of a payout combination (e.g., Bell) in which payout of game media is given as a privilege before and after the transition. A second specific transition result (first PBB, second PBB) with different probabilities is provided,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the first specific transition result and the first specific pattern combination for specific transition as the first specific pattern combination stops at the first valid position, the game state is changed. It is possible to shift to a first specific state (bonus state), the lottery result by the lottery means is the second specific transition result, and the second specific pattern combination is specified at the second effective position. Specific transition means (function for executing bonus state processing by main controller 101) capable of transitioning the game state to a second specific state (special bonus state) when the second specific pattern combination for transition stops with
The circular body is provided with the pattern such that when the second specific pattern combination for specific transition stops at the second effective position, the first specific pattern combination for specific transition stops at the specific position. The game machine according to any one of features A1 to A8, characterized in that:

According to the above configuration, the first specific transition result and the second specific transition result as so-called bonuses are provided in both games with the first bet amount and the second bet amount, respectively. Moreover, when the second specific transition result is won in the game with the second bet amount, and the second specific pattern combination for the specific transition which wins the second specific transition result stops at the second effective position, the first specific transition is performed. As a result, the first specific symbol combination for the specific transition, which is the winning prize, stops at the specific position. By doing so, it is possible to make the bonus winning in the game with the second bet amount look as if the game with the first bet amount also wins a bonus, and the game with the second bet amount is also possible. The playability of the game can be improved.

Feature A10. When the second bet amount is set by the bet amount setting means, after the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the second specific transition result, a second specific state is shifted based on the second specific transition result. The gaming machine according to feature A9, characterized in that, until the end of the game, a number of game media exceeding the bet amount set by the bet amount setting means is not paid out.

According to the above configuration, even if the game with the second number of bets wins as a result of the second specific transition and enters the second specific state, an increase in game media cannot be expected. By doing so, the game with the first bet amount and the game with the second bet amount can be differentiated, and the impression that the game with the second bet amount is a practice game can be enhanced.

In the above configuration, "when the first bet amount is set by the bet amount setting means, after the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the first specific transition result, the first specific transition result In the game until the first specific state that shifted based on the above is completed, game media are paid out in an amount exceeding the bet amount set by the bet amount setting means. The difference between the 1 specific state and the 2nd specific state can be made clear.

If the relationship between the "first bet" and the "second bet" is such that "the second bet is smaller than the first bet", then the 2. It is possible for the player to understand the specific state as a privilege according to the number of bets.

Feature A11. A first ending means (set in step S613 by the main controller 101) for ending the first specific state based on the number of game media paid out during the first specific state reaching the first predetermined number A function of executing affirmative determination processing in step S1504 based on the number of remaining payouts becoming 0);
Second termination means (main controller) for terminating the second specific state when the number of game media paid out during the second specific state reaches a second predetermined number smaller than the first predetermined number 101, based on the fact that the number of remaining payouts set in step S614 has become 0, affirmative determination processing is executed in step S1504);
The gaming machine according to feature A10, characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, the second specific state ends with a smaller number of payouts than the first specific state. By doing so, it is possible to make the second specific state conform to the practice game with the second bet number, and the second specific state is substantially the game medium as in feature A9. Even if the increase in is not expected, it is possible to end the second specific state earlier.

In the above configuration, for example, "when the first specific transition result is won or after the transition to the first specific state, until the first specific state ends, the lottery by the lottery means with the second bet number As a result, the second specific transition result is not won, and if the second specific transition result is won or after the transition to the second specific state, the first bet number is kept until the second specific state ends. If the lottery result of the lottery means does not result in winning the first specific transition result, the significance of ending the second specific state earlier is increased. That is, in such a configuration, even if the number of bets is changed to the number of bets as the first number, winning is not achieved as a result of the first specific transition until the second specific state is terminated. First, it is necessary to end the second specific state in order to play the game with the first bet amount.

Feature A12. During the second specific state, as a result of winning the lottery by the lottery means in a situation where the second bet amount is set by the bet amount setting means, the same amount of game media as the second bet amount is paid out. is provided as the privilege, and the lottery by the lottery means in a situation where the specific bet number (3, first bet number) larger than the second bet number is set by the bet number setting means The gaming machine according to feature A11, characterized in that, as a result of winning at , the payout of the same number of game media as the specific number of bets is provided as the privilege.

According to the above configuration, in the configuration in which the second specific state ends when the second predetermined number of payouts is paid out, the game with the specific bet amount is played earlier than the game with the second bet amount. , the second specific state can be ended. In particular, by making it possible to change whether or not to end early in the portion of the number of bets that can be determined by the player's operation, the game can be played when the player wants to fully enjoy or experience the second specific state. As a result, it is possible to play a game while respecting the will of the player.

Feature A13. A predetermined end result (PCB, SB) is provided as a result of winning the lottery by the lottery means during the second specific state,
The gaming machine according to feature A11 or feature A12, wherein the second end means is capable of ending the second specific state based on winning as a result of the predetermined end.

According to the above configuration, the second specific state ends even if the predetermined end result wins. Therefore, depending on the winning probability of the predetermined end result, the second specific state ends earlier than the second predetermined number is reached. can. As a result, it is possible to eliminate the inconvenience caused by the long continuation of the second specific state in which an increase in the number of game media cannot be expected.

Regarding the ``predetermined end result'', more specifically, ``the winning probability of the predetermined combination changes before and after the transition, and the game state after the transition when the number of game media paid out after the transition reaches a predetermined number. may be terminated as a result of In addition, regarding the "predetermined end result", "the winning probability of the predetermined combination changes before and after the transition, and the number of payouts of game media after the transition reaches a predetermined number, or the transition occurs after the predetermined number of games have been executed. It may be "result that the later game state is terminated".

Further, when the above configuration is applied to feature A12, it may be that "the predetermined end result is set as a result of winning in the lottery by the lottery means in the situation where the specific number of bets is set". . It can be understood that the player who sets the specific bet amount by the bet amount setting means has the intention of ending the second specific state early, and in this case, winning the predetermined end result. With such a configuration, it is possible to end the game early according to the player's will, and avoid the inconvenience of ending the game early even though the player does not want to end the game early.

Feature A14. The drive control means stops the rotation of the corresponding orbiting body within a predetermined period based on the operation of each of the stop operation means, and when the stop operation means is operated at a predetermined timing, The winning pattern corresponding to the result of winning is controlled to stop at the effective position,
If the lottery result by the lottery means is the second specific transition result, and the pattern corresponding to the second specific transition result is not stopped and the second specific pattern combination for the specific transition is not formed, the second specific pattern combination is not formed. 2 Reservation storage means for reserving and storing specific transition result winning (processing for setting bonus winning flag in step S306 in main control unit 101, function for executing negative determination processing in step S609),
In the lottery by the lottery means performed under the condition that the winning of the second specific transition result is reserved and stored in the reserved storage means, it is set so that there is a non-winning result that does not win the second specific result. The gaming machine according to any one of features A9 to A13, characterized by:

According to the above configuration, in a situation where the second specific transition result is reserved and stored, it is possible to target and stop the pattern corresponding to the second specific transition result. That is, even if an attempt is made to win the second specific transition result that is reserved and stored, if the second specific result is won, the second specific transition result winning is established in the control that prioritizes the second specific result winning. It becomes impossible to shift to the second specific state. Therefore, with the configuration described above, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of not being able to shift to the second specific state.

Feature A15. The reserved storage means stores that the lottery result by the lottery means is the first specific transition result, the pattern corresponding to the first specific transition result is not stopped, and the first specific pattern combination for specific transition is not formed. The gaming machine according to feature A14, wherein it is possible to reserve and store the winning of the first specific transition result even in the case of the first specific transition result.

In the situation where the first bet number is playing a game that may be different from the above-mentioned trial version game with little increase or decrease in game media, if the first specific transition result is obtained and it is stored in a reserved memory, depending on the player, , it is also conceivable to implement the reserved and stored situation at the second bet number instead of the first bet number. In that respect, according to the above configuration, it is possible to win the first specific transition result with the first bet number and win with the second bet number. It is possible to improve the degree of freedom of the game that establishes a prize.

Feature A16. The gaming machine according to any one of features A9 to A15, wherein the second bet amount is set to be smaller than the first bet amount.

According to the above configuration, there is a clear difference between the first specific state that is shifted with the first bet amount and the second specific state that is shifted with the smaller second bet number. In particular, in the feature A14, it becomes easier to win the first specific transition result with the second bet number in a situation where the first specific transition result is reserved and stored.

Feature A17. When the second specific transition result is won and the second specific pattern combination for the specific transition stops at the valid position, the transition means transitions to the second specific state, while game media are paid out during the transition. is not performed, and
In the second specific state, in the predetermined game in the second specific state, the number of game media for the second bet is added to the number of game media for the bet amount set by the bet amount setting means. The gaming machine according to any one of features A9 to A16, wherein a payout is set as one end condition of the second specific state.

According to the above configuration, game media are not paid out when the second specific transition result is won, so game media may be lost when transitioning to the second specific state. Therefore, assuming that the end condition of the second specific state is increased by the number of game media (second bet number) required when the result of the second specific transition wins, the total from the transition to the end of the second specific state is as follows. It is possible to reduce the increase and decrease of game media. As a result, the game with the second bet amount has a game property that reduces the increase or decrease of the game medium even if the transition to the second specific state occurs, and there is an advantage that the stop result in the game with the first bet amount is shared. can be enjoyed to the fullest.

Feature A18. In a game performed in a situation where the first bet amount is set by the bet amount setting means, a first series continuously performed across each game in a predetermined effect means (for example, the auxiliary display section 65) The performance is set,
In a game performed in a situation where the second bet amount is set by the bet amount setting means, the predetermined effect means sets a second continuous effect to be continuously performed across each game. ,
A first consecutive number storage means (continuous effect counter) for grasping the number of consecutive first continuous effects, and a second consecutive number storage means (continuous effect counter for display) for grasping the consecutive number of the second continuous effects. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A17, characterized by having the respective features.

According to the above configuration, since the number of consecutive first continuous effects and the number of consecutive second continuous effects are grasped separately, for example, during the execution of the first continuous effect, the game with the first bet amount Even if the game is switched from to the game with the second bet number or vice versa, the number of consecutive effects of each continuous effect can be stored, and when the game is returned to the game with the original bet number, continuous It is possible to restart from the middle of the production.

Feature A19. A first effect mode in which an effect based on the first number of bets is performed as an effect by a predetermined effect means (for example, the auxiliary display section 65) based on the establishment of a predetermined switching condition (operation of the second effect switch 67). (Normal game mode) and a second effect mode (specific mode) in which the effect based on the second bet amount is performed, a switching means (a function of executing a specific mode switching process by the display control device 81) is provided. ,
Any one of features A1 to A18, wherein the bet amount setting means can set the first bet amount and the second bet amount without switching the effect mode by the switching means. The gaming machine described in .

According to the above configuration, it is possible to switch the performance mode and enjoy the game with the first bet number and the game with the second bet number in the respective performance modes. On the other hand, for example, in a game in which a bonus is awarded when a so-called bonus is won, a bet number different from the bet number when the bonus is won may be set. If it is put away, the player may feel annoyed. Therefore, by enabling the setting of each bet amount by the bet amount setting means without going through the switching of the production mode, it is possible to fully enjoy the game with each bet amount without feeling the above-mentioned troublesomeness. can entertain.

Feature A20. Based on the transition of the game state to a predetermined game state (advantageous section, during bonus), it is not possible to switch the performance mode by the switching means or it is not a state in which switching of the performance mode by the switching means should be performed. The gaming machine according to feature A19, characterized by comprising regulation means for executing regulation processing for notifying (a function for executing processing such as steps S4603, S4604, and S4703 to S4705 by the main control device 101).

According to the above configuration, there is a possibility that switching between the game with the first bet amount and the game with the second bet amount should not be performed depending on the gaming state. For example, in an advantageous state managed by the number of games, if the game is completed with another number of bets, the number of games in that advantageous state may be eroded. If the bonus is won, there is a possibility that the bonus lottery will not be performed even if the game with the other bet amount is played. Therefore, by providing a means for disabling the switching as described above, it is possible to avoid the event that the player loses money due to the switching.

Feature A21. The gaming machine according to feature A20, wherein the predetermined gaming state in which the regulation processing is to be performed by the regulation means is a state advantageous to the player.

According to the above configuration, the effect of feature A20 can be favorably exhibited.

<Characteristic group B>
Feature B1. a plurality of revolving bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction;
a display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern for each of the surrounding bodies;
Receiving means for receiving game media or virtual game media (medal insertion slot 45, credit insertion switches 56 to 58, 69);
A bet amount setting means (steps S204 and S205 by the main control device 101) for setting a game bet number up to a predetermined number as an upper limit after grasping that the game medium or virtual game medium has been received by the receiving means. function to perform processing) and
a starting operation means (start lever 41) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when operated;
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the circulation of each of the circulation bodies when operated;
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the starting operation means is operated, and stopping the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the stop operation means is operated function to perform processing) and
When the lottery result of the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at a valid position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized through the display unit, Privilege giving means (function for executing payout determination processing by the main control device 101) for giving the player a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result;
The result of the lottery by the lottery means is a transition result corresponding to transition to a specific state (bonus state) in which the winning probability of each role in the lottery by the lottery means can change compared to before the transition (for example, 1st BB, 1st BB, etc.). 2BB, first PBB, second PBB), and transition means (main a function of executing bonus state processing by the control device 101);
A gaming machine comprising
When the number of bets set by the number-of-bets setting means is the first number of bets (three), as a result of the lottery executed by the lottery means, more game media than the first number of bets are paid out. is performed or a first specified result (for example, watermelon as the 26th minor combination) and the transition result are provided,
As a result of the lottery executed by the lottery means in a situation where the number of bets set by the number-of-bets setting means is a second number of bets (one bet) that is smaller than the first number of bets, the second A game characterized by providing a second specified result (e.g., a special watermelon as a 26th P minor win) and the transition result, in which the same number of game media as the number of bets are paid out or a replay can be executed. machine.

According to the above configuration, the starting operation means is operated with the number of bets on the game medium as the first bet number, and the result of the lottery executed based on the operation is notified by the stop result of the pattern through the operation of the stop operation means. , if the result of the lottery is the first specified result, it is possible to acquire more game media than the number of bets, or it is possible to execute a re-game, wherein the number of bets is is a second bet number different from the first bet number, a game in which the same number of game media as the bet number is paid out or a replay can be executed, and a second specific result or a transition result can be won. can be done. By doing so, it is possible to realize a game that is played in anticipation of winning more game media than the number of bets, but that is played from a completely different point of view. . For example, by increasing the winning probability of the second identification result and the transition result, it is possible to realize a game with no increase or decrease in game media, such as no increase in game media but no decrease in game media. Even if the winning probability of the second specific result or transition result is low, the second bet number is smaller than the first bet number. It is also possible to execute a series of games of revolving the revolving body, operating the stop operation means, and stopping the revolving body. By doing so, it is possible to freely set the game without being bound by a uniform number of bets, and it is possible to greatly contribute to the diversification of the game.

Feature B2. The first specified result is won in a situation where the first bet amount is set by the bet amount setting means, and a first predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the first specified result is formed at the valid position. By stopping each of the revolving bodies, a privilege corresponding to the first specific result winning is granted,
As the second identification result,
A specific position that is not the valid position when the second bet amount is set by the bet amount setting means and is the valid position when the first bet amount is set by the bet amount setting means. In addition, by stopping each of the revolving bodies in a state in which the first predetermined pattern combination is formed, a first corresponding result (for example, as a 26th P minor win special watermelon) and
By stopping each of the revolving bodies in the state where the first predetermined pattern combination is not formed at the specific position, a privilege corresponding to the second specific result winning is granted. )and,
The gaming machine according to feature B1, characterized in that is set.

According to the above configuration, in the gaming property with the second bet number, the first predetermined pattern combination that wins in the game with the first bet number is formed, and the first predetermined pattern combination that does not win in the game with the first bet number is formed. The privilege corresponding to the winning of the second specific result can be given in either case where the pattern combination of (1) is not formed. By doing so, in the game with the second bet number with little increase or decrease in the game medium, unlike the game where some kind of pattern is matched and the so-called winning number is stopped as in every game, some kind of pattern is matched and the game is stopped. As a result, the game performance of the second bet amount can be improved by increasing the variation of the stop numbers, such as the appearance of winning numbers and the stoppage of the so-called losing numbers when they are not aligned.

Feature B3. When the operation order of the stop operation means is the first operation order as the second identification result, each of the revolving bodies stops with the first pattern combination stopped at the effective position, and the first operation result wins. (for example, a small winning combination) is established and the operation order of the stop operation means is the second operation order different from the first operation order, the second symbol combination different from the first symbol combination is placed at the effective position. In the state where the pattern combination is stopped, each of the revolving bodies stops and a second operation result winning (for example, a third minor winning combination) different from the first operation result winning is established (for example, a special number 1 promotion replay 1-4) is provided,
The privilege granting means pays out the same number of game media as the second bet amount when the first operation result wins, and also when the second operation result wins, the second bet amount. The gaming machine according to feature B1 or feature B2, characterized in that it is configured to pay out the same number of game media as the number of game media.

According to the above configuration, in a game with the second bet amount, if the second specified result corresponds to the operation order, the number of game media to be paid out does not change, but different symbol combinations stop depending on the operation order, resulting in different winnings. form. In this way, in the game with the second bet amount, the game property is improved by making the winning modes larger than the types of winning results while ensuring the game property without (small) increase or decrease of the game medium. can be done.

Feature B4. The first specified result is won in a situation where the first bet amount is set by the bet amount setting means, and a first predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the first specified result is formed at the valid position. By stopping each of the revolving bodies, a privilege corresponding to the first specific result winning is granted,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the operation order correspondence result and the operation order of the stop operation means is the first operation order, the first predetermined pattern combination is placed at the effective position. When the first operation result winning is established by stopping each of the revolving bodies in a state in which a pattern combination is formed, and the operation order of the stop operation means is the second operation order, the above-mentioned The gaming machine according to feature B3, wherein the second operation result winning is established by stopping each of the revolving bodies in a state in which the first predetermined pattern combination is not formed as the second pattern combination.

According to the above configuration, the so-called losing numbers and winning numbers in the first bet amount are stopped according to the operation order of the stop operation means. Although the privilege to be awarded does not change even if any of the numbers is stopped, if the above-described procedure is performed, for example, by performing or not notifying the first operation order for the winning number, it is possible to win a prize. It is possible to intentionally make the outcome appear. As a result, it is possible to greatly improve the gaming performance of the second bet amount.

Feature B5. In a situation where the first bet amount is set by the bet amount setting means, a replay result among the first specified results is won, and a predetermined pattern combination for replay corresponding to the replay result is placed at the valid position. By stopping each of the revolving bodies in the formed state, a replay corresponding to the winning of the replay result is provided,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the result corresponding to the operation order and the operation order of the stop operation means is the first operation order, the predetermined pattern combination for replay is placed at the valid position as the first pattern combination. When the first operation result winning is established by stopping each of the circular bodies in a state in which the pattern combination is formed, and the operation order of the stop operation means is the second operation order, at the effective position, According to feature B3 or feature B4, characterized in that the second operation result win is established by stopping each of the revolving bodies in a state in which the predetermined pattern combination for replay is not formed as the second pattern combination. game machine.

According to the above configuration, the so-called replay winning number and the losing number in the first number of bets are stopped according to the operation order of the stop operation means. Although the privilege to be given does not change even if any roll is stopped, if it is set as described above, for example, the first operation order for the roll that results in a replay winning prize may or may not be notified. , it is possible to intentionally cause the replay winning combination to appear. As a result, it is possible to greatly improve the gaming performance of the second bet amount.

Feature B6. A high replay state (for example, a second RT state) in which the probability of winning as a result of the replay is relatively high and a low replay state (for example, a second RT state) and a low replay state in which the probability of winning as a result of the replay is relatively high and low are the games performed in the situation where the first bet amount is set by the bet amount setting means. A replay state (for example, the first RT state) is set,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the result corresponding to the operation order, the first operation order can be notified by a predetermined notification means (auxiliary display unit 65). A gaming machine according to feature B5, characterized in that the game machine has a function of executing mode push-in process.

According to the above configuration, in the case of the result corresponding to the operation order, for example, if the first operation order is notified by the operation order notification means, the replay win in the game of the first bet amount appears, and the first If the operation order is not notified, a winning number appears in the game with the first bet amount, and depending on whether or not the notification is given, even in the game with the second bet amount, the replay state is high or low in the game with the first bet amount. It is possible to reproduce the replay state. Therefore, the playability of the game with the second bet amount can be improved.

Feature B7. A plurality of types of the second specific result are provided as a result that can be won in the lottery by the lottery means when the second bet amount is set by the bet amount setting means,
In a predetermined state (normal game state), when a lottery is performed by the lottery means when the second bet amount is set, one of the plurality of types of the second specified result and the transition result is won. The game machine according to any one of features B1 to B6, characterized in that it is set as follows.

According to the above configuration, when the second specified win is established, the same number of game media as the second bet amount is paid out or a replay is provided. If one of the results is won, the game played with the second bet number does not increase or decrease the game media. As a result, the game played with the second number of bets can be used, for example, as a practice game, or used as an effect in the game played with the first number of bets.

Feature B8. In the game from when the second bet amount is set by the bet amount setting means and the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the transition result to the end of the specific state shifted based on the transition result. , The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B7, characterized in that the number of game media that exceeds the bet amount set by the bet amount setting means is not paid out.

According to the above configuration, even if the game with the second number of bets results in a win as a transition result and the specific state occurs, an increase in the amount of game media cannot be expected. By doing so, the game with the first bet amount and the game with the second bet amount can be differentiated, and the impression that the game with the second bet amount is a practice game can be enhanced.

Feature B9. In the situation where the second bet amount is set by the bet amount setting means, when the transition results in winning and the specific pattern combination stops at the valid position, the transition means transitions to the specific state. , It is a configuration in which game media are not paid out at the time of the transition,
In the specific state, in a predetermined game in the specific state, a payout is made by adding the number of game media for the second bet to the number of game media for the bet set by the bet setting means. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B8, wherein is set as one termination condition of the specific state.

According to the above configuration, game media are not paid out when the transition result is won in the second bet amount, so game media may be lost when transitioning to the specific state. Therefore, if the end condition of the specific state is increased by the number of game media (second bet number) required at the time of winning as a transition result, totaling from the transition to the specific state to the end will reduce the increase or decrease of the game media. becomes possible. As a result, the game with the second number of bets can be made to have a game property in which the increase or decrease of the game medium is reduced even if the transition to the specific state occurs.

<Characteristic group C>
Feature C1. a plurality of revolving bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction;
a display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern for each of the surrounding bodies;
Receiving means for receiving game media or virtual game media (medal insertion slot 45, credit insertion switches 56 to 58, 69);
A bet amount setting means (steps S204 and S205 by the main control device 101) for setting a game bet number up to a predetermined number as an upper limit after grasping that the game medium or virtual game medium has been received by the receiving means. function to perform processing) and
a starting operation means (start lever 41) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when operated;
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the circulation of each of the circulation bodies when operated;
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the starting operation means is operated, and stopping the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the stop operation means is operated function to perform processing) and
When the lottery result of the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at a valid position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized through the display unit, Privilege giving means (function for executing payout determination processing by the main control device 101) for giving the player a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result;
The result of the lottery by the lottery means is a transition result corresponding to transition to a specific state (bonus state) in which the winning probability of each role in the lottery by the lottery means can change compared to before the transition (for example, 1st BB, 1st BB, etc.). 2BB, first PBB, second PBB), and transition means (main control) for shifting the game state to the specific state when a specific pattern combination (red 7 matching) corresponding to the transition result stops at the effective position. function of executing bonus state processing by the device 101);
A gaming machine comprising
As the bet amount set by the bet amount setting means, a first bet number (3) and a second bet (1) which is different from the first bet amount are provided,
When the number of bets set by the number-of-bet setting means is the first number of bets, the lottery means performs a lottery for each combination including the transition result at a first lottery probability, and sets the number of bets. when the number of bets set by means is the second number of bets, a lottery for each combination including the transition result is performed with a second lottery probability,
In a predetermined state, the lottery by the lottery means is performed based on the ratio of the benefit to the number of bets when the lottery by the lottery means is performed based on the first lottery probability, and the second lottery probability. A configuration different from the ratio of the privilege to the number of bets when
display means (auxiliary display unit 65) capable of displaying game information including the privilege to be provided;
Identification means (stamp 65a, identification Accessory 65b) and
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, in both the case of playing the game with the first bet amount and the case of playing the game with the second bet amount, each winning combination including the transition result that enables the transition to the specific state is achieved. A lottery will be held. A game played with the first bet amount and a game played with the second bet amount are different in the so-called payout rate, which is the ratio of the bonus to the bet amount. By adopting such a gaming machine, it is possible to realize a plurality of game characteristics with different ball output rates in one gaming machine, and it is possible to meet the needs of various players with one gaming machine. Moreover, which game is being played can be identified by the display means capable of notifying game information including benefits. Therefore, for example, when confirming the gaming information including the obtained benefits, it is clear at a glance which number of bets the game was played with along with the benefits. It becomes possible to easily confirm.

The ball output rate is expressed as "the ratio of the bonus to the number of bets", but may be, for example, "the rate of giving the bonus for each game" or "a predetermined number of game media are paid out as a bonus". ', it may be expressed as 'increase rate of the game medium for each game' or 'decrease rate of the game medium for each game'. Also, the number of games used for calculating the above-mentioned pay-out rate may be set as "per predetermined number of games".

Further, "in a predetermined state" may be, for example, a predetermined state out of a plurality of types of game states set, such as during a bonus or RT state, or may be a predetermined state among a plurality of types of game states set. It may be a state that includes any or all of the game states that are present.

Feature C2. The identification means identifies that the display information (ordinary game effect data) displayed by the display means when the game is being played with the first bet number indicates that the game is being played with the second bet number. The gaming machine according to feature C1, wherein the game with the first bet amount and the game with the second bet amount can be identified by superimposing information (effect data for identification information).

According to the above configuration, the display information when the game is played with the first bet number and the display information when the game is played with the second bet number are separately provided. Compared to a configuration that allows identification, it is possible to simply superimpose the identification information, so that the storage capacity of the display information to be stored in advance can be greatly reduced.

Feature C3. The display means displays image data for displaying the display information when the game is played with the second bet amount, and displays the display information when the game is played with the first bet amount. The gaming machine according to feature C2, characterized in that the identification information can be superimposed and displayed along with image data for displaying.

According to the above configuration, it is not necessary to store in advance the image data for displaying the display information when the game with the second bet amount is being played, and the effect of the feature C2 can be exhibited more favorably. can.

Feature C4. The game machine according to any one of features C1 to C3, wherein the display means is arranged at a position not overlapping the revolving body in the front-rear direction.

According to the above configuration, when playing a game while looking at the revolving body, the identifiability of the identifying means is not a concern, and when confirming the identifiability by looking at the display means, the revolving body is not a concern. For example, it is assumed that some players will take a picture and record it, such as when a roll that does not stop for a long time stops on the revolving body. In this respect, according to the above configuration, it is possible to take a picture without worrying about the reflection of the display means.

Feature C5. When the number of bets set by the number-of-bets setting means is the first number of bets and the state is shifted to the specific state by the transition means, each of the revolving bodies is stopped. The stop number of the pattern that stops at a position visible through the display unit is
The number of bets set by the number-of-bets setting means is the second number of bets, and the number of bets is the same as the stop number when the state is shifted to the specific state by the transition means. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C4.

According to the above configuration, the transition to the specific state in which the winning probability of each combination can be changed by the lottery means is caused by the same stop roll in the case of the first bet number and in the case of the second bet number. obtain. In this way, even if the game characteristics have different ball payout rates, the transition of the game state is caused by the same number, so that the player can easily understand the game characteristics and the ball payout rate is low. Even when playing the side game, it is possible to experience the transition to a specific state with the same result as the side with the higher ball output rate, and it is possible to provide a sense of satisfaction. becomes.

On the other hand, if the numbers are the same, it can be said that it becomes even more difficult for the manager of the game hall to understand which game is being played. In particular, the point at which the game state transition occurs is a point that the manager of the game hall can pay attention to. In this respect, as described in the feature C1, since the display means can be identified, which game is being played is notified at a position irrelevant to the outcome of each revolving body. While enjoying the effect such as the player's satisfaction, the identifiability does not deteriorate.

Feature C6. When the number of bets set by the number-of-bets setting means is the first number of bets, a first transition result (first BB, second BB) as the transition result that causes transition to the specific state by the transition means is provided,
In a situation where the bet amount set by the bet amount setting means is the second bet amount, a second transition result (first PBB, second PBB) as the transition result causing transition to the specific state by the transition means is provided,
The probability that the result of the lottery executed by the lottery means will be the first transition result in a situation where the bet amount set by the bet amount setting means is the first bet amount, and the probability set by the bet amount setting means Characteristic features C1 to C5, characterized in that the probability that the result of the lottery executed by the lottery means will be the second transition result in a situation where the number of bets placed is the second number of bets is set as the same probability. The gaming machine according to any one of 1.

According to the above configuration, the probability of the transition result (the probability of the first transition result and the probability of the second transition result) between the game with the first bet number and the game with the second bet number with different payout rates. set as the same probability. Therefore, it is difficult to distinguish between the game with the first bet amount and the game with the second bet amount in the winning state (occurrence state of the specific state) of the transition result. In other words, it is possible to make the two games similar to each other, even if the game characteristics are different in the pay-out rate. For example, one game can be treated as a trial version of the other game. . As described in the feature C1, the two games are made to resemble each other in this way, but since the display means side is made identifiable, confirmation work can be easily performed in the game hall.

In addition, by adopting a configuration in which "different benefits are obtained between the specific state that transitions based on the first transition result and the specific state that transitions based on the second transition result", the winning probability for both transition results is the same. Even if it is, it is possible to secure a configuration with different ball payout rates.

Feature C7. When the lottery result by the lottery means is a first specified result (for example, a watermelon as a 26th minor winning combination), the privilege providing means pays out a first specified number of game media as the privilege. ,
A case where the result of the lottery executed by the lottery means is the first specified result in a situation where the bet amount set by the bet amount setting means is the first bet amount, and the first specified number When the game media are to be paid out, the same stop roll as the stop roll of the pattern that stops at a position visible through the display unit in the situation where each of the revolving bodies is stopped. However, when the number of bets set by the number-of-bets setting means stops at the second number of bets, a second specific number of game media different from the first specific number is paid out. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C6, characterized by:

According to the above configuration, it is possible to provide a configuration in which different benefits are awarded for the same stop number in the game played with the first bet number and the game played with the second bet number. As a result, while being identifiable by the identification means, by using the numbers of the looping bodies which are in a region different from the display means in which distinctiveness is produced, the numbers of first bets and the numbers of second bets are common. While using , it is possible to realize game characteristics with different payout rates.

Feature C8. When the number of bets set by the number-of-bet setting means is the second number of bets and the result of the lottery executed by the lottery means is a second specified result (for example, a 26th P minor win) that is different from the first specified result special watermelon), the second specific number of game media can be paid out,
a probability that the result of the lottery executed by the lottery means will be the first specified result in a situation where the bet amount set by the bet amount setting means is the first bet amount; Characteristic feature C7, characterized in that the probability that the result of the lottery executed by the lottery means will be the second specified result in a situation where the number of bets placed is the second number of bets is set as the same probability. game machine.

According to the above configuration, the first specific result in which the first specific number of payouts is made and the second specific result in which the second specific number of payouts are paid out are made to appear with the same probability while using common outcomes. be able to. As a result, while being identifiable by the identification means, by using the numbers of the looping bodies which are in a region different from the display means in which distinctiveness is produced, the numbers of first bets and the numbers of second bets are common. While using , it is possible to realize game characteristics with different payout rates.

Feature C9. The display means is capable of displaying the payout number of game media as payout number information by the privilege granting means when notifying the game information including the privilege,
When the second specified number of game media are paid out based on the second specified result, the payout number information can be displayed assuming that the first specified number of game media have been paid out. The gaming machine according to feature C8, characterized by:

According to the above configuration, the same payout amount information can be displayed for the game with the first bet amount and the game with the second bet amount when the game information including the bonus is announced. As a result, even if the number of game media actually paid out is different and the payout rate is different, it is possible to experience the same gameplay in terms of display. However, as described in the feature C1, when the game information is announced, it is possible to identify which game it is, so it is premised that it is a pseudo display to the last, and it has such a premise. Therefore, even if the number of payouts is displayed differently from the actual number of payouts as described above, it is considered that no problem will arise.

Feature C10. The display means is capable of displaying information on the number of games played as number-of-games information when notifying the game information including the bonus,
When the game is played with the first bet number, information on the number of games played with the first bet number is displayed, and when the game is played with the second bet number, the information is displayed. The gaming machine according to feature C9, wherein information on the number of games played with the second bet amount can be displayed.

According to the above configuration, while the number-of-payouts information is displayed in a pseudo manner, the number-of-games information is displayed corresponding to the actual number of games. This is because if the number-of-games information is also displayed in a pseudo manner, the reliability of the notification of the game information will be significantly lowered. , it becomes easier to imagine a pseudo payout number display.

Feature C11. The identification means identifies that the display information (ordinary game effect data) displayed by the display means when the game is being played with the first bet number indicates that the game is being played with the second bet number. A game with the first bet amount and a game with the second bet amount can be identified by superimposing information (effect data for identification information),
The number of bets when the lottery of the lottery means is performed based on the second lottery probability is higher than the ratio of the benefit to the number of bets when the lottery of the lottery means is performed based on the first lottery probability. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C10, wherein the ratio of the privilege to the number of points is lower.

According to the above configuration, a game with a second bet number with a low ball payout rate is displayed for display information when a game with a first bet number with a so-called high ball payout rate is being played. Identification information is superimposed. In other words, when a game is played with the first bet amount, the identification information is not superimposed. In other words, when the game with the first bet number is being played, it can be said that the player can concentrate on the game with the first bet number without worrying about the other game. This is based on the idea that many players prefer to play games on the side with a higher ball payout rate, and by doing so, the game machine can meet the needs of the majority of players. be able to.

<Characteristic group D>
Feature D1. a plurality of revolving bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction;
a display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern for each of the surrounding bodies;
Receiving means for receiving game media or virtual game media (medal insertion slot 45, credit insertion switches 56 to 58, 69);
A bet amount setting means (steps S204 and S205 by the main control device 101) for setting a game bet number up to a predetermined number as an upper limit after grasping that the game medium or virtual game medium has been received by the receiving means. function to perform processing) and
a starting operation means (start lever 41) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when operated;
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the circulation of each of the circulation bodies when operated;
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the starting operation means is operated, and stopping the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the stop operation means is operated function to perform processing) and
When the lottery result of the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at a valid position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized through the display unit, Payout means for executing payout of a predetermined number of game media as a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result (function for executing payout determination processing by the main controller 101);
The lottery result by the lottery means is a transition result (for example, the first PBB, the second PBB) corresponding to shifting to a specific state (bonus state) in which the winning probability of each role in the lottery by the lottery means changes compared to before the transition. ), and transition means (main controller 101), and
A gaming machine comprising
Expected number of game media to be paid out (ball payout ratio) by the payout means with respect to the bet amount set by the bet amount setting means per one game executed during the specific state; The gaming machine is characterized in that the expected payout number of the game media by the payout means is equal to the bet amount set by the bet amount setting means per one game executed during a game state.

According to the above configuration, the bonus state as a specific state to be shifted based on a so-called bonus winning as a transition result and the normal gaming state before the transition to the bonus are set so that the number of payouts for the number of bets per game is the same. ing. In other words, even if the normal game state shifts to the bonus state, the advantage for the player does not change. For example, as a configuration that does not change the advantage, a bonus pattern is aligned and stopped in a predetermined start game to generate a bonus state, but a pseudo win probability that does not change compared to before the transition to the bonus state. A configuration that generates a bonus state is also conceivable. However, in this case, the game state does not change at all and the probability of winning a minor role does not change only through the starting game in which the bonus symbols are aligned and can be stopped, so the player can feel the occurrence of the bonus state. hard to do. On the other hand, in the above configuration, the probability of each role is changed by transitioning to a specific state as a bonus. It is easy to feel the state. With such a configuration, if the advantage level is not changed as described above, it becomes possible to make the player experience a bonus state as a specific state in a simulated manner without giving any profit to the player. degree of freedom is greatly improved. Therefore, it is possible to preferably aim at the degree of attention of the game.

It should be noted that "equivalent" may include "the same" and "not the same, but the same level of profit for the player".

In addition, "expected number of game media to be paid out (ball payout rate) by the payout means with respect to the bet amount set by the bet amount setting means per one game executed during the specific state, and is equivalent to the number of bets set by the bet amount setting means per game executed during a normal gaming state. The advantage during the specific state and the advantage during the normal game state before shifting to the specific state are equivalent."

Feature D2. Expected payout number of game media by the payout means per game executed during the specific state, and the game by the payout means per game executed during the normal game state before transition to the specific state The gaming machine according to feature D1, wherein the expected payout number of media is equal to or less than the bet amount set by the bet amount setting means for each game in each state.

According to the above configuration, an increase in the number of game media cannot be expected not only during the normal game state but also during the specific state. In other words, an increase in game media cannot be expected even in the normal game state. By doing so, it is possible to suitably realize a game in which the player experiences a bonus as a specific state without giving any profit to the player.

Feature D3. Expected payout number of game media by the payout means per game executed during the specific state, and the game by the payout means per game executed during the normal game state before transition to the specific state The gaming machine according to feature D2, wherein the expected payout number of media is equal to the bet amount set by the bet amount setting means for each game in each state.

According to the above configuration, it can be expected that the same number of game media as the number of bets will be paid out in each game in the normal game state and the specific state. In other words, although an increase in game media is not expected in each game, there is no decrease in game media. In this way, by providing a game feature in which the number of game media does not increase or decrease, it is possible to realize a game feature for practice, for example, to make the user understand the specifications of the game machine.

Feature D4. As the lottery results executed by the lottery means, there are provided a plurality of payout combinations and replay combinations to which game media are to be paid out by the payout means, and when the lottery is conducted by the lottery means, one of the above It is configured to win the payout combination or the replay combination,
When the lottery result of the lottery means is that the payout combination is won and a specific combination of symbols corresponding to the payout combination win stops at the valid position, the payout means provides a privilege corresponding to the payout combination win. The gaming machine according to feature D3, wherein the same number of game media as the bet amount set by the bet amount setting means is paid out.

According to the above configuration, a so-called loss result is not set, and in each game, the same number of game media as the number of bets is paid out or a replay is performed. For example, in a configuration in which there is no increase or decrease in game media when averaged over a plurality of games, a state in which the game media are decreased and a state in which the game media are increased exist. Advantages and disadvantages may arise for players in realizing On the other hand, according to the above configuration, since the number of game media does not increase or decrease in each game, the player can easily experience the game without any advantageous or disadvantageous situations. can be done.

Feature D5. The drive control means stops the rotation of the corresponding orbiting body within a predetermined period based on the operation of each of the stop operation means, and when the stop operation means is operated at a predetermined timing, It is controlled so that the pattern corresponding to the result of winning is stopped at the effective position,
If the result of the lottery by the lottery means is the transfer result, and the pattern corresponding to the transfer result does not form a predetermined pattern combination at the effective position and does not stop, the reservation storage means ( a function of executing a process of setting a bonus winning flag in the main controller 101),
In the lottery by the lottery means performed under the condition that the transfer result winning is reserved and stored in the reserved storage means, it is set so that there is a non-winning result that does not win any of the plurality of payout combinations. The gaming machine according to feature D4, characterized by:

According to the above configuration, in a situation where the transfer result is reserved, it is possible to target and stop the specific pattern corresponding to the transfer result. In other words, even if an attempt is made to win the transition result that has been reserved and stored, if another payout combination is won, the transition result winning cannot be established in the control that prioritizes the winning combination, resulting in a specific state. can no longer be transferred. Therefore, with the configuration described above, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of not being able to shift to the specific state.

Feature D6. As the bet amount set by the bet amount setting means, the expected number of payouts of the game media by the payout means per one game executed during the specific state, and during the normal game state before transition to the specific state. A first bet number (one piece) equal to the expected number of game media to be paid out by the payout means per one game to be executed, and a second bet number different from the first bet number. A number (three) is provided,
In a situation where the second bet amount is set by the bet amount setting means, the expected payout number of the game media by the payout means per one game executed during the specific state, and The expected number of game media to be paid out by the payout means per one game executed during a certain normal game state is not equal to the expected number,
the transition result is set as a lottery result by the lottery means of the game played with the second bet number;
In the reserved memory means, the result of the lottery by the lottery means in the game played with the second bet number is the transition result, and the specific patterns corresponding to the transition result form a predetermined combination at the valid position and stop. The gaming machine according to feature D5, wherein even if the game is not played, the transition result winning can be reserved and stored.

In the situation where the second number of bets is playing a game that may be different from the above-mentioned trial version game with a small increase or decrease in game media, if a transition result occurs and it is stored in a reserved memory, depending on the player, it may be stored in a reserved memory It is also conceivable to implement the situation at the first bet instead of the second bet. On the other hand, according to the above configuration, it is possible to win the transition result of winning with the second bet number at the first bet number. It is possible to improve the degree of freedom of the game to be played.

Feature D7. The gaming machine according to feature D6, wherein the first bet amount is set to be smaller than the second bet amount.

According to the above configuration, since the first bet number is smaller than the second bet number, the loss of game media can be minimized in a situation where the transition result is stored with the second bet number. If an attempt is made to stop and establish a transition result win, it is assumed that the transition result win will be established with the first bet number, not the second bet number. Therefore, the scene in which the effect of the feature D6 is exerted is more likely to occur, and it is possible to increase the merit of having the configuration of the feature D6.

Feature D8. The drive control means stops the rotation of the corresponding orbiting body within a predetermined period based on the operation of each of the stop operation means, and when the stop operation means is operated at a predetermined timing, It is controlled so that the pattern corresponding to the result of winning is stopped at the effective position,
The specific pattern corresponding to the transition result in each of the circular bodies is arranged so as to be able to stop at the effective position regardless of the operation timing of the stop operation means,
The transition means is characterized in that a lottery result by the lottery means is the transition result, and the specific patterns form a predetermined combination at the effective position and stop, thereby transitioning to the specific state. The gaming machine according to feature D4.

According to the above configuration, the game feature of stopping aiming at a specific pattern in the case of a transition result is lost. There is no event that a loss of

Feature D9. As the plurality of payout combinations, a first payout combination (for example, a special bell as a 1st P small combination) and a second payout combination (for example, a special watermelon as a 26th P small combination) are set,
The payment means is
When the lottery result by the lottery means is that the first payout combination is won, and the first predetermined symbol combination corresponding to the first payout combination win is stopped at the valid position, the first payout combination is won. As a corresponding privilege, the same number of game media as the bet amount set by the bet amount setting means is paid out,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is that the second payout combination is won, and the second predetermined symbol combination corresponding to the second payout combination win is stopped at the valid position, the second payout combination is won. As a corresponding benefit, the same number of game media as the bet amount set by the bet amount setting means is paid out,
The gaming machine according to any one of features D4 to D8, wherein the first predetermined pattern combination and the second predetermined pattern combination are configured to be visually identifiable.

According to the above configuration, a plurality of payout combinations are set, and the first payout combination is won in a game characteristic in which the same number of game media as the number of bets is paid out and the number of game media is not increased or decreased even if any payout combination is won. The first predetermined pattern combination and the second predetermined pattern combination that constitute the winning combination and the second payout combination are configured to be visually identifiable. Therefore, it is possible to generate variations in the number of times the revolving body stops in each game, and even if the payout combination is won, the game medium does not increase or decrease, so that the game does not become boring. It becomes possible.

Feature D10. As the plurality of payout combinations, a first payout combination (for example, a special bell as a 1P small combination) that can be won during the normal game state and a third payout combination (for example, a 32P small combination) that can be won during the specific state A special BB medium and small role 1) is set as a role,
The payment means is
When the lottery result by the lottery means is that the first payout combination is won, and the first predetermined symbol combination corresponding to the first payout combination win is stopped at the valid position, the first payout combination is won. As a corresponding privilege, the same number of game media as the bet amount set by the bet amount setting means is paid out,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is that the third payout combination is won, and the third predetermined symbol combination corresponding to the second payout combination win is stopped at the valid position, the third payout combination is won. As a corresponding benefit, the same number of game media as the bet amount set by the bet amount setting means is paid out,
The gaming machine according to any one of features D4 to D9, wherein the first predetermined pattern combination and the third predetermined pattern combination are configured to be visually identifiable.

According to the above configuration, a plurality of payout combinations are set, and for any payout combination winning, the same amount of game media as the number of bets is paid out, and there is no increase or decrease in game media. A first predetermined pattern combination forming a first payout winning combination that occurs and a third predetermined picture combination forming a third payout combination winning occurring during a specific state are configured to be visually identifiable. there is Therefore, it is possible to produce variations in the number of times the revolving body stops in each game between the normal game state and the specific state, and even in a game with the same expected number of game media, it is possible to experience the transition of the game state. It is possible to make it easier.

Feature D11. As the bet amount set by the bet amount setting means, the expected number of payouts of the game media by the payout means per one game executed during the specific state, and during the normal game state before transition to the specific state. A first bet number (one piece) equal to the expected number of game media to be paid out by the payout means per one game to be executed, and a second bet number different from the first bet number. A number (three) is provided,
In a situation where the second bet amount is set by the bet amount setting means, the expected payout number of the game media by the payout means per one game executed during the specific state, and Any one of the characteristics D1 to D10, characterized in that the expected number of game media to be paid out by the payout means per one game executed during a certain normal game state is not equal. The game machine described.

According to the above configuration, while realizing the novel game characteristics of the feature D1 in the first bet amount, if the second bet amount is different from the first bet amount, payout is expected in the specific state and the normal game state. A general game in which the numbers are different can be realized. By doing so, it is possible to realize a plurality of game characteristics with one gaming machine, and diversification of games can be achieved.

In this case, for example, if a game feature that can cause an increase or decrease in the game media realized at the second bet amount is configured to be experienced at the first bet amount, the game with the first bet amount is changed to the second bet amount. It is possible to provide it as a position for practicing games by. As a result, the game with the second number of bets is novel and complicated, and even if it is difficult to understand the fun of the game in the first time, it is first practiced with the first number of bets to make it more interesting. and fully enjoy the game with the second bet amount.

<Characteristic group E>
Feature E1. a plurality of revolving bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction;
a display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern for each of the surrounding bodies;
Receiving means for receiving game media or virtual game media (medal insertion slot 45, credit insertion switches 56 to 58, 69);
A bet amount setting means (steps S204 and S205 by the main control device 101) for setting a game bet number up to a predetermined number as an upper limit after grasping that the game medium or virtual game medium has been received by the receiving means. function to perform processing) and
a starting operation means (start lever 41) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when operated;
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the circulation of each of the circulation bodies when operated;
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the starting operation means is operated, and stopping the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the stop operation means is operated function to perform processing) and
When the lottery result of the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at a valid position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized through the display unit, Payout means for executing payout of a predetermined number of game media as a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result (function for executing payout determination processing by the main controller 101);
The lottery result by the lottery means is a transition result (for example, the first PBB, the second PBB) corresponding to shifting to a specific state (bonus state) in which the winning probability of each role in the lottery by the lottery means changes compared to before the transition. ), and transition means (main controller 101), and
A gaming machine comprising
As the bet amount set by the bet amount setting means, a first bet number (3) and a second bet (1) which is different from the first bet amount are provided,
In a game played in a situation where the bet amount set by the bet amount setting means is the first bet amount, it is determined whether or not a specific condition that can be established without winning the transition result has been established. Condition determination means (in the second embodiment, a function that executes processing for determining whether or not there is a special addition flag by the main controller 101);
In a game played in a situation where the condition determination means determines that the specific condition is not established and the bet amount set by the bet amount setting means is the second bet amount (Auxiliary display unit 65, speaker 64, etc.) can execute the first specific effect in the first effect means (main controller 101 in the second embodiment, for example, the processing of step S5520, step S5704, S5705 function) and
In a game played in a situation where it is determined by the condition determination means that the specific condition is established and the bet amount set by the bet amount setting means is the second bet amount Second effect means (main controller 101 in the second embodiment) capable of executing a second specific effect different from the first specific effect by means of predetermined effect means (auxiliary display unit 65, speaker 64, etc.), for example A function to execute processing such as steps S5521, steps S5712 and S5713, and processing for special addition);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, in the configuration in which the first bet amount and the second bet amount can be set, when the game is played with the first bet amount, the specific condition is satisfied, and then the game is played with the second bet amount. A different effect is generated depending on whether the game is played with the first bet number or when the game is played with the first bet number but the game is played with the second bet number without the specific condition being satisfied. As a result, it is possible to greatly improve the range of games in a gaming machine in which a plurality of numbers of bets can be set. In other words, unlike conventional gaming machines, where the game is always played with the first number of bets, for example, a specific condition is established during a game with the first number of bets, and then the second bet is made. It is possible to realize the game property of playing a game based on numbers.

Feature E2. The betting number setting means sets a situation in which the condition determination means determines that the specific condition is satisfied and a situation in which the condition determination means determines that the specific condition is not satisfied. The gaming machine according to feature E1, wherein the odds of winning each combination by the lottery means are the same when the number of bets placed is the second number of bets.

According to the above configuration, regardless of the success or failure of the specific condition, the winning probability of each combination by the lottery means in the game played with the second bet number does not change. Therefore, it is possible to make the effects different between the first effect means and the second effect means without changing the game state or the like. Therefore, the degree of freedom of presentation is improved, and it becomes possible to greatly contribute to the improvement of attention.

Feature E3. As a result of the lottery by the lottery means performed in a situation where the bet amount set by the bet amount setting means is the second bet amount, the same number of game media as the second bet amount will be paid out. A 2-payout combination (for example, a special watermelon as the 26th P small combination) and a replay combination (special replay) are provided,
At least in a situation where the condition determination means determines that the specific condition is established, the lottery is conducted by the lottery means in a situation where the bet amount set by the bet amount setting means is the second bet amount. The gaming machine according to feature E1 or feature E2, wherein the game machine is set to win either the second payout combination or the replay combination when the winning combination is won.

According to the above configuration, at least in the game played with the second number of bets when the specific condition is met, the amount of game media does not increase or decrease. By doing so, it is possible to position the game with the second bet number as a game in terms of performance, and it is possible to suitably realize a novel performance with different bet numbers within a range that does not cause a loss to the player. can.

Feature E4. A first specific number of game media equal to or greater than the second bet amount is paid out as a lottery result of the lottery means performed in a situation where the bet amount set by the bet amount setting means is the first bet amount. The first payout combination (for example, watermelon as the 26th minor combination) is provided,
The specific condition is that the lottery result of the lottery means wins the first payout combination in a game played in a situation where the bet amount set by the bet amount setting means is the first bet amount. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E3, wherein one condition can be established.

According to the above configuration, when playing a game with the second bet amount based on the establishment of the specific condition, the player has the game medium of the second bet amount even though the specific condition is established. Therefore, the inconvenience of not being able to see the second specific effect based on the establishment of the specific condition is less likely to occur. In other words, based on the winning/winning of the first payout combination that triggered the establishment of the specific condition, game media equal to or greater than the second bet number should have been paid out.

Feature E5. A first payout combination (for example, watermelon as a 26th minor combination) is provided as a lottery result of the lottery means performed in a situation where the bet amount set by the bet amount setting means is the first bet amount. cage,
A second payout combination (for example, a special watermelon as a 26th P minor combination) is provided as a lottery result of the lottery means performed in a situation where the bet amount set by the bet amount setting means is the second bet amount. and
The stop numbers of each of the revolving bodies when the first payout combination win is established are set to be the same as the stop numbers of each of the revolving bodies when the second payout combination win is established. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E4, characterized in that:

According to the above configuration, the first payout combination that is won in the game with the first bet number that satisfies the specific condition, and the second payout combination that is won in the game with the second bet number that can be executed after the specific condition is met, will have a common stop roll. By doing so, the game played with the second bet amount can be made to resemble the game with the first bet amount, and it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity in the game in which each bet amount comes and goes.

Feature E6. A first payout combination (for example, watermelon as a 26th minor combination) is provided as a lottery result of the lottery means performed in a situation where the bet amount set by the bet amount setting means is the first bet amount. cage,
The specific condition is that the first payout combination is won and that a lottery by a second lottery means (a function of executing a special extra lottery process by the main controller 101) different from the lottery by the lottery means is won. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E5, characterized in that it is established based on.

According to the above configuration, the specific condition is not established simply by winning the first payout combination at the time of the first number of bets, but is established when winning the lottery by the second lottery means. As a result, it is possible to lower the probability of establishment of the specific condition without lowering the appearance rate of the first payout combination, thereby increasing the rarity of the second specific effect by the second effect means. In addition, by doing as above, even if the first specific role is won, there are cases where the specific condition is established and cases where it is not established. You can also try to make it.

Feature E7. By winning the lottery by the second lottery means, a second privilege (for example, an addition to the number of games in the attack mode) different from the privilege by the payout of the game medium is awarded. The gaming machine according to feature E6.

According to the above configuration, the significance of the lottery by the second lottery means is improved, and if the second privilege is given, the specific condition is established and the second specific effect is performed by the second effect means. Therefore, the significance of the second specific effect is also improved.

Feature E8. By the lottery means performed in a situation where the condition determination means determines that the specific condition is established and the bet amount set by the bet amount setting means is the second bet amount Characteristic E7, characterized in that it has means (a function of executing a special addition process by the main controller 101) that can determine the type of the second privilege to be given based on the lottery result. game machine.

According to the above configuration, the significance of the game played with the second bet number is improved. That is, it is determined that the second benefit will be granted by winning the second lottery means at the time of winning the first special role, and the second benefit will be granted in the game of the second bet number that is performed thereafter. 2 The type of privilege is determined. By doing so, the interest of the game with the second bet amount is improved.

Feature E9. In a situation where the condition determination means determines that the specific condition is satisfied, the lottery means sets the bet amount set by the bet amount setting means at the first bet amount instead of the second bet amount. means for determining the type of the second privilege to be granted based on the result of the lottery when a lottery is held by the main controller 101 (function for executing normal extra processing by the main controller 101) The gaming machine of characterizing feature E8.

According to the above configuration, when the specific condition is satisfied and the type of the second benefit can be determined in the game with the second bet amount, the game with the first bet amount is played instead of the game with the second bet amount. If the player wins, the lottery result of the game with the first bet amount is used to determine the type of the second privilege.

Feature E10. A means capable of determining the type of the second privilege to be granted using the lottery result of the lottery means for the first bet number that triggered the establishment of the specific condition (based on the additional opportunity by the main controller 101) A gaming machine according to feature E8 or feature E9, characterized by comprising a function of executing processing for determining the number of games to be added for special addition.

According to the above configuration, not only the result of the game after the establishment of the specific condition, but also the result of the game that triggered the establishment of the specific condition is reflected in the type of the second privilege. As a result, the continuity of a series of games, in which a specific condition is established in a game with the first bet amount, and then the second award is given mainly in the game with the second bet amount, is the type of the second award. As a result, it is possible to realize novel game features such as a privilege granting system that takes into account the continuity of games with different numbers of bets.

Feature E11. The second specific effect by the second effect means can occur even in a game executed in a situation where the bet amount set by the bet amount setting means is the first bet amount. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E10.

According to the above configuration, when the specific condition is established in the game with the first number of bets and the game with the second number of bets is played, in the configuration in which the second specific effect can occur, the second specific effect is the first To make it difficult to understand whether the game in which the second specific effect is generated is executed with the first number of bets or with the second number of bets because it can occur even in a game with the number of bets. be able to. This makes it difficult to understand the movement of the bet amount in the game property realized by changing the bet amount, and makes it possible to draw attention to the course of the game (for example, the type of the second privilege to be given).

Feature E12. A first payout combination (for example, watermelon as a 26th minor combination) is provided as a lottery result of the lottery means performed in a situation where the bet amount set by the bet amount setting means is the first bet amount. cage,
The specific condition is that the first payout combination is won and that a lottery by a second lottery means (a function of executing a special extra lottery process by the main controller 101) different from the lottery by the lottery means is won. is established on the basis of
When the bet amount set by the bet amount setting means is the first bet amount and the lottery by the second lottery means is not won, the second specific effect can be executed. means (a function of executing a normal add-on process by the main controller 101).

According to the above configuration, even if the specific condition for awarding the second privilege is not satisfied, the second specific effect can occur in the game played with the first number of bets. Therefore, to make it difficult to understand whether the second specific effect was carried out based on the game with the second bet amount carried out when the specific condition was established or whether it was carried out based on the specific condition being unsatisfied. can be done. This makes it difficult to understand the movement of the bet amount in the game property realized by changing the bet amount, and makes it possible to draw attention to the course of the game (for example, the type of the second privilege to be given).

Feature E13. As the receiving means, a plurality of second bet amount receiving means capable of accepting virtual game media of the second bet amount;
The second effect means is a situation in which the condition determination means determines that the specific condition is established and the bet amount set by the bet amount setting means is the second bet amount. In the game played in , when the virtual game medium of the second bet amount is accepted by operating the first second bet amount accepting means among the plurality of second bet amount accepting means, the When the virtual game media of the second bet amount is accepted by operating the second second bet amount accepting means different from the first second bet amount accepting means while the second specific effect is being executed. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E12, characterized in that the first specific effect is executed in the.

According to the above configuration, when the first side of the plurality of second bet amount receiving means is operated, the second specific effect is executed, and when the second side is operated, the first specific effect is executed. is executed, and it is possible to vary the effect depending on the operated second bet amount receiving means. For example, even if an operation on the first side is prompted when a specific condition is established, which operation should be performed is a matter for the player to decide. If so, it was configured to respect the player's decision-making. As a result, the game is started by causing the revolving body to revolve by one's own operation, and the revolving body is stopped by one's own operation to end the game. becomes possible.

Feature E14. Having a plurality of the starting operation means,
Characteristic feature E13, characterized in that a predetermined starting operation means out of the plurality of starting operation means is operated in response to an operation force of the first and second bet receiving means by the player. game machine.

According to the above configuration, when the player operates the first and second bet amount receiving means, the predetermined starting operation means is also operated, and the operation of the receiving means and the operation of the starting operation means are performed in conjunction with each other. Therefore, operability is improved. In this case, as the second bet amount receiving means, not only the first side and the second side are provided as described above, but also a plurality of starting operation means are provided. It can be said that the player can select whether or not to use the configuration in which the operation is performed. Therefore, the game can be favorably executed without imposing an effect against the will of the player.

In addition, the above-described configuration is such that "a reception operation section for operating the first and second betting number acceptance means and a start operation section for operating the predetermined start operation means are provided adjacent to each other, and By adopting a configuration in which the receiving operation section and the starting operation section are operated in the same direction, it is possible for the player to operate both operation sections at the same time.

Further, in this case, it may be configured such that "there is provided an interlocking portion that presses the starting operation portion in the operation direction when the reception operation portion is operated in the operation direction."

Feature E15. a game played in a situation where it is determined by the condition determination means that the specific condition is satisfied and the bet amount set by the bet amount setting means is the first bet amount; Discrimination of a game played in a situation where it is determined by the condition determination means that the specific condition is met and the bet amount set by the bet amount setting means is the second bet amount. Characteristic features E1 to E14 characterized by having means for lowering the performance (function of executing processing for setting effects at the time of betting, payout appearance, etc. when the special addition flag by the main controller 101 is set). The gaming machine according to any one of 1.

According to the above configuration, in the situation where the specific condition is satisfied, in the game property realized by moving the bet amount, the movement of the bet amount is made difficult to understand, and the direction of the game (for example, the second privilege given type) can be focused on.

Feature E16. As a lottery result of the lottery means performed in a situation where the bet amount set by the bet amount setting means is the second bet amount, a payout combination and a replay combination in which a predetermined number of game media are paid out are set. and
When the lottery result of the lottery means performed in a situation where the bet amount set by the bet amount setting means is the second bet amount is the payout combination, the condition is established from the state where the specific condition is established. Characteristic features E1 to E15 characterized in that it is possible to maintain the state in which the specific condition is established when the lottery result of the lottery means is the replay combination while changing to a state in which the lottery is not performed. The gaming machine according to any one of 1.

A replaying role is a role that enables a game to be played with the same number of bets as the number of bets in the current game without the need for a new game medium, as a benefit at the time of winning, for example, the second bet. If a player wins a replaying role in a number-based game, he/she may be forced to play the next game with the second bet number. Therefore, with the above configuration, when a replay role is won in the game with the second bet number based on the establishment of the specific condition, the next game must also be played with the second bet number. Even if it becomes, since the state in which the specific condition is established is maintained, for example, even if the specific condition is not established, the player is forced to play the game with the second bet amount. It is no longer necessary to play a useless game.

<Feature group F>
Feature F1. a plurality of revolving bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction;
a display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern for each of the surrounding bodies;
Receiving means for receiving game media or virtual game media (medal insertion slot 45, credit insertion switches 56 to 58, 69);
A bet amount setting means (steps S204 and S205 by the main control device 101) for setting a game bet number up to a predetermined number as an upper limit after grasping that the game medium or virtual game medium has been received by the receiving means. function to perform processing) and
a starting operation means (start lever 41) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when operated;
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the circulation of each of the circulation bodies when operated;
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the starting operation means is operated, and stopping the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the stop operation means is operated function to perform processing) and
When the lottery result of the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at a valid position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized through the display unit, Payout means for executing payout of a predetermined number of game media as a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result (function for executing payout determination processing by the main controller 101);
A gaming machine comprising
As a lottery result by the lottery means, the first specific role (for example, a replay during a normal game state in the first embodiment, and a watermelon role as a 26th minor role in the second embodiment) and the first specific role There is provided a second specific role (for example, the first minor role in the normal game state in the first embodiment, and a special watermelon role as the 26th P minor role in the second embodiment) with a higher probability of winning than the role. and
A first specific situation in which the first specific role winning can be established (a situation in which replay winning is established in the normal game mode, a situation in which a watermelon role winning is established), and a second specific role winning can be established 2 Specific means (for example, in the second embodiment, special addition A gaming machine characterized in that it has a function of setting a sound effect when betting 3 cards, etc.).

According to the above configuration, since the distinguishability between the first specific situation in which the first specific role can win and the second specific situation in which the second specific role can win is reduced, the first specific role wins. It becomes difficult to understand whether the second special role has won the prize. Since the winning probability of the second special role is set higher than that of the first special role, for example, by making the frequently occurring second special role winning look like the infrequent first special role winning, It is possible to make the player feel as if the winning of the first special role is frequently occurring without excessively increasing the probability of winning one special role. In this way, by lowering the identifiability of the roles with different winning probabilities, it is possible to realize novel gameplay by combining these roles.

Feature F2. In the first specific situation, when the first specific combination winning is established, the pattern stopped at a position visible through the display unit in the situation where each of the revolving bodies is stopped The stop result is
The gaming machine according to feature F1, wherein, in the second specific situation, the winning number is the same as the stopping number when the second specific winning combination is established.

According to the above configuration, the stop roll when the first special combination is won and the stop roll when the second special combination is won are the same. In other words, a so-called slot is achieved in which the revolving body is started based on the operation of the start operation means, the revolving body is stopped by the operation of the stop operation means, and winning of each combination is established as the stop result according to the lottery result. It is possible to have commonality between the winning of the first special combination and the winning of the second special combination with respect to the stop result, which is the core of the game characteristics of the machine. As a result, in order to lower the identifiability of each specific effect by the specifying means, it is possible to easily make the players think that the two specified combinations are the same, since the stop numbers of the respective games are the same in the first place.

Feature F3. The first specific combination is a combination that can be won as a result of the lottery by the lottery means when the number of bets set by the number-of-bet setting means is the first number of bets (3),
The second specific combination is a combination that can be won as a result of the lottery by the lottery means in a situation where the bet amount set by the bet amount setting means is a second bet amount different from the first bet amount. The gaming machine according to feature F1 or feature F2.

According to the above configuration, the first specific combination and the second specific combination with different winning probabilities can be used according to the difference in the bet numbers. As a result, in the first specific situation in which the first specific winning prize can be established and the second specific situation in which the second specific winning combination can be established, the game characteristics such as the lottery probability etc. can be completely different. Moreover, as in the feature F1, since the first specific situation and the second specific situation are less distinguishable, it is difficult for the player to realize that such completely different game characteristics come and go. , it is possible to realize a novel game property using the coming and going of the game property.

Feature F4. receiving effect execution means (function for executing processing for bet-time effect by main controller 101) capable of executing a reception effect based on the acceptance of the game medium or virtual game medium by the receiving means;
The specifying means determines the distinguishability between the acceptance performance executed by the acceptance performance executing means in the first specific situation and the acceptance performance executed by the acceptance performance executing means in the second specific situation. The game machine according to any one of features F1 to F3, characterized in that it can be lowered.

According to the above configuration, the game medium or the virtual game medium is accepted by the accepting means, which is performed at the start of the game. It is possible to make it difficult for players to recognize the situation in which different winning combinations such as winning a winning combination and winning a second specific winning combination can be won, and it is possible to suitably realize the playability described in the feature F1.

Feature F5. The first specific combination is a combination that can be won as a result of the lottery by the lottery means when the number of bets set by the number-of-bet setting means is the first number of bets (3),
The second specific combination is a combination that can be won as a result of the lottery by the lottery means in a situation where the bet amount set by the bet amount setting means is a second bet amount different from the first bet amount,
The specifying means causes the acceptance effect executing means to execute the acceptance effect corresponding to the first bet amount when the receiving means corresponding to the second bet amount has accepted the second bet amount. The gaming machine according to feature F4, wherein the distinguishability between the first specific situation and the second specific situation is reduced.

According to the above configuration, it becomes difficult to understand whether the game is a game in which the first specific role can be won with the first bet number or a game in which the second specific role can be won with the second number of bets. By doing so, it is possible to make it difficult to understand which specific combination can be won in a game based on which number of bets, ie, which specific combination can be won, while different winning combinations are made for each number of bets.

Feature F6. virtual game media number display means (credit display unit 60) for displaying the number of virtual game media that can be accepted by the acceptance means;
Updating means for updating the display of the number of virtual game media by the virtual game medium number display means based on acceptance of the virtual game media by the receiving means counter processing: function to execute step S109);
with
The specifying means may make the number of virtual game media displayed by the virtual game medium number display means invisible or difficult to see, based on establishment of a specific condition (set of a special addition flag) that causes the second specific situation. The gaming machine according to feature F5, characterized in that:

According to the above configuration, in a configuration where the number of bets set by the bet amount setting means differs between the first specific situation and the second specific situation, it is possible to reduce the visibility of the number of virtual game media that can be used to set the number of bets. , the distinguishability between the first specific situation and the second specific situation is reduced. In this way, the fact that different bet amounts are set by the bet amount setting means is clearly expressed by updating the display of the number of virtual game media, and the event of making it clear which bet amount is being avoided. can be avoided.

Feature F7. a payout number display means (payout number display unit 62) for displaying the number of game media paid out by the payout means;
The gaming machine according to feature F6, wherein the specifying means is capable of making the number of payouts displayed by the number-of-payout display means invisible or difficult to see, based on the establishment of the specific condition.

According to the above configuration, when the second specific situation is caused, the visibility of not only the display of the number of virtual game media but also the display of the number of payouts is lowered. Generally, these displays are arranged side by side, and if the visibility of only one display is lowered, the player may feel uncomfortable. Therefore, by reducing the visibility of both displays, it is possible to effectively achieve the effect of the feature F6 without giving a sense of discomfort.

Feature F8. The number of game media that can be paid out by the payout means based on the first special winning combination is different from the number of game media that can be paid out by the paying out means based on the second special winning combination. The gaming machine according to feature F7.

According to the above configuration, even if the number of payouts is different in this way, since the visibility of the display of the number of payouts is originally reduced as described in feature F7, in the configuration of feature F7, It is also possible to enjoy the effect of making it difficult to understand which specific role winning has been established.

Feature F9. As the receiving means, a plurality of specific receiving means (second credit insertion switch 57, fourth credit insertion switch 69, fifth credit insertion switch 75 for one bet) that can be operated in the second specific situation,
The specifying means, in the second specified situation, when the virtual game medium is accepted by the operation of the first specified accepting means out of the plurality of specified accepting means, the acceptance effect executing means causes the first 1. When a virtual game medium is received by operating a second specific receiving means different from the first specific receiving means while performing the above-mentioned receiving performance which is an object to reduce the distinguishability from the specific situation. The gaming machine according to any one of features F5 to F8, characterized in that the acceptance effect executing means performs the acceptance effect that does not reduce the distinguishability from the first specific situation.

According to the above configuration, in the second specific situation, when the first side of the plurality of second bet accepting means is operated, an acceptance effect is performed in which the distinguishability from the first specific situation is lowered. When the side is operated, an acceptance performance is performed in which the identifiability with the first specific situation is not lowered. In this way, the game is started by making the revolving body revolve by the player's own operation, and the revolving body is stopped by the user's own operation to end the game, which is within the real pleasure of the slot machine game. Therefore, it is possible to enjoy the performance effect of the performance in which the identifiability is lowered.

Feature F10. Based on the payout of the game media by the payout means, a payout appearance execution means (a function of executing a process of setting the payout appearance by the main control device 101) capable of executing a payout appearance according to the number of payouts is provided. ,
The number of game media that can be paid out by the payout means based on the first special winning combination is different from the number of game media that can be paid out by the paying out means based on the second special winning combination,
The specifying means performs the payout appearance executed by the payout appearance execution means based on the first specific role winning in the first specific situation, and based on the second specific role winning in the second specific situation. The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F9, wherein it is possible to reduce the distinguishability from the payout-out executed by the payout-out execution means.

According to the above configuration, since the distinguishability of payout appearances between the first special role and the second special role having different payout numbers is reduced, it is possible to determine whether the first special role won or the second special role won. becomes difficult to understand. Thereby, the playability of the feature F1 can be suitably realized.

Feature F11. A first specific number of game media is paid out by the payout means based on the first specific winning combination, and a second specific number of game media different from the first specific number is paid out based on the second specific winning combination. It is configured to be paid out by the paying out means,
The specifying means causes the payout/appearance execution means to execute the payout/appearance corresponding to the one specified number of payouts based on the winning of the second specified role, thereby obtaining the first specified situation and the second specified situation. The gaming machine according to feature F10, characterized in that the ability to distinguish between is reduced.

According to the above configuration, the effect of feature F10 can be favorably exhibited.

Feature F12. The second specific combination is a combination that can be won as a result of the lottery by the lottery means when the number of bets set by the number-of-bets setting means is the second number of bets,
The gaming machine according to feature F11, wherein the second specific number is set to be equal to or less than the second bet number.

According to the above configuration, for example, if the configuration has a function of crediting virtual game media, it becomes difficult to actually pay out the game media when the second special winning combination is established. In other words, in order to establish the second specific winning combination, the receiving means accepts the virtual game media of the second bet amount, and as a result, the second specific number of game media that is equal to or less than the second bet amount. is obtained, the second specific number of game media is considered to be within the credit. In this way, since game media are not actually paid out, it is possible to obtain the effect of lowering the identifiability just by paying out the game media.

Feature F13. The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F12, wherein the operation of the starting operation means is performed in response to an operation force of the receiving means by a player.

According to the above configuration, when the player operates the receiving means, the starting operation means is also operated, and the operation of the receiving means and the operation of the starting operation means are performed in conjunction with each other, so that the operability is improved. By doing so, the time lag between the operation of the receiving means and the operation of the starting operation means is less likely to occur, and the revolving body is started without giving time to recognize the number of virtual game media accepted by the receiving means. becomes possible. Therefore, in the configuration of selectively using the first special hand and the second special hand depending on the difference in the bet amount as in the feature F3, the distinguishability of the bet number is lowered, and either the first special hand or the second special hand is won. It is possible to make it difficult to understand whether a has occurred.

In addition, the above-mentioned configuration is such that "a receiving operation section for operating the receiving means and a starting operation section for operating the starting operating means are provided adjacent to each other, and the receiving operating section and the starting operating section are If a configuration is adopted in which the operation direction to be operated is made common, it is possible for the player to operate both operation units at the same time.

Further, in this case, it may be configured such that "there is provided an interlocking portion that presses the starting operation portion in the operation direction when the reception operation portion is operated in the operation direction."

<Characteristic group G>
Feature G1. a plurality of revolving bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction;
a display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern for each of the surrounding bodies;
Receiving means for receiving game media or virtual game media (medal insertion slot 45, credit insertion switches 56 to 58, 69);
A bet amount setting means (steps S204 and S205 by the main control device 101) for setting a game bet number up to a predetermined number as an upper limit after grasping that the game medium or virtual game medium has been received by the receiving means. function to perform processing) and
a starting operation means (start lever 41) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when operated;
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the circulation of each of the circulation bodies when operated;
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the starting operation means is operated, and stopping the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the stop operation means is operated function to perform processing) and
When the lottery result of the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at a valid position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized through the display unit, Privilege giving means (function for executing payout determination processing by the main control device 101) for giving the player a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result;
A gaming machine comprising
As the bet amount set by the bet amount setting means, a first bet number (3) and a second bet number (1 bet, 2 bets) different from the first bet amount are provided. cage,
Valid position setting means for setting the valid position according to the bet number set by the bet number setting means (function for executing valid line setting processing by the main controller 101);
When the bet amount set by the bet amount setting means is the first bet amount, the first effective position (lower right line L4) set by the effective position setting means and the bet amount setting means When the number of bets placed is the second number of bets, the second valid position (bending line L6) set by the valid position setting means is set to include a specific position that is a valid position that does not overlap with each other. A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the above configuration, it is possible to associate the game with the first bet amount and the game with the second bet amount by using the specific position. That is, the specific positions included on the first effective position side do not overlap with the second effective positions, and the specific positions included on the second effective position side do not overlap with the first effective positions. If such a relationship is used, for example, in a game played with the first bet number, a predetermined result is won by stopping a predetermined combination of symbols at a specific position, while a game played with the second bet number is awarded. , even if the predetermined symbol combination that wins the predetermined result in the first bet number is stopped at the position where the predetermined symbol combination was stopped, the position remains valid in the game played with the second bet amount. Since it is not regarded as a position, it does not result in winning a predetermined result. However, in the game played with the first number of bets, however, it appears that the predetermined result is a winning result, so in the game played with the second number of bets, it seems as if the predetermined result has been won. It is possible to show off. The reverse is also true, and if such a specific position that does not overlap the first effective position and the second effective position is used, as described above, one wins but the other does not. It is possible to increase the interest in the game by utilizing the commonality of the outcomes.

Feature G2. The first effective position is composed of a first specific position (lower right line L4) that does not overlap with the second effective position, and the second effective position is a second specific position (bending line L6) that does not overlap with the first effective position. ), and is set so that there is no overlapping valid position between the first valid position and the second valid position.

According to the above configuration, there are no effective positions that overlap each other between the first effective position and the second effective position. If there is an overlapping valid position, for example, in the case where a stop roll that results in a winning result in a game played with the first number of bets is to be stopped in a game played with the second number of bets. , the pattern combination corresponding to the result of the game with the second bet this time stops at the overlapping valid position, so that the desired outcome rule (the outcome of the game with the first bet and the second bet Inconvenience may arise that the rule of standardizing game results based on numbers collapses. Therefore, by eliminating overlapping effective positions as in the above configuration, it is possible to achieve the effect of the feature G1 while avoiding such inconvenience.

Feature G3. The effective position is a position that can be visually recognized through the display unit, and one stopping position at which the pattern attached to each of the rotating bodies can stop is set for each of the stopping positions of each of the rotating bodies. It is set as a line that combines each
The first specific position is set as a line that forms a straight line when combined with the stop positions, while the second specific position is set as a bending line that bends when combined with the stop positions. The gaming machine according to feature G2.

In a game machine in which a plurality of revolving bodies are stopped and a result is notified by a combination of patterns attached to the plurality of revolving bodies, patterns corresponding to a winning combination are aligned in a straight line and stopped as the combination of the patterns. It is easier for the player to understand the winning combination than to stop at the turning line. Based on this premise, in the case of the above configuration, the first specific position, which is set as a straight line, allows the player to see the stopped pattern more than the second specific position, which is set as a bent line. It is considered that the combination is easy to understand. By using such an event, for example, even if the combination of symbols corresponding to the result of the game of the second bet is stopped at the second specific position with the second bet, the result of the game of the second bet is If a predetermined pattern combination stops at the first specific position, eyes tend to be drawn to the predetermined pattern combination, and it is easy to make a misunderstanding as if a predetermined result winning has been established. Therefore, it is more preferable to use the first specific position and the second specific position to make the outcome common.

Feature G4. The stop positions included in the line of the first specific position and the stop positions included in the line of the second specific position are set so that there are common stop positions and non-common stop positions, respectively. The gaming machine according to feature G3, characterized in that:

According to the above configuration, the design is facilitated in terms of standardizing the outcome of the game based on both numbers of bets by using the first specific position and the second specific position. Specifically, for example, in the case where a stop dot that stops a predetermined pattern combination on the line of the first specific position is to appear in a game with a second bet number, the game with the second bet number is performed. It is necessary to stop the predetermined pattern combination at the first specific position while stopping the resulting pattern combination at the second specific position. It is only necessary to stop the patterns forming the predetermined pattern combination at the common stop position, and stop the patterns not forming the predetermined pattern combination at the uncommon stop position. As a result, the combination of the pattern stopped at the common stop position and the pattern stopped at the uncommon stop position is associated with the predetermined pattern combination, thereby simplifying the pattern configuration.

Feature G5. The gaming machine according to feature G4, wherein the number of the common stop positions is greater than the number of the non-common stop positions.

According to the above configuration, in the configuration of feature G4, among the patterns to be stopped at the second specific position, the number of patterns forming the predetermined pattern combination is greater than the patterns not forming the predetermined pattern combination. As a result, when designing the combination of various symbols in the game of the second bet for the game of the first bet, the combination of various symbols in the game of the first bet can be easily diverted. Therefore, while making good use of the existing configuration, it is possible to easily realize the novel playability of the feature G1.

Feature G6. The gaming machine according to any one of features G3 to G5, wherein the first bet amount is set to be larger than the second bet amount.

According to the above configuration, the first bet number on the side where the straight line is set as the valid position is larger than the second bet number on the side where the bent line is set as the valid position. Generally, the higher the number of bets, the higher the probability of winning a role (for example, a bonus), or the more benefits that can be obtained in the game. The number of bets that will be made is set as a straight line. By doing so, for example, in a game with the second bet amount, when a predetermined combination of symbols is stopped on a straight line, which is the first valid position, in view of the game normally played, it is This makes it possible for the player to easily understand that it is a stop roll corresponding to the winning of a predetermined result.

Feature G7. A first specific result (for example, a watermelon combination) is set as a result of winning the lottery by the lottery means under the condition of the first bet number,
A second specific result (for example, a special watermelon role) is set as a result of winning the lottery by the lottery means in the situation of the second bet number,
The privilege granting means is
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the first specified result, a privilege corresponding to the first specified result can be given by stopping the first specified pattern combination at the first specified position,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the second specified result, a privilege corresponding to the second specified result can be given by stopping the second specified pattern combination at the second specified position,
The first specific pattern combination is set to be established when the first specific patterns (for example, watermelon patterns) constituting the first specific pattern combination are aligned and stopped at the respective stop positions, The second specific pattern combination is established by stopping at each stop position a combination of a plurality of types of second specific patterns (for example, a watermelon pattern and a red bell pattern) constituting the second specific pattern combination. The game machine according to any one of features G3 to G6, characterized in that it is set as follows.

According to the above configuration, the first specific pattern combination that stops on a straight line is set as one type of first specific pattern combination, while the second specific pattern combination that stops on a bent line includes a plurality of types. Since it is set as a combination of the second specific pattern, the first specific pattern combination is more eye-catching than the second specific pattern combination, and it is easy to understand the winning combination from the stop roll. , even if the first specified pattern combination and the second specified pattern combination are respectively stopped, it is easy to understand that the first specified result winning has been established. This makes it easier to make the player think that the first specific result winning has been established even with the second specific result.

Feature G8. When the first specified picture combination stops at the first specified position, the second specified picture combination stops at the second specified position, and when the second specified picture combination stops at the second specified position, the The gaming machine according to feature G7, wherein a first specific pattern combination stops at the first specific position.

According to the above configuration, for example, in a game with a second bet amount, if a situation occurs in which the second specified pattern combination stops at the second specified position and the second specified result wins a prize. , the stop result is that the first specific symbol combination is stopped at the first specific position. By doing so, it is possible to make it easier to make the user think that even the second identification result is the first identification result.

<Characteristic group H>
Feature H1. a plurality of revolving bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction;
a display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern for each of the surrounding bodies;
Receiving means for receiving game media or virtual game media (medal insertion slot 45, credit insertion switches 56 to 58, 69);
A bet amount setting means (steps S204 and S205 by the main control device 101) for setting a game bet number up to a predetermined number as an upper limit after grasping that the game medium or virtual game medium has been received by the receiving means. function to perform processing) and
a starting operation means (start lever 41) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when operated;
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the circulation of each of the circulation bodies when operated;
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the starting operation means is operated, and stopping the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the stop operation means is operated function to perform processing) and
When the lottery result of the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at a valid position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized through the display unit, Privilege giving means (function for executing payout determination processing by the main control device 101) for giving the player a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result;
A gaming machine comprising
As a game mode
a first game mode (normal game mode) set so that the game medium can increase or decrease from the bet amount set by the bet amount setting means by playing a game;
a second game mode (specific mode) set so that the number of bets set by the number-of-bets set by the game is less likely to increase or decrease than in the first game mode;
is set and
In the second game mode, as a result of the lottery by the lottery means, the payout result (for example, the 26th P A game machine characterized by setting a special watermelon role as a minor role.

According to the above configuration, the first game mode is set so that the amount of game media can increase or decrease, and the second game mode is set so that the amount of game media is less likely to increase or decrease. A plurality of game modes can be executed in the game machine, thereby diversifying the games. In particular, since the second game mode hardly causes an increase or decrease in the number of game media, it can be used, for example, as a game mode for practice or a game mode for presentation, making it possible to make the game machine novel and unconventional. .

In the case of setting such a game mode in which increase and decrease of game media are unlikely to occur, for example, all the lottery results can be used as replay combinations. The replaying hand is a hand that allows the next game to be executed with the same number of bets as the bets set in the current game without requiring the acceptance of the game medium again. , is considered to be a favorable combination for performing the game mode for practice. In particular, when a replay win is established, it is common to automatically set the bet amount for the next game without accepting gaming media in the next game. By performing the game mode, there is also the merit of improving the operability as much as the acceptance operation becomes unnecessary.

However, if such a replay is set as all hands, the number of bets is automatically set as described above, so the second game mode as the game mode for practice , the number of bets is always set based on the winning of the replay, so that it may be difficult to end the second game mode. In this case, for example, it is necessary to add a configuration that allows the gaming machine to be turned on/off or that the game mode can be changed even when the bet amount is set based on the replay win.

Therefore, in the above configuration, the payout result is set such that the same number of game media as the bet amount is paid out, instead of setting all of the winning combinations as replays, thereby automatically setting the bet amount. It is possible to provide a game machine that has the novel game property of the second game mode, which has never existed in the past, together with the first game mode while avoiding the above.

Regarding the “second game mode”, for example, it may be expressed as “a second game mode that is set so that the amount of game media does not increase or decrease”, or “a second game mode that allows the status quo of game media to be maintained”. It may be expressed as "game mode".

Regarding the "first game mode" and the "second game mode", for example, "the first game mode in which the first bet amount is set by the bet amount setting means and the first game mode in which the bet amount setting means sets the first bet amount." It may be expressed as "second game mode in which a second bet number different from the bet amount is set."

Feature H2. The second game mode is set as a mode capable of executing a game imitating the game of the first game mode,
When a game is played in the second game mode, means capable of executing identification notification indicating that the game is a game imitating the game in the first game mode (executing processing for performing identification display by the display control device 81 function).

According to the above configuration, in realizing the novel second game mode such as the practice game mode shown in feature H1, it is possible for the player to clearly recognize the positioning of the second game mode.

Feature H3. The first game mode is a game mode executed when the first bet number (3 or 2) is set by the bet amount setting means,
According to feature H1 or feature H2, the second game mode is a game mode executed when a second bet amount different from the first bet amount is set by the bet amount setting means. game machine.

According to the above configuration, the first game mode and the second game mode are realized by the difference in the number of bets. In this way, since it is only necessary to make the game medium or virtual game medium to be received by the receiving means different for each game mode, the player can choose which game mode to play in according to his/her will. becomes possible. Here, in order to realize a plurality of game modes with different bet amounts, if one of the game modes is all replayed as described in the feature H1, automatic Due to the standard setting of the bet amount, the next game must be played in the same game mode. In that respect, as described in the feature H1, since the second game mode is realized by the payout result, even if you want to set the next game to the first game mode, a different bet number (first bet number) , and it is possible to suitably execute the first game mode and the second game mode.

Feature H4. A replay combination as a lottery result by the lottery means, and a transition result corresponding to shifting the game state from the normal game state to a specific state in which the winning probability of each combination in the lottery by the lottery means changes (for example, 1st PBB, 2nd PBB, etc.) 2PBB) is set,
Lottery by the lottery means in a first predetermined state (normal game state) of the normal game state in the first game mode and a second predetermined state (normal game state) of the normal game state in the second game mode The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H3, wherein the probability of winning the replay role is set to be the same or substantially the same.

According to the above configuration, not only the payout result but also the replay combination are set even in the second game mode in which the game media are set so as not to increase or decrease. The replay combination is set with the same or substantially the same winning probability in the first predetermined state of the first game mode and the second predetermined state of the second game mode. Based on the premise that the first game mode is a general game mode, the replay role of the second game mode is set so that the winning probability of the replay role in the general game mode is the same or substantially the same. If is set, it is possible to play the game with the same feeling as usual in both the practice mode and the second game mode as the game mode, and it is possible to improve the significance of the practice mode. Become. Also, assuming that the first game mode is a general game mode as described above, in the general game mode, the winning probability of the replay combination is determined by setting other minor combinations. It should be a winning probability, and even if the replay role is set as a high probability to win the replay role other than the other small role, other small roles in the general game mode A payout result can be expected in the second game mode as well, with a probability that a winning combination can be established. Then, in the second game mode, almost all the results are replayed hands, and very rarely a payout result occurs.

It should be noted that the "substantially the same probability" does not mean that the probability is exactly the same, but it is sufficient that the probability is such that the player can recognize that the probability is the same, in other words, the probability is different. It is sufficient if the probabilities are such that it is difficult to do so.

Feature H5. In the normal game state in the first game mode, a plurality of re-game states (normal game state, first to third RT states) with different probabilities that the lottery result by the lottery means wins the re-game role are set. and
The gaming machine according to feature H4, wherein the first predetermined state is set as one of the plurality of replay states.

According to the above configuration, the second predetermined state in the second game mode has the same or substantially the same probability of winning a replay role as any replay state of the plurality of replay states in the first game mode. is set to be In this way, not only is the playability of the first game mode improved by a plurality of replay states, but the second game mode can be positioned as a practice mode corresponding to one of the states. The playability of the 2-game mode is clarified.

Feature H6. The gaming machine according to feature H5, wherein the plurality of replay states (normal game state, first to third RT states) are not set in the normal game state in the second game mode.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to simplify the second game mode in the gaming machine having the feature H5. That is, while the first game mode is set with a plurality of replay states, the second game mode as the practice mode is not set with a plurality of replay states, so the second game mode is the first game mode. This is a simpler mode than By doing so, in designing a game machine having a plurality of game modes such as the first game mode and the second game mode using the limited memory area of the game machine, a memory area twice as large as the normal one can be used. It is possible to prevent the inconvenience of securing and the inconvenience of simplifying the general first game mode.

In addition, the above configuration may be expressed as "the normal game state in the second game mode is set so that the probability of winning the replay role in the lottery by the lottery means does not change".

Feature H7. In the first game mode, when the lottery result by the lottery means is that the replay role is won and the pattern combination for replay corresponding to the replay role stops at the effective position, the replay role winning is established. As a privilege corresponding to , the number of bets can be set by the number-of-bet setting means without allowing the receiving means to receive the game media or virtual game media in the next game,
As a kind of the replay pattern combination, the replay patterns (first replay pattern, second replay pattern), which are patterns constituting the replay pattern combination, are aligned and stopped at the effective position. A pattern combination that forms a pattern combination for replay is set,
As the payout result as the lottery result in the second game mode, the payout of the same number of game media as the number of bets is given as the privilege by stopping all the replay symbols. The gaming machine according to feature H6, characterized in that a small winning combination is set.

As in the above configuration, if the stop roll corresponding to the result of the replay payout appears, the replay symbols are visually aligned and stopped, making it possible to make it appear as if the replay winning combination has been established. However, since the same number of game media as the number of bets is paid out, the effect of being able to play the next game without requiring new game media is the same as winning a replay role. Therefore, even if the winning probability of the replay role is uniformly set in the second game mode, if the winning probability or the appearance rate of the replay payout result is changed, the winning probability of the replay role will be as if it were different. You can make it look like you are changing. Therefore, it is possible to bring the game characteristics closer to the first game mode without setting a plurality of states in which the winning probability of the replay combination is different in the second game mode.

Feature H8. When the lottery result of the lottery means is the re-game payout result, the drive control means establishes the re-game payout result win when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation order, Means (executing reel control processing by main controller 101) for preventing establishment of winning as a result of regame payout when the stop operation means is operated in a second operation order different from the first operation order. The gaming machine according to feature H7, characterized in that it has a function to

According to the above configuration, it is possible to realize the case where the replay payout result win is desired to appear and the case where it is not desired to appear without changing the winning probability of the regame payout result. Therefore, in the gaming machine having the feature H7, it is no longer necessary to provide a plurality of states with different winning probabilities for replay payout results, thereby simplifying the configuration of the second game mode.

Feature H9. When the lottery result of the lottery means is the re-game payout result and the stop operation means is operated in the first operation order to establish the re-game payout result win, The same number of game media as the number of bets is paid out as the privilege, and the same number as the number of bets is provided even when the stop operation means is operated in the second operation order and the winning is not established as a result of the re-game payout. The gaming machine according to feature H8, wherein the payout of the game medium is provided as the privilege.

According to the above configuration, the same number of game media as the number of bets are paid out regardless of whether or not a win is established as a result of the re-game payout when the re-game payout result is won. In this way, regardless of whether or not a prize has been won, it is possible to realize a game property in which the number of game media does not increase or decrease by always playing the same game.

Feature H10. Regardless of the lottery result in the first game mode, the game according to any one of the features H1 to H9, characterized by being capable of switching from the first game mode to the second game mode. machine.

According to the above configuration, if the second game mode is to be executed while the first game mode is being performed, it can be executed at any time, and the second game mode cannot be executed unless some game result is obtained. In comparison, the degree of freedom of the game is improved.

Feature H11. Predetermined effect execution means for executing a predetermined effect in the second game mode (function for performing processing for executing various effects for a specific mode by the display control device 81),
Said predetermined effect executing means, in a situation in which a regulation condition (for example, bonus winning) established during said first game mode is established, when switching from said first game mode to said second game mode is performed The gaming machine according to feature H10, wherein the execution of the predetermined effect is restricted.

According to the above configuration, switching between the first game mode and the second game mode can be freely performed, but when the regulation condition is satisfied, the predetermined effect is restricted even if the game mode is switched to the second game mode. By doing so, it is possible to let the player know when the first game mode should not be switched to the second game mode while allowing the free switching between the two game modes.

Feature H12. In the normal game state in the first game mode, a plurality of game states (normal game state, first to third RT states) with different probabilities that the lottery result by the lottery means wins a predetermined combination are set,
The second game mode is set as a mode capable of executing a game imitating the game of the first game mode,
Setting means for setting the second game mode (function for executing a specific mode switching process by the display control device 81),
Any one of the characteristics H1 to H11, wherein the setting means can be set to start the current second game mode from one game state of a plurality of game states in the first game mode. The game machine described.

According to the above configuration, the second game mode can be played as a simulated trial version of the first game mode without increasing or decreasing the amount of game media. Since it is possible to set which of the game states in the first game mode to start the simulation experience by the setting means, the playability of the second game mode is improved.

Feature H13. Penalty means (function of executing penalty processing by main controller 101) capable of performing specific processing that is disadvantageous to the player when a specific operation of the stop operation means that is subject to a predetermined penalty is performed. prepared,
The penalty means performs the specific processing when the specific operation is performed in the first game mode, and performs the specific processing when the specific operation is performed in the second game mode. The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H12, characterized in that it is configured not to perform the specific process or to perform a process with a reduced degree of disadvantage for the player when the specific process is performed.

According to the above configuration, in the configuration in which a specific process that is disadvantageous to the player as a penalty is performed when a specific operation that is subject to a predetermined penalty is performed in the first game mode, such a configuration is added to the second game mode. If it is uniformly applied to the game mode, it may be inconvenient to use the second game mode, which is a so-called practice mode. In other words, in the first game mode, the above-mentioned penalty is given to, for example, an act of intentionally trying to obtain the game medium. This is because if the penalty is given to the second game mode as well, it goes against the gist of the second game mode.

Feature H14. Based on the specific operation, a specific notification execution means (function for executing penalty notification by the display control device 81) capable of executing specific notification that the specific process is performed by the penalty means,
The specific notification executing means performs the specific notification when the specific operation is performed in the first game mode, and also performs the specific notification when the specific operation is performed in the second game mode. The game machine according to feature H13, characterized by performing

According to the above configuration, in the gaming machine having the characteristic H13, although no penalty is given in the second game mode, the specific notification is performed. As a result, even in the second game mode, if the specific operation is performed, it becomes possible to make the player understand that the operation would give a penalty in the first game mode, and this is a practice mode. It can improve the meaning of things.

Feature H15. Characteristic feature H14 characterized in that the specific notification executing means is capable of executing content notification indicating the content of the specific processing when the specific operation is performed in the second game mode. The gaming machine described in .

According to the above configuration, when the specific operation is performed in the second specific mode, no penalty is given, but the details of the penalty (specific process details) are notified. As a result, the fear of the penalty given when the specific operation is performed in the first game mode is made known to prevent the specific operation from being performed, and the second game mode is a practice mode. It is possible to improve the meaning.

Feature H16. a plurality of revolving bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction;
a display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern for each of the surrounding bodies;
Receiving means for receiving game media or virtual game media (medal insertion slot 45, credit insertion switches 56 to 58, 69);
A bet amount setting means (steps S204 and S205 by the main control device 101) for setting a game bet number up to a predetermined number as an upper limit after grasping that the game medium or virtual game medium has been received by the receiving means. function to perform processing) and
a starting operation means (start lever 41) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when operated;
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the circulation of each of the circulation bodies when operated;
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the starting operation means is operated, and stopping the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the stop operation means is operated function to perform processing) and
When the lottery result of the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at a valid position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized through the display unit, Privilege giving means (function for executing payout determination processing by the main control device 101) for giving the player a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result;
A gaming machine comprising
As a game mode
a first game mode (normal game mode) set so that the game medium can increase or decrease from the bet amount set by the bet amount setting means by playing a game;
a second game mode (specific mode) in which the number of bets set by the bet amount setting means does not increase or decrease by playing a game;
is set and
Penalty means (function for executing penalty process by main controller 101) capable of performing specific processing that is disadvantageous to the player when a specific operation of the stop operation means that is subject to a predetermined penalty is performed.
with
The penalty means performs the specific processing when the specific operation is performed in the first game mode, and performs the specific processing when the specific operation is performed in the second game mode. A gaming machine characterized in that it performs a process that does not perform or reduces the degree of disadvantage for the player when the specific process is performed.

According to the above configuration, the first game mode is set so that the amount of game media can increase or decrease, and the second game mode is set so that the amount of game media does not increase or decrease. A plurality of game modes can be executed in the game machine, thereby diversifying the games. In particular, since the second game mode does not increase or decrease the number of game media, it can be used as, for example, a game mode for practice or a game mode for presentation, making it possible to make the game machine novel and unconventional. .

Further, when a specific operation that is subject to a predetermined penalty is performed in the first game mode, a specific process that is disadvantageous to the player is performed as a penalty. Here, if such a configuration of specific processing is uniformly applied to the second game mode, it may be inconvenient to use the second game mode, which is a so-called practice mode. In other words, in the first game mode, the above-mentioned penalty is given to, for example, an act of intentionally trying to obtain the game medium. This is because if the penalty is given to the second game mode as well, it goes against the gist of the second game mode. Therefore, with the above configuration, it is possible to favorably execute the second game mode, which is a practice mode.

Regarding the "second game mode", for example, it may be expressed as "a second game mode in which increase or decrease of game media is less likely to occur", or expressed as "a second game mode that allows the status quo of game media to be maintained". You may

Regarding the "first game mode" and the "second game mode", for example, "the first game mode in which the first bet amount is set by the bet amount setting means and the first game mode in which the bet amount setting means sets the first bet amount." It may be expressed as "second game mode in which a second bet number different from the bet amount is set."

The inventions shown in the following characteristic groups I to O are known as "a pachinko machine, a slot machine, etc., as types of gaming machines. These gaming machines have game media such as surplus tokens in the storage unit. (See, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2005-323750).” Regarding the background art, “Here, in the game machines exemplified above, there is still improvement in terms of usability of the auxiliary tank. There is room for.” This invention was made with the problem to be solved.

<Characteristic group I>
Features I1. a housing (housing 11) opened forward;
a door (front door 12) for opening and closing the front opening of the housing;
A hopper device (hopper device 51) installed in the housing and having a storage portion (storage tank 52) for storing game media;
an auxiliary tank (auxiliary tank 54) that is installed in a predetermined installation area in the housing side by side with the hopper device and that stores surplus game media in the storage section;
with
The auxiliary tank has a bottomed shape having an opening (upper opening 502) at the upper end and a bottom (bottom plate portion 501a) at the lower end,
a first engaging portion (right flange portion 571c) provided on the auxiliary tank;
A second engaging portion (engaging portion 574) provided in the housing and capable of engaging with the first engaging portion,
The auxiliary tank is installed in the predetermined installation area in a first orientation (upward orientation) in which the opening is on the upper side and the bottom portion is on the lower side, and in a second orientation different from the first orientation. is possible and
When the auxiliary tank is installed in the first direction, the first engaging portion and the second engaging portion are not engaged, and the auxiliary tank is installed in the second direction. A gaming machine, wherein the first engaging portion and the second engaging portion are engaged with each other when the auxiliary tank is in position, and the engagement restricts the movement of the auxiliary tank.

From the viewpoint of preventing loss of the auxiliary tank during transportation of the gaming machine, it is desirable to transport the gaming machine with the auxiliary tank stored in the housing. However, when manually collecting game media stored in an auxiliary tank in a game machine, the auxiliary tank must be removed from the housing, so the auxiliary tank must be stored in a free state without being fixed. Therefore, if the game machine is tilted or vibrated during transportation, the auxiliary tank moves within the housing and collides with the surrounding hopper device, door body, and the like, resulting in damage.

In this regard, in this configuration, when the auxiliary tank is installed in the first orientation with the opening facing upward and the bottom facing downward, the first engaging portion and the second engaging portion are not engaged, The first engaging portion and the second engaging portion are configured to engage when the auxiliary tank is installed in a second orientation different from the first orientation. When the game medium from the reservoir is to be stored in the auxiliary tank, it is assumed that it will be used in the first orientation. In such a case, the auxiliary tank can be put in a free state, allowing it to be removed from the housing. it becomes possible to On the other hand, when the auxiliary tank is installed in the second orientation, the engaging portions are engaged to restrict movement of the auxiliary tank within the housing. By installing the auxiliary tank in the second direction when the game machine is being transported, it is possible to prevent the auxiliary tank from rattling during transportation, and to prevent the above-described inconvenience from occurring. In other words, according to the present invention, it is possible to restrict the movement of the auxiliary tank during transport, while permitting the removal operation of the auxiliary tank when the game machine is in operation, thereby significantly improving convenience.

Moreover, in the present invention, since the orientation of the auxiliary tank corresponds to switching between the engaged state and the disengaged state, the external appearance of the auxiliary tank is changed depending on whether it is in the engaged state or the disengaged state. can be differentiated. For example, if the engagement point is a blind spot for the employee of the game hall (the worker who takes out the auxiliary tank), the operator may forcefully take out the tank without noticing that it is in the engaged state. There is a risk of damaging the first engaging portion, the second engaging portion, and the like. In this respect, according to this configuration, the difference in the appearance of the auxiliary tank makes it possible to notice the difference in state at a glance. In this case, for example, if the operator is notified in advance that the presence or absence of engagement differs depending on the orientation of the auxiliary tank, it is easy to determine which of the above states the operator is in, without requiring confirmation of the engagement location. This makes it possible to suppress unreasonable removal operations.

In addition, in this configuration, when the auxiliary tank is installed in the second orientation, it can be installed by utilizing the installation area for installation in the first orientation. As a result, it is possible to eliminate the need to secure a dedicated space for transportation, etc., and to minimize the expansion of the installation space, making it suitable for game machines with limited installation areas for mounted parts. can do.

Feature I2. The door body is rotatably connected to the housing at one side portion of the game machine, and the door body and the housing are provided at the side portion opposite to the one side portion of the game machine. A locking device is arranged to lock the
The predetermined installation area is set at a location near the side of the opposite side in the housing,
The gaming machine according to feature I1, wherein the upward movement of the auxiliary tank is restricted by engaging the first engaging portion and the second engaging portion.

In the above configuration, since the locking device is provided on the side opposite to the pivot shaft of the door, it is possible to prevent the door from opening in the locked state. Since the installation area of is set closer to the side of the door body opposite to the pivot shaft, the auxiliary tank can be easily taken in and out. However, in a configuration in which the locking device and the installation area of the auxiliary tank are arranged on the same side, when the auxiliary tank moves upward during transportation of the game machine, the auxiliary tank is caught in the position where it interferes with the locking device, Even if the unlocking operation is performed, it may not be possible to unlock the door. In this regard, in the above configuration, the upward movement of the auxiliary tank is restricted by the engagement between the first engaging portion and the second engaging portion, so that the occurrence of the above inconvenience can be suppressed.

Feature I3. The gaming machine according to feature I1 or I2, wherein the second direction is a direction in which the auxiliary tank is turned upside down with respect to the first direction.

According to this configuration, the size of the space occupied in the installation area can be made almost the same between when the auxiliary tank is installed in the first direction and when it is installed in the second direction. Therefore, the auxiliary tank can be installed in the second orientation by utilizing the installation area for installation in the first orientation, and it is possible to suppress expansion of the installation area.

Feature I4. When the auxiliary tank is installed in the first direction and when the auxiliary tank is installed in the second direction, the size of the tank overlap area on the tank installation surface of the installation area is different. The gaming machine according to feature I3, wherein the tank overlapping area is larger when the tank is installed in the orientation 2.

When the game machine is transported, the auxiliary tank is installed in the housing in the second orientation. In such a case, the movement of the game machine itself causes the auxiliary tank to generate force depending on the orientation of the housing, etc., but the auxiliary tank is engaged with the housing side, and the tank overlapping area on the tank installation surface is large. Therefore, the auxiliary tank can be held in a stable state. In addition, when the auxiliary tank is installed in the first direction, the tank overlap area on the tank installation surface is small, so the auxiliary tank is installed in the first direction in the operating state of the game machine. and an engaging portion (second engaging portion) on the housing side.

Feature I5. The first engaging portion and the second engaging portion match in height position when the auxiliary tank is installed in the second orientation, and when the auxiliary tank is installed in the first orientation. A gaming machine according to feature I3 or I4, characterized in that the mutual positional relationship is set so that the height positions do not match when there is one.

According to the above configuration, when the auxiliary tank is installed in the first orientation, the first engaging portion and the second engaging portion are unintentionally engaged to prevent the movement of the auxiliary tank from being restricted. can be suppressed.

Feature I6. In the auxiliary tank, at least a portion of the peripheral edge of the opening is provided with a projecting portion (right flange portion 571c) projecting outward,
The game according to any one of features I3 to I5, wherein the projecting portion constitutes the first engaging portion, and the second engaging portion is provided on the tank installation surface of the installation area. machine.

According to the above configuration, when the auxiliary tank is installed in the second orientation, the first engaging portion and the second engaging portion are properly engaged, and the first engaging portion is engaged when the auxiliary tank is turned upside down. The height position of the part can be changed greatly. As a result, when the auxiliary tank is installed in the first direction, the first engaging portion and the second engaging portion are unintentionally engaged to prevent the movement of the auxiliary tank from being restricted. Become.

Feature I7. The projecting portion is provided at a portion extending in the front-rear direction of the game machine in a state where the auxiliary tank is installed in the installation area at the peripheral edge portion of the opening,
The first engaging portion and the second engaging portion are engaged and disengaged by sliding the auxiliary tank in the longitudinal direction of the game machine within the housing. The gaming machine according to feature I6.

According to the above configuration, when the auxiliary tank is installed in the second orientation, it is possible to engage the auxiliary tank in the housing by using the projecting portion provided on the peripheral edge of the opening of the auxiliary tank. can. In addition, considering that the hopper device and the auxiliary tank are provided side by side in the housing, when the auxiliary tank is installed in the first direction, the projecting portion prevents the auxiliary tank from being attached to the hopper device and the wall of the housing. position is regulated. Therefore, even if the auxiliary tank is not engaged in the first orientation, it is possible to restrict the displacement of the auxiliary tank.

Feature I8. Equipped with storage state detection means (upper sensor bar 16a, lower sensor bar 16b and main controller 101) for detecting the storage state of game media in the auxiliary tank,
The storage state detection means includes insertion members (upper sensor rod 16a, lower having a sensor bar 16b),
A plurality of said through-holes are provided in a vertical arrangement,
In both the case where the auxiliary tank is installed in the first direction and the case where the auxiliary tank is installed in the second direction, the insertion member is positioned in one of the plurality of insertion holes. The gaming machine according to any one of the features I3 to I7, characterized in that it is insertable.

According to the above configuration, the insertion member of the storage state detecting means is positioned inside the tank main body regardless of whether the auxiliary tank is installed in the first direction or the auxiliary tank is installed in the second direction. can be made As a result, it is possible to detect the storage state of the game media regardless of the vertical orientation of the auxiliary tank, and it is possible to provide a configuration suitable for installing the auxiliary tank upside down.

Feature I9. By sliding the auxiliary tank in the longitudinal direction of the gaming machine in the housing, the first engaging portion and the second engaging portion are engaged and disengaged,
Equipped with storage state detection means (upper sensor bar 16a, lower sensor bar 16b and main controller 101) for detecting the storage state of game media in the auxiliary tank,
The storage state detection means includes insertion members (upper sensor rod 16a, lower having a sensor bar 16b),
The insertion member extends in the longitudinal direction of the gaming machine and extends in the same direction as the tank installation surface of the installation area in the height direction,
The game according to any one of features I3 to I8, wherein the insertion member can be inserted into and removed from the insertion hole by sliding the auxiliary tank in the longitudinal direction of the game machine within the housing. machine.

When the auxiliary tank is installed in the housing in the first orientation and the game medium is stored in the auxiliary tank, the auxiliary tank is relatively heavy. It is considered that the auxiliary tank is pulled out of the housing by sliding on the tank installation surface from the front opening side of the housing. In this case, since the auxiliary tank is slid, the insertion member inserted through the insertion hole of the auxiliary tank is pulled out from the auxiliary tank without receiving excessive force.

In contrast, when the auxiliary tank is installed in the housing in the second orientation, the auxiliary tank is empty and relatively light in weight. Therefore, when the auxiliary tank is taken out by the operator, it is conceivable that the auxiliary tank is pulled out of the housing while being lifted forward. In this case, there is concern that the insertion member inserted through the insertion hole of the auxiliary tank may receive excessive force from the auxiliary tank. In this regard, since the auxiliary tank is slid in the front-rear direction of the game machine, the engagement and disengagement of the first engaging portion and the second engaging portion are performed. It is possible to suppress receiving excessive force from That is, the insertion member can be protected.

Feature I10. Of the side wall portions that surround the bottom portion of the auxiliary tank and rise from the peripheral edge portion of the bottom portion, the side wall portion that faces the second engaging portion when the auxiliary tank is installed in the first orientation ( The left side wall portion 501e) has an inclined shape in which the distance from the side wall portion (right side wall portion 501d) facing the inner side of the auxiliary tank increases as it goes upward. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

According to the above configuration, when the auxiliary tank is oriented in the first direction, the side wall portion facing the second engaging portion is inclined such that the interval between the facing side wall portions increases upward. Therefore, when the auxiliary tank is installed in the first orientation, it becomes easier to secure a space between the auxiliary tank and the second engaging portion, and interference between the two can be suppressed.

Feature I11. A bottom plate opening (medal discharge hole 15) is provided in the bottom plate portion of the housing, and game media can be discharged to the outside of the gaming machine through the bottom plate opening.
When the auxiliary tank is installed in the second orientation, the bottom plate opening is covered by the auxiliary tank, and the first engaging portion and the second engaging portion are engaged on the outside of the auxiliary tank. The gaming machine according to any one of features I3 to I10, characterized in that it is constructed so that a match is made.

When transporting the game machine, a foreign object or a hand is introduced into the bottom plate opening from the outside of the game machine to release the engagement between the first engaging portion and the second engaging portion, remove the auxiliary tank, and move the inside of the game machine. It is assumed that the act of trying to gain unauthorized access to According to the above configuration, the bottom plate opening is covered with the auxiliary tank, and the engagement relationship between the first engaging portion and the second engaging portion is established outside the auxiliary tank. A wall portion of the auxiliary tank can be interposed between the portion. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to access the engaging portion through the opening of the bottom plate, thereby suppressing the fraudulent act.

Feature I12. A bottom plate opening (medal discharge hole 15) is provided in the bottom plate portion of the housing, and game media can be discharged to the outside of the gaming machine through the bottom plate opening.
The gaming machine according to any one of features I3 to I11, wherein the bottom portion of the auxiliary tank can be opened and closed by an opening/closing means (bottom lid 514) provided at the bottom portion.

According to the above configuration, by opening the bottom of the auxiliary tank, it is possible to guide the game medium from the reservoir directly to the bottom plate opening. As a result, it is possible to automatically collect the auxiliary tank while it is installed in the housing, and in addition to eliminating the need to secure a storage space for the auxiliary tank in the game hall, it is possible to reduce the loss of the auxiliary tank. .

Feature I13. The opening/closing means is configured to open the bottom portion by moving inside the auxiliary tank,
The gaming machine according to feature I12, wherein the auxiliary tank comprises holding means for holding the opening/closing means in the closed position.

According to the above configuration, since the holding means for holding the opening/closing means in the closed position is provided, it is possible to transport the game machine with the bottom portion of the auxiliary tank closed.

Feature I14. The auxiliary tank is provided with a display section on which predetermined information is displayed,
When the auxiliary tank is installed in the second direction, the predetermined information becomes visible or easily visible in the first mode, and when the auxiliary tank is installed in the first direction, the predetermined information The gaming machine according to any one of features I3 to I13, wherein the second mode is invisible or harder to see than the first mode.

According to the above configuration, when the auxiliary tank is oriented in the second direction, the predetermined information can be visually recognized or easily visually recognized. Operation can be suppressed. Conversely, when the auxiliary tank is oriented in the first direction, the predetermined information becomes invisible or difficult to see, thereby suppressing the confusion of the operator due to the display of the predetermined information and hindering the collection of game media. can be suppressed.

The predetermined information includes information explaining a release method for releasing the engaged state, information calling attention to removing the auxiliary tank, information suggesting or indicating that the auxiliary tank is fixed, and information indicating that the auxiliary tank is fixed. information suggesting or specifying that it is the bottom of the tank, or information suggesting or specifying the raw materials and forming materials of the auxiliary tank. Note that the predetermined information does not necessarily have to be characters, and may be composed of colors, shapes, patterns, and the like.

<Characteristic group J>
Feature J1. a housing (housing 11) opened forward;
a door (front door 12) for opening and closing the front opening of the housing;
A hopper device (hopper device 51) installed in the housing and having a storage portion (storage tank 52) for storing game media;
an auxiliary tank (auxiliary tank 54) that is installed in a predetermined installation area in the housing side by side with the hopper device and that stores surplus game media in the storage section;
with
The bottom plate portion of the housing is provided with a bottom plate opening (medal discharge hole 15) for discharging the game medium inside the game machine to the outside of the game machine,
The auxiliary tank has a bottomed shape having an opening at the upper end and a bottom at the lower end,
The bottom portion is provided with opening/closing means (bottom lid 514) for opening and closing the bottom portion,
The auxiliary tank has a first orientation (upward orientation) in which the opening is on the upper side and the bottom portion is on the lower side in the predetermined installation area, and a second orientation in which the opening is on the lower side and the bottom portion is on the upper side. It can be installed in each orientation (downward orientation),
A game machine, comprising a switching mechanism that closes the opening/closing means in the first direction and opens the opening/closing means in the second direction.

According to the above configuration, since the tank bottom can be opened and closed, the auxiliary tank can be adapted for manual recovery by closing the bottom, and can be adapted for automatic recovery by opening the bottom. As a result, the auxiliary tank can be installed in the housing even during automatic collection, and in addition to eliminating the need to secure a storage space for the auxiliary tank in the game hall, loss of the auxiliary tank can be suppressed.

In addition, in the above configuration, the bottom portion can be opened as the auxiliary tank is turned upside down from the first orientation to the second orientation, so that the switching operation to the open state can be simplified. Moreover, in this configuration, since opening and closing of the bottom portion is associated with the orientation of the auxiliary tank, it is possible to easily grasp which aspect it is. For example, in the case of a thing that only switches between opening and closing under the first orientation, it is difficult to grasp which state it is in unless one looks into the inside of the auxiliary tank. As a result, it may be used in an erroneous manner, such as using it in an open state when it should be used in a closed state. In this regard, in this configuration, the appearance of the auxiliary tank can be different depending on whether it is in the closed state or the open state, so that the difference in state can be noticed at a glance. In particular, when the bottom is on the upper side, it is configured to be in an open state, so that it is easy to notice that the bottom is empty, and it is possible to suppress use in an erroneous manner.

Feature J2. The gaming machine according to feature J1, wherein the auxiliary tank is installed in the predetermined installation area in the second direction when the game media are automatically collected.

By orienting the auxiliary tank in the second direction, the bottom of the auxiliary tank can be switched to an open state, so that it is possible to prevent the bottom from being left unopened when used in correspondence with automatic collection.

Feature J3. The opening/closing means is rotatably supported by a supporting means (supporting portion 504), and is rotated toward the inside of the auxiliary tank to open the bottom portion,
The game machine according to feature J1 or J2, wherein the opening/closing means is rotated and opened by its own weight when the auxiliary tank is oriented in the second direction.

According to the above configuration, since the opening/closing means rotates under its own weight to open the bottom portion, the bottom portion of the auxiliary tank can be opened as the auxiliary tank is oriented in the second direction. can be suppressed. In this case, there is no need for a drive section for rotating the opening/closing means to open the bottom, or a control configuration for controlling the drive section according to the attitude of the auxiliary tank. be possible.

Feature J4. The opening/closing means is rotatably supported by a supporting means (supporting portion 504), and is rotated toward the inside of the auxiliary tank to open the bottom portion,
According to any one of features J1 to J3, characterized in that when the auxiliary tank is in the second orientation, at least the support-side proximal end of the opening/closing means is covered from above by the bottom of the auxiliary tank. game machine.

According to the above configuration, the game media from the reservoir are prevented from colliding with the support-side proximal end portion of the opening/closing means to hinder the support. In this case, by using the bottom portion of the auxiliary tank as a covering portion that covers the base end portion on the support side, there is no need to provide a special component, and the construction of the auxiliary tank can be simplified.

Feature J5. The opening/closing means is rotatably supported by a supporting means (supporting portion 504), and is rotated toward the inside of the auxiliary tank to open the bottom portion,
The auxiliary tank includes rotation limiting means (protruding portion 535) for limiting the rotation range of the opening/closing means,
The rotation upper limit angle (predetermined rotation angle α) by the rotation limiting means is an angle at which the opening/closing means rotates to the closing side by its own weight when the auxiliary tank is oriented in the first direction. The gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J4, characterized by:

According to the above configuration, when the auxiliary tank is oriented in the first direction, the opening/closing means rotates under its own weight to close the bottom. can be closed, and the possibility of forgetting to close can be suppressed. In this case, there is no need for a drive unit for rotating the opening/closing means to close the bottom, or a control configuration for controlling the drive unit according to the attitude of the auxiliary tank, so the configuration can be simplified and the cost can be reduced. be possible.

Feature J6. Characteristic J5 characterized in that the opening/closing means is tilted toward the closing side when the opening/closing means is rotated to the upper rotation limit angle while the auxiliary tank is oriented in the first direction. The gaming machine described in .

According to the above configuration, when the auxiliary tank is oriented in the first direction, the opening/closing means can be tilted toward the closing side by its own weight, and the bottom of the auxiliary tank can be naturally closed.

It should be noted that this feature is defined as "when the opening/closing means is rotated to the upper rotation angle with the auxiliary tank oriented in the first direction, the center of gravity of the opening/closing means is aligned with the rotation axis of the opening/closing means. It is configured to be located on the closed side with respect to an imaginary vertical line passing through."

Feature J7. The opening/closing means is rotatably supported by a supporting means (supporting portion 504), and is rotated toward the inside of the auxiliary tank to open the bottom portion,
Inside the auxiliary tank, when the auxiliary tank is installed in the second direction, the opening/closing means is rotated to the opening side, and a rotation limiter for limiting the rotation angle of the opening/closing means on the opening side is provided. A game machine according to any one of features J1 to J6, characterized in that members (upper sensor bar 16a, lower sensor bar 16b) are provided.

According to the above configuration, when an object such as a foreign object enters through the opening of the bottom plate to open the bottom of the auxiliary tank during transportation of the game machine, the rotation restricting member can prevent the opening of the bottom of the auxiliary tank. This prevents the bottom of the auxiliary tank from being completely opened, making it difficult for unauthorized access to the inside of the gaming machine to occur.

Feature J8. Equipped with storage state detection means (upper sensor bar 16a, lower sensor bar 16b, main controller 101) for detecting the storage state of game media in the auxiliary tank,
The storage state detection means includes insertion members (upper sensor rod 16a, lower having a sensor bar 16b),
The gaming machine according to feature J7, wherein the insertion member constitutes the rotation restricting member.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to restrict the rotation of the opening/closing member by utilizing the accommodation state detecting means without providing a dedicated member as the rotation restricting member. Further, when the auxiliary tank is installed with the insertion member inserted into the tank when the game machine is transported, the rotation of the opening/closing means can be restricted, and the restriction can be released by removing the auxiliary tank from the housing. . That is, it is possible to switch between presence and absence of restrictions depending on the situation, thereby improving convenience.

Feature J9. a first engaging portion (right flange portion 571c) provided on the auxiliary tank;
A second engaging portion (engaging portion 574) provided in the housing and capable of engaging with the first engaging portion,
When the auxiliary tank is installed in the first direction, the first engaging portion and the second engaging portion are not engaged, and the auxiliary tank is installed in the second direction. Features J1 to J8, characterized in that the first engaging portion and the second engaging portion are engaged with each other when the auxiliary tank is in position, and the engagement restricts the movement of the auxiliary tank. The gaming machine according to any one of

According to the above configuration, it is possible to cope with automatic recovery while engaging the first engaging portion and the second engaging portion. As a result, for example, even if the player hits the game machine and receives an impact, the positional displacement of the auxiliary tank can be suppressed, and the game medium from the reservoir can be properly guided to the bottom plate opening. . Further, if the auxiliary tank is installed in the second orientation when the game machine is transported, movement of the auxiliary tank within the housing can be restricted, and rattling of the auxiliary tank can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the auxiliary tank from colliding with surrounding members in the housing and being damaged.

<Characteristic group K>
Features K1. a housing (housing 11) opened forward;
a door (front door 12) for opening and closing the front opening of the housing;
A hopper device (hopper device 51) installed in the housing and having a storage portion (storage tank 52) for storing game media;
an auxiliary tank (auxiliary tank 54) that is installed in a predetermined installation area in the housing and stores surplus game media in the storage section;
with
The bottom plate portion of the housing is provided with a bottom plate opening (medal discharge hole 15) for discharging the game medium inside the game machine to the outside of the game machine,
The auxiliary tank is
It has an opening at the upper end and a bottomed shape having a bottom at the lower end,
An opening/closing means (bottom lid 514) provided at the bottom portion and capable of opening and closing the bottom portion;
a support means (support portion 607) that supports the opening/closing means so that it can be opened and closed;
urging means (coil spring 617) for urging the opening/closing means toward the closing side;
with
The auxiliary tank has a first orientation (upward orientation) in which the opening is on the upper side and the bottom portion is on the lower side in the predetermined installation area, and a second orientation in which the opening is on the lower side and the bottom portion is on the upper side. It can be installed in each orientation (downward orientation),
When the auxiliary tank is installed in the second direction, the opening/closing means is opened by the weight of the game medium from the storage section when the game medium is placed on the opening/closing means. A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, the bottom of the tank can be opened and closed, and when the auxiliary tank is installed in the second orientation, the bottom of the tank can be opened by the weight of the game medium on the opening and closing means, so that the auxiliary tank can be opened in the second direction. By setting it in the correct direction, it can be used for automatic recovery. As a result, the auxiliary tank can be installed in the housing even during automatic collection, and in addition to eliminating the need to secure a storage space for the auxiliary tank in the game hall, loss of the auxiliary tank can be suppressed. Moreover, since the opening/closing means is urged toward the closing side by the urging means, it is possible to prevent the bottom of the tank from being left open, thereby allowing foreign objects and hands to enter the game machine through the opening of the bottom plate. It becomes possible to suppress the act of trying to access.

Feature K2. The auxiliary tank includes an opening restricting means (the surface 602a of the bottom plate portion 602) that restricts the opening/closing means from opening to the outside of the tank by coming into contact with the opening/closing means from the outside of the tank when the opening/closing means is closed. The game machine according to feature K1, characterized in that

According to the above configuration, when the auxiliary tank is installed in the second orientation, it is possible to prevent the bottom of the tank from opening even if the opening/closing means is pushed up from below. As a result, if the auxiliary tank is installed in the second direction when transporting the game machine, the bottom of the tank will not easily open even if a foreign object or a hand enters through the opening of the bottom plate, and the inside of the game machine will not be able to enter through the opening of the bottom plate. It is possible to suppress the act of attempting unauthorized access.

Feature K3. The gaming machine according to feature K1 or K2, wherein the bottom portion is provided with an enclosing portion (upright portion 608) that extends in the height direction of the auxiliary tank and surrounds the opening/closing means.

It is conceivable that a foreign object or the like entered from the opening of the bottom plate is hooked on the opening/closing means to open the bottom of the tank to gain unauthorized access to the inside of the game machine. In this regard, in this configuration, since the opening/closing means is surrounded by the enclosing portion, it is possible to make it difficult for a foreign object or the like to get caught in the opening/closing means, and it is possible to suppress the fraudulent act.

Feature K4. The game machine according to feature K3, wherein the height dimension of the enclosure is larger than the thickness dimension of the opening/closing means.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to make it more difficult for a foreign object or the like to get caught on the opening/closing means.

Feature K5. Upward movement restricting means (right flange portion 571c, engaging portion 574) for restricting upward movement of the auxiliary tank when the auxiliary tank is installed in the predetermined installation area in the second orientation is provided. The game machine according to any one of features K1 to K4, characterized in that

According to the above configuration, by installing the auxiliary tank in the second direction during transportation of the game machine, it is possible to suppress the floating of the auxiliary tank. Damage is suppressed. Furthermore, even if a foreign object or the like enters through the opening of the bottom plate and pushes up the auxiliary tank, it is possible to make it difficult to create a gap between the auxiliary tank and the tank installation surface, or to make it difficult to expand the gap. As a result, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to the interior of the gaming machine through the gap. Not only that, even when used in correspondence with automatic recovery, for example, when a player hits the game machine and an impact is applied, the auxiliary tank is suppressed from bouncing within the housing. . As a result, displacement of the auxiliary tank due to impact is suppressed, and it is possible to suppress the problem that the game media from the reservoir are not guided to the bottom plate opening.

Feature K6. The upward movement restricting means is
a first engaging portion (right flange portion 571c) provided on the auxiliary tank;
A second engaging portion (engaging portion 574) provided in the housing and capable of engaging with the first engaging portion,
When the auxiliary tank is installed in the first direction, the first engaging portion and the second engaging portion are not engaged, and the auxiliary tank is installed in the second direction. Characteristic feature K5, characterized in that the first engaging portion and the second engaging portion are engaged with each other when the auxiliary tank is engaged, and the engagement restricts the movement of the auxiliary tank. game machine.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to realize the configuration of the feature K5 in a practically preferable manner. In addition, when the auxiliary tank is installed in the first orientation, the first engaging portion and the second engaging portion do not engage, allowing the auxiliary tank to move. Therefore, when used for manual recovery, the auxiliary tank can be easily removed from the housing.

Feature K7. In the auxiliary tank, the opening/closing means is provided with a size capable of opening and closing a partial area of the bottom,
Guiding means (inclined portion 604) for guiding the game medium from the reservoir to the side of the opening/closing means when the auxiliary tank is installed in the second direction at a portion different from the opening/closing means in the bottom portion. The gaming machine according to any one of features K1 to K6, characterized by comprising:

For example, when game media are supplied from the reservoir, if the response of the opening/closing means is delayed and the bottom of the tank does not open, the game media may accumulate on the bottom, gradually spill out, and scatter in the housing. In this regard, in the above configuration, since the game media are collected on the opening/closing means, the weight of the game media can be concentrated on the opening/closing means. This makes it possible to improve the opening responsiveness of the opening/closing means.

Feature K8. The guiding means is a guiding inclined part (inclined part 604) provided at a different part from the opening and closing means on the bottom part,
Characteristic feature K7, wherein the guiding inclined portion is inclined downward toward the opening/closing means when the auxiliary tank is installed in the predetermined installation area in the second orientation. The gaming machine described in .

According to the above configuration, the game media can be guided along the slope, and the game media from the reservoir can be favorably moved toward the opening/closing means.

Feature K9. The support means rotatably supports the opening/closing means,
A bottom opening (lower opening 603) is provided in the bottom,
The opening/closing means opens the bottom side opening by being rotated inwardly of the auxiliary tank,
The gaming machine according to feature K7 or K8, wherein the bottom side opening is arranged near the pivot tip side of the opening/closing means.

In the above configuration, the opening/closing means is exposed to the outside of the tank through the opening on the bottom side, and the opening on the bottom side is arranged near the leading end of the rotation of the opening/closing means. As a result, the game media from the reservoir can be easily placed on a portion spaced apart from the rotating shaft of the opening/closing means, and the opening responsiveness of the opening/closing means can be enhanced.

Feature K10. The support means rotatably supports the opening/closing means,
The auxiliary tank is characterized by having guide means (back surface 606b of bottom lid 606) for guiding the game medium placed on the opening/closing means toward the rotating tip side of the opening/closing means. A gaming machine according to any one of K1 to K9.

According to the above configuration, since the game medium is guided toward the rotating tip side of the opening/closing means, the weight of the game medium is easily concentrated away from the rotating shaft of the opening/closing means, and the opening responsiveness of the opening/closing means is improved. can be increased.

Feature K11. The guide means includes a guide inclined portion provided on the opening/closing means,
When the auxiliary tank is installed in the second orientation, the guiding inclined portion is provided on a predetermined surface of the opening/closing means on the side on which the game medium is placed, and extends toward the tip end of the rotation. The game machine according to feature K10, characterized in that it is inclined downward.

According to the above configuration, the game medium on the opening/closing means can be guided along the inclination, and the game medium from the storage section can be favorably moved toward the tip of the rotation.

Feature K12. The opening/closing means opens the bottom portion by being rotated toward the inside of the auxiliary tank against the biasing force of the biasing means,
Characteristic features K1 through K1, characterized in that when the bottom portion is closed by the opening/closing means, the mounting surface of the game medium in the opening/closing means is inclined downward toward the tip of the rotation of the opening/closing means. The gaming machine according to any one of K11.

When the auxiliary tank is installed in the second direction, the weight of the game medium causes the opening/closing means of the auxiliary tank to be opened, and the game medium enters the tank. In this case, when the game medium enters the tank and its weight is reduced, the opening/closing means returns to the closed position due to the biasing force of the biasing means. In such a case, if game media remain on the opening/closing means, there is a concern that the game media may be scattered outside the auxiliary tank due to the momentum of closing the opening/closing means.

In this regard, in the above configuration, when the opening/closing means is in the closed state, the surface of the opening/closing means on which the game medium is placed is inclined downward toward the leading end of the rotation. In other words, if the surface on which the game medium is placed is inclined downward toward the leading end of the rotation, the game medium is guided into the tank even if the opening amount of the opening/closing means is relatively small. Therefore, when the opening/closing means is closed due to the decrease in the amount of game media on the opening/closing means, the amount of rotation required for closing the opening/closing means can be reduced, and thus the game media can be prevented from being bounced off.

In addition, in this feature, "the opening/closing means is inclined so that the tip end side of the supported portion by the supporting means is positioned inside the tank in the vertical direction when the bottom portion is closed by the opening/closing means." can be read as

Feature K13. In the auxiliary tank, the bottom part has a receiving part (bottom plate part 602, bottom lid 606) that receives the game medium supplied from the storage part when the auxiliary tank is installed in the downward posture,
The gaming machine according to any one of features K1 to K12, wherein the bottom portion is provided with an upright portion (bottom plate projecting portion 605) that stands up from the bottom portion around the receiving portion. .

When the auxiliary tank is installed in a downward posture, the weight of the game medium causes the game medium to enter the inside of the tank as the opening/closing means of the auxiliary tank is opened. In this case, when the game medium enters the tank and its weight is reduced, the opening/closing means returns to the closed position due to the biasing force of the biasing means. In such a case, if game media remain on the opening/closing means, there is a concern that the game media may be scattered outside the auxiliary tank due to the momentum of closing the opening/closing means. In this regard, in the above configuration, since the standing portion is provided around the receiving portion in the bottom portion of the auxiliary tank, even if the game medium is bounced off, the game medium does not reach the outside of the auxiliary tank. It can be suppressed.

<Characteristic group L>
Feature L1. a housing (housing 11) opened forward;
a door (front door 12) for opening and closing the front opening of the housing;
A hopper device (hopper device 51) installed in the housing and having a storage portion (storage tank 52) for storing game media;
an auxiliary tank (auxiliary tank 54) that is installed in a predetermined installation area in the housing side by side with the hopper device and that stores surplus game media in the storage section;
with
The auxiliary tank has a bottomed shape having an opening (upper opening 502) at the upper end and a bottom (bottom plate portion 501a) at the lower end,
a first engaging portion (bottom-side through-hole 720, engaging rising portion 836) provided in the auxiliary tank;
a second engaging portion (engaging portion 721, lower sensor portion 801) provided in the housing and capable of engaging with the first engaging portion;
Switching means (bottom lids 704, 802) for switching between an engaged state and a non-engaged state between the first engaging portion and the second engaging portion according to the storage state of the game media in the auxiliary tank; ,
A game machine characterized by comprising:

From the viewpoint of preventing loss of the auxiliary tank during transportation of the gaming machine, it is desirable to transport the gaming machine with the auxiliary tank stored in the housing. However, when manually collecting game media stored in an auxiliary tank in a game machine, the auxiliary tank must be removed from the housing, so the auxiliary tank must be stored in a free state without being fixed. Therefore, if the game machine is tilted or vibrated during transportation, the auxiliary tank moves within the housing and collides with the surrounding hopper device, door body, and the like, resulting in damage.

In this regard, in this configuration, the first engaging portion provided in the auxiliary tank and the second engaging portion provided in the housing are provided. It is configured to switch between presence/absence of matching. Therefore, by engaging the first engaging portion and the second engaging portion when transporting the game machine, it is possible to suppress rattling of the auxiliary tank, thereby suppressing the occurrence of the above inconvenience. Become. On the other hand, when collecting the game media stored in the auxiliary tank, the first engaging portion and the second engaging portion can be switched to the non-engaged state in response to accumulation of the game media in the auxiliary tank, It becomes possible to allow the removal of the auxiliary tank from within the housing.

Feature L2. The switching means engages the first engaging portion and the second engaging portion when no game medium is stored in the auxiliary tank, and the game medium is stored in the auxiliary tank. The gaming machine according to feature L1, wherein the first engaging portion and the second engaging portion are brought into a disengaged state.

According to the above configuration, when the game media are not expected to be stored in the auxiliary tank, such as during transportation, the movement of the auxiliary tank is restricted by the first engaging portion and the second engaging portion, while the game machine is in operation. , the removal of the auxiliary tank is naturally allowed in response to the game media being stored in the auxiliary tank. As a result, it is possible to eliminate the need for a switching operation by the operator, thereby not only contributing to the elimination of troublesomeness, but also suppressing the inconvenience of damaging the first engaging portion and the second engaging portion due to the removal operation performed while forgetting to switch. .

Feature L3. Characteristic feature L1 or The gaming machine described in L2.

In the above configuration, even if no game medium is stored in the auxiliary tank and the first engaging portion and the second engaging portion are in the engaged state, the release operation portion is provided. By operating the release operation portion, the engagement between the first engagement portion and the second engagement portion can be released, and the auxiliary tank can be taken out appropriately. As a result, it is possible to improve the convenience of using the auxiliary tank while suppressing rattling during transportation of the game machine.

Feature L4. The gaming machine according to any one of features L1 to L3, wherein the first engaging portion and the second engaging portion are provided so as to engage with each other in the longitudinal direction of the gaming machine.

According to the above configuration, the engagement of the first engaging portion and the second engaging portion restricts movement of the auxiliary tank in the longitudinal direction of the gaming machine. As a result, it is possible to prevent inconveniences such as the auxiliary tank moving within the housing and coming into contact with the door when the game machine is transported.

Feature L5. One of the first engaging portion and the second engaging portion is a movable portion (engaging protrusion 723, engaging rising portion 836), and the movable portion is the other engaging portion (bottom It is movable between an engaging position and a non-engaging position with respect to the side through hole 720 and the lower sensor portion 801,
Any one of features L1 to L4, wherein the switching means moves the movable portion from the engagement position to the non-engagement position based on a game medium being stored in the auxiliary tank. The gaming machine described in .

According to the above configuration, it is possible to simplify the configuration of the first engaging portion and the second engaging portion, and this is a practically preferable aspect in realizing any one of the features L1 to L4.

Feature L6. The first engaging portion is a hole (bottom side through hole 720) provided in the bottom of the auxiliary tank,
The second engaging portion is the movable portion (engaging protrusion 723) that can enter and exit the hole,
The switching means is provided as at least part of the bottom of the auxiliary tank, and has a movable bottom plate (bottom cover 704) that is displaced downward by the weight of the game medium when the game medium is stored in the auxiliary tank. death,
The gaming machine according to feature L5, wherein the movable portion moves from the engagement position to the non-engagement position as the movable bottom plate is displaced downward by the weight of the game medium.

In the above configuration, the auxiliary tank is provided with a movable bottom plate. Since this movable bottom plate is provided as at least part of the bottom of the auxiliary tank, it can efficiently receive the weight of the game media contained in the auxiliary tank. Since the displacement of the movable bottom plate is used to move the movable portion, the responsiveness of the movable portion to changes in the storage state of the game media can be enhanced, and the switching to the non-engaged state is delayed to take out the auxiliary tank. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of troubles.

Feature L7. The movable bottom plate is
It is rotatably supported by support means (support portion 705),
The game machine according to feature L6, characterized by having a pushing portion (pushing projection portion 733) for pushing the movable portion to move it from the engaging position to the non-engaging position on the tip end side of the rotation.

According to the above configuration, the engagement between the first engaging portion and the second engaging portion is released by pushing the movable portion with the movable bottom plate. In this case, since the downward displacement of the movable bottom plate can be used as it is for pushing the movable portion, the configuration can be simplified.

Feature L8. The movable bottom plate is rotatable in the housing with a back side in the front-rear direction of the gaming machine as a rotation tip,
The gaming machine according to feature L7, wherein the first engaging portion and the second engaging portion are provided on the back side in the longitudinal direction of the gaming machine within the housing.

When an operator pulls out the auxiliary tank from the inside of the housing, it is conceivable that the front side of the auxiliary tank is lightly lifted and then slid forward along the bottom plate of the housing. In this case, for example, if the front end of the movable bottom plate is on the front side of the housing and the push-in portion is provided on the front side of the housing, the push-in of the movable portion by the push-in portion is released as the auxiliary tank is lifted. , it is conceivable that switching from the disengaged state to the engaged state is performed unintentionally due to this. There is concern that this may hinder the withdrawal of the auxiliary tank.

In this regard, since the first engaging portion and the second engaging portion are provided on the back side in the longitudinal direction of the game machine inside the housing, it becomes easy to maintain the pushing of the movable portion by the pushing portion, and unintentionally Switching from the engaged state to the engaged state can be suppressed. This makes it possible to smoothly pull out the auxiliary tank.

Feature L9. The first engaging portion is the movable portion (engaging standing portion 836) that can be displaced in the vertical direction,
The second engaging portion is an engaged portion (lower sensor portion 801) provided at a position that can be engaged with the movable portion,
The switching means is provided as at least a part of the bottom of the auxiliary tank, and has a movable bottom plate (lid main body 835) that is displaced downward by the weight of the game medium when the game medium is stored in the auxiliary tank. death,
The gaming machine according to feature L5, wherein the movable portion moves from the engagement position to the non-engagement position as the movable bottom plate is displaced downward by the weight of the game medium.

In the above configuration, the auxiliary tank is provided with a movable bottom plate. Since this movable bottom plate is provided as at least part of the bottom of the auxiliary tank, it can efficiently receive the weight of the game media contained in the auxiliary tank. Since the displacement of the movable bottom plate is used to move the movable portion, the responsiveness of the movable portion to changes in the storage state of the game media can be enhanced, and the switching to the non-engaged state is delayed to take out the auxiliary tank. It is possible to suppress the inconvenience that hinders the

Feature L10. The second engaging portion is inserted into the tank from outside the tank through an insertion hole (lower sensor insertion hole 831, lid sensor insertion hole 837) provided in the auxiliary tank,
The gaming machine according to feature L9, wherein the first engaging portion and the second engaging portion are configured to engage inside the auxiliary tank.

With the above configuration, the engagement relationship between the first engagement portion and the second engagement portion can be established inside the auxiliary tank. Therefore, there is no need to secure a space for engagement around the outer periphery of the auxiliary tank, and in the installation area (predetermined installation area) for the auxiliary tank, the dead space that does not contribute to the accommodation of the game media can be reduced or generated. can be suppressed.

Feature L11. Equipped with storage state detection means (lower sensor unit 801, main controller 101) for detecting the storage state of the game media in the auxiliary tank,
The accommodation state detection means has an insertion member (lower sensor portion 801) that is inserted into the insertion hole,
The gaming machine according to feature L10, wherein the insertion member constitutes the second engaging portion.

According to the above configuration, since the second engaging portion is configured by utilizing the storage state detection means for detecting the storage state of the game media in the auxiliary tank, an increase in the number of parts is not required in order to realize the configuration of feature L10. can be suppressed. In addition, since the accommodation state detecting means is generally made of metal, it can be configured preferably in terms of suppressing breakage of the second engaging portion.

Feature L12. The bottom plate portion of the housing is provided with a bottom plate opening (medal discharge hole 15) for discharging the game medium inside the game machine to the outside of the game machine,
The gaming machine according to any one of features L6 to L11, wherein the movable bottom plate is configured to open and close the bottom of the auxiliary tank.

According to the above configuration, since the bottom of the auxiliary tank can be opened and closed by the movable bottom plate, by opening the movable bottom plate, the game media from the reservoir can be directly led to the bottom plate opening. As a result, it is possible to automatically collect the auxiliary tank while it is installed in the housing, and in addition to eliminating the need to secure a storage space for the auxiliary tank in the game hall, it is possible to reduce the loss of the auxiliary tank. .

Feature L13. Guide means (extension plate 751, recess 754) for guiding the installation position of the auxiliary tank to a predetermined position where the first engaging portion and the second engaging portion do not face each other when the movable bottom plate is in the open state. ), the gaming machine according to feature L12.

When the movable bottom plate is in the open state, the weight of the game medium cannot be properly received, and there is a possibility that the switching from the engaged state to the disengaged state may be inconvenient. In this regard, in this configuration, when the movable bottom plate is in the open state, the installation position of the auxiliary tank is guided to a position where the first engaging portion and the second engaging portion do not face each other, so the occurrence of the above inconvenience is avoided. can be suppressed.

Feature L14. storage state detection means (lower sensor section 801, main controller 101) for detecting the storage state of game media in the auxiliary tank;
external signal output means (main controller 101) for outputting a predetermined signal to the outside of the game machine when the detection result of the accommodation state detection means is a predetermined result;
with
The switching means disengages the first engaging portion and the second engaging portion before the predetermined signal is output by the external signal output means. The gaming machine according to any one of features L1 to L13.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to allow removal of the auxiliary tank before collection of the game media (removal of the auxiliary tank) is prompted by the predetermined signal. As a result, it is possible to deal with the timing of taking out the auxiliary tank with ample time, and it is possible to prevent troubles in collecting the game media.

Feature L15. Equipped with storage state detection means (upper sensor bar 16a, main controller 101) for detecting the storage state of game media in the auxiliary tank,
The storage state detection means has an insertion member (upper sensor rod 16a) that is inserted into the tank from outside the tank through an insertion hole (upper sensor insertion hole 505a) provided in the auxiliary tank,
characterized in that, when the insertion member is inserted into the insertion hole, the peripheral edge portion of the insertion hole and the insertion member come into contact with or approach each other in a direction intersecting the direction of insertion of the insertion member. The gaming machine according to any one of features L1 to L14.

According to the above configuration, the movement of the auxiliary tank can be restricted by abutting or approaching the peripheral portion of the insertion hole and the insertion member. As a result, in addition to the engagement of the first engaging portion and the second engaging portion, the movement of the auxiliary tank can be restricted, and the rattling suppression of the auxiliary tank can be strengthened. At that time, since the storage state detection unit is utilized, it is possible to suppress an increase in the number of parts.

<Characteristic group M>
Feature M1. a housing (housing 11) opened forward;
a door (front door 12) for opening and closing the front opening of the housing;
A hopper device (hopper device 51) installed in the housing and having a storage portion (storage tank 52) for storing game media;
an auxiliary tank (auxiliary tank 54) that is installed in a predetermined installation area in the housing side by side with the hopper device and that stores surplus game media in the storage section;
with
The auxiliary tank has a bottomed shape having an opening (upper opening 502) at the upper end and a bottom (bottom plate portion 501a) at the lower end,
a first engaging portion (right flange portion 571c) provided on the auxiliary tank;
A second engaging portion (engaging portion 574) provided in the housing and capable of engaging with the first engaging portion,
By sliding the auxiliary tank on the tank installation surface (bottom plate 11a) of the predetermined installation area, the first engaging portion and the second engaging portion are engaged and disengaged. A game machine characterized in that the relative positional relationship between the two is set in.

From the viewpoint of preventing loss of the auxiliary tank during transportation of the gaming machine, it is desirable to transport the gaming machine with the auxiliary tank stored in the housing. However, if the auxiliary tank is stored in the housing in a free state in the game machine, if the machine is tilted or vibrated during transportation, the auxiliary tank will move inside the housing, causing damage to the surrounding hopper device, door, etc. There is the inconvenience that it collides with and causes damage.

In this regard, according to the present configuration, the first engaging portion provided in the auxiliary tank and the second engaging portion provided in the housing are provided. can regulate the movement of auxiliary tanks. As a result, it is possible to prevent the auxiliary tank from moving within the housing and colliding with surrounding members, thereby preventing damage to the auxiliary tank and surrounding members during transportation.

In this case, in this configuration, it is possible to engage and disengage the first engaging portion and the second engaging portion by sliding the auxiliary tank on the tank installation surface. . Therefore, it is possible to engage the first engaging portion and the second engaging portion without directly operating the first engaging portion and the second engaging portion. In addition, with such a configuration, the first engaging portion and the second engaging portion can be arranged in locations that are difficult for the operator to reach, and the degree of freedom in layout can be improved. , it can be an advantageous configuration in a game machine in which the installation space of the mounting parts is limited. In addition, when closing the door, it is essential to push the auxiliary tank behind the game machine (towards the inside of the housing) so that the door does not interfere with the auxiliary tank. and the engaging operation of the first engaging portion and the second engaging portion can be completed by one operation, and workability can be improved.

Feature M2. The gaming machine according to feature M1, wherein the first engaging portion and the second engaging portion are provided so as to engage with each other in the longitudinal direction of the gaming machine.

According to the above configuration, the engagement of the first engaging portion and the second engaging portion restricts movement of the auxiliary tank in the longitudinal direction of the gaming machine. As a result, it is possible to prevent inconveniences such as the auxiliary tank moving within the housing and coming into contact with the door when the game machine is transported. Further, when the auxiliary tank is installed in the housing, the movement of the auxiliary tank is restricted by the engagement of the first engaging portion and the second engaging portion, so that the auxiliary tank is positioned within the predetermined installation area within the housing. You can grasp that you have slid to.

Feature M3. The first engaging portion is a hole (bottom side through hole 720) provided in the bottom of the auxiliary tank,
The second engaging portion is a movable portion (engaging protrusion 723) that can enter and exit the hole,
The movable part is biased by biasing means (coil spring 729) so as to protrude from the tank installation surface of the predetermined installation area,
A guide portion (engagement inclined portion 745, arcuate portion 746) for guiding the movable portion under the bottom portion of the auxiliary tank is provided at the rear end portion of the auxiliary tank in the longitudinal direction of the game machine. The gaming machine according to feature M1 or M2, characterized by:

According to the above configuration, the movable portion can be inserted into the hole by the biasing force of the biasing means, and the first engaging portion and the second engaging portion can be properly engaged. However, the movable part protrudes from the tank mounting surface, and there is a risk that the auxiliary tank and the movable part will interfere in the process of sliding the auxiliary tank. In this regard, in this configuration, the movable portion is guided under the bottom portion of the auxiliary tank by the guide portion provided at the end of the auxiliary tank on the back side in the front-rear direction of the game machine. It is possible to suppress the catching of the part. As a result, the auxiliary tank can be smoothly slid to the position where the first engaging portion and the second engaging portion are engaged. Also, damage to the first engaging portion and the like due to installation of the auxiliary tank can be suppressed.

Feature M4. As the guide portion, an inclined portion (an engaging inclined portion 745) that obliquely intersects the sliding direction of the auxiliary tank and contacts the movable portion when the auxiliary tank is slid is provided,
The gaming machine according to feature M3, wherein the inclined portion is inclined to push the movable portion downward as the slide movement progresses.

According to the above configuration, the movable portion can be guided under the bottom portion of the auxiliary tank along the slope of the inclined portion, which is a practically preferred mode for realizing the configuration of feature M3.

Feature M5. guide means (right side plate 11c) for guiding the auxiliary tank so that the auxiliary tank passes through a predetermined specific path when the auxiliary tank is slid on the tank installation surface;
Characteristics M1 to M4, characterized in that the relative positional relationship between the first engaging portion and the second engaging portion is set so that the two engage with each other when the auxiliary tank passes through the specific path. The gaming machine according to any one of

According to the above configuration, the first engaging portion and the second engaging portion can be easily engaged by sliding the auxiliary tank according to the guide of the guide means. For this reason, for example, even if the engagement point is in a blind spot or a hard-to-visually-visible area from the viewpoint of the worker who installs the auxiliary tank, the engagement can be easily performed, and the workability of the engagement work can be improved. can be increased.

<Characteristic N group>
Feature N1. a housing (housing 11) opened forward;
a door (front door 12) for opening and closing the front opening of the housing;
A hopper device (hopper device 51) installed in the housing and having a storage portion (storage tank 52) for storing game media;
an auxiliary tank (auxiliary tank 54) that is installed in a predetermined installation area in the housing side by side with the hopper device and that stores surplus game media in the storage section;
with
The bottom plate portion of the housing is provided with a bottom plate opening (medal discharge hole 15) for discharging the game medium inside the game machine to the outside of the game machine,
The auxiliary tank is
a bottomed tank body (tank body 701) having an opening at the upper end and a bottom at the lower end;
Opening and closing means (bottom lids 704, 802) for opening and closing the bottom,
with
The opening/closing means opens the bottom portion by rotating to the inside of the tank body, and in the open state, the end on the leading end side of the rotation is positioned above the tank body,
A game characterized in that an abutment member (guide plate 52a) abuts against the opening/closing means in an open state at a predetermined open position at a position above the tank body in the housing. machine.

According to the above configuration, since the tank bottom can be opened and closed, the auxiliary tank can be adapted for manual recovery by closing the bottom, and can be adapted for automatic recovery by opening the bottom. As a result, the auxiliary tank can be installed in the housing even during automatic collection, and in addition to eliminating the need to secure a storage space for the auxiliary tank in the game hall, loss of the auxiliary tank can be suppressed.

However, when the tank is used with the bottom open, for example, if the game machine is hit by a player and the game machine is subjected to impact or vibration, the opening/closing means may tilt and the bottom may be closed. In this case, if the game proceeds without noticing that it has been closed, not only is the game medium not collected, but the game medium overflows from the auxiliary tank and scatters in the housing. In this respect, according to this configuration, even if the opening/closing means tilts due to the impact or vibration, the abutment member can restrict the rotation of the opening/closing means, thereby preventing unintended closure of the tank bottom.

Feature N2. The abutment member is a guide portion (guide plate 52a) that guides the game medium from the storage portion to the auxiliary tank, or a member provided at a position on the side where the opening/closing means rotates at a larger angle than the guide portion. The gaming machine according to feature N1, characterized by:

According to the above configuration, when the rotation of the opening/closing means is restricted by the abutting member, the opening/closing means blocks the discharge port of the game medium in the guiding portion, or the opening/closing means is interposed between the guiding portion and the tank bottom. It is suppressed. As a result, the game media from the reservoir can be continuously guided to the bottom plate opening, and delays in collection of the game media can be suppressed.

Feature N3. The game machine according to feature N2, wherein the opening/closing means is rotatably provided toward the front of the game machine at the bottom portion.

According to the above configuration, the opening/closing means in the closed state is rotated toward the front of the game machine to open the game machine. can. As a result, it is possible to prevent inconveniences such as the game medium supplied from the guiding portion to the auxiliary tank coming into contact with the opening/closing means, jumping to the side of the door body, and hitting the door body. In addition, it is possible to prevent game media from entering between the door body and the tank body.

Feature N4. The game machine according to any one of features N1 to N3, wherein the opening/closing means is elongated and rotatably supported on the short side of the bottom.

According to the above configuration, the tank body is deepened to some extent to secure an appropriate tank capacity, while the opening/closing means is positioned above the upper end of the tank body in the open state. becomes possible.

Feature N5. The game according to feature N4, wherein the opening/closing means is rotatably supported by a short side portion that is on the front side of the game machine when the auxiliary tank is installed in the predetermined installation area. machine.

According to the above configuration, when the auxiliary tank is installed in the housing with the bottom portion of the tank opened, the opening/closing means can be positioned on the front side. When the auxiliary tank is pushed in, the opening/closing means can be easily supported by hand, and the installation work can be facilitated.

Feature N6. Equipped with storage state detection means (upper sensor bar 16a, lower sensor bar 16b, main controller 101) for detecting the storage state of game media in the auxiliary tank,
The storage state detecting means is inserted into the tank from outside through insertion holes (upper sensor insertion hole 731a, lower sensor insertion hole 731b) provided in the inner side wall portion (rear wall portion 701c) of the auxiliary tank. Having an inserting member (upper sensor rod 16a, lower sensor rod 16b) to be inserted,
The gaming machine according to feature N5, wherein the abutment member is provided at a position where the abutment member can abut against the opening/closing means in a non-contact state between the opening/closing means and the insertion member.

According to the above configuration, when the opening/closing means tilts, the abutment member restricts the rotation of the opening/closing means before contact with the insertion member. As a result, even when the opening/closing means is unexpectedly tilted, it is possible to suppress the collision with the insertion member.

Feature N7. The gaming machine according to any one of features N1 to N6, wherein at least part of the portion positioned above the tank body when the opening/closing means is in the open state is transparent. .

According to the above configuration, it is possible to see the inside of the housing and the tank body through the opening and closing means. It is possible to suppress adverse effects on the visibility inside the tank body and the tank body.

Feature N8. The gaming machine according to any one of features N1 to N7, wherein at least one of the opening/closing means and the contact member is provided with a buffering means at a contact portion between the opening/closing means and the contact member. .

According to the above configuration, damage to the opening/closing means and the like due to impact when the opening/closing means abuts against the contact member is suppressed.

<Characteristic group O>
Features O1. a housing (housing 11) opened forward;
a door (front door 12) for opening and closing the front opening of the housing;
A hopper device (hopper device 51) installed in the housing and having a storage portion (storage tank 52) for storing game media;
an auxiliary tank (auxiliary tank 54) that is installed in a predetermined installation area in the housing side by side with the hopper device and that stores surplus game media in the storage section;
with
The auxiliary tank has a bottomed shape having an opening (upper opening 502) at the upper end and a bottom (bottom plate portion 501a) at the lower end,
a first engaging portion (bottom-side through hole 720) provided in the auxiliary tank;
A second engaging portion (engaging portion 721) provided in the housing and capable of engaging with the first engaging portion;
Engagement operation means (coil spring 729, engagement driving portion 761) for bringing the first engagement portion and the second engagement portion into an engaged state or a non-engaged state;
with
The engaging operation means disengages the first engaging portion and the second engaging portion when the game machine is in a predetermined power supply state, and disengages the first engaging portion and the second engaging portion when the game machine is not in the predetermined power supply state. , a gaming machine characterized in that said first engaging portion and said second engaging portion are brought into an engaged state.

From the viewpoint of preventing loss of the auxiliary tank during transportation of the gaming machine, it is desirable to transport the gaming machine with the auxiliary tank stored in the housing. However, when manually collecting game media stored in an auxiliary tank in a game machine, the auxiliary tank must be removed from the housing, so the auxiliary tank must be stored in a free state without being fixed. Therefore, if the game machine is tilted or vibrated during transportation, the auxiliary tank moves within the housing and collides with the surrounding hopper device, door body, and the like, resulting in damage.

In this regard, in this configuration, the first engaging portion provided in the auxiliary tank and the second engaging portion provided in the housing are provided, and when the gaming machine is in a predetermined power supply state, they are non-operating. It is configured to be in the engaged state, and to be in the engaged state when it is not in a predetermined power supply state. Therefore, when power is not supplied during transport of the gaming machine, the first engaging portion and the second engaging portion can be brought into the engaged state, while the gaming machine is installed in the gaming hall and power is not supplied. If so, it can be disengaged. In other words, according to this configuration, while restricting movement of the auxiliary tank when the game machine is being transported, etc., it is possible to permit the removal operation of the auxiliary tank when the game machine is in operation, thereby significantly improving convenience.

Feature O2. The engagement operation means is adapted to engage the first engagement portion and the second engagement portion based on the predetermined power supply state and the amount of game media contained in the auxiliary tank being equal to or less than a predetermined amount. The game machine according to feature O1, characterized by comprising means for engaging with.

Even if the power line is connected to the gaming machine installed in the gaming hall, etc., if the auxiliary tank is empty during inspection or game setting before the hall opens or after the hall closes, the auxiliary tank There is no need to move the auxiliary tank, and it is desirable that the auxiliary tank is immovable from the viewpoint of work convenience. In this respect, the first engaging portion and the second engaging portion are brought into the engaged state based on a predetermined power supply state to the game machine and the storage amount of game media in the auxiliary tank being equal to or less than a predetermined amount. Therefore, when it is not necessary to move the auxiliary tank, the unnecessary movement can be suppressed, and a configuration advantageous in work or the like can be realized.

Feature O3. Storage state detection means (upper sensor bar 16a, lower sensor bar 16b, main controller 101) for detecting that the storage state of game media in the auxiliary tank is a predetermined state (full state),
The engagement operation means is in the predetermined power supply state, and based on the detection of the predetermined state by the accommodation state detection means, the engagement operation means engages the first engagement portion and the second engagement portion. A game machine according to feature O1 or O2, characterized by comprising means for disengaging.

According to the above configuration, when the power supply line is connected to the gaming machine, the first engaging portion and the second engaging portion are adjusted to correspond to the predetermined state (for example, the full state) of the game medium storage state. The parts can be disengaged. This makes it possible to permit the movement of the auxiliary tank in accordance with the timing of taking out the auxiliary tank.

Feature O4. Equipped with storage state detection means (upper sensor bar 16a, lower sensor bar 16b, main controller 101) for detecting the storage state of game media in the auxiliary tank,
The accommodation state detection means is
a first means (upper sensor bar 16a, lower sensor bar 16b) capable of detecting that the stored state is the first state (full state);
a second means capable of detecting that the stored state is a second state in which the stored amount is smaller than that of the first state;
with
The engaging operation means is in the predetermined power supply state, and the second state is detected by the second means, and the first engaging portion and the second engaging portion are engaged. A game machine according to feature O1 or O2, characterized by comprising means for disengaging.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to allow the auxiliary tank to be taken out before the storage state of the game media reaches the first state (for example, the full state), so that the timing of taking out the auxiliary tank can be dealt with with a margin. it becomes possible to

Feature O5. One of the first engaging portion and the second engaging portion is a movable portion (engagement protrusion 723), and the movable portion is connected to the other engaging portion (bottom side through hole 720). movable between an engaged position and a disengaged position;
The engagement operating means is
a driving portion (driving source of the engaging driving portion 761) that moves the movable portion between the engaging position and the non-engaging position;
Drive control means (main control unit 101) for driving and controlling the drive unit based on the amount of game media contained in the auxiliary tank. game machine.

According to the above configuration, when the power line is connected to the gaming machine, it is possible to switch between the engaged state and the disengaged state according to the amount of game media contained in the auxiliary tank. Any of the configurations of O4 to O4 can be practically preferable.

Feature O6. The engagement operation means includes biasing means (coil spring 729) that biases the movable portion toward the engagement position,
The gaming machine according to feature O5, wherein the movable portion is held at the engaging position by the biasing force of the biasing means when the driving portion is in the non-driving state.

According to the above configuration, the first engaging portion and the second engaging portion can be brought into the engaged state when the game machine to which the power supply line is not connected is transported. This makes it possible to suppress rattling of the auxiliary tank during transportation or the like.

It is also possible to individually apply the technical ideas shown in each configuration of the other feature group A to feature group O to each configuration of feature group A to feature group O detailed above. However, it is also possible to combine and apply each technical idea. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine across a group of features.

The basic configuration of a game machine to which each feature described above can be applied is shown below.

Pachinko machine: operation means (game ball shooting handle 341) operated by a player, game ball shooting means (game ball shooting mechanism 410) for shooting game balls based on the operation of the operation means, and A ball passage (guide rail 400) that guides a game ball to a predetermined game area, and each game part (such as a nail 369) arranged in the game area (game area PE). A gaming machine that provides a privilege to a player when a game ball passes through a passage portion (general prize winning port 361, etc.).

Spindle-type game machine such as slot machine: Equipped with variable display means for displaying a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols in a final stop after variably displaying the symbol row; A special game that is advantageous to the player under the condition that the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stopping or after the lapse of a predetermined time, and that the final stopped symbol at the time of stopping is a specific symbol. A gaming machine designed to generate a state (bonus game, etc.).

Ball-use belt-type game machine (ball-use reel-type game machine): Equipped with variable display means for displaying a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols and then finally stopping and displaying the symbol row. The game is played with the necessary condition that the fluctuation of the symbols is started, the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stopping or after the lapse of a predetermined time, and the final stop symbol at the time of the stop is a specific symbol. A throwing device for generating a special game state (bonus game, etc.) advantageous to players, furthermore, providing a ball receiving tray for performing a casting process for taking in game balls from the ball receiving tray, and dispensing game balls to the ball receiving tray. and a payout device, wherein the operation of the starting operation means becomes effective when a game ball is thrown in by the throwing device.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 10... Slot machine as a game machine 11... Housing 15... Medal discharge hole as bottom plate opening 32... Reel as revolving body 41... Start lever as start operation means 42 to 44... Stop operation means 52... Storage tank as storage part 54... Auxiliary tank 64... Speaker constituting auxiliary effect part 65... Auxiliary display part constituting auxiliary effect part 81... Display control as sub control board Apparatus 101 Main controller as main control board 102 CPU constituting various control means such as lottery means and main control means 501, 601, 701 Tank body 504, 607, 705 Support means Supporting parts 514, 606, 704, 802...Bottom cover as opening/closing means 571c...Right flange part as first engaging part 574... Engaging part as second engaging part 617...As urging means coil spring 720 bottom side through hole as first engaging portion 721 engaging portion as second engaging portion 801 lower sensor portion as first engaging portion 836 second engaging portion Standing part as joint part.

Claims (1)

a housing opened forward;
a door that opens and closes the front opening of the housing;
a hopper device installed in the housing and having a reservoir for storing game media;
an auxiliary tank that is installed in a predetermined installation area in the housing side by side with the hopper device and that stores surplus game media in the storage unit;
with
The auxiliary tank has a bottomed shape having an opening at the upper end and a bottom at the lower end,
a first engaging portion provided on the auxiliary tank;
a second engaging portion provided in the housing and engageable with the first engaging portion;
with
The auxiliary tank can be installed in the predetermined installation area in a first orientation with the opening facing upward and the bottom portion facing downward, and in a second orientation different from the first orientation,
When the auxiliary tank is installed in the first direction, the first engaging portion and the second engaging portion are not engaged, and the auxiliary tank is installed in the second direction. A gaming machine, wherein the first engaging portion and the second engaging portion are engaged with each other when the auxiliary tank is in position, and the engagement restricts the movement of the auxiliary tank.

Images